.

.

..

'INTELLECTUAL

·-4

AND

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR,
.It
IM

..4.. SERIES OF

INDUCTIVE Q.UESTIONS,

..

...
•

~

-

CONNECTED WITH

EXERCISES IN COMPOSIT I ON.

..
•

BY ROSWELL

c.'1SMITH,
..

.a.111bor of Practical and Me11tal .a.ritbmttic.

.

urobflJtnrt :
·f .

.,.. · ~
-

>
a::

L · . ·.~
.' ~:-- ~
. ·.
- ~

-

::Jl'

t:".:

*

~

a
.>

,.

,.

i

•

•

!(:

.

I

..

,,

· ,~ .

,.-.
~

.

..

•

~

...

.

it

~l. '•

:;

#

"<t'

••

<#°

-$

.

..

'.

~

...

~
~

~

If

~
'

-.

~

~-

.

~

v.
.,

<-

,,

~

•

~.

-~

.

'It

.

...•·

~· -

.,

. t'

":

{!:
r

~

.
-~

/

'

' It

•
_,

....
..:

<
-· -

... •

/

...

...

,.

-

·1'1

•

...

.,..

(.

t

"

,.

•
.....

_ .-/
- ~

. ',

'

.,.

~

<'·

.•

... ...

'

.

,.

.;

.. 'J NTELLECTUAL

, . "r

.'
·,
AND

.,.

.

'

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR,
ll'f

.A. SERIES OF

•
INDUCTIVE . Q.U ESTIONS,

..
·t

- ,.
CONNECTED WITH

EXER0:-ISES IN COMPo'SITION~ ·

.

.·

. .'.' . . ,' : " \: '" :· r'~·<' >.» : ·,·' ,

•

..

BY ROSWELL C. S.MI'rH 1
J.ulhor or Practical and Mental Arithmtlic.

t,!Jrobfbtnrt : ·
SOL• BT Tift AUTHOR AND BOOJUJEf.LEn!! , GE~.lllt.A.Ll;'1r· ·
I

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

•

• .•

••

e • • • •

1829.

~

'

•

~

.:- I

~·. •.

--..

.\

~

PREFACE•
•

I

•

...... ,

· b any one should take up this woi·k with the impre~- .
sion that he has met w~th another." Murray's Grammar

:: !

one"

Simplified," to be added to the " one_hundred and

• RHODE-ISLAND DISTRICT, sc.
[L. S .]
BE IT REMEMBERED, That on the 10th day of
Noy ember, 1820,. and in th e fifty-fourth year of the Ind epen~~nce . of. th e Umted ~tate~ of .Am erica, Ro sw F.r.r, C. S1mn1 , of
said D1 s tnct, lw.tl1 deposited 1~ tins Offi ce th e title ofu book, the ;ri ght
\vh ereof he cla1.111 s as author , 111 the following word s, viz . " Intell ec tual and Pr~ct1.cal G1:amn~ar , in a ~e~·i es of inductive questions,
connected with .exercises m dompos1t1on. By Roswell C. Smith,
autho: of ~,ract1 cal and Mental Arithm etic. Names should succeed 1dem;i.
1!1 conformit y t.o an act of Congress of tlie U nited StatC'~,
!mtitlcd " A.n Act for th e en couragement ' of learning, by securrng tl.1e copi es of maps, charts and books to the authors and
propri etors of such copi es, during the tim e th erein mention ed
and al~o to an A ct entitl ed " An A ct supplementary to a1;
'.'ct entitl ed '.'An act for th e encouragement of learning, by securrng t~ e copi es of maps, charts and books, to th e authors and
propri etors . of such copi es, durin g th e tim e th erein mentioned ,
a~d extending th e benefit thereof to the arts of designinu
enar't0
0
• vrng and etching hi storical and oth er prints."
'
'
·
·
~Vitn ess ,

already ih use, or rather in e~i~tence, he i~ · respectfully:
.

.

I

•

requested to suspend his judgment, till a. careful 'perusal of its contents has furnished some.data, on which to
predicate a just a11d candid opinion of its meri.ts.
To convince the public, if indeed it is not

alre~d~

· , .

' convinced, of the imperious necessity of having some
work, on.the subjec.t of English' Grammar, on a differ. ent plan, Q.nd, better. .a dapted to the wants of bur youth,
than ~ny we now .have~ .the author cit~~ th.e follo~ng·
extracts from No. · Lil, of that I distin~shed" lite~ary ·

.

'

'

. journ~l, the North~,!merican Review, Art. I.II. ,p p. 52,

BENJAMIN COWELL,

,.;

·53,

Clerk of the District of Rhoclc-lsland.

.,

.

'

'

"The first thing to be required in a system .o f popular _.·
instruction, is, that it should be intelligible ; that chil· .
, .. , dren and ·youth

s~1ould

understand . what they learn..

\ -·- Understand what they learn 1 it ;may be asked; What
1.·

.. .

'

'

.

else c11:ri they do 1 We answer, that they may com•

·

·· · mit it to me1~ory, may recite it, may even mak~ a· fair ··:
n.

·"

H . BROWN .... J'RlNTBn .• :.15, M&RKET SQU .H • .E.

.,
t

sl~~~v
'-, ,

of know)edge, and yet know no~hing.
'

'

'Undej·~· .

standest thou what thou rea<lest,' · or what · thdu ·: ·

-

IV

~'
'this attending to words, .withQut cpmpt~p~qdi~g thejt
meaning, also fosters a habit Qf.inpietil,lctness, ~ wt:mJ pJ

PREFACE.

sayest 1 1s the hardest question, that can be put
to the old inquirer, and to the guarded and cau.tious
controvertist or disputant.
regard to

m~ch

founding question.

We have not the least hesitation

in saying, that two or three .rears, in the education
of
.

almost every individual in this country, have been
thrown away upon studying what they did not understand."
" Shall a child, then, it may be asked, attend to nothing, that it cnnnot understand!

W~ answer, to very

httle or nothing.-What possible use would it. serve!
..' "The evils, which have resulted from this defect in
education, are of the worst kind.

The loss of time,

already alluded to, is the least of them.

Nor is even

the loss of knowledge the greatest of them.
very disposition to know, the

~: ery

For the

desire of acquisition

Much of the ignorance of the com-

munity is to be traced to this kind of learning.

How

.a

meilt~l vn(~i~h~

fulness, and. something bordering., cert!l-inly Qn ~prnl

of what they have been taught in the

prevailing systems of education, this would be a con-

is taken away.

discri~ination of mind. · It creates

But to most children, in

de'relict~on.

.ih~ '

Ther.e .cannot · pe a .wor.se habit fm,.'

~th

1. minJ, if not for the heart, than to · be cont.ent

-Jlfl-

equivocal, half way knowledge of what is f!tudied, or
read, or heard.

It is f~tal to thorough scholarship;

it is irijurious to pr~ctical good sense ; it is a speciee

.of

injustice to the mind, and almost a swerving . (ro~ .c onscience.

We are prone enough from o.u r natura~ jndo-

lence, to rest satisfied with superficial knowledge ; :b_ut .
we add to this propensity the influenc~ of .a negli~
gent ,and superficial education.

And yet, perhaps, nQ-.

thing so pu:ffs up the mind with a riotioi;i..of its acquisi•
tion~,

as superficial knowledge.

No person is so .self .

'

I

\

'

'<~ompla~ent as the fluent repeater.of unmeaning words•'~..
I

The above reµiarks, though m~de in reference to the
•

'.)

-

subject of early education, generally, apply w,hh .pe_culiar ,force to .the subject of grammar.

many dull scholars, too, have be.en made so by unintelligible instruction.

The abused mind still gives

this testimony to its intrinsic dig·nity, that it cannot be
interested in whnt it does not understand.

"Vords that

neither teach nor signify any thing to it, must be dull;
they ought to be dull. .It is and it ought to be, a dull
business to com111it them to memory, .and to repeat
them, though with ever so much fluency and eclat.-

,,,• ,• " .J n .teaching · grammar, ~\le ..fii:_st .step _is, /.oj
the ·pupU .to <?ommit to me~or.J ,. the p.arts .of ; sp~ec.li,
with -their defi.nition,s; then, .t4,e .variations .to . W(~cb

thos~ ·parts
,Qf sp~ech .are .subj ~c~e.~ ,by .~ UITl ~er, .g.~.
.
der, .case, .:mood, ap,d .tense .; . a~d.then, .the.relation.i!ha-t

l*

.

·71.,

'·

~

vi

PREFACE.

rREFACE.

Words may SUStai1~ to eJI.Ch other, when arranged into

. ~'It may

be very p~~per, indeed it. is il).d.ispensabl~.- ,.~

Now, all these things will be riddles to the

tO' n finished ·education, that one s4ould learn .the
·~c)'."
,,
..

learner,
until after he has become familiar with the
J
.

enc6r of grammar ; . but . I · am_ persuaded the c~m,mo_ll ·

usages of correct Janguagc, by much reading of well-

method of teaching it is most unnatttl,'al; an,d therefor.e.

sentences.

written books.

'

'

The time, tlierefore., whicli is usuallJ,i

"

'

.

~·

-

.

.

so often unsuccessful.''

\

\

111 . ·

, . From the foregoing .facts and observations, it will
not be denied, that a suitable work on this sltbject is

If the

Other quotations~ of the same

same time were expended in reading with care, speci-

ear11estly called for.

111iens of correct and elegant Eng·Iish-in ascertainii1g

general purport' from the most respectable sources,

precisely, the meaning of sentences-particularly ob-

might easily be made, but it is presumed 't hey are

serving those that may be at all yeculiar in their struc-

necessary.-Common sense teaches, that any study, iu

ture ; if the time, I repeat, usually spent in learning

order to be useful, must be intelligible, and a common

to recite the pages of l\:lurray, were faithfully employ-

acquaintance with the English Gra1i1mars, at present

~d

in the manner suggested, I am confident the pupil

in. use, caii scarcely fail to convince all, that th(fy are

would acquire incomparably more knowledge of the

for, very far, .from . being intelligible to young minds.

laliguage, and would much sooner learn to use it

Besides, no reasons why a thing is so and so, or why it

with greater accurn cy than most of our common school

,.

un~

is not, are ever or rarely ever given in the ordinary
•

'

I

tatight grammarians do; besides which, he would be

treatises ; no fitness is suggested to, or perceived by,''

more likely to ohtain the very rare accompli shment of

the mind of the young pupil, between the name and the:.

reading well.

In proof of what has been said, I might

thing or subject named.

point you to certain persons, who write with a good

The effect produced on the learner by this method of

·degree of propriety, and even elegance, though they

t·reating the subject, ,is admirably illustrated by ' an

never learnt anything about the technics of grammar ;

anecdote of the celebrated John Horne Tooke . 'Vhen

while, on the other hand, you all undoubtedly know

at Eton. school, he was one day asked, by the master,

many persons, claiming to be very familiar with or-

why a certain verb governed a particular case..

thography, etymology, syntax, and prosod.r, yet habit-

answered, "I d<,n't

ually, both in speaking and writing, outrage some of

the master.

".t he first principles of language.

rrate~

know.~'

He ·

That's imP.ossible, said

I k.n ow you are not ignorant, but . obsti-

Horne however persisted, and th.e

ma~ter

flog-.

..,

' '.l

---

-

PREFACE.

ix .

PREFACE• .

ged.

After the punishment, the pedagogue.quoted the

rule of grai:nmar.

joot to which he wis~ed\ . to dire~t his atten~ion . ;

Horne instant!~ re.plied, ,; I know ,

~~e child"in

he found

from, any one clear idea of which

and

that very well, but you did not ask for the rule, you
demanded the 1·cason." '

po.ssession~ he led him on, ·by ~ ,e~ies ofquestioris, .t(J the

A scholar may, it is true, be taught to repeat "A

acquirement of such otlier i~eas as ioere mos.t iry.tiffi:ately,

•

\

>).

,1

.

''

.

connected with that primary conception.

noun is the name of any thing that exists," but unless

Iii ··

some further explanation be given, he will ·be in great

The plan of this _work will be found to conform,· pr~etty.

danger of making, occasionally, such a blunder ns the

nearly, to the directio~·s contai~ed in, the . following .

· "A noun is the name of aiiy thing
following, and saythat consists," which circumstance is s~id actuulJy to
have happened.

'"·

paragraph, from ·page 189 of the ~ame No. ~f the Jour- .
nal last quoted.
"What ~eems to be most needed 'for the purp9ses of
I

It is nn old maxim that it is easier to point out defects, than to devise remedie8.

The nuthor has en-

instruction, is to place the whole subject of gramm':lr in
such an order as is best adapted for the discipline and .

deavored to apply a remedy, where'ver he has found a

improvement of the mind in learning. The whole ought

defect.

'.£'he remarks made above, have not proceed-

to be arranged in a ·s_eries of .inductive questions, lead•

ed from any love of fault-finding, in the author, hut

ing the young mind to 'tliose results which are common-

to acquit himself of the charge, if such a charge

ly 'given

should be made, of attempting to palm upon the

perceive and underst.arid eyery _step of · his 'progress, ·by ·

public n book, on a subject which had been treated

doing something nearly lik~ , what he does ·,vhen l,ie~

~y others, with s~ much ability, as to prevent uny
improvement.

works out sums in arithmetic, and arrives at general

•

I

. .

,

:

{

~

•

In books . on grammar.
I•

!

.

\

t

.

The learner will thus'

,

,

"

,

.

'

.

, , ,

, •

.

,(

I ~

.

results himself, on the .inductive method.'" .. '

'The author's views on the subject of teaching Eng-

Accordingly the pupil is first presented 'with a f~w .

lish Grammar, are perfectly coinci.d ent with P.estal-

'obviously incorrect expressions, next .with .the same·

lozzi's general method of instruction, as described iii
the Journal of Education, No. 38, pp. 97, 98.
" -PEsTALozz1 endeav~red, in the first place, to ascertain 'by questions adapted to ihe tender age of.the pu-

}J\1, .,vhether any idea :existed .ii1 his mind upon the sub-

· ideas cprrectly expressed, and then he is called upon _t~
decide which is correct and which incorre~t.

This will ·

e.n courage him to proceed without his acqu~ringf th~ .,

~v:ho. h~~e :
attended slightly to the subject .of grammar, .as t~ught ··
I·" , ,

prejudice., no'v· s,o prevalent among scholars·,
;

·,

.

. .

.

.

'

.

I

in ardinary treatises; narhely, that their own common .

x

PREFACE.

-.· ·; Xi

sense cannot be brought to bear on.the subject', but that

• .hesitation ,b& evinced '. in. a.ns~.ering , these. questions, re-

they must commit to memory, these and those facts,

ference can agaii:i be l~ad "to .: the .primary questfons./ on
th~ same subject., . . . .
.

without attending at all to the constant mid daily use

To induce the habit of writing ~vith e~se•and; cor- , ,

of language.
'Vhen the pupil has practised on these exercises a

rectness, a tlii~d set of:qu~stions is added to those men-

sufficient timJ to answei· the above purpose, he is le<l

. tioried above, denominated- '' Exercises for: the ·Slate

to observe that there are some words in the language

o-r .P aper."

which have a general similarity in meaning, and conse-

th.e pupil is introduced. to the,.o.bjects ~round him, and

quently, that they may form a class.

taught to associate them ~vi~h. th~ ~t~dy to .which.he is

This classifi-

.cation he is then calle<l upon to make, and when by

In ·these, ~till more latitude is allowed ;

attending, thus acquiring; in· an agreeable man~er,

tbe

even nccc f:'s i!y of this

principles of the ianguage as rapidly as his min<l ~~n
. be made to grasp them.
.,
.

classification, or division of words, he is requi,r ed to

'The subject of parsing, and all that .is naturally in-

give it a name, not however to adopt one, without first

volved in it, is unfol,d ed to th.e mind of th_e pupil, as

these means, he has acquired clear and definite ideas
respecting the propridy

1111d

'-~
·'

...
,:"'

'

\

'

being satisfied that the name is -\~rell adapted to, and
.calculated to give an idea of the thing·, or subj ect named.
The same principie, inde ed, will b~ found · recognised

diff~rent parts
.o f .speech, under
consider~..Sastas the
.
.
.
'·
.

~i?'n, ·will aClm.it. ·"'OJ cot~rse, tl~ese exe:t:cis(.!s mus~ , be
, progressi.ve, ~o~men~ingwith simple, an·~ .easy ex~~-

tic, viz. tltat names s!tould succeed ideas. The same mode
is ,.~dopted with regard to the several classes of words,

In the second part, after the pupil .ha~ acquired. a

and their several properties, to which it is necessary to
assign nmbes.

·. partial knowledge of grammatical parsing, exer~is~s

In order to fix firmly in the mind the facts and infer-

course _is deemed better adapted to a~aken the pupil's

ences deduced by the pupil in tl.1e ·first set of questions
on any one subject,, another set is subjoined, of a' mo;·e
direct character, intended to comprise a reca1;itulation
of the whole subject matter of the first set, and al so to
test, accurately, the pupil's acquisitions.

Should any

·'

0

. pies, . and proceeding, gradually, to . those moz:.e . difficult.

in this work, which the author adopted in his Arithme-

,)
, '•

.'

I

in, false syntax are given for his correction~ .This
.<

· .powe.rs of discrimination, to increase hi~ care and ac- .

cura.~y in the construction of sentences, than an exclu-

sive. attention to language ~trictly gram~atical . . . ,
, A similar method has been put~su.ed in ,treating the
~mbject -.o f prosody. Examples. for correction are acJ., ,

'j

PREF.ACE.

Xll

dcd to all the rules there given for Punctuation, &c.Throughout the work, it l1as

been

the author's aim

.

,.:' . . '"' .

' J

,

!

, J

to make his book complete in itself, on the subject
of which it professes to treat.

The _author takes this opportunity to observe, that

GRAMMAR.

having been long engaged in teaching English Gram·

mar, in ~onncxion with the grammars of other Ian·
guages, he became satisfied, several years ago; that
the mode of teaching was most unnatural, and conse-

LESSON ,I.

quently, to the learner, dry and uninteresting, if not
entirely useless.

ished from his school the study of English Grammar,
as

MENTAL EXERCISES.

With these opihions, the author ban·

learned from books, and commenced a course of

oral and 'familiar lectures, a wa

---"'----~

slates, applying and illustrating the
principles advanced in each lecture.

This system

having proven useful and agreeable to scholars, and
highly satisfactory to parents, the author was urged to
give it publication.
In compliance with this request, combined with a

8incere desire to facilitate the progress of the youth of
his country in the important study of their native Ian·
guage, the author now suhmits this work, the result of
nearly twenty ycarR experience, to the candor of an
enlightened public, to l1e by them received or rejected,

as they may deem proper.
THP. 4 TTTHOR.

Questioner. If you wished to speak correctly would you !H1.y,
'James am,' or 'James is, a good boy 1~
.Answer. ,
Q. Would you say,' You am happy,' or 'you are happy1'
'These book,' or' these books 1' 'A apple,' or 'an apple 1'
· Q. Would you say,' Maria am an industrious girl,' or' Maria is an industrious girl 1' i She work well,' or 'she work.I
.· ' i
well 1'
Q. Would you say that 'Rufus ]earn well,' or that' Rufiu
Jearns wcJI ?' 'Birds sing,' or 'birds sings 1' 'James write
well yesterday,' or 'Jam es wrote weH yesterday 1' 'He writet
well now,' or ' he 'note well now 1' 'Yes_terday you go t•
1chool,' or' yesterday you went to school 1'
Q. Would you say 'One boys,' or 'one boy 1' · 'He gal'•
the book to we,' or' he gaYe the book to us 1' 'The bird whe
new,' or' the bird which flew 1' 'They is happy,' or' they are
I

.

'

.happy 1'
Q. , I now see that you know something about language, ht
.t. you not think that you sometimes speak incorrectly t
"

2

.•
'·~·

.~

-

14

•

INTELLECTUAL AND

Q. You need no~ however feel tli::couraged from undertaking
this subject, but on the contrary do you not feel pleased with
the idea of examining the tlifferc11t forms of expressi011 used
by the best writers and speakers 1 Besides, this will enable
you at all times to speak correctly, shall you not like this also 1 'Vell then let us proceetl.
Q. 'Vhen you prevail on your father to give you his knife,
and a pine shingle from which you wish to make four little
wheels, two sticks made round at the ends on which to put
the wheels, a littl e hox to place on these sticks , and a tmi "ue
to dra,V'thc whole riloug, what name woul!l you give the thing
which all these parts put together would make 1
Q. Do all tli ings lwse nam es or not 1
Q . .W ell n ow, sin ce rill thiH gs ha\'C names, " ' C shall wrint
some general name for all this class of words, and as the word
Norn1 mea ns name, woulu you not then call th e names of nll
thin g:o; Noun s 1
Q. Wagon is the name of s;)mething, is it not 1 vVhat then
may it he call c(l 1
Q. ' Vliat m <iy th e knife with which you ma lle the little
wagon he c ~1 11 e cl , n!Hl wl1y 1
Q. Du an tlii n;•;s '-'>'Li(·li ym1 c!ln see, hear, taste, smell, or
feel, have 1rnmcs, or{\ () niry not 1
Q. By wh~.t t';c n ~ ral n ;':~rn then, may every thing which you
can sec, licr..r, ta ~ ~~ , :-:in cl!, 01· reel , be call ctl 1
q, Now yo11 C' :1n R ( ~ n thn li<~ lll'h on wl1id1 yo11 sit, a.nil the
.book whd1 l ld tl in my lmml , by what general name th en,
may hook, and bc1JC·.h li c call c!l1
Q. J)o you cDH boPk and bcnC'h by the gc ncrnl name of
nonn s.hc r..ausc th ey arc, or are not the nameo of things 1
Q. \'Ve ham lca.nicd that the name of every thing that we
can sec, taste, &c. is a noun, now ca.st your eyes over the
school room and say if you can discover any thing that i~ not a
noun 1
Q. If all the thin gs which are in the ro9m arc nouns, wiJl
you mention, say six, Uiat are nouns 1

15

PRACTtCAL GilAMMAR,
t

....

.

.

'

. Q. Your father llves perhaps in a large ·house ~ now 1s there
R?Y thing .from the garret to the cellar that is not·a no mi 1 .!
Q.' Ho\v niany things; the : mimes of .which are nouns : do
'

'

'

'

'

.t.

you supp?sc you have on and about Y?u t Let me hear · you
reckon them up, commen~ing with your-. shoes, stockings, ,butt~rn3, &c.

;

"1· 1

I

.

'

,

, ,

-

· Q. There are iri ,our language as many as seventy thousand
'words, mimy of these We have alre0;dy seen may be properly
. ,called nouns, other words, we shall · find by and by, may be·
called by some other ,general. names; -now will it not be con-·
venient, sometimea, to have one common term for these diffetw
ent sorts or divisions of words 1
· · ··
·· · : . .
. Q. Since speech means the power' of using w~rds or Ian" guage, and part means division, would ·or \vould not PARTS
OF SPEECH, then, be a convenient term or name, for these
grand divisions of words 1 ·
Q. From the exp.lanations v,rhich I have now given, can you
tell me \vhy these divisions, classes, or sorts of words, are call- ·
ed Parts of Spee.ch 1
·
. ,.
. ..· ·
~· ·when, then, I ask you, what Part of ·speech bench is,
for mstahce, 'vhat do · you understand me to m
· ean tl ie same as
to ask you :vhether bench· is anoun or not1
... ~ 1• . ,
Q. Y
told me that the name ' of every thing which. you
Cai1 see is. a n?un; now you can s.ee a hoi;se, what Part of .
Speech, then, IS horse 1 vVhy 1 '
-.. '
L

,

?u

1

C:},. What Part of Speech is man 1 Why 1 Is. woodpile 1
Why1
.

.. Q. Arc there not many things in this world 1 There are
very many things even in Boston, if we reckon all th t . .
·h
·
a is m
every s. o~, -house , &c. nmv · Boston is but a little part of the
world, 1s it 1
·
.,
Q. Since then there are so many things in the world as
grass,, corn, trees, &c. which 'you have seen ' in walking about
the fields, and elsewhere, you will not think hard of me if I' k
you to mention a few ilouns, say ten, as many as you have
gers and thumbs 1.
·
,
··
I

. ~

fui_

'

~

, 17

:PR;ACTICAL GRAMMAR.INTELLECTUAL AND·

15

't -

Q. Can you tell me what Part of Speech each finger of your

LEssoN 1r.

hand is, and why 1
Q. Did you not tell me that every name is a noun 1 Is the
name John a noun 1
Q. Boston is the name of a place, is Boston a noun 1 11
not apple the name of something 1 Is apple a noun 1
Q. Do we not learn from these facts that noims are the
names not only of what are commonly called things, but also
of persons and places 1
·
. Q. You are now prepared for me to give you a full idea of
the word noun. A noun is the name of any person, place , or
thing . . L est you should forget what I have just now tc;ild you.,
will you tell what a noun is 1
Q. Now since a noun , as you say, is the nam e of any per11on, place, or thing, will you Inform me what Part of Speech
Thomas is, amj. why 1
Q. What Part of Speech is N ew-York, and why 1
Q. What Part of Speech is B altimore, and why 1 Is Hartford, and why 1 Is Rufus, and why 1 Is William, and why 1

ls Salem, and why 1
. Q. It seems, then, th at th.e re are three classes of nouns,
namely, the names of persons, places, and thin~s; will you
mention three examples of each 1
· Q. I will now give you a few sentences, and w~ll you tell
me which the nouns are, and how many there are, ih each

1

1entence, as I re ad th em to you 1
'James and William are in a boat.'
'The duck and the goose are in the water.'
'Boston is a pl ace of curiosities.'
' Slate, pencil, paper, ink ancl quills, ai:e things for
the use of scholars.'

lU ENT AL . EXERCISES.
' · Q. When I ask you,' What is the ~umber of your fingers,'·.
tlo you underst.a nd ·me to ask ' How many fingers you hav:e ~'
. Q. Very true, r.umber does mean how many; well, now,
... BUppose I should say to you, ' Give me' a book,' should I mean .
one book, or more than one 1
·
Q. Well, then, . since the word singular means but one,
would you, when speaking 9f the name of one thing, chooseto
ha~e no word to expre.ss it, or should you prefer to . call the
aame of one thing the singufar number 1
· Q. When I say to you, ' Give me some books,' l evidently
mean more books than one, do I ·not 1 Perhaps you already know that the word plural, means more than one, what number then shall we call the riames of more thiqgs than ·one ?
Q. Plural number expresses this idea v.ery well; will you
ROW inform me how many numbers there a:re in all, and what

they are called ?
Q. 'W11Cn I speak the word " cart,' .do · I mean one cart or
more than one? When I say' carts," do I mean one . or more
.than one? Is carts theti of the singular or plural number?
Q. Of what number is boy; and why? Is boys; and why?
Is dollars, and why? Is carts, and why ?. Is- inkstands, and
why? Jg pins, and \vhy?
Q. Will you name a noun of the singular ·number? One _of
th~ plural number?
·.,
Q. Can you point out the noun'!, and their <lifferent\ ntim. · >._
bers, in the following sentences 1
'Rufus has a knife.'·:
'Three ·trees in a meadow.'
'James has but one appJC.' • 'Three farms .in a village.-' ,
Thi~ty peaches for one orange.' 'Three villages in the tolVn.!'
' "'three l:ioys on a tree.' ·
' Thirty towns in the State.!'

.

2•

•

18

t

INTELLECTUAL AND

Q. John has ten buttons on his clothes, Rufus ten pins ou
his sleeve, and William ten peanuts in his pockets, how many
nouns will all these things make 1
Q. Harry has a little box, and in it he has three whistles,
four \valnuts, seven pins, and tlu·ee orang~s, how many nouns
will all these make 1
Q. 'What is the plural number of dove 1_ Of box 1
Q. Is not the plural number of dove and box formed by adding s to dove and ES to box 1
Q. Is then the singular ai1d plural form of nouns alike 1
Q . Is the plural generally formed by adding s, or ES to the
<iingular 1

LESSON III.
lUENT AI... EXERCISES.

Q. You doubtless know that the word female, when applied
to ~school, as a female school, for instance, means a school
for Misses, also that a male school means a school for Masters; now let us see if you have a clear idea of the words,
male and female. Is girl a male or female 1 Is boy a male
or female 1 Is man a male or female 1
Q. When we speak of the female sex, we evidently mean
females; and when we speak of the male sex we mean males ;
now can you inform me whether uncle is of the male or the
femalo sex1
Q. Is sister of the male or female sex 1
• Q. Do you 1~ot know that gender or kind, means the same
ns sex1
Q. Well, if gender means the same as sex, would you say
of a boy, that he is of the male gender, or of the female gen·
dor ? Of a girl, that she is of the male or female gender 1

PR.A.CTICAL GRAMMAR.

i ..

.

I

Q. True, boy is of the male and girl of the female gentler;
,but sin~~ masculine means male, and feminine ; female, 'gfa~
marians have called the male gender .the masculine ge1~der,
. and the femaie gender, the feminine _gepder. Now_will · you
. inform me what gender the names of males are, and what'ge1i, der- th{l_!lames of females are 1
'·
·
Q . Of what gender is 9x 1 . ,Why 1
.
• ·.
. Q. You arc fight, ox is of the masculine gemler, because ·it
is the name of a male. Now will you tell me of \yhat gender
.
cow isl Whyl
Q. Feminine, because it is tl~e name of a femaie is a correct answer. We will nm"'. proceed to give you several~ouns
the genders of which I wish you to point out.
·
Of what gender is man, and why 1
Of what gender is woman, a~d why 1
Of what gender is brother, all(} why 1
Of what gender is father, and whY, l
Of what gender'is mother, a11d why T ·
Of what gender is cow; 1 and why 1
Q. The word neuter means neither, as when I say,' James
and John are fi ghting and Rufus stands neuter,' do;I mea1i that
Rufus is 'likewi~e ·fighting, or do I.mean that he . takes sides
with neither l
Q. Very true, by neuter we mean neither one nor the oth-·
er. Now let us apply the word neuter to gender. Is the·
bench on which you sit, either masculine or feminine, or is ·it
neither 1
Q. W el1, then, if bench is neither ri1asc1tline nor 'reminine,
would not this word, neuter, b.e a good nanie for· it, as · it
·means neither 1
.
.
/ Q. Of what gender then would you say bench is 1 · ·
Q. Of what genderis floor, and why 1 ·, · . ' ·
· Q: You are ·right in saying because .it is·neither male nor·
~· female. ·Now let' us se'e if you can tell me of what gender:
. .:··
book is, and why 1
'

20

INTELJ,ECTUAL Aj_';D

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

Q. Of what gender is cart, and why 1 Is box, and why r
Q. You ha·•c now been tau7,ht the masculine, femini'(, an.rl
'neuter gcnrler~; will you repeat these cliffcrcnt genders and
tell me how many they make 1
Q. I will now examine you a little on the <lilfcrent gcnrlcn
of nouns : can you tell me the gender of boy 1 Why 1 Of
woman, and why 1 Of girl, and why 1 Of mea<low, and
1rhy 1 Of ~iatc, and why 1 or grandfather, and why 1

J-'ESSON IV •.
JUENTAL EXERCISES.

Q. You must by this ti rnc have acquirccl tolerably corrc•t
nleas of gender and number. vVe will proceed next to the or<ler in which persot1s anrl things are considered in discourse.
Woul1l it not be more natural for the person speaking as, 'I!'(>quest you to sit still,' to be co"tisidcrcd the first person, rather than the scconcl or third 1
Q. vVhen I say to James, 'Give me that book,' I evidently
11peak to J ames, so he is not the person who speaks, would
you then call James the fir1> t or second person 1
Q. .Hight, .Jam es, wh en spnken to, .is the second person,
but suppose you and I were tnlking ahout James, and that we
1houl<l say, 'James is a goocl boy,' would you in this case call
James the second or third person 1
Q. Now since the person speaking must always be I, as' I
walk,' 'I rm~,' 'I requ est. you,' &r-. antl since l is not a noun,
but a different part of speech, as we shall see by and by, yoTJ
perhaps perceive the reason why nouns cannot, properly, be
1aid to be of the first person, but let us sec if you can recolJect, from what was mentionc<l above, .how many persons ma7;·
properly belong to nouns t

21

Q. True, there are but two persons, second and third, and
, you must partict¥arly notice that the person spoken to, i9 the
lecon<l
persoh, and the person or thing, ' spoken of or about,
\
the third person.
Let me give you a_ few examples.When I say, 'Joseph, study · your book,' what person is Jo1eph, and why 1 ·
.
.
· Q. When you and I are talking about Joseph: pnd say, 'Jo1eph might learn well, if he would only study,' what person 1 i1
Joseph, and'why 1
Q. Will you tell me of what person the nouns are in the
following sentences '!
'John, where are you going1'
'John is an industrious boy.'
.
' 'William, please hand 1m that penciL'
'The sun shines plea~ahtly.'
V'll<
'The lamp givM a clear light.'
Q. Do you recollect why light is of the third person 1
Q. You arc right in saying because we were talking about it.
Well, now, let
see if you can recollect and inform me when
nouns are of the third person, and when, of the seconcl1,
Q. We will now see if ybu have not forgotten gender and
number while attending .to person, . Of what ge.nder and number is Thomas; and lvhy 1 Is Mary, and why 1 Is· Providence,
and why1
Q. Will you name the gender, number, and person, of each
ft{)Un in the following sentences, as I read them to yoti 1.
'Sarah, why do you not attend to your work 1'
'·while th e girls are playing the boys are studying~'
'Harry, why do. you not porform your tas~ 1'
''James, remember that time is money.'

,,

us

"'

12

23

PRACTICAL GRAMMA;rt.
INTELLE:C'f UAL AND'

; #

world, do you then think that city is .a common or proper .....

. LE§SON V.

.

'

.IU .E NTA J~ J~XE RCISES.

Q. Th e woril common, yon very well know, means gcncrNow we will ~ 11ppO'> O t!mt in yom i:..lafrn there nrn twcll·o
boy;;, may not caclt ono of tho cln:.;s be call ecl hr-tho 1mrnc of

nl.

boy1
{,.~. °YV•.mll J'.)'.I ~l:l.J' th011 i,~n.t h:iy hi !i: CO!lll\1011 llOUll, l.ha,t
fa, a nanw cominrm to each one ia L!1c chl:;s, or tha t boy is a
particular narnc or o!lly one of the clu.sg '!
Q. You arc rigl1t, boy is a common nonn, bec iwsc it i:i a

general name . For the same reason girl is a com mon noun,
n.lso man, and 90 on. JJnt, if in the cla<>9 of boys mentioned
above, we siugle out one boy, whose name is John, you must
perceive a manifest impropriety in c~lling John a common
noun, it being the name of one person only. Proper means
fit or particular, would you then call John, it being a particular name, a co1111non or a pro1~r noun 1
Q. Ri ght, John ·is a proper noun, because it is a particular
name. Can you tell whclhcr vVilliam is a common, or proper
noun 1

Q. Is Ruf'ufl a proper or commo11 11011111
Q. You J'nust be particular to remember that a noun is called common, wlien it is a general name, and proper when it is
a particular name. Now lrit me hear you repeat this distinction, and inform me when a. noun is called common, and when
proper1

Q. Is dog, a common or proper noun ? vVhy? Is Lion,
when the name of a particular dog, a common or proper noun?
Q. B~ston you know is the name of a particular city, would
you call it a common or proper nou~ ?
Q. You know that there are a vast many cities in the

* . noun?

'

.

·

.

.

· Q. Will you pdmt c;rnUhe ·pi:oper,. and _common nouns m the

' following w~rds : James, Ne-w-York~ sleep, clog, man, 'Villiam, London, Hartford, bench, chair;' ¥is~issippi.
·
Q. Let me now see if you have not forgotten how to disijngu.ish th~ g~nder, ~u~nber, and person of no~ns, whil~ your
atte11tion has been called tp proper and common.noUI)s.
·
·: ' Wil~am learns his lesson.'.
' .
·
Q. VVhich are thc·nouns in the sentence, and why?
Q. Of what pcr~on are they, and why?
Q. Of what gentler .are they, and why ? ,
;, Q. Of what number is each, and why ?
Q . .Arn they proper or comm6n, and why?
. 'Ch;ules l~ecps two birds in a cage.'
. How many nouns arc th ~re in this Eicntcnce?
\ Vlii cli are· common a.nd which propei:, and \vhy?
Q. Of wlmt gender is each, and why?
Q. Of vihat person ai1d numb er is caqh, and why?
'The boy plays in school.'
Q. How many nouns arc there in this sentence?
Q. Are they proper or coinmon?
·
Q. 'Vliat is the gender, number and person? .,
'.Many men of many minds, many birds of many kinds,
Many {i c,hes in the sea, many men that clo decree.'
Q.. How many nouns arc th em in this sentence?
Q. Aro they proper or common?
Q. Of what gender, number, and person, is each?
Q. Will you mention a noun which is of the masculine gender, third person, and singular number?

, Q..

, Q. \Vill you mention one whicl~ is of the neu.tcr gender,
third person, and plural number?
·

. Q. Will you mention a proper noun, of the third person,
.and singulm; number?

·'

•

1

1

1
1

J

l>RACT.ICAL llRAl'ilMA:R..
INTELLECTUAL AND

LESSON VI.
MENTAL EXERCISES.
, Is it William or Thom'
Q. '"\Villiam struck Thomas.
.
. .
' Then ho
.
ti act of striking ? I s it not Wilham .
t.
"\Villiam.' Is it Thomwho performs ie
is the actor or doer. 'Thomas s m e1c
,,
xr1"lliam who is the actor or doer, no\V?
· th actor in this
as or '"
·
·
Q. ' 'Henry beat Thomas., "\Vluc1l is e
case?

, T he lion seizes his prey .'
Q. ·w hich is th e agent or actnr in this sentenc~ ? • . . ,
What is th e li on after , or in other words, what is his obj ect .
.
< •
lh"t in this sentence th ere is both :.ci11 actor and
Hence you see "
. 1 · t tt
r ,
·r
cantcllme a'ra111w11
c11 neyae.
l "ed . let rn c sec I you
"
h' h
an o JJ , ~ l
, W hich is the arrent, and w ic
Q. , A l og kill e<l a, cat
c •
~
the obj ect? k "Jl I d'.>!J" '
Q. A cat 1 .e( a o'

"\\11!ch is the agent, and which i1

the obj ect now ?
become
B . the last e:'\ample we see that an age nt may
Q· Y
.. t
agent H ence we learn that the
bj. ect antl an OlJJ eC 'an ,
.
an o
' i·t·1011 of th e ~" ·ne noun , may be altered very ma11tate or conc>1
"·· •
t &
Id
nall
N ow since case m eans conditi on, sta e, . ., ·c .. w·ou
te l ~· k "t !Jes' to ham no gene ral name for these ~hfferent
• al
You tun 1 . · .L
. ' !cl you call them 1JY th e gener
states or cond1tions, or "ou
name of case ?
·
.
1· d
what I }1avc JllSl ex p amc
G, Now Jest you HI1ou11< forrrct
. ,.,
.
·11 you re1Jeat to me the meaning of case, and why it
to you, w1
.
is so called ?'
Q. , J ames cats apples.'

"\Vhich is

the actor and w'hich

the obj ect?
b · t· and
Q True, J ames is the agent and apples the o . Jee '
thcs~ terms are goocl enou gh for all purposes ; bu_t smce. nom~
inative means namin g, and as the agent or actor is cons1dere .

the leading or naming : noun, grammarians have c called all
nouns that ar:e agents, the nominative ·case. ..Will you now
repeat the meaning of nominative, whe.n it is applied to nouns,·
.
and w}Jt it is so e:alled 1
Q. We have seen' that there are nouns fo ' senteRees which .
may properly be considered objects, and as the word objective
is derived from object, and means belonging to the object,
would you then make no distinction between the nominative
case and the object, or wolild you call that noun which is the
object, the objective case 1
Q. 'Rufus assists Harry.' Which is the nominative case
.~ r agent, and which the objective in this sentence 1
Q. Do you recollect what gender, number, . and person,
Rufus and Thomas are 1
Q. Are they proper or common nouns
Q. 'John's slate.' ls there any agent or object, that is, is
there any nominative or objective case in this sentence as it
now stands 1
Q . Very true, there is none. L et us however examine the
·s tate or condition of the noun, John's.. Who is the owner or
possessor of the slate 1
Q. Now since the phrase, 'John's sla~e,' denotes possession, joined with case, thus, possessive case, what would be a
good name for all those nouns that denote possession, ownership or property 1
Q. If you can recollect what I have just now told you, can
you not always tell when a noun is in the possessive case,
1lnd give a reason for it 1
, Q. 'Johnson's Dictionary.' Is Johnson's in t}ie nomina. tive, possessive, or objective case 1 Why 1
Q. What number, person, and gender, are Johnson's and
Dictionary 1
Q. Are they proper or common nouns (
Q. John's slate means the same as the slate of John, now
will you tell me what other form of expression means the same
as Johnson's Dictionary ?

r

3

INTELLECTUAL AND

26

PRACTICAL ·GRAMMAR.
~

Q. The Dictionary 0 { Johnson, it is true means t~1e same.
In the expression' Johnson's Dictionary,' do you notice the s
with a comina before it ? This comma is called an apostrophe,
and the s, an apostrophic s. This s, with the apostrophe, is
put at the end of these nouns to denote the possessive cas~,
thus, 'William's~.knife.' Now let me hear you repeat what 1s
put at the end of nouns to denote the possessive case ..
Q. 'On eagles' wings.' 'Charles' slate.' 'For ri ghteousness' sake.' What other forms of expression may mean th~
frntne as these? We find eagles', Charles ', and ri ghteousness,
to be in the possessirn case, here we have no apostrophic s,
but simply an apostrophe or comma added. Do 1~ouns then
that encl in Es, and ss, as these do, form the possessive case by
:ulding the apostrophic s, or by simply adding the apostrophe

.

. Does ·the second phrase mean the same as to say, 'The
1orse of Wllliam? Who then owns or possesses the horse 1
·: Q. In what case then is William's ? · . . . . ; . ~ ·i
Q. In the last example, the horse ,bites-bites . what , or
whom?
:., .
, ...
· .. . , , ,
~
".
Q. What then is the object of biting?
Q. lil what case then is this object?
.
" Q. Frorn the preceding .illustrati<_>ns', in how ma1~ cas~s <lo
nouns appear to be ? . W.ill you name them?
· .
. . · ,:
'

'

.,

last three cxmnples ?
Q. Arc they proper or common, and why?
Q. 'For conscience' sake.' This, you know, means the
same as for the sake of cot1scienc'-'. Conscience in the exrimple has the apostropl1e merely without the s, for if we should ·
:ulil ai1 s , thus, for conscience's sake, wouhl it souncl as well ?
Q. Hence, in nottns ending in NCE, is the possessive case
formed by addin g the ripostrophic s, or by aii apostrophe without the. s?

Q. 'William's book.' Who owns or possesses the book ?
Q. h 1 ,vhat case th en, is William's ? Of what gender, and
why? In what num be r, and why 1 In what person, an<l

why?
Q. 'vVilliam catche~ his horse.'

'William's horse.' 'The
horse bites William.' In these sentences, there are three different cases. In the first example who catches the horse 1 ·
Q.. What word then denotes the actor or agent ? In what
t

"l

Q.-N OMINATIVE John,(catch- ., · Q. In how m~ny cases is John
es a horse.)
used in these three sentences 1
· · PossEsSIVE John's (horse) . Q.
.you repeat eacl~ ~as~
0BJECTI VE ( Tlie horse
commencing thus 1 , , ..
bites) John.
Nominative John; &c. .
· Q. When I call upon you to name these different cases of
the nouns it ·may be well to have a name ,· for thi~ exercise.Now the word, decline, sometimes means to change the . ep<l".'
ings of a word, which is giving its different cases, as for .in'"
stance, the different cases of John; as above. When the~ I
ask you to decline a noun, do you .not understand me to mean
that you should give the diU:erent endings or cases of the noun 1'
Q. Will you decline the wo.rd'.J~lin agai1i ?:·: 1 . • · : . " .
Q. Will you decline Mary 1 " · .'\ ' · ' '
· · "· ' <;
NoMiNATIVE CAsE Mary.
. ,'
PossESSIVE CASE Mary's.
OBJECTIVE CASE Mary. ·
•
Q: ·wm you decline boy, m the singular· and plural nutn1
Gers !
SINGULAR.
PLURAL.' '. 1'"
NoMINATIVE CASE Boy.
_ N oM1NAT1vE CAsE Boys.
~,'_ PossEss1VE CASE Boy's. ·
Poss:EssxvE ' CAsE Boys'.
OBJECTIVE CAsE Boy.
0BiECTIVE CASE BoY:s.
.'...,Q . Will you decline man 1
.,
s'IN.
PLu. · ·
.:
1 :·.
NOMINATIVE CASE. .Man~, ..:__. Men. ·

Will

without the s 1
Q.,Vhat ~~ernlcr, n11mber, and person, is each noun m the

case is the actor or agent?

Q

I

" '

28

1:.NTELLECTUAL

~}tlcit'tcAL

AND:
l I

·

.

'

'

GRAMMAR: .

,,.

·/

29
. ,

,

.

I

PossESSIVE CASE Man's. Men's
OBJECTIVE CASE Man.
Men.
Q. 'Rufus's coat.' What part of speech is coat, that is, is
it or is it not, a noun 1 Does Rufus possess any thing 1
Q . What does Rufus possess 1 In what case then, is Ru-

why 1 Which is propet · and which . is_ common~ and why .1
Who'se cap ·is . it 1 111' what case, then
Peter's 1 By what'
word is it 'gove~nea;· ancl'by ~hat rule~ '
" .. ' ' . : ~ ' ' . . .
Q. 'William's knife.' Does :this· meap the' same as to s~y,
c The knife of Williarn 1'.
··
·· ·
'·
· ··
·· ·

fus 1
Q . Do you not observe that coat follows Rufus's1
Q. Diel you, or did you not notice, in the preceding examples that another noun always followed the possessive case 1
Q. Does then or does not the fact of a noun's being in the
possessive case, depend on another noun's following it 1
Q. Well then, if the possessive case dei)ends on the noun:
after it, can we or can we not say, with propriety, that this case
is governed by the next following noun, it being the name of

Q. What otherform of expression means the same as ' Harriet's bonnet 1' ·
·
·
· ··

the thing possessed ?
Q. It may be well to recollect these facts, they are indeed
of importance enough to make a rule, which I wish you to
learn 'and. repeat.
RULE I.

The posssessive case is governed by the next noun after it,
that is, by the name of the thing possessed .
Q. 'William's house.' What does. William possess 1 By
what then is William's governed l
Q. What is the rule for William's being governed by the

,.

next noun?
Q . 'Mason's store.' What does Mason possess 1 In~what
case then is Mason's, an\} by what is. it governed 1 What is
the rule 1
Q. 'My brother's son.' Whose s~n 1 In what case then is
brother's, and why 1 Is it a proper or common noun, and
why1
Q. 'Peter's cap.' Here are two nouns, wl1at is. the gender
o( ~a~h" an4, wh.r 1; 1=h~. numper, anct wh~ 1. '(he person, and

1

'is

.

-eee....
LESSON VII.
QUESTIONS . ON THE

NOUN~

Q. Which is the correct . . Q. When I ask you, 'What ·
form of expression, 'I are,' or part of speech· man ,is,' what
1
I am 1'
do I mean 1
Q. Do you ever speak inQ. ·What part of speech is
correctly 1
Wi1liam 1
Q. Is. this subject of IanQ. What part of speech is
guage a pleasing subject; ·a nd Boston 1;
why 1
. · ; Q. What part of speech
Q. Do all things have bench 1 Why 1 .
names·? ·
Q. Are the names of things
Q. What is the meanihg of the only words that are nouns.1
the.word noun 1
Q. What then is amore ac-· ·
Q. What is the meaning of · curate definition of a noun 1
noun as applied to words ?
Q; What does the singular
Q. Will you give an exam- number 'me~n 1
·. '.
pie of a noun 1
' Q. What does · the · plural .
Q: What .is the meaning. of mean 1
· -r ·
1peech 1
· ' Q. How many' numbers do.·
". Q, · What . does part ·signi- nouns have 1 ' · J
' - · 1'···<
'
'
'. '· "l
'ff L · . ·
Q. Will you give an exam"'"
3*
.
t '1. 't. •.

is

~ .

II
31 ·

Pl\A'.CTICAL GRAMMAR.

30

IN'FELBECTWA-L A-ND"

Q. ·How

Q. What is a proper noun T
ple of the singular number 1
Q. Will you give an examQ. Will you girn an examvle of a common and also of a
ple of t.he plural number 1
Q. How is the nlural num- proper noun 1
Q. W:hat is the meaning of
ber of nouns generally form- 1
the word case 1
ed?
Q. vVhat is the meaning of
Q. What does the word
the word nominative 1
gender mean 1
Q. What does nominative
· Q. What does masculine
case. mean as applied to nounsT
mean 1
Q. Will you gi\·e an examQ. Will you give an exam1ile 1
ple 1
Q,. What does possessiye
Q. \'Vhat does feminine
case mean 1
.mean 1
Q. vVill you gi\·e an examQ. vVill you give an exam1ile?
plc ·1 .
Q. What docs objective
Q. What docs neuter gencase mean ?
der mean 1
Q. Why arc nouns said lo
Q. vVill you give an examlie in the objcctirn case , or
ple 1
1
e
Q. How many gen <l ers ar · whv. ·do they have this name.·
.. How many cases of'
Q
there 1
tl. When is a noun o f tl ie llo uns do there a1Jpear to be 1
Q. How. · do nouns form ·
.
11econd person 1 G I ye an ex their possessive case, gencralample.
Q. vVhen . is a noun of the ly 1
Q. What nouns form this
.
· 1ve an examthird person 1 G
case by simply acldingt.h e aposple 1
Q. Why are there Mt trophe without the s 1
1
Q. When nouns end m
•ouns of the fi rst person .
Q, How many persons have NCE; how do they form the
aouns 1
possessive case, and why do ·

na ned to

.

Q. Are the endings ·. of the ~

conunon' nominative an<l
cases alike-!

posses!liv•· .

,}

'

\.

EXERCISES 1~0R THE SLATE OR 'PAPER.

Q. What is the meanihg of they so form it 1
"
the word common !
Q. What is a
1
noun 1-

m:111y· different thing's or properties have been
you, which belong to nouns 1

1

Q .. Now I wish to ascertain whether you can write correct- ·
ly, for it wiil do you no good comparatively to be able to tell a
noun, ·and all its properties, when you see one, unless you can
apply that knowledge to practice by writing and speaking correctly.
I will therefore give you some exercises in writing. \Vtile
dnwn on your slate six nouns which shall be nallles of persons .
~ix, which are the nanl.es of places.
Six, the names of animals. Six, the names of trees. Six, , the names of riv·
ers. Six, the names of different kinds of clothing. Six,
H,1e titles of different books.
Six, the names of bird~ .
Six, the names of things 'Used iii school. Six, · the names of
things used in a blacksmith's shop. · Six, the names of thin·g~
u~ed in the kit~hen. Six, the names ofthings used in the parlor. Six, the names of things tised at the dinner table. Six,
the names of things used on board a vessel. Six, the
. names of animals that eat gras·s. Six, the- names of animal!I
that walk on two feet. Six, the names of animals that cat
flesh. Six, the names of animals which climb trees. Six, the
name~ of animals that dig holes' in the ground. Six, the nam~s
of good qualities such as honesty, &c. Six nouns, each in the ·
plural number. Six, in the sirigufar. Two, of the third person. Two, of the second person• Six of the masculine gender.. Six, of the feminine. gender. Six, of the neuter gender, .
and of the plural number. Write down six short sentences,' .
each having an agent or nominative case. Six; each having im .
ebject or·objective case. Six, each having a noun in . tpe'po,t."' ·

1cs11ive case.

i'

.,·

..,,,,

32

..33

PRACTICA:&. GRAMMAR.

lNTELLlWTUAL AND ·

W fl'te down six common and six proper. nouns. · .Write
.
l
three proper names of persons, in the possessive. case, JOllle(
with book. Write the whole of your own name m ~he possesJ. oined with book. Wnte another
. cas e , i'n li'ke manner
sive
<
'
•
.
form ·of expression having the same meanmg as the last sentence.
f h
·
Will you write in the possessive case the na~e o t e own~r
in the following phrase-' The ball of Thomas. Cha~1ge this
possessive case ' ' The hats of the boys.
~lso
. to tl1e
a1SO Ill
·
•
,
these, 'The slate of Peter.' i For the sake of consGience.

LESSON YIIJ.
lUENT AL EXERCISES.

Q. When I say to you, 'Give me a book,' as soon as possible do I mean any particular book?
' Do I not mean
. any book you Pl ease·.
?
Q.
Q. Is not a, the little word that shows this?
,
When
I
say
'Give
me
the
book,
that
I
lent
you,
do I
Q
.
'
.
b k?
mean any book, or do I mean s~me parbcul~r oo .
Q. If you noti ce the words a, and the, m these examples,
you will find that they limit the signification of th~ noun, that
is they tell what book is meant, aml are called articles. Now .
wil~you repeat to me what a; and the, are called, and for what
purpose they are used ? ·
.
•·
Q. 'Give me the book.' In this sentence you.say a particular book is meant; now since definite means .particular, would
not Definite Article be a good name for this word?
Q. 'Give me a book.' This phrase, we know, means no "'
particular .book, and since a, placed before many words means
not, (as incon;ect means n~t .correct,) would
th~n ~~ll the
word a, before pook, a Dehmte, or an Indefimte Article· .

!ou

Q. Carr you now inform me what a, and the, are called, and
,why they .are so called? . ,
. . ·
· .·
. '.
'

•

'

'

I

1

Q. In conversation would you ·say:, 'A apP,le,' or 'an ap;-ple ?' ·'An eagle,' or' a eagle?' 'A Irishman,' or "an Irish.;.
man?' 'An ounce,' or· ' a ounce?' 'A uncle,' or 'an uncle?'
, Q. Before each of these five letters a, e,, i, o, u~ you .will
t~en use im, ,instead of a; these five let~~rs you probably knpw
are called vowels.
. ,. .
·
. , Q . Letters are ,then divided into vowels and consonants ..
Now since you know;. tl;e vowels, you can of course tell the
consonants ; will you then name to me all the vowels andicQnspnants, in the Alphabet?
· . ..
. . '.
,.
.Q. A, is the same article as an, with .this· ~ifference onl}"fo
the use. The latter is .used before words begin~ing with . a
vowel, because it is more easy to pronounce, the former,before
words beginning with consonants. Now .will you repeat_to•
~e when we use a, and when we use an 1 Why ?1.
Q. Do we say' A hour,' or 'an hour?' 'A honor,' ,o r 'a,n
honor?'
.
. Q. When then, words begin with a silent h, as the h, in hon-...
!)f, (by which is m~ant that the h is ,QOt sounP,ed .in P,ropot,ll?-Cing, honor being pronoun<;.ed as if written.onor,)
d..o .\Ve
;use' .a,_
!
.
• '
.
" ' .
"' or an p
. r,
Q. 'An heroic action.' This we know sounds a little bet.:...
ter than 'A heroic action ; ' but is the h silent? .
· -·
•' · · Q. Well then, this is an exception t.o the rule that:we must
., use before h, when it is . not silent. Let us examine the ·
"'· exam.pie. · Is, or is not, the accent on Uie. second 'eyllaqle,, i(t .
. l '
.. : heroic 1
, ,: · ,r
;. · ,•1:Q. 'An ·historical account.' This is afso ·correct; and is .
. . the acoent on tor, the second syllable in historican , '
. , '· ·
· ~· h Q ... Well then,, when words begin with· h;. 11.ot silent, ,and the
· . ~ent is on the second syllable, do we use a, or 8Jl 1, , .. , . ,
, Q. 'A homely man~ ' Here the accent is not on the · sec"..,.,.,·ond
.
syllable, and the h is sounded; would you us.e , a,~ or .a~~in.,
all such. cases t

a,

..
~
'j

~

J

l

J

1
.1

~

j

i

1

PRA°C~IC,AL GRA.l\fMAn.

lNTE~LECTUAL AND

Q. 'A tinion .'

'A unirnrsity ., · ' 'An ' uncle.' Do you, or
ilo you not, observe that in these first two exa111plcs, the 11, ill
union and university, is long, while in unde, it is short 1
. Q. ' 'Y<mfd you tiicn . use a, or an, before words beginning
with u long 1
. Q. In worcls ~ egi nning \Yith u, short, \vhich Wonl<l you \1se1
Q. Well then, woultl you sny, •A i.mit,' or' an unit 1' 'An
ulc er,' or' a ulcer1' 'A use fi1l thing,' or' an useful tbing1'
Q. 'Many a one.' This is th e usual mode of speaking, but
docs not one, begin witli a vow el1
Q~ Then this is another exception , is it not 1 Let us examine it, howeYer, and sec i r it is an exception in fact. Does
not,· 'many a. one,' sound as if written many a wun 1 J/Vun,
you perceive, begins with the consonant w; ought we, or
ought
we not , for this reason, to use a 1
'
Q. Would you 1hen say 'Such a one ,' or' such an one 1'
(.l, Do we say 'A slate.' or 'a slates F 'An oranges' or' an
orange 1'
Q . D oes a, or an, 111 these last sentences come before a
singular or plural noun 1
Q. It is important to ·r ecollect this fact; we will therefore
state it in the form of a rule, will you repeat
RULE II.

Tho itidefinite Article, A or AN, belongs to nouns in the sin-'
gular number only.
Q. 'A man.' ls a, an indefinite, or definite article 1 Does·
it some before the noun man 1 Is man of the singular number1·
'What then is the rule for a 1
Q. ' An apricot.' Is an, a definite or indefinite article,
:~ t
and why 1
· Q. What is the rule for an 1 Is apricot a noun, and why?
Is it comrnon or proper, and why ? \Vhat is its gentler/and:
why? Its number, nnd why? Its person, and why?
.
Q. Do we say' Tiu~ boy, and the boys?' \Veil then, does-

~-

tho .definite article the, come before, :or belong to 1104ns, ,b9tJ1 .

of the singula.r and plural numbe\S 1 ·.
.
·
Q, It may be well to .r emember this fact -also. I will there~ .
fore 1tate it to you expressed .in fu!L .W-iJl y ou
\

I

.

. UULE III. ·

.

rep~at ,

\ ' ..

''

' '

. The de.finite ~rticle ~HE, be)ongs to· notins, either ·of tl1e
singular or r1ural 11umber.
'
Q, ' The m en run.'· What kind ' of an article is the, and
why? \\>That does it come before? What then is the rule for
the definite article ~ Ute ?

Q. What part of speech is men? Is it a proper or 'com-

mon noun?

What is its person, and why1 Its number, and
why 1 Its gender, and wh)r? Do' m en <lo any thing ? Is men
then the agent or the objP-ct? In other words, is men in · the
nominat.i ve or ~hjeet ive case?
·

Q.. 'A cat catches mice · in t.hc garreV
cles are there here ?

How many arti-

'Q : . \Vhich is d efi nit e, and which inclefinite 1 To ~vhat noun
does each bel ~n g, and 'vhat are the rules. for both I There
. are then nouns in the sentence, which are they ?
.
Q . Are they proper or common, and why? vVhat· .is the
person of each, and why? ,T he nmnbe~·, an~ why?
Q. To speak correctly, would you say, 'A boys,' or 'a
boy,' and why? vVould you say 'a ounce,'
'an ounce,' and .
why? 'A university,' or ~an university,' and why 1 'A honor,' or 'an honor,' and why 1 'An pen,' or 'a pen,' and why1 .
'An inkstand,' or 'a inkstand,' and why? 'A ox lows,' or
'an ox lows,' and why ?
Q. 'A wise son.' Is son a noun 1 To wha,t then does a,
belong 1
· Q. ' The man walks . ' To what does the, belong 1 What
is the rule 1
. 'A ball.'
Q. How many articles are fhere m th~se '

or

'Tbe fokstand.'

sentences on the le fl, and why?

. · ..

. ·'

.

'PRACTiCAL GRAMMAR.

INTELLECTUAL ANU

86

~. Which are definite, and which 'indefin'An orange. ' '
·
ite and why 1
'A writ.'
'
1
•
Q.
To
what
does
each
belong ·
. wrt'ts. '
'The
Q What is the rule for each 1
' The misers.'
How many nouns are there ?
c An historical
1
Q. Are they proper or common, and why . ~
Societf .'
Q. What is the person of each, and why •
'

.Q:

The number, and why? The gender, and why ?

LESSON IX.
QUESTIONS ON THE ARTICLE.
Q. What is an article 1
Q. What is the meaning of

the word definite 1
,
Q. What is a definite arti-

Q. Vlhen do we use a?
<.~. When <lo we use an 1

Q. Is an, the same article

as a?
Q. When do we use a, be·
cle 1
Q. What is the meaning of fore vowels?
Q. When do we us ean, bethe word indefinite 1
Q. What is au indefinite fore a consonant1·
Q. Vfhat is the rule for the
article?
.
Q. How many articles are definite' article?
Q. "What is the rule for the
there?
indefinite article?
Q. What are they1

37

at least two articles and two nouns? A sentence in which
there shall be at least three articles, aiid at least two nouns,
in the plural?
NOTE·. Those pupils who have not attended to the study of
arithmetic may omit the two following ex(Lmples.
James says, that he is 'the ow~er of five hundred and .fifty
·things, the names of whid1 are nouns; says John, 'you must be
mistaken; let me hear you name them.' 'Well,' says James,
'I have forty cents in a purse, thirty apples in a basket, two
hundred and twenty nine walnuts in my chest, and two hundred and fifty six pins in my. box.' Does James speak the
truth or not 1
Harry told Thomas that 'he had seen in one single store,
one .thousand things, the names of which were nouns.' Says
Thomas, ' this cannot be true. What! one thousand no.uns !
This surely is a mistake, Harry.' 'No,' said Harry, 'I am
right, and if you will take the trouble .to reckon them, as I
name them, I will convince you.' 'Very good,' says Thomas, 'proceed.' 'Well,' says Harry, 'I have seen twenty five
pieces of cloth, fourteen pair of shoes, forty pieces . of calico,
twe~ty seven umbrellas, forty two cravats, severity five fans,
seventeen whips, and perhaps ten thousand knives and pins.'
•Enough,' says Thomas, 'I did not think that every little
thing is a noun.' Now the question is, how many nouns will
all these thing•;, which Harry enumerated, make when added
together?

EXERCISES FOR THE SLATE OR PAPER.

L}jSSON X.

' Q.. wm·you write down the definite ~rticle ~vit~ _a singula~
n6un? With a masculine noun? With a femmme noun.
With a neuter noun? With fiv_e masculine nou1~s. each beginning with a different vowel? With ~ve f ~mmme nouns
beginning in like manner with the masculme?
Q. Will you write down a sentence in which there shall be

MENTAL EXERCISES.·

Q. If I had a horse, which I , desired to sell you, would it
not be very natural that you should wish to have him <lescrib·
ed before you purchase<l 1

4

38

PnACTICAL GRAMMAn.

INTELLECTUAL AND

Q. If I were to describe him and wished to reccommend
him, shoultl I not probably say, that' he is gentle, kind, young,
and handsome 1'
Q. Are not the words 'gentle, kind, &c. the words that describe the horse 1
Q. Cannot you describe something which you have seen, a
dog, for instance 1
Q. Do you not notice that the describing words are joined
to the thing that is described 1
Q. Now since the word adjectiYe, derived from the Latin
word adjectum, si gnifies adjoined, that is, joined to, would it
not be a convenient name to give to th ose words which are
joined to nouns for the purpose of describing them 1
Q . vVhat part of speech then would you call good, wise,
and industrious, in this sentence: 'James is a good, wise, and
industrious boy ?'
Q. Can we not say of a mountain that it is a' steep and lofty mountain 1' Is mountain the describing word, or are steej}
and lofty the describing woi·ds ?
Q. Which then are the adjectives in the sentence 7
Q. Can you not describe this school room 1 Is it high or
low in the walls ? Dirty or clean 1 Convenient or inconvenient 1
Q . Which are the describing words that you have used in
describing the school room 1
Q. Will you describe the bench on which you sit 1 This
inkstand ? Paper 1 Book1 PenciB
Q. Can we not say, 'a good cow,' 'a good man,' 'a good
garden,'' a good house,' 'a good tree,' &c.?
Q. Is the sa100 adjectirn then confined to one noun, or will
it describe se.Yeral?
Q. Will you give an example of an adjective that will .describe several nouns?
Q. Can we not say, 'a wise man,' '.a good man,' 'a happy
man,' 'an intelligent man1'

.,

·3.9

Q .. Must the1~ every noun be contjned to one acljective, or
may it be clescnbecl by several?
.·
·
: ~.' We have seei1 that.an adjective is so called because it
is Jomed. ~ith a noun to describe it, what then may all words
·
..
that are J omed with nouns be called 1 ·
_Q. Will you give me an example of any adjective joined
with a noun? Will you give me another? Another? One
more1
·
Q. ·'A wise man.'
man?

What part,of speech is a? Is wise 1. Is

. _Q. 'A wise .son ~akes a glad father 1' . How many adjec~n es are there m tlus sentence 1 ·Why are they adjectives 1 Js
it not because they describe the nouns after them ?
Q. How many articles are there in the sam~ sentence,1
How many nouns 1
.
Q. When I say to you, 'James is a good boy, but Rufus is
a better one,' do I not compare Rufos wi'h James 1
Q. Now sine~ degree, means the condition ofa thing, which
may be. altered m .~nany respects, and as you say I made a
co~pa~·1son by saymg Rufus was a better boy than James,
would it not be proper to say that .better is in the comparative
· degree?
,
Q ..If then I .should ask you what degree of comparison better, wiser, happier, and such 'vords are, what would you say 1
Q. If I should ask you why better is in the comparative
degree, would you not say, because it implies a ~omparison between two things or persons ?
·
Q. Now will you tell me in ,what degree of comparison bet_ .
ter, safer, and wiser are, and why? ·
Q. 'William is a tall boy of his age, but Thomas is a taller
one.' 'Vhat degree of comparison is tailer, .and why 1
· . Q. If I say, 'This is a good apple,' · without. comparing it
, ';1th any other apple, canl reasonably call good,' the compara~ve degree ?. .
·

--

•
40

INTELLECTUAL

A~D

Q, Do I mean any thing more than to assert that the apple is good ?·
Q. Would it not be very proper then, when we speak ~h~s
positively, to say that the adjectiVe which we make use of is 111
the positive degree 1
Q. 'This is a good peach.' Is good of the positive or com.
parative degi'ee 1
Q. If I should ask you why, would it not be. a satis:actory.
answer to say, that 'it is because good simply gives an idea of
that single peach, without compariilg it with another ?'
.
Q. Will' you now state to me what degree of comparison
, , and "vhy 1. Is small, and why 1
wise
· is,
· an
· d w hy 1. Is safe
Q. c James is a good scholar, Tho~as is a ~etter one, a1~d
Harry is the best scholar I ever saw. In tlus sentence, is
good the positive or comparative degree, and why ? Is better
the positive or comparath1e, and why? In the phra:e, 'Harry
is the best scholar,' do we not give Harry, for lns scholar..
ship, the highest possible praise?
.
Q. Do you not know that superlative means highest, or
lowest that is, the extremc1
Q. Well then, would you call best the positive, comparative, or superlative degree1
Q. If you were asked why, would. you or. would you ~ot,
say, c because best, describes scholar m the lughest degre.e ·
Q. Will you tell)nc what degree of comparison best, w1sesl;
and greatest, are, and why t
· .
Q. c This is a poor apple, that is a poorer one, but the one m
the basket is the poorest of all.' What pa~ts ~f s~eech are
poor., poorer, and poorest 1 Why dfe they adjectives . ~
Q'. Of what degree of comparison is poor, and why·
,
'
h
1
Is poorer, and why 1 Is poorest; and w Y ·
,
Q. t Tlte great man, the greater man, the greatest .man.
c This;iil a safe place, that is a safer place, but yonder 111 the
safest ~lac.e...~ l;IQw IJlanY. ad~ectjye.s. a.r.e. th~r.e. in .the.s.e sen~~
tences '?•

P.RACTICAL GRAMMAR.

41

Q. In \\tliat degree ofcomparison is each 1
Q. Great and safe are words of how many syllables 1 'ls not .
greater formed from great, by adding ER, and greatest from
the same, by adding EST?
Q. Is not safor formed from safe, by adding R, and safest,
by adding ST 1
Q. How then do adjectives of one syllable commonly form
the comparative degree 1
Q. How do they form the superlative 1

Q. True, they do form the comparative, by adding

or
ER, and the superlative, by adding ST, .o r EST, to the positive.
Will you then in the same manner compare strong ?
Q. Will you now compare keen? old? small 1 fresh 1
large 1 red 1 green 1 light? dark ? salt ? new ? young 1
rich?
R

Q. Do we say, 'This woman is beautifuler than that 1' or,
'This woman is . mor'e beautifol than that 1
Q. Do we say,
beaatiful woman 1'

'Th~ beal!tifulest woman,' or, 'The n;iost
·

·Q. Do then, acljectives of more than one syllable form the
comparative by adding En, and the superlative by adding EST
to the pos itive, or by prefixing the word more, to the positive
to. form the comparative, and t,he word most, to form the superlative 1

Q. Aller the same manner will you compare numerous ?
benevolent 1 splendid 1 faithful 1 irregular ? candid 1 dangero~s ? grievous 1 hungry 1 knavish? pleatiful 1
Q. Do we not say, 'Little money, less money, least money 1 Is little, less, least, a regular comparison formed .accotding to the foregoing rules, or is it irregular 1
Q. Does the expression, 'He is the more wiser man, He ,
is the i;nost wisest man,' shew any thing more than, ' He is
U1e wiser man, He is the wis.e st man 1
Q. True, it does not. Besides, such forms of expression
: are not used by correct . writers and speakers. How then .
1

.

4*

'

42:

- ~~,,.....·--· -·~

_.,,._...

....---

···~

INTELLECTUA:L: .A!Ntl '

would' you speak; instead of saying, 'He is more ~aifer 1' ' ~~ ­
is the most oldest man 1' ' She is the more prettier woman ·
'He is the rnosf comeliest man 1' ' Washington was the most
noblest patriot 1' 'One· star appears more brighter than another 1' ' A more sweeter pie I never ate ?'
Q. Would you say, 'A more sweeter apple,' or ' A sweeter
apple' 1 An older man,' or, ' A more older man 1'
Q .. Why is, 'A wise man,' a more correct form of speak- ~
ini' than, 'An wise man 1'
.
Q. Good, you know, is an adjective, m1 'Good man.' But
if we add NESS to good, it makes goodness. Is it proper tcs
say, 'Goodness man 1'
Q. Is goodness an ncljective, then1
Q, Is it not the name of sml!e quality?
Q. Do you recollect what all names are called?
Q. What part of speech then is goodness?
.
Q. Can you not in the same manner form a noun from the
.
'l
. h ~
adjective bad? From ripe? cheerful 1 ingemous
. peev1s
.
calm 1 greedy 1 ill 1 sober 1 1·igliteous ? swift 1 spotless 1
tame? rash 1 smooth 1 slow 1 idle 1
Q. Do you not know that lawful, is an adjective? Is it not
formed from the noun law?
Q. Will you form in like manner an adjective from the
noun fear 1 From hope ?
Q. The best way, perhaps, to find out whether you have
formed your adjective correctly, is to join it to a noun; if it
make sense, the word is rightly formed. Thus, from beau.ty,
is formed beautiful, which makes. sense before a noun; as,
beautiful house. Can you now form an adjective from revenge? From zeal 1 child 1 mercy 1 change 1 cour~.ge 1 care?
1
health 1 wealth 1 worth 1 patriot 1
Q. I will now give you some sentences in which there.are ,'.
adjectives irregularly compareil. You need only repeat the ·,'
comparison, without the nouns. I will name the positive to · ~
you, then will you repeat the other degrees 1

PRACTJC.A:JJ GRAMMAR.
POSITIVE.

Good man,
Little money,
Many persons,
Late inquiry,
Old. man,
Much evil,

COMPARATIVE.

43
SUPERLATIVE.

Better man,
Less money,
More persons,
Later inquiry, .
Older man,
More evil

Best man.
Least money.
Most persons.
Latest inquiry.
Oldest man.
Most
evil.
'
Q. From the preceding remarks, how many degrees of comparison do there appear to be! ·
Q. Why are they called degrees? Will you name them 1
Q. Alljectives, you say, describe nouns, ought they, or
ou?ht they not, to belong to_ those nouns which they tlcscnbe 1
·

Q. This fact should be remembered. I will therefore state
it to you distinctly, so that you may refer to it at any time.
Will you repeat
RU.L_E IV.

Adjectives belong to the nouns which they describe.

·

. Q. 'An old man.' Which word describes man 1 'V'h at part
of speech is it then 1 Will you compare old, that is, tell its-positive, comparative, and superlative degrees 1
Q. In what degree is old, and why 1 If it describes man,
• as you say, to what ought it to belong 1 'What is the rule for
- ~ts. belongiog to man 1
·
1

: Q; 'The most industrious man labors .' Which word
, here is the article, which the noun, which the acljective, and
. why?
'·. Q. Is the article definite or indefinite 1
Q. Wi~l you compare the adjective, industrious 1 .
"· Q. Is it regular or irregular, and why 1 To what does it
belong, and what is the rule for it 1
·
:"'·.,~· Is the noun to which industrious belongs, prope;, 0 ~
Mhlmon, and why ? What is its number, person, and gender 1 Does man do any thing t Is the word nian then an agent? ·In
what. case then is it ? ·
·

l!;

INTELLECTUAL AND

PRACTICAL GRAMMA,R.

Q. How many differe11t parts of speech
'A large boy.'
are there i11 each of these sentences 1
'The busy woman.'
(1. \Vill you com pare each a<ljective 1
'An an gry man.'
Q.
Arc they regularly or irregularly
'A foolish girl.'
compared 1
'A dirty room;'
Q.
In what degree of comparison is
'The noisy boys.'
each and why 1
each
of them belong, aml what is the
Q. To what does
rule 1
Q. Are the nouns proper or com mon, aml why 1
Q. What is their person, gentler, number and th e reason

.EXERCISES .FOR , THE SLATE OR PAPER.

14

for each 1
Q. ·To what docs an nrtirl c belon g) To \vhat tlocs each
of these belong and wl u~t is the rule 1

Lu~S§ON

QUESTIONS O N

'l'HE

Q. vVhat is the meanin g of
the wonl arijectivc 1
Q. What is an at1jncfoc
joined to 1
Q. What is a correct tlefinition of ar\jectivcs?
Q. Will you giYe an exaIPple of an adjective.
Q. What is the meaning of
degree of comparison?
Q. How many degrees of
comparison are there 1
· Q. Which is the positive,
and .why?
Q. Will you give an example 1

xr.
ADJECTIVE.

Q . Wl1aL is the meaning of
the corn para.ti YC degree?
({. Wi ll you giY e an example 1
Q. What docs the word su- .
perlaLivc mean 1
Q. ·w hat is the meaning qf
the superlative degree ?
Q . How many different
ways are there of comparing
adjectives?
Q. What are they 1
Q. Will you give an example of an adjective regularly )
compared 1 One i1Tcgularly1
compared 1

.. Q.

45

Will you write down an article, ' adJ'ective ,· and noun ,

m one sentence, so as to make sense 1 Will you write six
different acljectives that will make sense, between these
words; 'A
man' 1 Six that will make sehse between
these; 'A
cow'1 Four in the superlative degree in like
manner between these; 'The
bench' 1 Four between
these; ' The
girls 1 Four in the comparative degree
between these ; ' A
house' 1

Q. Will you Write six phrases, each having a different
article, acljective, and noun 1 Six having the same article and
adjective, but each noun the name of a different tree 1 Six
nouns, the names of things used in school, each described by
the same adjective 1 Six the names of buildings each described by a different adjective denoting the color of each building 1 Six phrases, each having the same article, but different .adjectives, in the superlative degree and the nouns the-·
names of six different plants 1 Two phrases, each having the
article an, properly used before an adjective beginning with a ,
consonant~ Two having the article a, properly used before
an adjechve beginning with a vowel 1
Q. Will you describe the noun hat, in four phrases by dif~
ferent adjectives, descriptive. of different colors 1 Will. you
write your name, correctly joined,. with the . noun, book 1
Write another form of expression for the phrase, 'Peter's knife'1 •
Write a phrase having a noun i.n the second person 1 Twenty
different nouns to be described by the same adjective 1 ·
Twenty different adjectives descriptive of the same noun ?
·Q. Will you write a phrase having an article and an adjecA ive belonging to the same noun 1 Will each of you who are
in the class see who will write the greatest number of nouns
Jles.cribed by the same adjective! Also the greatest number
, adjectives describing the same noun 1
, James says to William, 'I once visited New-York, and
• 1¥h11t do you ,think . I saw there 1' .' Oh, I don't know,' says .

.

-

·- -------------:

- ·--·~·~....

•

46

INTELLECTUAL AND
PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

\Villiam.' '\Vell' says James, •I saw so many things, that it
will take five h~nrlred adjectives to describe them.' Says
\iVilliam, ' I should be much gratified to hear you make use
of your five hundretl adjectives.' 'Reckon 1.he1.n up ·t.h en, a~
I name them,' says James. 'I saw a large, wlute, any, spa
Cious, convenient, and marble City Hall; an old, elevated,
elegant, commodious, and splendid Hotel; twenty . Pr:t:~
little -steam-b oats; fomtecn laq;e, grand, and .costly ship '
twenty large bay' ancl fifteen old, small, and wl'.1te dray h~r­
ses . four milk while steeds, drawing a. large, n ch, s.plcnd1d,
beautiful, and most superb
the
ywas
so honest, so a.cti>:e, so amiable, so rndustnou s,
m~el.h gent,
nnd so obli rrin.,. that he possessed the entire and u11plic.1t con"
O l
who knew him.' ' Stop, ' says w·u.
l mm, 'I was
.'
ftdence of all
not aware that we cuuld describe every thin g that we s~e, ~y
an adjective: you have convinced me.' Now tl.1e ~ucs t10n is,
how many adjectives <licl James use in his de scnvti~ns, be\ore
he was stopped by William 1 How are they compared, to
what do they belong, and what i11 the rule for each 1

giltl~d,

c~ach; ~nd

s?

~lnrn~

LESSON XII.
:tuENTAL EXERCISES.

Q. ' The boy goes to school, the boy learns fast, and tlie
boy will excel.' Can we not sa~, 'The boy ~oes ~o school;
he learns fast, and he will excel, mstead of say mg, the boy'
every time 1 '\i\rhat little word then, may stand for b~y.1 .
Q 'That girl will make rapid prngress, for that girl stud·
.
. l ' t w1ce
. ?
ies hard.'
Do we not say in this sentence, 'that gir'
What little word can we use instead of it, so as not to use
the word giri, but once?
.
.
. Q. Do you not see by these examples, that ~here is quite a
Convenience many times, in using several httle word~, to
'
.'
'I
avoid. repeatlug other words several times over ··

..

47

Q. Y du have doubtless noticed that these small words
which we have used in the plac~ of others; do not resemble'
th~ articles, nor describe other words like adjectives, and that
the~ differ somehow from nouns ; Jet us seEHt we can find
soma good name for them. You said of one of the examples
above, that he, stood :in the place of boy; that is, stood for
a noun, now the Latin word pro, means for, can we not then
make such a word as we need, by placing the word pro, be.fore the word, noun?

Q. What will the word be, then?
· Q. You are right, it is pronoun.

Weil, now we have hit
upon the right name, "".ill you teJl me which are the pronouns
in the foUowing sentences? 'John is studious, he is attEJntive,
and he is ob edient 1' 'Boys, why do you not study, do 'you
not wish to Jearr, 1'

Q. What noun does he stand for, in the first sentence?
Q. What noun does you, stand for, in the next 1' If he
stands for John, what gender, numb er, and person, ought · he,

to be?

(~. In speaking of a man, do we say he or she? · Of a wo-·
man, which do we say'1 Of a bench, d~ we say he or it 1
Q . Do pronouns then have the same gehder, number, and
person, as the nouns for which they stand, or do · they have
different ones 1
'Q. When the noun denofos the person or thing spoken to,
clo you recollect what person it is ? When the noun is spoken
of, 'vhat person is it 1

Q. Do you not recoJiect that it was stated as a re,a son why
,nouns have no first person, that we do not use a noun to de. note the person who is him.seif speakirig? Thus, would J~mes
say, 'Jam es does so and so,' or 'I do ·so and so 1'
l · Q. Does or does not, I, stand for the person speaking1
.• Q. We have a second person and a third person to nouns,
.. and a]so to pronouns, as you have see1i, and another person,
,Peculiar to pronouns, to denote ,the person speaking, would it

..
- 48

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

INTELLECTUAL AND

not then be proper, since we have as yet had no first person,
to call the person speaking, the first person 1
Q. Since the pronouns which we have uaed, take the place
of nouns, ought they not to stand for all the different persons
,of nouns 1
Q. True, they ought. Now when any one is speaking
and says, 'He loves lea1;ning but I do not,'i You know that I,
stands for the person speaking, and he, for the person spo~en
of. ,C an we not tell this by the very words, I and he, which
person is meant 1
Q. Would you not then for this reason call them personal
pronouns 1
Q. When any one is speaking of lnmself, ought he to say,
'l do so and so,' or, 'He does so and so!
Q. Is not I, the agent 1 In what cas.e then is I 1
Q. Do you rccdlcd what person I is?
Q. Doe~ I stand for two persons speaking or only one?
Q. If but one, what number is I?
Q . In speaking of myself and brother, which would be proper to say,' I,' or' we do so and so1'
Q. Is not we, an agent then? In what case then is it? What
number and per;ion?
Q. When I am speaking to James, ought I to say, 'He
does well,' or' You do well.'
Q. Do we not so111etimcs, in the Jnnguage of scripture,
say, 'Thou dost well,' instead of saying, ' You do well 1 ,
Q. Is not thou or you an agent 1 In what case then is thou
and you 1 In what numlicr and person 1
Q. When I am speaking to James about William, and tel:ling James how William behaves, should I say, 'Yvu does . :
well,' or, 'He does well?'
·
Q. What is the gender, number, person, and case, ofhe1
Q. When I am speaking to James about William and hi9
brother, should I say,' You (meaning William and his brother,) do well,' or, 'They do well?'

. • •r

• : 1

;1. :·

49

r

\ · ~.

Q. What gender, person, a~1d case then, is they? What is
thepluralofhe!
· '· ·· ' '" .. 1•1it·,, · ~, .• f .• ,. r,,,J

I<
'Q. ' Sh.e reads ·,~ell.' " Does ~ she' stand for
sortie fetnale1 ' ' '
l JI; :"·

"' "

"'.'

' .(

a' noun; mea,ning
' • :1 '\~" > • ~ '
i,

, :· Q. What gelid er, nmri ber, 1;ersott ·~ml ! ch~e thell'' is 1she 1
", ,Q.!. In ,speaking 6ftrior~ than one '~oma1~ shduld1 We'notsay
they 1
· · .. '" · ': " · · } .: 1 • • • r l , ~ , " .. , , . r
1
Q.· Wliat then is the p.lural oHlie !' ·: · · ·· · ' · ;_"\ .
'
1

Q. 'This is the d~or which I made, and it fits hacUy.'-·

What ~ittle word stands for door1 · · ' · ;: .w',li · · : : .

l "

'

'

.

'

'

~· What gender, · ·D.t.nnber, and pe~so~, is~·iHh'err· r. 'What
case is the word it, in ?
"·
Q. ",.hen we speak of this c~~1·, . and. that b~n~h~ ·a8 being
well made, should we say, . ' It;' (meaning boili)" ~ is'1vell
in!).de,' or, .' They are well made 1' · ·;
· · · · :,, ··, . ~ ,
. ::" Q. Whah~ord then .do we find .is used for 'the 'pl~~al of he
she;anditl ·
.
·
· ·· · , .. ; .. ... . , . · '
.1 . Q. If Harrriet has a book given her, then· it' is her book is
it not 1 . · · , · · · "· · . : · '
· "
·1
•
" ,'

·Q>Do~s her bo~k, in this cas.~,' ri1ean the· s~e a~· Har~iet's

book 1 .

! : · -·

('' . Q.. \Yhat noun then does h~r~ take ~h~ place off ,·:. ·', · .
":., .Q: In what gentle~, i1umber, and ,p,ersoh'
.he~ :be then?
'i; , ~· Harriet's, you know is in the i><>ssessi~e · cas({'becauae
'it denote~ possession; the.n if her stands 1i;·11;e 'place or'Hat1•.f~et's, in what case must it be? ·
· '. .: · · , ; ,1 • · '

must'

'

. ·:.~· 'My . n~me-our name-thy nam~~you~ ' n~ame~his
' . name-::-her name-its na~e-theH" name.,' In th~ firs~· pl;rase,
1" ;ffR.~s, or .does not my, stand for or refer to the person;speak~ng 1
' - Q. Ooes or does not .my, signifiy,' that the nilme ·belon"'s to
the person speaking?
·
· · ,·
. · · · · ,; :· , b
. ilt i. • Q. .w hat part of speech then is my? .

.. ,
~· · There are eight small words in all these ph~ase1, each
~)l~~ed bHote the word name. '., What dci. t~~r,sta:n~ fof,1 · ·
' .f; Q.1 What part of speech are they then ?,'.: ' ' .''. ·· .•:, '1' . -: · ' /
.,,'td 1Q .'.,DoeS'Cif does not each of them . ~enote pos.s essi6ni

!:

11
•:

5 '

". ,.; , ,, ; l"l '

-

. . . . ... · ----~- ···- ...

50

INTELLECTUAL

Q In what case then, are they ?
·~
'Susan
has
had
her
troubles,
as
well
as
John
and
I,
but
.
Q
hers ·were passed before ours began .' , Susan had her
. troubles
. .;
but
Susan's
were
passed
before
J
'
?
1111 <ls
I
h
d
11
J
as we as o n an ,
.
b
'
w·n
you
compare
these
two
sentei~ces ,an
and mme egan.
I
'
• tl
I p
. the first stands for Susan s .m ie
tell me w]1at wor d. m
( as 'l'll )
Q. What in the first, stands for John's and mme, . p1~~a '
in the last 1
for nouns, what PB;rt
Q. Well then, if these words stand
..
of ~peech are they? Also, what is their gender, ,number, ,.. n<l
person ?
.
. ..
?
Q. Do they stand for nouns m the possc:>Sl\ c case .
Q In what case are they then ?
.
·
Onr, is mine, one tlune, one
.
.
.
.
l
bool·s
Q. Here are sev eta
· ;... ·
.
.
urh' I
. a nd one theirs. n' . IC .1
his one hers, one ours, one yoms,
nre' the words here that stand for the person or persons sp~~~­
ing spoken to, or spoken op.
.
.
.
. I
. Q.
' If you se1ec t ti ie ri!!ht
words ' you ·will find that t ,ey
.~
make seven in number, and does each simply imply
sioil 1

.
Q. In what cases then, a1e they 1·
. '' .
Q Hence we see that there are two .sorts of pronoJ~s I~ •
·
· t wo sor ts as 'it regards their
the possessive
case, t1iat is,
; o;' ' U~,
as you perhaps observe; for do we say, ours book, : ·' • ~;If
' our, ' o1· ' OUl'S 1'
• •
book?' This boo1{ 1s
·
. .. .
· . ·~~1.t
Q Well then, does or does not the only ddTe1ence c~ ·•.
· that one has a notm a fl er I•t' an d the other has no
111
. this
" ': l '
·
·
'
·
,
I
't
us
and
the
•l
.Q. 'A bee stung me, . you, 1~nn, .. icr, I i . '
... ·rr
Stung whom? What then are the obJe~ts .o.f the w~~dsiu g _
Q. In what case then are each of these prnnouns . .. , : l:\JU
1

· n. f,or the pupil h'to h\Wri
N 0-t -Perhaps it would b e' we
e.
f, llowmg sentences w ic.~~
1
0 f II
· ie
clown on tho slate t iose
l then to su
hin the six pronouns of the fi1st pe1son, anc
he
t~te in place of these the other pr?nouns. At f~rs~ . Ida
lJe per1pitted to answer the qudestt1lo ~1S tl~Xi/y;ol\~; ~u{i1t $&c>
on the slate. When he can . o us re
'
req~ired to do it without this aid.

?

.

'

.

PRACTICAL
GRAMMAR.
.
.
.I . J

AND

51

. LIST OF THE PERSON AL PRONOUNS.

First person ·Si;,,gular~· 1 ' . ; '·· ' 1 First p~1'son Plttral:
Nom. I have a name.
'1 W.t ·have a naine; · ~·· · · ·· .
Poss .. The name .is .MINE, or .The name is . otms, . or OUR
MY name.
name.. . . ;
Obj.:. The name belongs to ME .. · The name ·belongs to us.
Secord person Singular. · : · ""'Second per'son Plural .. l
Nom. THou hast a name. · ''YE; or vou have a name . . '
P.oss . .The name is THINE, or ~he name is YOf!Rs, ~r YOUR
TH.Y name.
'
name.
·
Obj. The· name ·belongs to The name belongs to You.
1

..

THEE.

. .

·· ;_,

·

Third person Sing. (Mas.)

Third person Plu .. (Mas.)
THEY have a name.
, ·
Poss. The name is H:1s, or Hili . The name is THEIRS, or THEIR
name.
· name. · ·~..
· .'! .- '
Obj. •The name belongs t<:> . The name belongs to '.fJIEM.
Hm.
,
Third person Sing. (Fem.)
Third person Plu . (Fem.)
·
Norn. SHE has a name. THEY have a name. -: · 1
Poas. ·The : na.me is HERS, or ' :The name is THEIRS, or THEIR
' HER name.
name.
·
Q.bJi. The name belongs to The name .belongs to THE.M.

. Norn. HE has a natne.

HER.

TlJ.rdperson Sing. (Neuter.) Third person Plu. (Neuter.)
IT has a name.
· THEY have a name. -. , _ .
.fh~
.The name ..is JTs, or r~s .: }'he narne)~ 1:~~~!'}s.'.o~. THfJR
.p.ame.
.
.,
name.
·
..
1
06P The name belongs to ·IT: ' T~e name belongs to THEM. "

Nom.

1

. . ~·~ fr)sli.~uld ~p~ak t~ you, 'w~uld'j,t ~of be inorthaturai'
'fai*)tiar ~o~v~rsatiori to say, . you ancl · you~~, ·than' thou;
- ~ '"and thee 1
·
· ·· ' · · · ,,..,., , '; · ·· ' ; .. '.:

1
'.' Which .is"most natural to say, , ·You

~ave ~

booktor
:Jiau hast a book 1'
· · ·: ' .. _ 1 ' · "
Q~ fn;~ riiany agents. or ttominatives the singlllat: nl!m··· '·- ··
are.there in .the foregoing list 1 ·Which ate' they f
1
1io~: ~.any · nominati ~es ·in. the plural ~umb~r 1 Which
~y 1' ,,. ' .. •'
I
; . ,' J.:; ;!: ·. - :.
•

in

.

'

I

. •

-

.,

Q.·!i 'How
many pronouns in the . possessive case singular,
t• >
which ~r~ .they 1 How; .manr ..in .the po.s.s~ssiv~'. . :i)lp~a.1,
' I.'•

.

which 1arethey1

. '

'

•.

'

,

· : · ··· · ··. ' ·

,

,· '

iJ • · ·

• •. ··•

1"·

1

. n?.~. -.~any -~bjects, or ho:W many .-in, the obj,ectiv~~ -~~~~~~
:11(

I·

I<.• '

1

' ·' . ' •

" "

:

'.

.'

.

.

1, : , , ! ·

'

1i

'

I

j

~

; I

j,. d

'':

-··. - :r•·

52

,.,

INTELLECTUAL AND

.
l ar, .a n'-1'
smgu
, u . which are they 1 How many in the objective
case plural, and which are they 1
Q. How many proi10uns are there of the first person, and
which are they l Decliiie them.
1.
Q ., H ow i nany of the second person, an<l decline
.
I. them
1
Q. How many of the third pers~n, a'.1d declme t iem .
. , &c . are used m discourse, .do we know
Q . WI ien I., you
ainly
whethei•
these words
clenote males or females
1
cer t <
·
1
Q. When he is used, do we not mean a ma1e .
Q. What gender then is. he 1
· ..
Q. Is .male or fem11le referred to when she .is use<l.1
Q. What gender then. is she 1
Q. When we say- it, <lo we refer to man or woman, or.
neither1
·
Q. Wh~t geniler; would you call it 1
. . ·/
Q. Of which of the pronouns then can we s:l'y that their gen;"
is always known 1
', 1
. Q. you are right, gender does refer only to he, she, an~
it, but when the other pronouns stand . for . males or females ~
may not their gender be known 1
'
.
. '.: .
Q. Notwithstanding ther.e are a great many pron~u~~' ~~Il.l
as the possessive and objective cases are only vanabqns ,of,
the nominative, it is sometimes saj.<l that there a~·e n~, m1~,re
personal pronouns than there are agents o~· nommabye~;:-:: ~ r
How many then of the above · list may be saul to en).brace .~fJ
the perso,nal pronouns of the sihgular number, and how ~narr~ .
all of the plural 1
·· · , 1 1
.Q. Do we not sometimes . speak thus, 'I, myself, , ~ll\; rt.1
f;mlt,' ' You, yourselves, must. bear i't 1'
•
. , . ~ .
, Q. Do you not see, that myself, , himself, thyself, l\er.~~ ,
i'tself, ourselves, and themselves, are compounded of ay.r~~~o:1 i
a11cl-, th,e word self, in the plural, sel ve.s 1
.
"1 · (
, Q . . Would you then call them silnple persm~al pro~ou~~ or w.ould you call' them compound personal pronouns 1 1 • ·,1
11 1
, Q , Have we not seen that pronouM ~ake the place of 1 ~t>"'\
Alli~ that they ought to be of the same gender, ll@Jib'er, 'ilMl:
pel'S:9n .as.. t!1~ 1w~ms a.r~. (pr, wbi~.lttlWY. stand?

rr, •

.

'

'

.53

1. ,

. ., Q'. · ~o,u,d you . t~~n, as~ rule, pay.no ·regard..to ~he l\qP,J1s
..for · which t~e pronouns . staq~, .or in usi!lg. them,, , woul,d,.yqu
ma~e them agree wi~h;. the ~oups~.•n g~J1d~:i:-,n~~.~'fr, ~~d.pe~d1on.
.
Q. I.twill be importa.n t to remember. this: .Jwill therefore
~ s~ate,it to .you in the form of a rule. 'wm you '~p~at ' " ' ' . '
RULRV.

·Pronouns agree with the nouns for which they stand ' in
gehder, number, and person.
.

Q. 'James is a good boy, fo~ he has studied well.' . .What
word here stands for James 1
J

·

•

Q. What part of speech is it then 1 What. is its gender,
number, and person 1 Why 1 If it stands for ·James, ~ith
what does it agree, and what is the rule for its agreement 1
Does or does not, he, stand as an agent1 In \vhat case then is
he1

Q. 'Mary, why do you play 1' What word here stands for
Mary 1 What part of speech then is it 1 Of what person,
1
number, and gender is Mary, and why 1 What then is the
gender, number, and person, of you, and why 1 What is the
tule for the agreement of you with Mary 1·
' Q. ' The boys are out, will you tell th€m to come in 1'
.>What gender, number, and person, is · boys 1 What _word

stan~s for boys in the last clause of the sentence, and what is
l fts , gender, number, and person 1 Why 1 What then, does
"them, agree with, and what is the rule 1
·
· • Q. 'I will teach him.' Here are two pronouns, which are
they1

· Q. Does I, stand for the persons peaking, and him, for some
person understood and spoken of 1 What then are thei~ per- \
sons, genders, and numbers 1 Who will teach 1 Which then
is the agent 1 Whom will I teach! What word then repre1~ents the object 1 In what case then is him 1
.. Q. ' The book is inine.' ' I .\vill leave his book.' Here
are two pronotms, which ·are they 1 Why 1 What is their gen-

..cler, number, and person, and why 1 Who will leave! Which
5•

54

··

then, is the agent 1 Ill what case is I 1 Who owns the book 1··
In what case then is his 1 What is the rule for the possessive
case of nouns 1 What then is the rule for his 1
Q. What part of speech ·is book, and why 1 What is its

\

In what case then is book 1
Q. 'A wortl1}' man will rec~ive him.' What part of speech

why 1
Q. What is the rule for the agreeme1it of each 1
Q. ,fo wh'~t case is each, and why 1.
Q . :How 1nany nouns are there in the sentence 1
their gender, number, and person 1 Why 1
Q .. Since we have repeatedly found th e pronmmo; mu~l
agree with nouns, in several particulars, and haYe made a
1 rule for them, it cannot be very difficult for you to tell when
'. t11ey are use<l correctly and when incorrectly. Is it corred
·to' say ' My book fell into the fire , and by that means she was "

bumt1 ·
Q. Why not1
· . Q. Will you correct the following sentences as I read theml
'My cane fell into the river and I lost him.'
,' ,
' The house is mine and she is weJl built.'
'This pen is poor, she must be mended.'
' That is a beautiful woman and he has fine black eyet.
' I lost my hat but I soon found them again.'

' 'I hung my watch up, but.when I wanted her I could not
·· find him.'
·
.

Q. Let me now examine you .on other parts . of speech.
Which is «orrect, to say, , 'He is the most -wisest man,' or
'He is the wisest man 1' 'It is the more easieY..way' or' It
'
is the easier way 1
.
. \ .·
.
Q. Do we say 'An eagle/ or' A eagle 1' W,hy L-' An happy man,' or, 'A happy man1' '\Vhy 1,

gender, nu~be~, and person 1 Why 1
Q. 'I will leave'~what 1 What then is the object of leave1

is a, and why 1 Does it belong to a noun, or an acljecfo·e 1
Q. What is the rule for the indefinite article 1 What does
worthy describe 1· What part of speech is it then, and what is
th~ rule for it 1 · Will you compare it 1 Is it regularly or irregulai:ly compared 1 What degree of comparison is it, !llld
why1 ·" · · · .
.
.
Q. ' He went to play, she went to school, and my sister and
I went to church,..' Which arc the pronouns in this sentence,
and why 1 : · .·
Q. Why aie · they called personal 1
Q; In what gender, number, and person, are they, and

55

PRACTICAL' GRAMMAR.

INTELLECTUAL AND

'

.. .
LESSON XIII~
QUESTIONS ON PERSON AL PRONOUNS •.
Q. What is the meaning of the · Q. ·wm you decline them 1
Q. How many are there of
word p1:onoun 1 .

<l What.1s the meanmg of the

w?rd pronoun, when apphed to nouns 1
Q. What is the nieaning of
personal pronouns 1
Q, How many pronouns are
·there in .all 1
·
Q. What 1s the use of pronouns 1
.
Q. Why were they in vented 1 ·
Q. How many · personal pronouns. are th ere properly
< speakmg 1
Q, How many pronouns are
there of th e first person 1
. ' Q. Will you decline them 1
· i; Q, How many are there of
the second person 1

the third person 1

Q. Will you decline them 1
Q.:.How many numbers ha Ye
pronouns 1

Q. How ma,ny persol1s 1
Q. How many cases have
they 1
Q. To which of the pronouns
has gender tespect to 1
Q. \\Till you decline the masculine 1
· ·
Q. Will you decline the feminine 1
Q. The neuter 1
Q. \\That kind 'of pronouns
are myself~ thyself, himself,
&c.1
.
Q. Why are they so called 1 ·

•: EXERCISES FOR THE SLATE OR PAPER.

·"f 1

Q. Will you write down a sentence in which ·ther:e shall be
'
,.i ·two personal
pronouns 1
·~·h. :Q. Will you write one containing twq ·personal· pronoun11,
. ~lie one in the nominative and the other. in' the '9bjective case1
1
Q ; WiU · you write one containing an article, ·adjective,
'
. ~un, aiJd personal pronoun 1. '
,

1
" '

-

56

INTELLEC~UAL AND

PRACTICAJ, GRAMMAR.

Q. Will you write one containing a noun in the nominative'
case, an adjective in the superlative degree, and a pronoun in'
the third person plural, objective case1
·
.
Q. Will you write one in which there shall be a masculine'
.·
agent, and the object a masculine pronoun 1
Q. Will you write a sentence in which there shall be two
pronouns, and neither of them in the third person 1
Q. ·w ill you write down the objective case of he 1 of shet
of it 1 of I 1 of thou 1 of we 1 of ye, or you 1 of they 1
Q. Will you · vrite down a sentence which shall have a
pronoun in the nominative case, and also one in the possessive

case 1.
Q. Will you write one containing an article, an agent, an
adjecti ve in the comparative degree, and a masculine object 1

is, .d~e~ · l sta~d for ·~ny qtl~~i· than. th~ first
any. other than the second , &' c 1 · · · · ' · '

..

··- · ·-

57

p~rson'i 'thou f~r
··

·.

.·, : '

f

Q. True, they do not var)'. .b~t eac)1 ·one alway·s stanris Jr
the same perso~ ; well tl~en, ~he. pr~!1otm whp~ il.rid'. 'pe.~sonal . ~
pr0110llnS are different, are t.hey n'o t f .' · · . '"". ·: 1" · I. '..I

· Q '. "Y<>uld, you call whb', ·th~n:· a· p'~·~~onal pt~~u~ · '~i nof 1
~· Let us ,try . ~o .find s?~e othe'r., ~1.~1p~ by ,~hidh' ; 0 distir~­
gprs.h y~on~uns, h~~ ~)~~' rrom pers~~al pron~uns . . .J)i~ y~u
nol notice ~n the foregomg examples,' that who.,' 'stpo(I for· 'a
~o~n mentioned before, tha.t is, that it refe1'red back' ·each ')
~11ne, to a foregoing no~n. : Now· sln?e reiati\;e me~~s' rei'at1!1g to, ';VO~.Id .you n?t call who and -~iniil~i-' ~vo~ds·;Rei~tive' '
Pronouns1
. .
·
. · " ... ,.. ,, . ·· · •· "·. ·· t cl -.i

t ·Q. 'The _ben~h- which.i inad~.'-· Do~s n~t' ~vhiCh' 'i11 "this
sentenoo . relat.e to bench 1
.1
i
. Q. · !~ it,.then' a relah v~ o~
per~~nal pi·~nou·~ 1:
'·
1
Q. If it relates to bench; what is it~ ·gendei-, ~iuinb~r, ~~d
~ffSpn 1 why 1 . ,
.
. Q .. ~~' not the _rel.ative r~fe.rr~d 'back; e~ch 'thne, to .some
. fo~~g?ing no~n, as .' J'.h~. ~a!1' wh,?. ~ ', 'Lei '~~ gi'. v e"a iia~·e for:

'a

LESSON XIV.
l\iEN'l' AL E X ERCISES.

Q. c The boy learns who studies his book.' Is it not boy,
who learns and studi es 1
Q. Does who then stand for boy, or for something else 1
Q. If who stands for the noun boy, would you call who,,a ·
noun or pronoun 1
Q. If who stanrls for the noun. boy, what is the gender,.nui~ber, and person of who 1
Q. ' The woman who is amiable will be loved.'
in this sentence stand for or relate to woman 1 What then II
1
the gender, numb er, and person, of who, in this case 1
Q. When any one is speaking and says, 'I, who love learn·· .
ing, am perusing books;' does the who stand for or refer to I\·
What then is the number, and person of who in this case1· ., .
Q. Hiive we or have we not found, that who, mays~
for two different genders, and also for two different peNQ~1 . '
Q. Can you tell what persons and,what genders these ~IU'8J.
Q. Do the personal pronouns ever vary their persousu.u.l

.

tins noun to wl,1icl~. U)e .re~a~~v~.:~~fe~s,~ .,~. '. ~~:~ t,ip~~i~i~/'.!~" f!o'm
.other nouns. Do you,. not k1lo"' Jhat antecedent means folfe~qin~, qhe ante~ at t~e ,beginn\ ng' .a~t~d~cie~t', "ffi~ani~g· b~­
9,re, ,ns, .antedate to .dat~ .9e_for~, &c·~;) ' can.'yo~ nc»t :easily
, . ~~1at to call the fQregoipg poun,'to wl~i6J~ the.: relati\,~ tefers'l
; · · Q~ 'The· candie ., wl~ch. burns: ·l lighte'ct/ ·;·is·· it."tlol iM:
. e&,ndle that burns f ,Does ·whkh1 stand· for ; candle•!-' What
,then is its gender; numbe~; and p~~o~ t ''• ·.\
. '

of

f

tell '

Q. ~oes not candJ~, ~~ whic~, tl1~.' .~ehi.ti.ve ,refers, go be-

fore wluch 1 Wha~ theu~1s _the-antecedent to which 1 1
Q. If.the .relative is:of the ~a~e ge~der' . numb~r;"arid p~r­

. IP,Jl,ll;S lits antece~ent, is not ~he rule. for th~ ~eiative~ th~ saJ1e
1
f9r the perspnal f>ronomi 1 Will yo~. ·rep~ai'that'r~Iet ' ~'
' 'The man who came t'arried but a 'sh~rt tinie/'" ;) p
'Th
'
.·. i ' , · :;! · \ ···· ·4',:·: I t '
".•1;!-, , . ~,)~o.m~n .whom I saw is drowned.' · .," · ·· . 1" • '. •
· . 'T~1e person whose book j b~rrowed iert \i~ i~'.a:·,hti~~,

M

-

..

~-

...

~~

58

INTELLECTUAL ANll
PRACTICAL GRAi.fMAR.

.' The horse which
. I s1ioc1 ran aw ay with' the stao-e.'
. e
l . 1
. same man that I saw yesterday was buned to-cay.
'The
· t1 · ·
whose whom, which, and that, m 1e
0
1
t
D
Q. o no .w 1 ,
'
. • tl
1
f~;egoing sentences, stand for the nouns b;fo1e iem .
Q. What parts of speech are they t~en ·
1
Q W hat is the antecedent to each .
.
WI "'
' .' '
.
l
011 1
iy !
Q. What is their gender, number, am pars ;
.
Q What is the rule for the agreement .of each . ,.
ls
not
who
an
agent
!
In
what
, Q.. , The
.
h
e
'
man w o cam .
,
.

c~se
.then is it 1
,
.Q. ' The person whose book I ~o~rowed.1

SING.

Nom . .. Who,
Poss. Whose,

PLUR.

Who.
.. , . .
Whose.
. ,'
" .·
.. ·obj. wi10m,
Whom.
.
·. int
,
1
Q. Is it prop~i: t~ say, 'The persons which I love~ .: . t !
..
Is it. ~oper to say, 'Th~ persons whom .I lov.e . . ,, ..•
· Q. · : i .P
• t. ·
, Tlie animals or things winch. I saw1
Q .Is it proper o say, . '
· ' A
' I·
, . ·we not ~lso say ' ' The persons that J.Jove
Q .. . C an.
. ~ .. 1 · &o,\
. 1'
' The things'' that I desu~
·.
. .
. Q . .;Do. we in . spe,aking of persons _th~n use
whom, ~r which i

'I

' f

.

'l

or

I

,

I ;

•,,..

•

'

.1

•

. '

'.

'

'I

• .

~

'

) .

'

'{ '

: Q. If we can use that, ..both when speaking of persons·· and
1
, th.
in.gs) is it, ,or. is it not. import11n't
to ..·know
wl;e~1
'i'o'i tise
~tli'~t,
, . .'
,
,
-' .
~
.
..
.
I }
. and when to use who ,and which 1
·
· ·. '
' <\I• _,
,
• .
_,, i
• •
Q. Well then, I will hy to explaiii 'this by a (ew· exampl~s,
, ~vhich fol.low . . ', Who that wishes t? lt:;a~n will _npt's'tpdy 1'_:_
.If we should use who instead of _that in this sentehce, should
1 lY,~ 1 not use who twice.
.
·
..
. .. .,,, '
·'. ''' Q. Would not this be a repelitioi1, and d~ ,¥~~or p~event
' itbytheuseofthat,fo1:who1
· ·
· ' ·' ' · ·1 1
repeated, ' ~vould
as bad as ,v110~· ' ie"','. Q. Since '-"·hich,
'
. 5ouricl
. ,
peaterl; ought It not
to be avoiclecl
by . usitlg' ti1at for '\vhicli 1
I
•
.
.
t . Q. 'The man and the horse thiit w'e re . drownecl have not
' p~.en .found.' How many wer~ tl~e~e d~·o.w ~~e~, 1 · . · · 1 ,,·
. Q. Does or does not that, stand for both the . man · and
.11 :
: . I
.~
•.ihorse 'l. . .
. . . . ,.
.
'· !

a noun 1
.
f
1
·'
Q. What is the rule for the possess1v.e case o nouns . lb
. : Q. What then would you. say wl~ose IS governed by, am y

.

'

. Q. Wh~n speaking of .~hi~gs, ~nd ~fall animals excep~ ·p ersons, do 've u,s e who,
.do ,y.€/ ..us~ which,' ind ,, sometimes
that1
.
··. ·•' ·. " ..'.'''· ,. ~ ·~\ ' ' 1 ' ·1 '.''',· n 1

session 1 In what case is it then .
tliat is if it stands in the place
denote pos
. . .
Q If whose is a p1onoun,
'
manner ~
of a .noun, ought i't not to be governed in the same
·

, '

'

.Q. Can we not use that,
in speaking both of 'per.sons and
t,hings 1
.·
·1 ' • _
.'' •
• • •
•
,
'

Does not whose ,

what rule 1
I '
Is
not
w
saw
perished.,
I
I
Q ' The woman, w iom
'
1 iont
the ~bject of the word saw 1 In.what case is .whom then . 1
Q. Have we not found the pronoun to be. u~ t~ree cases ~ . ,
Q°. Will you tell me then what case ~ho ism .
')
In
what
case
is
whose
1
Is
whom
·
.
·
Q
. '
'
• d r . the pronoun
·.. Q.· Telling these ,cases you know IS ec mmg
.If' I ·ii
.
·
·
.
t
ld
·..f.he
cases yourse
-·'or noun: now smce you 1iave o .
;w~..,,,.
~tate them in pr<ler. Will you decline them 1
.,

I

f). •

'.

.

.

:

11

I

•

I

•

f

•

•

I

• I I

,

I ,

•

I

• '

.

~-

.

' -~

, ,, .Q. Could we1 say_who or which . wer~. drowned
'

•

• ,

•

,

'that f ·

,

•

•

•

!.'

·

•

'·. •

·. '

•

• •

·

"·

·i

'

..'

'I.

"· '

.... ''

r )

)nst~R;d of
l

• 1 :1

"· · • 1.

'

'

't·

'

f

Q, True, we could not, because wh9 refers only. to per, • '. ' .
. ,.. ' ' ' i
. l~!1s; a,n.d which only . to things, . or irtationa.l ~eing~; ·;~hat
· are the antecedents of that, in the last example 1
'·
I >1 •
· '
·
•· ·
· ·, •· , , ·
·
•Q . .Well, th~n, when there are two 'or mofe. ahtecedehts 'to ·
vela,tive, and pne is a persort, and the ' otheri~ il~t; <lo 'we use
' Wl10, which, or that 1
.· ..
· ·' :·!
i
11
1
.~ i

1

1

.. .' '

'

;

Q,. ' F1.e is the wisest ~a~ that I ever saw/ Is this lriore
correct than to say, ' He is th~ wi~est
whom 't ¢~er 'sa\v1'
'.ffQ...Do we use who, which, or that, after 'ail.'' adj~ctiye of
• the'superlative degree 1 • : , ,
,
r '.
,"

'man

'

1 · • ··

'

·

·1'

I

'

•

I•

•

(,
!

'

I

'

I

'. :!

1·'.
•

I

I ,

,

· ~;, ~~ l~ay.e !~e~ tha.t \V.e can sar.~ ' Th~ . nia~ .w?o, ' .the
ep who,' 'It is I who,' ' The b¢ast which,' .·Ste. : . QttgJit we
1
fo:
from this
~n~~~~~ rto.. expr~SS gend~r, :'numbe~,.' and I ptlrsdn,' :fhat
· Jhey are not varied for this purpose 1
~ r 'I ·' ;
-

'

J ..

I

'

'

1

'

,

'

'

.

1

~~ infe~

tha{relati~e~· ate'.v~ried, lik~ ·p ex!sonal
';rlr..

rat
INTELLECTUAL AND

. 60

Q. The foregoing are all the relative pronouns which wi
u~e, will you just turn back and reckon up how many tl~ere

are 1
. Q. 'This is what I ,\ranted.' Does not what, in this sen. · .:
. 'tence strim\ for the thing which, or that which 1
Q. Well, now, since what, frequently stands for _t~o
words, would you call what, a simple or compound pron6u~ 1
Q. 'Whoever li,·es in this world must expect tro~b~~·'
- Does this mean the same as to say 'He ,,who,' or ''the !11an
who lives,' &c.
; .,
i
..
ell
then
docs
whoever
stand
for
two
words,
or
oi1ly
Q • \IV
'
. '
ti
one?
.
Q. If it stands for two, is it a simple or compound pron?un1
. Q. ' I will give you whatever you wish.' Does whatcv~r,
here mean the same as, anything which 1
,
,
Q. When then it stands for two or inore words, ougl~t .it.,to "'
1
be called a simple or compound pronout1 1
. ,·
Q. How many compound pronouns have we now notice<l 1
Q . What does, what, stand for1 W~iat does, whoever, ·sltaud
for 1 What does, whatever, stand for 1
.: ;1 .
1
Q. ' Who comes here 1' ' Which of the two clo you m~~n' 1
' What clo you want 1' In these sentences is there any al\l~1. 11-1
cedent expressed for who~ which, a~~d what, to refer to J>
. '. ··
Q. Is there not a question a~ked m each 1 .
.
, :
(~. Interrogative, means · as.king; . when then who, 'Yl.11~~'
and _what, ate used in asking questions, would you call1..~l1em
relati'\1e or interrogative pronouns 1
·· .
Q. 'Which apple will you have 1' ' What man is tha9,,.:-'
Are not what and which here joined, t~1e one to the 1 iioiJa
.
.. ~
man, the other to the noun apple 1 .
.f j ()~
Q. Do they not describe or ,define these nouns 1 _ , 1 ,
Q. W onld you then on this· account, call them adjecti.ne
.
~
or relatives 1
'
. . c\ .1 •
Q. Is there not a question aske<l in each of these sent61
' ·
·
',
'
· ·
' 'I f f:
Q. What did we find that such sentences, or 8uch WO
6
as which and what, .\~ere called, when.
us~d
in asking
.
.
. , ' •II
tions1
·
•

•,

I

'

"

PRACTICAL ' GRAMMAR.

61 ·~

. Q. When then, -,vhfoh a~d what' ~eJ~Oined" 'w'th " .... ~
th ·
· ·. · . ·
'
1
nouns 1or
. e purp~se . of asking questicins, . would you· call ..them relatives, or mterrogative adjective pronouns 1 , . . ,
. . .·
Q. 'I saw the man who killed the boy.,,, Saw whom t
What then is the object f ·
·
\ ,
Q.. Was it the man or 'boy wh~ killed somebod .· 1
Q. W~at then does \yho stand for: anfis it anyagent 1 :
Q. If it stands for . man, \Vhat is . itS . ge1i<ler, number and ·
. . · · · . · ·. ·
'
person 1

Q. What is its anteceqent, that is, to what word going before, does it relate 'l
·
··

~he r~le

agre~ing

' Q. W?a,t is
for pronouns,
·with.nouns.?
· .Q.. How many n~uns are there in the exampl~ jusfgiven?
~· What a:e their ~ender, number, and person 1- Why 1
. Q. If man is the obJ~ct,, what case is it in 1 Killed whom?
Q.. '":'hat then is . the object ' after killed t In what case
then IS It 1 .
.
. .

~.y~ ·'. Q.:

~;e

How many art.ides
there in °the same example 1
. Q. Are they defimte or mdefinite 1 Why 1 To what words
do they belong, and what is .the rule? .
· .··
·: .1'.Q,• 'The instructor punished the . boy who~ he Ioved>~ow many nouns are there here, and why 1
· ·. .
·~;;.:,4r~)~iey proper or comm~n, .and :why 1
)t~·':·Wa.s it the boy or instructor who loved 1 . . .
. (~Q ..,)V~at then does he stand for, and l'fjth what does it
agree? .
,
.
·
· ·

·. ' Q. Is it an agent 1 In what case then is it 1
·· Q. Whom did he love 7 What then does whom st d fi
.-.. h ·
·
an or,
~· w at 1s the antecedent of whom?
·
~_',.Q: Is not whom a relative pronoun, because it refers to,
bd's.fands for the noun mentioned before 1 ·

"~~ .':Wh~t is its gentle:, number, and person 1 With what

· . }ii~t agree, and wl;iat 1s the rule 11
·
: Q: In w~n.t case is who~? Why is whom ,us~d here rath:than which 1

·

.11 'James saw the f~x, which' tl1~y caught in the woods.'

,1:1!1!!1

62

INTELLECTUAL AND

How many · nouns are there here 1 Saw what 1 Is not fox,
lhCll, nn object 1 Caught what 1 Which is the relative pro~oun, and why? What is its antecedent, and why is it so
called 1
Q. With what does it agree, and in what respects 1
Q. What is the rule 1 Is which, an agent or an object? .
Q. In what case then is which 1 Why is which used here
in preference to who or whom 1
'I love the man who practices Q. How many relatin prodrtue.'
nouns are there here 1
.
' Obey your parents whom Q. What words are their anyou should alway~ respect.'
tece<lents 1.
..
. .
'James, · whose · father was Q. What is then gende1,
there, retired.'
.
number, and person 1.
•
' The young trees which he Q. Is there any rule for their
iJlanted, flourished.'
agreement?
Q. Which denote pcsscssion?
Q. In what case are they then?
Q. Which are the no1,1ns and why 1
Q. How many articles are there 1 Are they definite or indefinite 1 Why 1
Q. ·what is the rule by which they belong to nouns 1
Q. There is but one adjectiYe in all these sent~nces, which
. 't 1
'
't l
IS I •

Q.

·wm you compare it 1

Is it regularly or irregularly com-

pared 1 Why ? ·
Q. 'What does it describe? To what then does
..
and what is the rule?

-.. @~····
LESSON XVI.
QUESTIONS ON THE RELATIVE PROlVOUNSirn

Q. What is a relative pro- Q. Are relative pronouns va';
noun 1
ried like personal, to ·qx ..
Q Why is it so called ?

(l_. How do you decline who!
Q. Is which declined 1
Q. How then can you tell its
rooco

1:

press number, gender,
d
person1
' ·.
Q. How then can you tell
their gender, ·number, ~d
nerson 1

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.
:

I

,

.

63

/ ,

Q: What is the noun to which Q. 'What rule did we . find
that applied to relative prothey refer, or stand for
·.
~
nofms . , , . .
.
. '. called 1. .
Q . Why is it so called 1
Q. Would YQU then, since we
.~.. When speaking of perhave a rule by which . we
can · determine ·the correct
' sons,. do we say who or
. use of the relatives, say· · which ?
Q. When speaking of things Q. 'The man which,' or
. and animals, do we use who
.'whom I love,' and why 1
' or which?
Q. 'The woman who,' or
Q. What is the first rule for
'which saw me,' and why 1
;', using that, instead of who .Q. 'The boy and the cow .
or which 1
· .
. tl~at,' or' which, I met, and
Q. What is the second rule 1
why ?
·
·
Q. What .is the third 1
Q. 'This is the same boy who,'
Q. What'-is the fourth 1
· or 'that, was lost,'- and why1
Q. ,How many relative pro- . Q .. 'The Canadian giant is the
nouns are there in all 1
greatest man that,' · or
Q. · When are who, which, and
'whoni, I ever saw,' ·and
· what, called interrogative
why ?
., pronouns 1
Q. 'Mary is the same girl that,'
Q.. Are t~1er~ any interrogaor 'who, was here yester' hve adjective pronouns 1
day,' and why 1
Q: How many are there, and Q. 'Who that is wise,' or
which are they 1
'who, who is. wise would
Q.. Why are they so called ? . d? thus,' ~d why~ : ..
EXERCISES FOR TH_E SLATE OR P .A PER.

,

Q. Will you write down a sentence containing the relativ~
who 1

Q. Will you write a sentence in which it is proper to use
·
which 1
'

'

Q. One, with a masculine antecedent! ·
Q. One, with a neuter anteced~nt ? ·

i';

· ·\':

· ·" Q. Write one in whic.h it is rr_iora elegant' to use that, than
who 1 .
I
:
) , .· , .. . .
.

.Q . .One, in which it is. more elegant to use that, than which!
·
· ,,. · ··!
Q. One, containing whom 1 . ·· ·.
•·
· , · , · ;··.
: Q:. OM, containing which, in· the objective case 1 · ,. ' · ''
. .Q. Write who and which, in interrogative sentences 1 ' '" ·
.~?Q: '·Write 'h¥ti sentences, one· containing \vhich,1 and f.J~e
other what, both interrogative pronouns ?,

;Q: Write a sentence containing whose 1 ·

INTELLECTUAL AND

64

65.
l

Q. Write a sentence containing an article, adjective; and
noun, of the neuter gender ?
Q. Write one containing an article, an adjective in the
superlative degree, and a masculine agent 1
.
Q. Write a ·sentence containing an article, adjective, and
agent, also an object with an article, and an adjective agreeing with the object ?·
Q. Will you fill up the following sentences with suitable
words to make sense 1 An - - man. The - - man came
'--- m'3. A - - man. A - - man. A - - man. A
- - · mo.n. A - - son. A - - son. A - - son. A-child. A - - daughter. A - - grandson. I saw the bird
- - has flown. The man is come - - was absent. The
woman - - I love died. - - comes here 1 The boy _..::.:.
hat I stole , The fox ___,..,..... I shot was running. He is th.e
same man ,- -. I saw yesterday. He is the wisest man - i ever saw. I will give you --you wish. - - book will,
you have 1
Q. Will you now inform me how many parts of spee.ch
you have used in ,filling up these sentences ?
Q. Will you name them 1

does 1 ' The. man . walks·.~ .. -Which · is the 'noun iri this s~n ...
terice 1 ·
. "'
,:
.'· I

· .Q. What word tells what the man do~ · 1
. Q: 'Boys play.' Which . word here 't~ils wh~t· the n~un
does 1 ·
· Q.

··

MENTAL EXERCISES.

.,

c The candle burns.' What part of speech is., candle J 1
Q. What part of speech is the?
Q. The next wort! is burns. This you know is not an ~~- :
jective, can you tell me why it is not 1
i:,~
Q. Is it a pronoun ? Is it an article ?
~) : ·
Q ·. Hence we see that we cannot class it with an,y part pf ·
speech already explained ; but, if w.e can find several suc;h:
words we can form another class of words, can we not1 ~P~(
us try.
( 1'
Q.; ''I;J~~,\ c~1'~1~ . b,µpw.~ 1},._oes _~!Jr~•. t~ll, wJ1~t th~ cajl,

Q.

. .

. ·.

. ·,,

,'

·

'Th~ lions roar.'· Wh~t word. he~~ '.tells ~~~t· Iio·n~ do?

Q. Have we not already . found, fi!ev~ral worqs . that . have

, . " ·
'
the same general meaning 1
'. 'Q.. '~good man hates the w:ays ·ofvice.' . What word in
· this sentence tells what the nou11 ma1~ . do~s t :
·. Q. If we leave out this word, hates, \VilLit not de~troy the .
,· sense?
·

·. · Q. Well, then, since verb (from.the Latin verlnim, ·signi- .
,fylhg word) means . word, and as the words which tell what .
..' tire nouns do, are very impor.t ant ones,·wouldnot v,erbs be a
· good name for this ~lass of words 1
'
1 · 'Q. ' Industrious boys
learn.' ·What .. word here. ·shows ·
wliat boys do 1
· Q. Is then learn a verb or., nouh 1' '·
,1
'.
·: ,Q. If you were asked why learn is a verb, \vould you say
·because it is the name of something., or because it tells what
the noun does 1
.
· : ·· ·
'

•

I

!

.

·.\ ':Q. 'Pete~ struck a
LESSON XVII.

, .

dog.'

Which is the .verb

h~re, ~nl

"Yhy 1
1 Q. 'Thomas and. Rufus learn their lessons.?-.. How many
. ll.Quns ·are there in this sentence 1
• •. Q. Is there any pronoun ?
Which is the verb, and why 1
~(Q·. 'James struck Charles.; Which w.ord is . thfi · agcqt
liere, and which .is the obj ect 1 Which i.s the verb, and why?
. . ~~ If Charles is the object, is it not denoted by struck!
{- Q. ·'Peter hurts Thomas.? Which is ' the actor . or agent

here1

·

·

-

. ··

·
'Q: Which ,is the verb, and why l Which is the ~bject 1 .. .
Q, 'Peter ·makes.' Makes what 1 Does he not make
'

I

'

.

'

···i:

INTELLECTUAi} AN'o"

PRACTICAL GRA¥MAR. .

something ? ' Let us suppose lhat Peter makes a cart, is not ·

" . EXERCISES FOR THE SL.A TE OR'P APER: ; · \.

66'··

cart then the object of makes?
. Q. What then will you add for an object, when I say Peter makes
?
Q. Will you put an object after the verbs in the following ·
sentences as I read them over to you 1
'
'
'
·
'PeteF makes--.'
'Peter hurts--.'
'Peter loves--.'
:'.'.~.: '• . ..
'Peter writes - - . '
. ... . <til:.~. : . .
'Peter eats--.'
.
'Peter tears--.'
Q. · ; John :ca~1ght a fox.' Which wonl ie the agent, and
which the object in thi~ sentence?
·· Q. Which is the verb, and why 1 Does not caught sho\V '· ·
th.at' ~omethiiig was do;1e 1
You say that John is the actor, or agent, does not the _.
verb caught then, merely show that there was an action per.· '·
'

, , · Q. ~iii you write down an agent, verb, and :object 1 · wi~l
you write the same agent to six differel\t verbs and · · d'ffi
t b• t l W
.
'
SIX I
.
eren o ~ec s .
rite six different agents, and six different .
verbs, and the same object to each t Wiite
d'ffi·· · t
t
. l'ffi
\ 1 eren
agen s, six c 1 erent objects, but the same"verb to each l . ·
. Q: . Will you write d~wn an agent, .and a r11 vo~ite 'object,
and
·
. connect them by as many different ver.bs as you can
thmk
of,
and
then
tell
me
.how
many
verbs:
you·
ha
e·
·
d
?
.
.
.
.
, v .use .

six ·

"I

·

· . 1• . :

Q>

formed by John 1
.
.
Q. You say that fox is the obj ect of tho action: does not• .
then the action of John centre on the fox as its ' obj ect 1
,
Q. Is not this action carried on, to fox,by the verb. caught,"
or in other ''\4ords is not fox, the object, placed im1nediately ,
.

i.

'

; . i ,·

after caught 1
.
.·
Q. Since then the verb conveys or shows this !lction, '
would it not be proper to give the verb so111e name which will
indicate tl~is~ction 1
"~
·•Q>Active, you probably know, means the power of actin~ i
w6~id not ti1e term '· active, then, be . a good name for such
. ve~bs as carry on the action to ~me object 1
·•'f°
Q. C~n 'You now tell me what verbs you would call aCtivd 1
Q. ' Thomas cuts wood.' · Which is the agent here 1.il
0

Which the object?
Q. Which is the verb 1 Is it active or not, and why 1

61

.

. LESSON XVIII~

)· Q

MENTAL EXERCISES; ·

..
'

,' . · ·' John strikes Thomas :' .Well, if this is true, is it not
~qually true that Thomas is struck by John ? . .
,
• · Q. '. Cain kilJed Abel? Does this mean the sarne as ' to say
Abel was killed by Cain ? ·
- '
'

·~Q. 'John eats an apple.'.
means the same as this 1

What other form of expression
·
i, .

· Q. ' Harry foids a knife.'

What other form nf expression ·
·
. ·
·
· -'

meai1s the same as this 1

, ·Q.. 'William struck Harry.' What other form of exprcs~.'
.
'·
.

iiOn means the same 1 ·

;Q
·the verb in this. sent en~e
· . ·.
.. . . .Which is the agent and. which
.
U"1t now stanrls 1 Which is the object 1 .
· .
·
Q; If Harry is the object, does not lie .receive the action?"
· Q: 'William is struck by I{~rry.' . This means the sam~
II .H.arry stri~es William. Sin~e this i~ the .fact, does not .
W'illiam ~ece1 ve the action in both cases? . . · ,
"- ·.
.
·Q.. Do.not, the words, is struck, show that William receive~
e.action 1 .
·
.
·Q; Is s.truck'. shows that an action is received in the ~ne
, e as.well as· the· ·oth~r; ought is ·struck, .then, to be a verb
·
.. , .. , . ·
some other part of speech?
Q. · 'Willi.am beats Charles .'
after the verb 1

Is the object here before. or
·
'

68

PRACTICAL <?RAMMAll,

INTELLECTUAL AND

.69

Q. Would it then be reasonable to infer .that every !passive
verb may be made active 1
'
WI~~ killed Abel 1 What
1, .. Q. 'Abel was kill~d by Oain.'
verb 1
·
··
.
phrase
then
ineans
the
same
as
this
1
· ·
· .
·
Q. Is lhere not then a considerable difference between the
Q. 'Brutus slew Cresar.' What: other expressi~n '. inean~
•
.
verb, beat, and is beaten 1
, the .same as this l Is not was slain, then, passive v1~b 1
·. ' Q. If in the one case the object is before the verb, as ,
"' . Q. ~eUt~en, if I should give you a phrase fn whfoh there
' Charlesis beaten,' does is beaten carry onward the action to
1s an active verb, could you not make it passive'1
some object, that is, have an object after it,.like an act~ve ·
. Q. 'The girls learn their lesson.' Will you change this
verb, or does it 1p.erely show that Cl_1arles receives the action
form of ex;pression so as to make the verb passive, still retaindenoted by is beaten 1
.
ing
the same meaning 1
·
... _
Q. Would you then call is beaten, an active verb 1
Q. ' Cattle eat grass.' 'Buffaloes are caught for their
Q. Well, then, it is evident that we want another name,
'
·
skins.'
'Horses eat oats.' How many verbs are there ju
for have we not seen tha~ there are seve:ral verbs of this des- ·
these sentence~1 Which is ac~ive, and why? Which pas~ ­
1.:ription 1
. .
,
-,
ai've,
and why 1
Q. If, as we have seen, is beaten shows that an actom is
~ . , . Q. We have seen that every active verb may be made pasreceived, without an object after it, and since pa!lsive meahs
11ve, and the reverse. Is . not this a good test to determine
receiving, would you not call nll sttch verbs, that is, all
the active nature of verbs 1
which show that an action is received, passive 1
: ;' Q. Will you repeat this test or rule ?
Q. Such verbs are, it is true, properly called passive, arn~ jf •
·'. Q. 'James loves.' in this example . we have no object,
you were asked why, could you not, by remembering the ;·'.'
but cannot we suppose one 1 Let -us suppose William .! It
. .
meaning of the word passive, always give a reason 1
will '. then read thus: 'James loves. William.' What is. the
Q. Are verbs then called passive because they have an ob- 1:·
passive·of
loves; when, th\s ex,eressio_n \~ alt~red .so as to retain_
ject after them, or because they show that an action is re-.. .
Jhe
same
meaning?=
·
ceived 1
· , .; :.
-; Q. 'Mary mends - . ' 'William cuts-.' ' What ob-.
Q. Well, let me examine you a little. Do you .say in
Jects can you put after these verbs 1 What is the pas1i ve form
the phrase, 'William strikes Thmnas,' that_strikes is an llC~ i:,
of these words 1
.
tive, or passive verb, and why 1
AA~STl()NS ON THE ACTIVE AND" PASSIVE '
Q. •Thomas is struck by vVilliam,' would you
.~: '.
VER'BS '
.
"'
' ·:·
~'
.
strnck an active or ~assive verb, and why 1
'I
,
,
·Q. .What is the meaning of the word verb t '
Q. • Horses carry men.~ ·Which is the verb here 1
~ .. Is this term app°iie!f to particular words ! . . · · · .
1 1
active or passive, and why 1
Q. 'Men are carried ' by horses.' Is not the sense
~- How can you tell the 'Yor\fs to which this .term·applies1
~
Jll 1 y~u. give an example 1
'
·
· 1 •
this example the same as that o(_ the last 1
'
:·. ·
Q~" What is the meaning of the word active 1
Q. Which ill the verb 1 Is it active or passive? Why 1 ~ "
Q. Do we not see by these examples that every acUy_
• Q,. What is au active verb 1 Will you give an ~xample ?,·;
·"' ~" Does an active verb always hav~ the object after .it e,x~
verb may be made passive 1
·Q. • Charles is beaten by William.' This phrase means
the same as the ·other, but is the object after or before the

a

1

.

~dr

>

'I

t

\:
\>.

"'I,

70

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

JNTELLECTUAL·AND

Q. Is the object before or after a passive verb ?
Q. What clo~s an active verb denote 1
.
Q. What does a passive_''erb denote ? Will you give an

example?
. Q. Can evcr:y active verb be made passiYe ?

11

EXERCISES FOR THE SLATE OR PAPER,·

Q. Will you write down an agent, an active verb, and ,an

object1
.
.
Q. ·write the same meaning, by makin~ th~ verb pass~ve 11 .
Q. Write down six different agents, six different objects,
aad connect each by the same verb 1
.
.
Q. Will you now change each of these si?C verbs to pass1v~ .
ones, and not alter the sense ?
·1
Q. Will you write a different verb to six different
.
. '.
having the s~e object 1
Q. Will you write the same verbs in the passive, retammg .
•
the same meanmg
·?
. ilt
Q. Will you write down as many verbs as you can tlunk .
of with the same agents and the same objects 1
'Q. Will you write the same phrases, that is, such _as sh~V
mean the same things, with the verbs changed to passive 1 ·l ,

•'t

~

.....89e .. •·

·. ·I

LESSON XIX.
MENTAL EXERCISES.
l

Q. c John makes'. -. Does not John make something1
Q. Can you not think of a noun which you can put a~r
makes, for an object ?
r1 ;
Q. If a verb have an object after it, you know that it i~ called active, what kind of a verb then is makes 1
Q. 'John stoops.' Which is the agent here 1
the verb, and why 1
· ; .. .,
Q. 'Will you put an object after stoops 1
. 0
Q. You cannot; true, neither can I ask you, with any ~.to-

71

priety, what John stoops . . Is not ~he reaso~ of this because
·
stoops carries on no action to an obj Pct 1
.Q: If it did, would it not be. active 1
. .
.. Q. '.John smiles.' Which is the verb, and ~hy1 Which is .
t~e. actor or agent 1
\ ·
, Q. Can you put an object ~fter smiles 1 Can you make it
passive 1
~. Q. Certainly not, fo,r if John is the actor, does smiles mean
that John receives the action 1 Can he both perform and receive
the action at the same time 1
. .
,,
Q. Are smiles, stoops, and such verbs passive then? .
.
Q.
If
we
examine
our
l,~1guage
we
shall
find
a
considera11
bJc ,number of verbs of tlus description, that is, being heither
· active nor passive. Would it not be well then to have a name
"
. ··
i~ distinguish them from other v~rbs 1
_
Q.. Neuter, you recollect, means neither; since we have
f~,und ~ome verb!! that are neither active nor passive, what
would you call them 1
.·. ,Q. :Neuter is a good name. Let me nO\f ascertain whether you fully understand these different kinds of verbs .
"'James sits.' Can you say that James sits any thing1 Can
,
'
'
12,U then put an object after sits 1 .
;,
_ .
• Q. Is sits then an active or neuter verb, and why 1
'·
· Q. 'John hates.' Can you put an object after hates 1
b it then an active or neuter verb, and why 1-·
· .J~,. '.James runs.' Does James run anything? Has nu~s
any object 1 Can it have antl/1
Q:,..What kind of verb, then is it, and why 1 ·
1
. Q. '·William is loved.' Is loved, you know, being passive,
,,ijl,not admit an object aft~r it, any more than neuter verbs
do; but do neuter verbs show that an action is received 1
'
.
Q. Hence then, when a verb does not show that an action
~c;eived, as 'James sleeps,' and we cannot put an obj~ct
, r ,(t, . will it always be neuter?
.1
;
Q . ., John stan'<J.s.' Is stands active or neuter, and why 1
t1J~hn walks.' Is not John the actor, - an~ .can,
;walks,
t•.
'
~ on an action to any object 1

-

,.

,.:~----

72

INTELLECTUAL AND

Q. Does Hi mean anything more . than · that John 1s activ~~
in doing s.,mething 1
.
Q .. c John walks.'· 'Peter hops.' Some consider wal~s
and hops active .verbs ns much as any verbs are, but do they
. ~nean'. anytfihig more than that John and Peter are actors .1."1i ,
Q.' Wben I say, 'Thomas _
strikes William,' it is trtJe · t~~t .
Thomas is the actor, and strikes; cannot, strictly speaking,
4
be said to be another actor, but does it not differ from walks
and hops inasmuch as the action which Thomas ~oes, passest.
on and in some sense, may be said to carry on the . action ~to'.·
William for its object 1
Q. Hence you must be particular to distin guish
,
such verbs as carry on the action to an object, and such as
have agents, &c. but do not carry on the action. Now can 4
you tell me what the former are called? Also, what the la~t~f
are called 1
·
Q. 'Joseph killed a man.' Then a man is killed. Is the ve~bZ
is killed, active, passive, or neuter 1 Why 1
q
Q. How many words are there in the passive verb,
led 1
Q. Well then, to help you in distinguishin g a passive ve~~;
I will just remind you of what you must have noticed, that
a passive verb never has less than two words, and sometini6s
more. ·
Q . c The birds fly.' . 'The robins feed their young. ~. •·
c Worms crawl.' '\'Yhich are the neuter verbs in these seft•
tences 1 Why 1
Q. From the foregoing illustrations, how many difl,'ere' ,t
kinds of verbs do there appear to be 1 What are they 1 · ' '[;' ·
1
Q. c James is a good boy.' Which words .are the nou~s ~r
this sentence r What is their gender, number, and person 1
Why?
.
. . 1•
•

'

•

.

•

!

Q. Is there any article in the sentence? Is it defiriite '
1
indefinite, and why 1 To what does it belong and what [~
rule for it 1
.
. -'~ _jj~
Q. Is there not an adjective 1 Will you compare
it
f
.
. WJiu

.

..

. 1i,. .: ·· ...

__ , . L~, s~_ON - ~X . .. '. . . . . ..
';t\'IE,~TAL il'JXER,C ISES.

l"

i ., ... ·

:

9,_/~Vhen in repro'ving J~mes, I say·tO hi~-~ f You·da~:Jearn

~t~1,.~_hoose,:':, _ and he ·repl,ies, ,p .wj_IUearn,',do y 9l1 µ()t. ~ee

~.~im. ·learn,_~eall~ ~hat~J am.e~ h~s .the;~bllity ~?: 1ean:i: ~- ·.'."~:_ ·

•9!f>1~hert . he ;Sf!.JS~ ,'· I will -learn;'. does 9~ meatj,'. th~l ~11.~ ·has
i:f· -~P,.~1ty, qr~.do~s -~~ sim~ly declare his .lnt~ntiori : t& :learn 1
"',Jl-~'!..... 1·.
. .
7 ~ . '
}
' I . . . . ' ··.~ • ' ,
I ! :

"'

74

PRAC;'1:!CAL GRAMMAR.

INTELLECTUAL AND

Q. If then, -One form of the verb m~ans ability, and anoth~ . .
er intention, simply, is not the manner of stating actions ·dlf~f·

;:e~ •~µ_~cJ;;learn-niay._ o~ ~an have le~rn~d.---:-might, . c<;mHl would .
fr!~~!wuld have learnedJ· ..'. Do .these ;·phrases . ,declarn. facts ~ o;
:4e:~~te ability, pow,er, &c, 1 : .·:. · ·' , . , :

:•; \("'1h

ferent 1
Q. Well, now we want a name for this difference, and si~~~
~ode - .means manner.1 grammarians· have called this different,- ~­
m~nner of representi~g actions, by' the name of mode:. '
you ·now rep.e at to me what is called mode, and why it l\~

'.'Y_HV

called 1
.• '
.
• r .• 1
i Q. ' William does play.' ' Does William play 1' Doeg.·~~
first phrase merely state ' a fact 1
· ·
. • ·"' · .:.
(~. Is not the second the same as the first, exceptmg th~~.~ .',

· ·;

:-;r

In what mode the.n is it 1 .
.:
· ' ~'·' f
Q. ' William may or can leam:__might, could, sho~),~
''
1':, \ 't j
~'" : . ., ...,,

'

'

'

.

~. - .

'

.

l)·

, .

-

. '

·Qw?il.n ;ou tell me what mod~ th~y _.&re,-!?en,! a!J.f why 1

1

I

~~·~i~~_ohn goes

out; · and ,:William m:i~ . g~\o.ut,~ ~ rWhi?h
verbs here .1: Here are. two d~fft:lr~nt mode!i.- .
W~Jf~ is· the indicaH~e and which. i~ · the poh~1~tiaH Why 1·.: :,
. Q ,,i;~ :" ':illiam .is a good boy; and · ThomfiS . rµay · be. a good
~ ..;~so; . Which are the . verbs here·1 -, ·Whjlt mode.is <(ach
•nd why 1
\, ·. ' •,
·-,'·, ,' .,' (,1;. :, '' .• .\. .'. ·' ...) ' ·, l.'. ' 1~
'
- ,Q.i )f'lf.I. walk.' . Poes this declare posWvely , what r -'am
'

~~ .. a:r~ , the

1

. .•

,

do,

1

question is asked 1
·
"·1' . !4
Q. 'James learns, but Thomas will play.' Does this s~~ ~·
tence mean, that James and Thomas have merely the
to act, or does it declare simply the facts 1
.
Q. When a verb dedares, or shows positively, or asks.~
question, · grammarians call it the Indicative mode, . beca~9
indicative m,eans declaring, and mode _as you have s~~ .
is a name given for all the forms or manners of acting .. ·.Wilt:
you now, state to me when a verb is in the Indicative m.o~r
1and why 1
.
'
·' ' ( ' •·:1
Q. ' James walks-walked-has walked~lrnd walke ·
sh~ll walk-shall have walked.' Do not all thes~, expres~iQ.~
declare some fact 1 In what mode are the verbs m, then ~~·
Q. ' James may or can swim.' Does this df)clare the ,f~ct
that James does swim, or I.hat he has the pow,er or abili,ty~
swim 1 Is it in the Indicative mode th~n 1
"' Q.. As it means power or ability, do we not want a ' ~a. ·
denoting power or ability 1.
Q. Do you not know that the 'yord potential means :~~l
(from the latin w_o rd potens, signifying ~ble1)
· .· ' :
. Q. Now then would you say that may or can swimtlSJll:·.~
•
~
J. ',J
indicative or Potential mode ~
• ,,. , .
Q. 'James may learn.' Does this ,imply power or a~9!..

75'

.

"I'·,"

.

- -'.~:· :s i~ in the ~~dicati~e mode' ..th~n1:- ~.~~~:: j·~ _' i~~lY~;· t~-a~

~K~~ ~he ability to w~lk .1- Is it in the i;:otential iµqde th~n'. 1 ·

'P1

Does it not express a con.dition :o r dou~t, whether, I'
~)J, or shall not walk 1 . · , ,
· · ; , , · ·(, , ,._.: ·. . · ,
. :•~ Do we hqt then want a s1.iitable- name; for this . ~de1 .
. ~~1,N;~w supposing that.we take away 'if( froll!- the phr~se,

r#ng, it th~s,

I ;w alk, would there be apy ,doubt . or condi~
.. fexpressed 1 In what mode would it be then, .al}-d·. why.t ,
. Q,i~ Do we not s~e then, that the .poubt or qon_d~t,ion ~.de-. ·
1
ds,oh
if,- the word before I walk 'l . · · ·., · /i ..., .••.:,.,:'K -~- "·=_.:,,~.,.-:..~.,.'. • .' .'. .~• .;..
•r
l

•

.,

,·

. .

..

..

,

·~ ~W.eWthen,.since the·verb must, in genhrat b~: j~ined~;~;

~~. l:Jd,- ,to s.01:~e such. wor~s !1$, if, unless~ . &c.)hat imply,
. ~t;; an~ : ~mce . s~b~unctivc· (from . ,t he,~:Lntil\,i· ~ub : an.d ,

, ,pi') ~ignifies subJomed, would ,you then . say . that ' if I ·

'~i~ in, .thc;.~.ubju~cti.ve,. or P.Q~ential_ mode,1 . Why·1 ..· . ;~ ' .
·~ ~I ,,.~rite~If l write I.mig~t ?r c~uld · ~r!t;,e.':: . l;I~.i.:e
7

. ,,e e· different i~1ode~, w1~ you tell ~e m ~whal ·Ipi:>,de eaeh
J~> ·~nd : why1 . · .... : ; 1 . . '.· . .. · ·,, _.- ._-,, .,_ "'
\(

.

.

'

.

.

..

'

'

.

'

·"i;:rnles$ l1e ref?r,m. ·, He_-.!loes, ~ot r.e~m. : I;Je.ca~ t,e, ) jow, rµany'
;~d· w_hy

11

ver~~ are ,, th~~e here ;.,.1q· "'.h11-t .m~de . is
..
' . .. , , '.. '<I · ' /. ·', _, ;;·'~"'" .'...

'

J,

I

; ; -· .

~e~, ~ attend" to iyoor book.' . .' Is ~het;~ any : :doubt~.or ·

,, .,. P?~ed

l~ere, or i_s any · thin~ declared.positively'. ~ :·!;,, · ·

. · ·,~:lH you.. then nam~ the _- nH>des which ~the verp ·i'is.·,not ·
1

..

an
,. . r:10,,
'~
.

,

.

d th'
' .
.
. ereason wby it. is not-t .
I.

•

•

•

•

•

-

..

,

.. " · .

ir.;i .'·:'· ;··'·~·~' .,,·. ~: !t··"'· ~·r:.I;
f

'

...

. ;i ,. ,,.

·

.

·

11

INTELLECTUAL AND

16

1

Q. ·c James, attend to your book.' Is n~tJathes _co mni~~~~: .
ed to do some action 1 Does not the verb imply tlus · . . . .. , .
Q. Do we not want a name for this mo~e·,. as well as . ~he
r
• g" Let us take· some word that 1ngmfies command. ,.
1orego111
.
·
."
.
wiien· one says to youf .' That you are imperatively c.alle:d o~ ·.
fo do thus and so,' do1Js he mean that you are comman~~~
do thus and so,' or not'!
.. : '
Q: WeU then, sit\Ce imperative implies a · comman_d, :m>'·.
\vhat mode in the phrase, 'James, attend,' would you say '

!g..

that attend is, and why 1
.' ":
Q. c James, study your book'-' If James s.tudy'-' Jame~ . ,
can study'-'-' James studies.' Here are four d11fere~t mo~es,
will you point' out each one and tell' the re.ason of its. IHI.Ill~ 1. .
Q. c Mary, do study more.' Doe~ tlus ;phrase imply · "~.
. i"lity doubt &c. 1 Does it not imply that M~cy .
command , ab
,
,
.
.
. !;,q~
is entreated, or exhorted to study 1
.
,i. · •
Q. 'We might then call it the entreating or exhortmg mOde,:
but if we should give a name to every different form, or m~· .
her of ·action, we should multiply modes to a numbedess'.:e~; .
tent. Hence grammarians have classed all such verbs as ,&
..
used for coni.manding, exhorting, e11treating, &c. un.de~ :· ~h~
head of Imperative mode. Besides, verbs used for. comm~~d.J
ing are in more g_eneral use than those 'f ~r exhortmg a~~ .~!'
ltl
v.i ,
t reat .in g., will you therefore inform me m what mode :ver'
used for exhorting, entreating, &c. are, and why l , . '..:. .
· Q. , William, do study.' 'William, study.' 'Will';.
might study.'. Here are only two modes; ~ut .three_,v~r~'
can you tell which is in tr.~ potential and wb~ch m the/~~

ti~e mode, and why.?

1
•

"j ·'

Q; c John may write. John will write." Which a .,!
verbs in tl~ese sentences 1 In what modes ,are th~y ?' Wh •
· Q. 'He ' can study.' In what inode is this , ,p~:i;,~~~~ '

Why 1

'

' ,

, ·~~I t

Q. c It m~y rain.' Does this imply _ability, ~r;·pos~1~.
Q. t He would go.' Does th~s, imply , ability; ~i>.·~~,.h.'
· Q: ' ·He sho~ld mind his instructor.' · · Does ~lu~ ~tn~I1
itY,,; .or.oblig::i:ti9n, , that is,_what he 'oµg!'it t9.doJ. ·:· ·
c •

.:r\

I

·'. ·, ..

,

..

•

.·

I

'

,

f

. , ·

·

~

-..: . .Q . ., B:e mu.s t mind .his ~l}s~ructor.." D?es 'this imply obll. , f
1
\
. . · , , 1.
·""" ',~f cf~ ':(,~~ ~.,, t ~
f~• "·J' ;i.. :rJf ~ ~·-~ .
'\

. I }i~fi lOn '. .

. . "" '1"• · r··· ' ·. ,.

; , .

..

:.~r}~9:·., These l~stJi~e E1¥a~np~~~

.

.

are,· ~ti; ,cor~s~?er~d
~he. po~
· J e}'.lhal mode, not because that rriode or form of the" verb 'al,, ~~.~ denotes ability( or po~e~~~ :· put '_ b.~c~use"i(does 11iri"'many
~ " / Rfts, a1 the· ~ame indic~te~:·" · Wi~l)?tl. foforl\1 nieJh_~n,' 'i~
· what mode all verbs may be classed, that denote"pow.e r, .abil)ty; liber.ty, will~ or obligation, and.· why they may" be' so
1
\
'
.
·•
•
f
,,.
'
•'
.'· .
..
.
classed 1
.
' . · 1· :. · · ' ·' · ·
~·
) •.,: .
\
•,
· ,Q. In what mode is the phrase, '.l am~s ·learns 1' : '\Yhy 1 '
; _·Q. Is this-' Ja1n_ps has learnecr 1.(Why 1' Isd1i's~' James,
, ..,. ,.t /
:•J·. <lo •'improve your time'? . ..Why
? · Is' .. this_:_'
John, ~ sit still' 1
•
- ,
.
'
.• •
~ }Y!iy 1, Is this-' You ma! go out to play"1 ' W.hy1....:::.Is this.:.:_
'"He can improve'? Why r Is this_...< If he.' behave:· wcll'1
Why 1 Is this-;-' James, you ' should not do so and so''1
;·Wl}y:1 Is this-' Although I reprove·' hi~' 1 Why f Is this11d
'1
'
'
~·· \ Mary is a good girl'.1 Why ? Is this-' Mary 'can ' become
· ago.od girl' ?'Why? Is this...:....' He shOuld be esteerned'1 "Why1
. · .'·1;41Q. 'I expect to 'w rite.' . Here are two verbs : Which .are
(~~/f Why1 , .
, ,,. .,.. . . . ·1!: ..
'... "
'

1

J

.

I

,

in,

•

'

,

'

,

•'

•

.

'\

'

. :' .,Q. In what mode is the. firs~,· and 'vh.Y.1 Does, to · write,

~!1!P!Y c~mmanci,' ability~
ali~n: 1 ; r

,. '

doubt, coridition,

' .

; 1 or .po.siti:v~ deelar-

""' . . •":''" ,·'.,., ~-,•.

..

y:: .~ :!

! ...

.

Let us firid 'asuitable' name' for this '
·11!:~.de,_ ther_
e being.1na,ny _of this Class; as ta ·-~rite, to speak;· to
tfil ' k •& ,
~
1

Q:' True; it does not.

,·

\"i I

'

·~;·<~

'

'

<

)

C.

,

'

'

' .

'

I

,·

•

'

•

.

•-

.

.

·

,

I

'' ·

•

"

• ':·

j. '

.•

:· '

.

. (1_,
·Q. • ,When, lsay; 'James
writes,' dl>'we
not
knoWwhat'per·
'
•
•,
'
inn writes, and how· many 1 When I say,· to write; 'to ~peak,
I

c.:'can we tell by the verbs . themseives, ·who does ·the act~ or
,:
'
' j
,
:
, •
' , :
· ·
,
, '·
,
JQI; Well
then, do w~ n"·~t· ·see .that · tb write', . is -' not .affected
'
'
I
•
t 'Urnitea either as to·numoei· or person 1 Nowlor 'the name. ·
· :. y6u·not 'know that fin,it~, meanS 'llinited,' as 1 when' we say
'\'~•f• '
1
ow
many .

I

~

I

' G ..; . .

'

.

'

I

.

.

I

j,

•

. an,~s: ~· .fin~te b~ihg,' d~ we , me~~~. ~hat m~n . has . ~.o~~ple~s,,

'¥h~1~ed k~~~led~e: or Y~.rr Hriut~d kno~~'?.~,e /1 ; ~·~· Y.1 , , .

I

•. _W ell tJien, · smce in, put b~fore '·words~ as:··youlr have :
seen, m~a~,s not, iwh~t wil~ <infinite l~iean r; i:~:"

~·

a?,r

:/

'

,

'

I

I

. 7•

•

•·

,

'

''

·

., ,

' •; ,

"'

... . ). "

I'.,

.:i., .

1

*''

,:f"'"
·.(

:·1

7s·;

,;;~·

i,:i~
r1\
~,)
9, -tjt:

,ii-}

~~r
iii '
+·{·.

A'Nti '

: Q:~ Now si.~ce· infi11itive

.}:

,.(:~,

INi~i'r;~-(h}iJAI:

is derived from i~finite, ai1d -means'·~:
th.e same, grammarians have preferred infinitive to infinite, 'as ·~~
appU:ed to modes; when then such verbs as to write, to speak~'. ;
&c. are not limited 'by person and number, in ~hat mode ar~;:i
they said to be'! You are r/ght in giving this mode the name ,;f 1
Infinitive; , will you just tell me why such verbs have. th~s <
name 1 ' . r
- '
'
• ;
· Q. ' Susan ·begins to write.' Here are two verbs in diffe~,.·~.i.
ent modes. Will you . tell me which is the infinitive,'-and .
why 1 · In what mode is the other verb, and why.'
. ·. ~'
' . Q; 'vVilliam may learn to write.' How many verbs are ·
tl}.ere he:i;e, and in what mode is each 1..
· - ,~·
· · Q. 'John, do come to visit ni.e'.' Which of these
is in the imperative mode, and why 1
. ·Q. Which is in the infinitive, and \vhy 1.
"t'
Q. In what ,node is this phrase, '.! sing,' and why1 rr~
1
sing;' ·and why 1 'To have sung,' and · why 1 'Willia~, 'do_
. you sing' 1' Why 1 ' TJ1omas may or can sing,' Why '! ~ _~i
Q. ·From the foregoing, how many modes do there app
'to be, and wlui.t are their names 1
"
Q. 'James assists Charles.' ·Which is the verb here,, ,
why 1· What kind; and why? In what mode, and why? rt•
word is the agent or nominative, and why 1 'Which ~s th~ H~·
ject; and why 1 . What is the gender, number, and person/ .
both notins, and'why 1
'
· " ·i~
'. Q. ,'John sails.' What kind of verb is sails, and w~~~t
In what mode is it, and why 1 What part of speech is Jo.
'
'
i\
. and why 1 WP.at is the gender, number, and case, of Jo'.
·Q.. 'A diligent and attentive boy will inake great profiJi,
7
cy .in his studies.' Which is the verb in this sei1te~1ce i.
why 1 .In what mode is it, and _why 1
·
· Q. How many nouns are there 1 What is their geii;
'
'· ~
number,· and person 1 Why 1 In ~hatcase is boy, and w.
h ~ro~ciency; and why 1 Are t~ere a?y adjecti~~s
Will you compare them 1 What 1s their degree, and t
To what do they belong, and what is .the rule ·1 . .' 'i~ ~ ..
. Q. Which is th.e article 1 Of what kind is it, and 1\rh~'.~
what does the article belong, and 'by what rule 1 '

,

'

~;}'.'.;t,:·.

'!!~4.;
m'."

'.~~h

'~;~{¥)
'f1~~'

\

..,

'.

• •

•

'

ti

t

/t
~

•

•\

..

,,_·· •

:i'::~~~~ 1 or ,' ~qssessive <i!1Se~ ~n,d . \vh~ ·t

, l \...

. '

0

W,hat i.s. t~?i. ~-1)~,{o~ :. the .
.· . ,.

.

~· -J\~¥se.s~ive case of nou~.s ·~. ~;v;·w~~t i_~; hi,, ~-o.~~~?if~~~;1 ?r:
rn~a,t rule 1 ~

.

'

..

' ' .. '

' : · ~.

;'

~;'

.. . -+' '.

'' :

~ .w,esay, 'T"',._e~an_. \V. h:?.! '. ?1'··.,, th.~n.10fl . '~'l\<;
' . h'
: '.~:Q
. . -T'
· ~· -~-'~..~d
.'f~h.Y l ' The man whom/ or .' tpe ~an w?'i~h/ and .wfiy 1. ·. .'
t~j~·.Q. ' The man whom I saw ~~ di:own~d.' - Is· there ·a. relative ··

•)(•,f;

I

•

Wli

"'"I

PRACTiCAL. GrtAMMAR.
19
·~l t~'.. ,' ~· ;'
,, · - ·' ~..I
, · ··~
1,.,..
.
,. · .
.'
,~~.: ;.1~:1·,~. n~~· Which
is
the · pronoun;
and' w.h y 1. -ls'it im""e
·
' .
.
.:
., , .
\~ .,....& -~·iiomina...
.

1

':! / '

' 'f '

•{

,

~f~ ~p{opotm in ,this sentence 1 ' , ·~ · · ./ ,. . . . .
·' .
t·.
t
:;,;
Q;
What
docs
it
stand
for
1
What
the1i
is.
its
gender,
num.,
,',:'~
j
,
: .' !
'
'"\~er,
and person 1 With wha~ do~s .it agr~e, a~1? .w~at is the 1
fi~, l'llle for the pronoun 1
. , 1 · ~~ • , • ( • , ' · ; ~ I
j,; ..; Q. llow many verbs are there and which are they 1 · Are
·:. :'.th~y active, passive; or neuter,' an.cl why 1 In what .mode arc
, 11, t\1;3J, an~l why 1
. .
, _.

I '

•

I,

'

'

I•

,

•

.

o

.

,•

t (

.

b, 4

,

( •\

·~:/
QUESTIONS ON ' TlIE MODES. '
IQ.. What is'the meaning of the. mbde'·g-·enerally imply 1

' word mode 1
• Q, What does jmperat~ve
• What does mode .mean as
mean ?
·
1
.,applied to .-verbs. 1_: · .·
Q. 'What d~es the 'imper!ltive
r9.' What . does indkative · . mode imply 1: ·
. .
~ir · mean 1
· Q. ·Why are verbs .denotmg
, ;-1.Q,1 Will yo\1 give an exainple1
entreaty, classed with those
, '.Q, What .does the word poimp1ying commai1d 1' ' . .
!:' tential mean 1
· · ·
Q. V\Thy are \crbs denotir1g
tl~"' What does the ; potential ' liberty, will, obligation, &c.
~~-· mode imply 1
. ' classed with those Jhat de.; Will you give an examplel _ note ability, or-power ? ·
.' . What does subjunctive Q. What does infinitive mean?
· mean 1
·
Q. When is a verb said to. be
r. What does the subjuncin th~ infinitive molle l '
•tive mode imply?,
, Q. Will you g,ive an exaf(lple1
• .Will you give.anexample1, · Q. Howrnany mod<:sdothere
:· What do the words befor'e · appear to be 1 · ·- ·. "
'th.e verb in the subjm\ctive ; · Q. Will you name. U;iemJ
1

1

:R

.

,

.

•

I

.

,

•

I

.

i.~'EX:EUCl~ES FOR~Tlfl~ ~~:ATE · ~Hl: ~AP~R1~

:,

_Q. \yil~ r,ou write down a ~lu;ase . in tl~.e ip~icati"'.~.' 05'de 1

Qne,~,iti. tlie .s~bj\m~tive mo~e 1 One, in· th~ pot~1~·t~ai f ' Oi1e,
t the i'nfiniti; e 1_One, ha vink both aii. ilulicatfv~ :iii'<l 1nfiAitive

'J~~ 1 :· on~~ -l1&ying . ~oth ' a.. p~t~~~i?.1' ~·tj~Jw~;1i.~~£e.t~;o~e,'
a.Ying both ·a subjunctive and infinitive 1· Q~e~' haying twe
·-~"
~
•

I

.

-:

J ,_

•

INTELLECTUAL AND

80

,

· · the nominative and one in the objective case, \v,ith :. .
nouns m
' ·
. ·
· h"·
1 Oil.e having an agent, an active verb m t e
.
·e
verb
t
. an ac iv
·
'
.
. .
-1 ~ ,
potential mode, an alljecti~e in the superlativ~ degree, and.':~
the same meanmg as the
neu t er ObJ'ect 1· 011e. , ]1aving
'
. · .last,
" ,.
't} tl e verb di'anO'ed to the passive voice 1 One, havmg two .
.WI l
l ,
1"
, '· ii
· ersonal pronotins 1 Four phrases having a different telabv~, • ·
pOne, having whose, in it 1 Five phrases· 111
. "\uc
l . l l wI10 ~n
. ·"d.
· 1 may be used ' but that ' more elegantly . One, 1havmg
.
w luc.1,
· · _,, ._ .
your given name correctly joined with the word book . One,
having your whole name joined to the same word 1 One, ha~~ ·,.. .·
'
ing the article, a1,1, b e f.ore a noun 1.

P~ACTICALi

.

~!'

GRAMiult.

?hQ, :'Jarn~s wrote_:.has\vri_tteh~had :~jitt~~.t '. ·n~ not ~ti'

··Ah,ese
phrases denote actions d6h'e; .So)Il~ )ime· ag1· o ~that'· it p' ~;t.
l1 1
.
'.
' ,,. '
' . . ; ' ""'
·""·,~ei l?M ·Which then,"'~an':.H~ef· pr?P~·~ly '~e.:e1ill~dj'1 ~r~s~~t1or
past tenses 1 ) .,
· ' '" ·. , !<~. :h ·:H t:· ..... .r· •\ , •, ''~'.; i)''·.Ith.
t(·;1;.,o'{.,1t"
I :- .
,. • ·
.•
1

•

• ·.

'('

~· ~·~> :~ Ja1nes .wrote yesterday~ ·,' and ·~~l'.Y wrjt~s •. t6·~~ay~'~

_, Here are two tenses; which)erb'.js"of 'the pres~\).farld\\lhilh·
i
'(
.,
;.H· .v.i. (f.' · ~:·~
'
•
,
",
'
• •\ I
.
.. ·\:Q~ _'!'shall write-shall h~vt:i"wriHen': ' Do not tlie. .a~lions'of
1. tlOth th~se verbs' i·efet tO inn~ heteaft~r~ that' i~;- fui~re tini~'1 ·
. ~ ~oul,you then say t~at .t hese ve.rbs are,?f tl~e pr.~se1~t o~' fu·. tttrc tense-1 '
'
· ,,,.
. 1f '-, :'~· .. .., !': ,1 ,.,. . .1 •
.i

· 'oflhe past tenile,'and· '*hf1 ·'·ed~1 ~ ~· .

I•

' .•. ,_ .:Q, ., John plays-playeCI-has ·p]ayed_:_had· :played-shall
. : p1ay..:.:..-s~all have played.; Here are three tenses."··~ ·'Wniclf is

LESSON XXI.
ME ~'lT AL

Q.

EXERCISES.
..
1ay. '
'Mary writes to-day, but Susan wrote yesten

Mary and Susan both write at the same time 1
,
Q. The verbs, you kn?w, ar~ writes and wrote; d~ not
these verbs then sh.ow that actions'may be performed at d1ff~f~
.
.':~:·
· ent times 1
.
Q. 'James read yesterday, but Mary · will read to-mor ~
row.' Which are the verbs here 1 Do .James and Mary .b0th
read at the same time 1 Is there not then here also, a d1~E1.t~
ence of time, in which actions are performe<l 1
Q . WelJ, then, it may be convellieht to have a
this difference, may it not 1
.
.
••
1
·Q. Since the word Tense means time, would it not be.•
goo<l general name to denote the different times it1 w~ich ~¢
'tions are performed 1
Q. The name is good' for a general name, it is true, b.~
we shall probably find that it ·. will admit of several divisions;
• John.·,~rites now ' is .writing now.' Does not this mean .tha ,
John at the prese1~t time is writing T t
Q. 'W ell, then, when an· action is passing now;
sent time,' shall we not call it'the present tense 1
. , Q. Will you repeat th~ rea~on why W~ crul this
~nt tense 1
·
1

I

' the present, which are the · past, 'vhich are the· future 1 ~~ ... '.
;;; ;,..- Q. From the foregoipg examples,' how ' many grand divi:.' sions of time do there appear to be, 'aiid what. are they 1 •
. ·)Q." You are right, them . a~e but' three, properly speaking,
f~r eve,ry action must be dOA.e eith.e r in the present·, · past,. o.r.
t ftiture time-; . but when I say, · 'James ·' wrote well yesterday,
.. r~as -·~fitt~n . well to day,, had '.'wri~ten we,lL some time ago/
does there not appear t<r be· son,1e difference ·in tlie· tiine· of
perfc>rming the past 0.ctionsT ·
· · · 1 • - ~·, ;~: - \'· , . , .' .
·~ri Q: -Well, then, be. accur:tte; \ve mullt'n~tice thls ~hade .o f

to

:~1iterence,'niust'wenot1 · .

V\

·

1··

' " •.

:'

, , . . . . .:l\

/, ~· "James wrote,. ' · Is this in present ~I' past time 1'as
I f}
-~~iterday~ last inonth, or last year1 ·
'
. ' · ;, :
,' ~ Q.' i 'Jam¢s was writing when! saw him.' ·Do~sthis iliean
·1~tP~.~n'ie's ~ad or i~ad .no.t,.'do1ie '~rit~il~ ~~~h·T s_aw h~~ 1'.
. '· Q. Does 1t then md1cale ah action unfimshed and mcom.~l~i~~"bi: 'o'ne ·finis~ed antf.c~niplete 1 . :~ · , " .. "..:. : · · ~ ·
- /cf:;N"ow sin~e irriperfect means not ·perf~ct, . bt,it' incomgr'airiinari~i1s' have ic~assed. a~l ~uch actions as tak~ place
in t~nie indefinite,
with thtm{ which .r~ina,in unfinished or in:.
1
. ,~ ·pl~t~,~ iii"a clittaiit ;~asf tense; ·ahd give1i ti6otl~'.i1~J ~nhlnlJ
f 1§{~~~fecf; ~~·· 'name · ~9·'ymrhav~ s~en; pecuH~r\~tily;. to~:·:~he
ler:" Will ybu 'n6w; i~ ordehhat you !'may .not,1fqr get, ·tea

Does it however spedfy ahy p·articular perfoil ·of p·a.st time
I

'

.

.

.

.

'

.

'

,, y0·;

f

J11 '.;,..
'"-r.

f}
':> h
•. o.:

~ II. l

.

'1

'

~

'

...'

82

·~ .

PRACT1CAL . ~IlAMMAlt.

INTELLECTUAi, AND ·

liie in what tense such ·actions are, as take place in time p~st
indeflnite, as 'I walked, I slept 1'
· ,.;,;iitl;"
-~ Q. ·In what tense are those which remain unfinished or ih', ~. ,
complete, in a definite tim~ past, as 'James was reading 1 - . ~~~·
. Q. \-Vill you put both of these illustrations together, an~f
tell me when actions are said to be in the imperfect tenseJ..,r ·
' ·Q.' ~Jam es labors now, ai~d labored some ti~e ago, yeste~ ~.
day, p~rhaps. ~ Here are two verbs and two different tens~11.~·}
Which i~ the present, and why1 Which is the imperfect, .an~;
why 1 ·
· ' ·1. '~
Q. 'John' sails-was sailing.' Which is the present, a11~ . .
.
which the· imperfect tense, and why 1
. Q. There is an easy way of distinguishing these two tensa.~ l ·
If you can put the word now, after the verb, without destroyr,,~ 1
ing the sense j it is the present tense ; if yesterday, it is the 1 ,
imperfect; thus',. ' I swim,' is present tense; for I can s.ay,;:,
'I swim now.' 'I swam,'-this is imperfect, for' I swam •
ye~terday' makes good sense. Will you remember this 1 ·; ~..~t
Q ~ Will you tell . me then what tense, " I run,' is in,l~
'I jump 1' 'I hopped 1' 'I fought 1'
Q .. ' Peter ciphered yesterday and has ciphered
Are not both the acts of ciphering in past t\me 1
.Q. Which refers most nearly to the present time~ ~· , ,. .
Q.: Does has ciphered, mean that Peter had or had n,~t!· ·
dope ~iphering 1,,
· ,"l!'
Q .• . If the action is finished, without reference to any P~r ·.
ticular time, you know that it is called the imperfect ten~.i ·
·do you not 1 :
·
Q. Has ciphered, then, cannot properly be called th~ ~i;n
pertect tense, for it refers to .time present, does it not 1 "' .\ .
, Q. Well, then, ·since has ciphered; denotes an actio1:i. «. ·
past and complete, .with reference to present time, and si~c
perfect me11;ns complete, would you say that .has ciphered!t ' "
jn th~ imperfect, or perfect tense 1
'
.Q. I ( I should ask you why has ciphere~ 1 .is in .t he ,perf(
tense, ,would you say . because it not only refers . to .':"l~Q.f1 t
past, , but also to present tim~, or · ,because it denotes.•t?,
time indefinite 1

83

"
··r .~ 'l eat_._a.te~hav~ .. eat~m~. · e:.Her~ ' · ar~ . three ,,dilfere~t
~p~es. : ·What .are they, · and ·-w;hyr are 1they. -~q 7111,,ed :V li ;,. ,,

·.

1

, ff;Q.•;·H .ave "you not ·' notice(l·Lthat · have•\ atid· h.as,& are ~ the
•J.~s ·o f the · perfect ten'se ~ J 9us,,: .'·I 1 .h ave• lea~n~d, ~ ~, ~¢ ha~
l { !
, .... ed , )' .& c. - . . ... _,·. .
_,\ 1· ...i,! ~\. j;r' , .£1 .,.,l
, ·1 ,.1,~ -· ,~\:-~.! .u J . ·"~ ~ 1 \
IA.~llt't'.1
I

.,, '

1 1, i,• ·

••

I

•

'

,

.

" '

'

'

I

,

,_;

• ._,. ..

,'{~t: :.~ l. .. write-~r6t~ha~~·1 ,:~ritt~n: ;:. ' lttfw~ I te~~~)..is

~~h''of these ·phrases, ·~nd 'why1 ' 1· · 'f:: , "', ... . '~ ~ 1 ~; ' . • "., .: '
·.:9.•· 'Jai:nes ·Ioved.:.i fa. ~hai't~111>e' ~s ·lovEid t "Whyt·· . . ,, .·
· '-J.Q~ "'·'Peter ·wept.' ' 'In ;What .tense ,is the/ Verb · in this . ~en~
~p.¢e 1. · Why, f
.
' .. , ··· · : > :. '" ": · \_ ,., ·:.:~ .

-jQ;1 '· P.eter has wept.' ·. Wha.t.t~hse' is· .this«1 :·Why"! ' .· :·
· · Q. ·'. '.rlhe thief had escaped before ,th~y :missed their goods'~'{ .
. ·'iiQ~ A'- there not" here·two ads, both' done ,ih. pas.t tihle H. - ·

.':Q. Which was dorie first 1 Is not missed in the:in:lperfoct · ·
/
tetlse'l . · , · ·
;>·A:'' ··.
f.

..

•

•.

·;

/~l. Well, then; 'is · not hacl ·escaped, u's ed in , reference·' to /
~~·t :'time; ·or the · in1 perfect ten~e ! ., .·· · , , · ,. ' ' ··· ·
r· Q. Is the perfect tense used in :reference to past time or
pt, sent time1
· ·
, ·
·• .·"· · - '
Weli, if .the perfect is" used in. refetenbe ·to present
~.~ I· ~hd had ' escaped ·refers to past time; · or I'the ill:ip~rfect
nae, does not had escaped then refet to ati'aclioff more
. ~te. than ' th~ perfect? ·. ·. · ;. ~ : :.. •: :·; ." ' "\'~'.,1..:,:, ~il'.:~f ·: f.'
. A:ir. Since pluperfect, (from ' the. Latin pltls, more; and
rfect'l,is, . perfect,) signifies m~re than ' the perfect, " \vl!a:t ~:
.d you call that tense which denotes past-time 'before
ther past time 1 ,
· " .. .
" · · · . .! ,
· "1 Pluperfect is a very proper name. .·If I should ask you . ! • ·
· )'.~U'. call ~had ·loved,.' 'had written, &c. '· .the· plUpett'ect• ·
·e,,,:would you say because lit denqte8 · p~st '·time b~for'3 ' ·
past time, or simply becatls,e u ·,dertotes past time :1 · ~ '
~ ii:,~Sophia had left before John came." : How ·many verbs .' .

,·R·

I

'er.

'·

~.i~ · herer·
~

•.

.

·'·

·f- .
I

.: ~ ·

1

.

';. : .d:., ; .-·~ . ( ": ·~r, :j 1i ~~1~~ 1.. '·

.

. .

I

•• •

•. ~ne ve.rb is in the 1 plu~e~fec:t;~ an~ the; .other is· rin·i?e ·, !
A.h 1can you .tell which 1is the 'o.ner which the ·othert · ..~'' .
. ~qf·yoµ noi::i1ee that .had is the. sigrt · of; .th~· pJµpe'r~e~tN, ~;·.· ,
, ~~bcri~zer play!i~played~has :• played~had:,•pl~te~~~; ,:'~ " ·
'

..i ·

.

;i

.

'

.

.

t'~ ? t ~l ~·l ~ ~~. ,..\~:.~

.

'

84

INT.ELLECTUAL AND

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

)

Here are four verbs, and four different tenses; will you IW~~t 1
' out tb ,me each tense, and tell tne ·Why 'it is .SO' ~alled 1 ·~·'.1~ t "
>·Q. 'J~hn will come.' Does this · refer to an acti~n tb~t ~8 ,
'"past; or to come hereafter, that is, in some_.future time:? '~ 1~ · '
Q. Future signifies something that is to come; w1ll!.n~~ ·
·::: -.~ -,,
future then · be a good name .for this term ? ·
. Q. 'Wha~ tense then
you say the 'verb, is in, 'V~k~·the act is to take place hereafter 1
:::· · '
·• Q. If you were .asked why, would you not say, b~~l'\¥. , ' future means time to come 1
: .t \
Q. In what tense is,' James had come,' and why? Is' S.~; ;
sanwill learn,' and why1 Is 'Mary shall come,' and why.t .
Q. Do you not perceive that shall and wiil arc the signs
of the future tense 1
Q. In what tense is this, 'The be,nch is made 1' Is .,tM1_.
' The bench was made 1' Is this, ' The man shall give 1' Whyt,,
Q. 'I, shall have learned my lesson before the teache
comes.' Does this mean that I have already learned my1le
'
"'
son, or that
the teacher has already come 1
' :,. · ''
:Q. Is either action then,: in past time 1
· · i:.:..«
. Q. Does it mean that the lesson is now learned, or th&\ !b,t
teacher is now come ? .
Q. Is either action properly •peaking then ~n the
tenser '
. . Q. Does it mean .that I shall learn tny lesson, and tha~~.
teacher is to come hereafter 1 ·
.
· ·, r~
·. - Q. Does it not also mean, that the act of learning th{
son, i~ to precede the time of the teachei;'s coming 1 .
Q. Does not, shall .have learned, also specify whe~·~9,r..
fore ·what time, the act is to happen 1.
.
· . · ·· ·, ·
Q . . Since, this fo1·m of expression, shall have learµ.¢ .
. sides denoting future ti1ne, specifies a time eertai11,: and· .. .
. l,iave already had one future .tense, would you ~all,thi~f '
a future or a second future tense 1
' ' ; ,\:; ~
: Q. ;Do you ,not notice' 't hat shall have or will ·have:.: .~,
. the: sign oj this· tense 1
. .· 1
. ~ ', .,,i ,,,i
rQ~ ' In what t,ense is th1spiu:a~e; ~James ·writes'1'\:

will

r

85

;this-' James sung' 1 Why? Is th~s-' William has laughed'l
.'Why 1 Is this-' Birds will sing' 1 Why 1 Is this-' The man
. ~twill have been hung' 1 Why 1· Is this_:_' The sun ·will rise' 1
Why 1 Is this-' Tije sun will have risen' 1 Why 1 Is this·' I have conie'1 ls this-'I had wept'1 Why1 Istli,is-'ThoJ)l' · as was singing'? Is this-' The dog has harked' 1 I~ this-'-' He
_ ·::may or can learn now' 1 Is this-' Ile vrn11ld sturly in spite of
· ·: me' 1 Is this-' If I have learned' ? Is this-' If I learned' 1
.~ As this-' I do learn now'? ls this-' Doi learn now?' Is
this-' I will learn' 1 Is this-' Will I learn' 1 Is this-' They
. have learned' 1 Is this-:' Have they learned' 1 Is this-' She
· did learn' 1 Is this-' Did she learn' 1 ·
' ··
QUESTIONS ON THE TENSES.
'··Q. What is' the meaning of the

Q. Will you give an example1
word tense 1
Q. What is the sign of this
tense 1
·
Q. How many grand divisions
of time arc there 1
Q. \Vhat uocs the pl uperfect
denote 1
Q. What ar~hey?
. ~ Q. Will you give an exam- Q. Why called pluperfect 1
, ple of each ?
Q. Will you give. an example 1
·
·
Q,. What are the more accu·rate· divisions of time~
· Q. What is the sign of this
tense?
, •
• Q. How many are there ?
: Q. . .What is the meaning of Q. '\Vhat does the first future
denote 1
,. .
present time ?
Q. How may the present Q . Why called future 1
,; tense be distinguished 1
Q. Will you give an example 1
Q. What does the imperfect
Q. What iB .the sign of this
.., tense denote 1
·., Why 'is it called impertense ?
Q. What does the second fu' fect 1
ture denote ?
~' How may it be distinQ. Why called second . fu' guished 1
ture 1
. Will ,you give an examQ. Will you_ give an example ?
Q.• What does the perfect
ple '!
··
Q. What is the . sign of this
tense de.note 1
Q: 'Why is it called perfect 1
tense 1
'
. , Ex;E:f;tCISES FPR i1HE SLATE O.R PAPER.

-

· ·. Q; Will you write down a phrase having a verb in the pres-

ttense? . One, having a verb jn the imperfect 1 .. Qne, hav-

8

'

'"

/

86

IN'tELLECTUAL AN·D

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

ing a verb in the perfect tense 1 One, having an agent,- an /
active verb in the perfect tense, and an objed after it? One, ..
having a verb in the pluperfect tense 1 One, having an agent, q
a neuter verb in the potential mode, and present tense 1 .One, '
having a pronoun of the first person singular, in the nomin11:- '.',
tive case, also a verb in the indicative mode, present tens~, · '
having an object after it? One, having a pronoun of the first ~.:
person plural, nominative case, and a verb in the future indic.: ,
ative, an article, an at\jective in the superlative degree, and a .'
neuter object 1 Write one, having the subjunctive mode, fu-''
ture tense 1 One, containing an article, an adjective, and an
active verb in the indicative mode, present tense, and a mas•:
culine object 1
·-

1

LESSON XXII.

87

,_tr .~: Q. What does fo agree with, and what'is the rule 1 ·

i; Q.

What or whom, d0es William' strike 1
. ,.: Q. What then is the object of strikes 1
· , : Q .. True, him is the object, or objeCtive case, and we
, . kno';" that, simply by declining he. · Will you decline he 1
v_Q. Well, then, since him is the object of the a~tion deno-'
.,,... t;d by gives, is it a fact that active verbs <lo have an objeetive case; or that they <lo not 1·
.l Q. Active verbs then n'm st have an object; would it not be
; ,natural, therefore, to lay down, as a rule, that 'active verbs
.
; must have an objective case 1 ·
. -_· ·q ; Hence if I should ask you what word hini, in the objective case is governed by~ in the phrase, 'William strikes
. ~,h,im,~ what would you say, and what rule would you give 1
·. , . Q. I will now, for the sake of convenient reference, state
, the rule, and will you repeat it 1
RULE VI.

MENTAL EXERCISES.

Q. 'The sun gives light.' Is there an article here 1
definite or indefinite 1 Why 1 To what does it belong, and \by •
what rule 1
· --~~
Q. There are two nouns in the sentence, which are they•t '{
Why are they nouns 1 ·what is their gender, and why 1 Num; ""
ber, and why ? Person, and why 1
- Q. Which is the agent or nominative 1
Q. What docs the sun give 1 What is the object then 1 In·
what case is light then 1
""
· Q. Which is the verb aml why 1
the object 1
Q.' Is the verb active, passive, or neuted Why 1 Does'i,
simply indicate or declare 1 In what mode is it then ?
Q. Can we say that, 'The sun gives light now 1' In wha t

.

0

tense then is it?
Q. ' William strikes him.' Here are three different paitl
of speech, will you tell me what they are 1
· · -..J{i.
Q. Why is him, a personal pronoun 1 What is its ge~1~ -~
number, and person 1 Why 1

~:. The objective case is go,ver_ned by activ~ verbs.
·, Q. Well, then, since .we have this rule to 'guide us in detenn~ning the object of the verb, would you say, 'I love he,'
9f·..h1m 1 ,W hy 1 'I love them,' or they 1 Why l .' Willi~m.
a assists she,' or her? Why1 'The man who,.' or whom I
. or 'may. love him' 1
l_aw.."'WI
.
1y.~ ' Ch arles may love he,'
, hy 1 ' He honors thou,' or thee 1 Why 1 ' He. commends
y~e/,or us? .Why 1 'He will surpass yours,' or you 1 _W hy 1

.
. ·
.
XJiomas will marry her,' or she1' Why 1
.Q. What is the object, and the rule for it in thi~ .p hrase
~qhn loves me 1' In this, 'Charles follows Thomas1' In 't his'
~illiam calls Charles 1 In this, ' They perse~ut~d u~ 1'
. ~ s, :' _A m~rc~ant had passed the street door 1' In tl:iis, 'Wil. ,., may admire Mary 1 ~ In this, . ' He praised himself1 ~ In
, ,'They neglected him1' In this 'They could have regard·
it
1' Iri this, ' Israel loved J osepi1 1'
'
.
. ._ .
1
· ·~i" · ' l.rec~ived my books.' Which are the,pronouns h~r'31
cp., .1s the .verb ? I~ it active, passive, or 1 q~ute~l WI,y 1-

I;

"88

PR'.A'CTICAL GRAM~AIL

INTELLECTUAL AND

What is its mode and tense 1 Which is the noun 1 WJ;iat did.
I receive 1 In what case is books, then 1 By what is it gov~
crncd, and what is the rule 1
Q. 'She despised reproof.' How many parts of speec~
are there here, and what are they ? What did she despise?:
In what case. then is reproof, what is it governed by, and by 1
what rule ?
. 'l
Q. 'They deceived themselves.' Whom or what did they ':
deceive 1 In what case then is themselves? By what is it
governed, and by what rule 1
Q. 'An industrious man will obtain a livelihood.'
is the rule for an ? For industrious 1 For a 1 For liveli- ·
hoo d ?

Q. ' Susan's brother will visit me.'
Susan's 1 For me 1

What is

LESSON XXIII.
l\IENT AL EXERCISES.

Q. 'William found James playing, laughing; jumping, and
hopping.' Whom or what did William find? Is found then .~
active or neuter verb?
Q. Are there not several other words in the sentence denot·
ing actions 1 What are they 1 Some of these words describ
James. Will you t~ll me whether it is the word found; thll
describes James, or the words playing, laughing, jum~t~L
and hopping 1
,
Q. 'I found ThomllS catching fish.' Which word d
scribes, here 1
Q. But does not the word catching also denote action ? •
Q. Well, then, if it describes, like an· adjective, and al
denotes action like a verb, can it be classed, properly,, .Y¥.' . ·
' I' .
. l . 1. .
' "
ether
·
.
" · :,
Q . Hence we sec that we shall want a name for t~
words l . and
others
of a similar character. We have seen . ..
.

th~f are partly" like lldjectives, and "partly · like verbs, and
1inc~ P,a rticiple, (~roin ·the Latin word particeps,) signifies
partaking of, \Vould not this be a good name for these and .
o~er words, which partake .of the nature of the verb and ad·
·
'\
je-cttve 1

·" 'Q. 'f saw Mary weeping.' Which .word describes here1
h ,not weeping the participle then 1

<r

'~ames is running and crying for help.' Which are
. the partiCiples here, and why 1 Do they denote something doJng now! In what tense then, ar~ they ?
·'
>ff~Q. Have you not 11ioticed that this present participle ends
i~ · ING, as hating, loving, &c.1
:.. : Q. D o you not pcrcciYC also th at it is forme d from a Ycrl>,·
_· thus, from hate , comc:o hating, loYc, 101-ing, &c.1
~< Q ... "'rill you form ' a present participle from see .1 From
·worship 1 From sit 1 From think 1
(!. 'j acob worshipped, leaning on his staff.' Here are.
o.phrases, Jacob worshipped, and ' leaning on his staff; but
'irbicl~ describes Jacob, 01: rather .his condition at tl~e time 1
·Q:· Hence not only single pa:rticiples, but the whole phrase
~~(ch ,the participle inakes a part, de~cripes, d~es it n~t1
. : ' :T~e cnmet seen in 1823,
return ' agai~.' Will te·;.' you know, is the verb, but which word is the participle
-he describing phrase, seen in 1823 1 Is it not the word
'f Q
I
'
en 1
,
-- ·-·
,, ·

·will

··'.4

I

• Q~.: Can you tell me whether the worcrseen denotes an

a(:~

past and finished, or one not past and finished 1 .
.
· ·. If then ·it denotes an action finished and 'complete, in
I •
'
.
.
·past .time up to the present, thereby resembling the per;. te,,ese of verbs, will you ~ay that seen, is a preseJ?.t. orperpartrciple 1 ·
·
. ·
·
. ·
Admired and applauded he became 'v ain.' Which ·
are the ~erfect participles here 1
'
· '
i 'rhe .man having slept soundly awoke.' , Does . the
e,~,having slept soundly, describe the man or rather the '
··· lfori in which he was 1 What part of speech, then, is
slept ?
S*
. ' '

'g

, .<

\

..•
'·

)

Q: What is having, without slept 1 Is . i.t ~ot a present par~ 1. '
..~ 1. 1 Is slept 11 \)resent or perfect participle ? Well, then; ' .
ti cip e .
· "1
having slept, taken together' is compounded of two particip e~,~ _'
1

•

the one present, and th~ other perfect, would you the~ ~all .it:·
simply a perfect participle, or a comp~und per.feet parh~iple 1i
Q. Do you not notice that having, is the sign of this par- ._ :
. ~;

.

~

ticiple ?
·
Q. c Thinking, thought, having thought.' Here are thr,ee
.- , .participles, which is the present, and why ? The perfect and .
:· '\vhy ? The compound perfect, and wl~y 1 ,
. ,;/ Q. c James was studying and learnmg.
'!.learning describe or refer to James 1
. .
.
" Q. If these par~iciples describe like adJect~ve~, w~ll they ~
'not belong to nouns, in the same manner as ~dJecbves . . . ·.
Q. Would you not then say, that studymg and learnmg,.',

..

ought to belong to the noun James 1 . .
. ,
·:
. . . .Q. Lest you may forget that parbc1ples belong to nouns, I ~
will state tl~e rule. Will you repeat it 1
. ·:i.
RULE vn.
Participles belong to nouns.
Q. 'The gun approaching melts the snow ;'
·, rule for the 1 For approaching1 Is not snow
': nielts 1 What then is the rule for snow 1
: Q. 'James found him hanging on a tree.'
ag~nt of found ? Found whom ? What then is the
~?

Q. What is the rule for hanging 1
Q. What is the gender, number,, and person, of

, 91

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

IN'tELLEC'ttr'.A:L A'.ND'

90_.

' ~· -.~~\. Q. ·True, they do, and-therefore l will give you a rule for

·' . it. , WiUyou repeat .

·.. ·

RULE VIII.

I ·.

·~fi~~Th~. objectiv.e ~ase may b~- go~~ned by. active . participles.

'·The ~hief was eating his bre.a kfast whe~~1is pursuers
.: caught him.' · What was he eating ? fo "what case is break"· · fast 1 ·What is the rule for breakfast, it· being . after the paJ:ti,(. Cip'le eating 1 .
.- ,
··
-· ii"
.
- ( Q. Who was eating1 To what,then does eating belong- or
'• '~ r~fer? What is the r.ule forit 1
.
,, '.. : Q; What is the object of caught? In .what case then is
.!

;j~: · Q:

"._h". Im ~'l.
~ ·' Q. By what is it governed, and what is the rule 1
.;· Q. 'I s.aw running streams and flyi_ng clouds.' What do, rimning and flying describe 1 To ·what do they belong, and
·what is the rule 1
·
.·, ' ' ~· 'William shot a, squirrel eating nuts:' What did Wil; ·"liam shoot1 What then is 'the object of sh?t, and by what is .
•;'this object governed 1
'., ': Q. Which word is the agent 1 What.does eating refer to ?
_' J;:W.hat then is the rule for eating 1 ,What di,<l t~e sqµirref eat 1
By .what is nuts governed 1. , _. .
··
· · ·· · · - ~-

LESSON XXIV.
1

QVESTIONS ON THE PARTICIPLE.-.

·. ·

tree,,.l~

why1
.
'
Q. ' James striking his brother, hurt , him
Whom:did he hurt 1 What then is the rule for him 1
did James strike 1
.
Q. Well, then, since striking denqtes action, an~ . ~'!
object, or objective case after it, like nu ~cti:e verb, ~Quid
infer that active participles govern an objective case lilt~1 .,
verbs or not ?
·

Q." What is the meaning of
'.. · the word participle 1 .
'. Q. Why does it have .this
'
.
•• name.;>
~ .Does · a participle · de,,,_ scribe ?
Q;,' How theri CJn you distin, guish . it from an adjective
,by the sense 1 · ·
.
/ How many participles are
.',there 1
•
.
0

~

.

..

.

·

Q. What are their names 1
Q. What is a present partici, ple?
,'. · ·
Q. Will you give an example1
Q. What does it generally end
in 1
· . ·
Q. W~at is a pedect partici~
. ' .ple l • .
. . .. ,
,Q,. ·:\Vhy- does it have .':·the
. · name of perfect? ,' !Y·, · '

.·

.:_)

. ·.:.

,.

·' ·.

I,

92'

INTELLECTUAL AND·

Q. What Is the compound
will make sense joined with .
having, is it a compound 'or
perfect participle 1
Q. Why does it have this
a perfoc t participle ?
name 1
Q. From what are partici'.Q. What is the sign of a compies derived 1
.
. ·· .
pound perfect p·articiple ?
Q. Will you form a present
Q. If any participle, when
1~mticiple from despise · 1.,''
. having is not joined with it,
from mourn ? delay 1 1 . , ,'·

.· ~ , i

!;1

•;

EXERCISES FOR THE SLATE OR PAPER.
Q. 'I went on to the review ground and saw the people . ·

,.

there eating, drinkin g, pl aying, m.uching, exercising, buying, t
selling, running, for111ing lines, marching, riding, disputing, , .
fi ghting, fiddlin g, dancing, singing, walking, scattering, and ·•·
leaving the ground.' How many participles are there, here, ' ·
what does each one belong to, and what is the rul e for e~eh 1
Q. '\Vill you write a phrase having ten different participles,
and tell me the rule for each 1 One, ha ving an agent, verb,
and object, but eight dilferent words, llc:i11g participles ? Give .
the rule for each of them. Six ph ra~ es ha ving the same participles, but different agents, different verbs, and different ob- ··
j~ets in each 1 One, having four participles, each agreeing .
with a noun, and governing an object likewise 1 Will you
write twenty obj ects to this phrase,' Thomas is cutting --1'.
Write twenty different participles to this, 'James is ~~.
Charles 1' Tw;enty dilferent agents to this, ' - - is leaming'1 '
Will each one in the class ~ee which can write the most sen- / •
tcnces each containing an agent, a verb, an object, and a par- '
ticiple agreemg with the agent ? Which will wri ~e the most;,1 '.
each sentence containing an agent, verb, and participle agree-·
ing with the object of the verb 1 Write one having an artir.: '_ .
cle, adjective, agent, verb, and obj ect 1 Will you now tell the•·
rule for each word in the sentence ? Will you write a senr .
tence containing a personal pronoun, and tell the rule for it · 1
One, having a relative pronoun in it, and tell the rule for.iti. ·
agreement 1 One, having an active verb? Write the !lame
meaning, but change the verb to the passive 1 Write !!- neu.~r'
verb1 Six sentences in the indicative mode, each having a 4fr.i;
ferent tense 1 Write one in the imperative mode 1 One,· in ·
the potential 1 One, in the subjunctive 1 One, in the infinitive1 ·

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

93

L£SSON xxv~
MENTAL EXERCISES.

"~·

·when I say, 'I love,' do I mean that I IO"ve n~w 'l In
·· . · · \
•
• ,. ,· • i
·.
Singular Pronoun, Present Tense.
. .· • . Do we say, 'I loves,' or I love?
~;·'.·: Do we say, thou love, or thou .lovest 1
, , Do we say, he, she, or it, love, ~r he, she, or it, loveth
or)oves?
-

· ~~at tense then, is, ' I love?' '. .

I .'

. 'l

· · Plural Pronoun~; Present Tense.
Do we say, we loves, or we love 1
Do we .say~ ye or you loves, or ye or you lover
Do we say, they loves, or they love .!
·
, .Q. ·When Thomas says, 'I loved yesterday, ' in what tense
11 ' I loved 1'
·
· ·
·

Singuia::)' Pronouns, Irnperfect Tense.
~ Do we say, I lovedst, or I loved?
·
. '" ,,Dd ~e say, thou loved, or thou lovedst? ·
-:~ ,·~CJ. ~e say, he, she, o~ it, l~ved~t,. or he,"·~hc, or it, loved}
, .: ; .'
Plural Pronouns, Imperfect Tense.
·· ·
Do we say, we lovedst, or we loved 1
'DCJ we say, ye or you lovedst, or y~ or you loved'!
po we say, they lovedst, or they Ioveci 1 .. '.
. Q. Of what number and person is 11· Is thou 1 Is h~, sh~,
and ~t) Is we 1 Is ye or you 1 Is they 1 '
,Q". :1~~ll !ou repeat these pronouns,
saying them in this
~er, :viz ·: the first, second; and' third 'persons singular,· then ·
e:~~st, second, and third ·persons p,lural 1
'
~ JVill yqu repeat them, in this ~rder, with the verb love 1
. . :the :verb hate 1 With desire? With hope 1 With walk!"
f:li loved 1· With walked·!: With desired 1
· · ·'
1
.Do We,say,,· Th.o~ have,' or' thou hast a book 1 .t Thou''
1
l11 0~, ' thou .hadst a book 1' ' Thou shall,' or ·' thou shalt
.. i ~' : ~Thou wilf'have/'or 'thou wilt have?' ' Th.oti .. max,st:

oy

Q::

.

."'

I

I

___;1

94

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

INTELLECTUAL AND

have ' or c thou may have 1' 'Thou mightst, couldst, wouldst;
1
'
.
and shouldst,'
or 'thou might, could, would,
and shou ld · ' Q. You have probably not forgotten the order of the pr.onouns above; will you join them as before, to 'have wnt:
ten to-day 1'
.. . .
· Q. Do you recollect what tense, have, is the sign of1 · Do,.·"
you recollect what tense, had, is the sign of1 In what tense ,'
then is, ' I had wntten 1'
Q. In what tense is,' I shall write 1' Is 'I shall have wri~ten 1'
.
·Q. Will you join the pronouns as before to ' - - had,, ·
. --had lived?' To' - - shall or w1·11 wn•te '?'
written 1 To'
.' .
To c _ _ rnay or can write 1' To' - - might, could, would,

.;

or shoultl write 1'
Q. Do ,not might and could write, imply ability, power., .
&c 1 In what mode then are they 1
·
Q. Do you not recollect that if, unless, &c. by implying ·.:
doubt, were the signs of the subjunctive mode 1
·
Q. 'Which would you say, 'If he study,' or if he studies t'
'If he stu<ly ,' is right, bf'came we have seen that when the·
pronouns are joined to it, the verb is not generally varied, : ,
Will you then join the pronouns to the phrase, ' If study,' 1
~·
and not change its ending 1 To this 'Unless - - learn~ 1
Q. Do you not recollect that have, had, shall, and will; are •
the signs of the different tenses of the indicative mode 1 · '
Q. Do they or <lo they not, then, help to show these d~ffe
.
'
ent tenses 1
Q. 'V'ell, then, since auxiliary, means helping, would ~9'*
or would you not, call such verbs as help to show the dil!i
ent modes and tenses, auxiliary verbs 1
· .
Q: The verb whose tense . the auxiliary shows, being :
principal verb, is consequently called so. Which then is;
auxiliary and which the principal verb in this sentew
·: ''i; i
' Jamee will ride 1' In this, ' James has written 1'
Q. When the auxiliary verbs are used with . the ptiq~i
may it not be said that they form a compound of two or~_
words or verbs 1
. · : ;.\
~

~

95

. '~" Q. 'Would yo~ the~ call .sue~ teri~es,

.. ·'

as are formed b,r. hvo
·
-fl! ·
_, " Q. Is this, 'James has · 10ved ' a sim l . , .
... tehse 1
·
'
, . P e . or · compound
i~~ m~re verbs, simple or c~mpound tenses 1

:· ·Q~ Is this, ' I have 1' .

:, ).·.Q. Do you recollect the signs of the pote~tial mode 1' If
you~ ~o not, tur~ b.ack arid see-What are they 1 Are they
'px1hary, or prrnc1 pal verbs? ·
' t. Q. Which is the principal verb in the foll~w
" 1·n~ I . .
1J
.
o p uase,
1
. ames m1g 1t have been loved 1' In this , James . h II i.
· loved~'
.
.
'
- s a,.~ave
.
,/;:Q.
!ou jom the pronouns as· above .to . this phrase
: ~ may love 1' To this, '--1night love 1' :
); Q
. .Do we say, 'They is,' or, · 'They are'? ' w·1·1· '
tr1.kes, , or ' William strike' ? 'One man runs ' . or 'On~I iam ·
f...
.
'
man
r:in· ,...'l.. , T women runs,' or' run'· ?
,
~"Q When we say, 'One man runs,' what letter does ru~s
~~d in
we say 'two men nm ' ' what
letter. d oes ruii
.
.
. 1. When

'·

~ill

~

,

arn.1

,

.

When we say ' The boy nms,' is the agent shigular or
plural 1 When then the agent is singular, do we sa.Y run' 011
s1
...
' .

/ .

'

· Q. ~en we say, 'The boys rim,' is the agent sii!gular or
lural . When then the agent is singular, as 'Boy runs,' does
·~rverb end in s, or does it not? When the agent is plural
-.-•,The birds fly,' does the verb end in s, or does it not 1. " ~
. . '. Is t~en the en~ing of the vetb varied or governed .by th.o
f!t, as it regards number, or is i~ not ?
·.. ' .1 " ..
~P)Jo .. we say, 'He write,' or ~he writes' 1 f I \Vr~te,' or
,.writes' 1

. : "~Whenwe use he, we say 'he writes,> but when we use
e\ ~ay, ·'I write,' but are not

. 1··

. .

.,.~ 1 ~Well then,
:

...

'

. '

is the

~«~risitnoti>
' •

t,
.

and' he, of differ~nt lJer..

.

.

.".

' .

.

ve~V varieq as the person of the. ~gent '
,·
' · :"" ;:. '.. ···«·:
.

'

.r;., .

~' If thtin t'1e verb varies as the ngmiJ~ati~e ~r ~ a~e11t\·~,..:, ·

""'

I

PRACTICAL (}RAMMAR.
lNTELLECTUAL AND

96

. .
on does or does not
also as this varies m pers '
b
tl e ve1·b in these re~
ries in num er,
· f
govern 1
•
the agent or nomma ive, .
bcr this· I will therefore
t 1 It is important . to remem
'
Will )' OU repeat
spec s ·
.
1
state i•t.111 tl1e form of a rue.
.
RULE J:X:.

·. The nommc
•

.

•

.a

t"ive case governs t lie

•,

verb in number and per- '>
.l'r
•.

'son.
. 1"t.ive case governs the verb hi
11 tl
if the nomn "
.
. r ..
Q. W c
ien,
. 1 , b governed by lhe nonnna iv~
number and person, is t 1e 'er . .
1
':
b
1d person or is it not .
. , f1:1
case, in 1,1um er aJ
. 1 ' to account for the ending o .. ·'·
Q. Well, when you wis ~ tl fact of the verb's being :va" ,
.
tl et to account ior ie
cl .
verb, or ra 1
'th tl e nominative in number an p~r~
ried, so as to agree w1 1 l
b agre es with its nominative
. , .
ld you say that be ver
<
th tit does not agree 1 It is impor· .
son, wou
<l person or a
t "'
b
in num er an
. · . 'I" ·t lso : will you lhcrefore repea ·; ·• ·
1
lant lo reme111ber t 11s ,\c . a .
,
RULE X.

A verb agrees with its nominative case in
11erson.

IUENTAl• EXERCISES.
.i •
.
. l admit the fact that the verb ii

N otwithstan<l mg yot '
t · ·
. f e still it is not always rue.
·
all correct 1 YoU: may ,...r.
varied to suit the nomina iv ''
t ' I love ' and ' they love, equ, y .
,
t tefi:}b
no '
'
1 Co.n you or can you no
. ..then how you shall know · ·
b 'l \Vill you jo
'
"tl the verbs as a ove ·
,
. oining the pronouns w1 1
'
.~
1
··
J
c
love
the pronouns lo, ---: I lov~ ' ' thou lovest,'. 'he loves,' .h
Q. When you say'
'
these pronouns ~
1 A
clocs the verb end in each phrase . re
· ~:

·Q ·

.. .

1
· l1 tl ie ve rbs ' ·
gular or plural
.'
. .. . these pronouns wit
Q When then we JOlil
•
d ·· irnlaz:
.
\· t the verbs to be cone1dere Slll;,.,- ..
make sense, oug i
.
, ,;.'
plural 1
n

ls writest, singiilar'(>r plural 1 It I shoQld ask you why, would
·. · you not say, because its agent is 1

.._. ·.Q•" ' 'We wrote,! 'ye·or you ·;wrote,' .' they wrote/ How
:.«lo~!I the verb end here 1 Would you caU these verbs plural

'. because their agents are plural f
' , · ·'
·t'.Q . . ' I wrote,' · ends also in .E , ·do then the '~hiral verb
kild 'the verb joined with I, end alike~
Q. 'He writes and thou writest.' What do both verbs
end in here 1 . Are these· agents singular . or.plural! : Are · the
te~bs then singular or plura~ 1 . : . . '
.
...1 Q: How many different persons of the ·pronouns. are there,
' in the phrases, ' Thou writest and he writes 1' . Can· you not
tell then, whether the verb is singular or plural, by joining the
different pronouns with them 1
·
·~ Q. 'I love.' What number is 'lbve 1' 'They love/ what
number is 'love,' here, and why 1 'Thou loveill,' 'he loves.'
Lovest and loves, end differently because their agents are of
ditfereht . persons. vVhat person is he 1 Is thou 1 Would or
yt.ould ,i t not, be proper to say lovest is of the second person,
ancl loves of the third, since their agents are of these persons
_and their enrlings different 1
Can we not tell thepersons of verbs 'also, by joining
their pronouns, a.s a.bove1
' Q. Hence do ·we learn , that verbs in themselves consider• ,,,have person and number or that they have these, properties
merely on account of their connexion with their agents 1
Q.- ' James stands.' What is the number and person of
... _dll 1 vVhy 1 Is it -not because James is of the thi~d pern~ ~rid singuhir numb ed
Q. Wen; then, does or does not, stands, agree with James
'. .
.
, ,
·
-·'\imber ·and person 1
. ~ 'n'o you recolle.ci the , rule for the agreement of the vet~
hits nominative or agent 1 Will you repeat it f
·Q. ,' John has sung.' What . i~ the n\lmber .and person of
sung,' ancl why ? What does it agree with then, and
1 ie the rule ?

Q:

LESSON xxvI.

1

c T writ.P..'

\1
Is write, singular or P1ura ·

'

Thou wri
· ·

97

9

.i
'

I

•
j

98

Q. 'The bird will fly.'

What does 'will fly,' agree with,

and what is the rule 1
Q. 'Thomas hurts.' What is the number and person o~
'hurts,' and why 1 With what docs it agree, and by wha~
rule 1 Who is it that hurts 1 What then is the agent of hurts1
Q. The agent of hurts being the nominative ca!e, that iO·
vems hurts, would you or would you not say, that Thomas it
the nominative case to hurts 1
Q. """hat rule would you give for Thomas, then 1
Q. c She learns.' What does she do 1 To what then is she : ,
the nominative case 1 What rule would you give for this riom·
inatirn case 1 What is the number and person of learns, and .
why 1 What does it agree with then, and by what rule ?
1.r
Q. 'Peter makes a whistle.' What does Peter do1 To .
what then is Peter the nominative. case ? What is the rule l· :
Q. Who makes 1 What then inust be the number and per!·
son of makes 1 Why ?
_'
Q. With what does makes agree, and what is the rule f ·· '
Q. What does Peter make ? What then is the object, or· _
objective case 1 What is whistle governed by, and what is the .
·
rule 1 What is the rule for the article, a 1
Q. ·wm you first repeat to me the parts of speech, and then the rules for each of the words, in the following sen··
1
tences, .as I read them to you 1
··
' lcllcrs should recehe
'Mills grind corn.'
proof.'
' Israel loved J oscph.,
' The man who loves Yirt.\l
' Peter Jllade a cart.'
will practise it.'
"
' He shuns strife.'
'
George
will
learn
his
lesson.'
•
'The teacher loves good boys.'
' I will respect my · teacllet.
'Oxen draw carts.'
though he chide me.'
'Birds fly.'
'
A
scholar who intends to iqi
' Horses run .'
prove his time, will 1 .l '
'A dutiful child will obey his
his business.'
parents.'
'"\\''"illiam can open the win~
dows.'

· .· ~9

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

INTELLECTUAL AND
,II

QUESTIONS ON P .RONOUNS JOINED WITH
VERBS.
.
. . ..

."Q. Will you jo.in the nomina- ' Q. What is the rule -for' the

' nominative r
'
-·? :· ;.- son. to ' . - - love' 1 To , Q. . ~What do verbs agree
. with 1
',
. - , ' --- desue'? To ' 1
' • 1 loved' 1 To' -·-have lOv~ I Q. What"is the rule for them1
., ~. ed' 1 To ' - - sleep,' in . Q. Why does the·verb agree
. .the perfect tense l T o ' - · with its nomi·n ative in num" said,' in the pluperfect · ber and person 1
I 'tense 1 To c - - strive,, in
Q . Do verbs . have number
, ., I.he ?~st future r To ' - and ,person 1i11 ·themselves
. r,:see, m the second future 1
considered 1
.
.
.: ;,:, :~o ',--may .or can see'1 _Q. On w?ataccount then are
Io - - might, , could,
they. said t~ have these pro• : 1 . would, or should see 1
perbes 1 · ' - ·
·- Q. In what mode is the last Q. What is the rule · for the
~. phrase 1
.
- .
indefinite. article 1
, ~· vyill. you join the pro- Q . What is lhe -rule ·for the
· , · -nouns to ' I f · - have sent'!
·_ definite article 1 · ·
: Q. How can you tell a sin- Q. What is the · rule for the
, · · gular. from a plural verb ?
adjective 1 · Q. How can you tell one per- Q. ·w hat is the rule for the
•
• •
_,, son from anothe: 1.
.
,pronoun 1 1 •
-: , Q. ~h~n a noun is m the no:.. Q .. \Yhat ar~ the rules for parmmab ve case, to what part
tic1ples 1 ·
f'. of speech is it the -nominaQ. What ts the rule for the
. I µve 1
objective Case after RVerb 1

,J- 'tive 1>ronouns of each per-

<,

. #

.

-ee•LESS~N

XXVIi. - ;_; : .

MENTAL EXE.RCISES.

~ ~1 ! ' 'See, saw, seen.'. Would you say,' I' seen him,' or ' I
1

•whim 1' 'I had saw him,' or' I had seen him 1'
; ~ /ts· seen, a participle or a verb 1 Is saw, a verb or p·artiple 1 Hence.do you hOt see that seen, must not be used for
c · "imperfect tense 1
·
r-· Q. 'Do, did, done.'
Would you say;' I did it well,' or 'i
_e it·well/ and why? 'I' wrote,' or 'I written,' and why t
_. have saw,' or' I have seen. him t' 'I had saw,' or 'I had~
n, and whyt
:

•

lj

l

~

j

j
l

'j

100

INTELLECTUAL AND

Q. Must you or must you not, use the participle with h~ve
and had 1
Q. Do we say, 'I have done it,' . or 'l ·have did it/ aq4
why? 'She had did well,' or' she had done well,' a~1~ .why 1
Q. If you are a small boy, or even a large one, is it, not .
more than probable that you m~ke mistakes in .using .these
words 1 Do you· not say sotnetnnes when speakmg qmc~y,1
'I done it mother t•· Is this cotrect1 What would be · correct, and why! Would ,you say, 'I have done,' or '.I h~ve
did/ iind why 1
.
Q. We cannot say, 'I have did thus,' but' I did thus,' is
correct. Hence if we can use have, is it a v~rb, or is it not
rather a participle 1 Do we use the participle for the imper- ·
feet tense, or do we not 1
. .
Q. Well, now, since you can t~l~ by joining have '. w~1ch ·~\
the participle and which is hot, will you tell me wl11ch .is c~ :- .
.
rect ' to say, ' IT"J.e gave, ) or 'I ie given
.I'
.·
Q. Can we join have, with . gave, and make it s0und
.
,
thus, 'He have gave 1'
Q. Would you say,. ' Id rove, ' or 'I. d nven
. Why1 .· '. .
.
"'
. ' · ·· 1
have drove ' or 'I have drivcn 1'
i: Q.
led, led.' Can we not say, 'I led,' and'
led ?' Hence you see that participles and the. imperfed tense, •
are sometimes alike, but if you know what the imperfect
tense is, can you or can you not tell, whether the participle ii.
the same by joining have with it 1 ·
,
Q. Would you say,' They lay down,' or ' 'they lain down;
and why 1
Q.. Would you say, 'They h!!-ve lay;'
.
.
andwhy1
· .
,, :f
Q. Would you say, 'William runs fast,' or1 ' run fast/ ...
' ' ' ' ' <' •
wh y ..~
'
Q. Would you say, ' She has ran,' or 'she has run,',,
why 1
.
. ·
·
·· •
. Q. W ~uld y_ou say, ,' He tQok him,'. or ' h.e taken him1~

'Le~d,

WP}'.1 :

I.~ve.

,,
1·

l-01

·· <f

w~1

Would you

·

~ay; 'He ha1 took/ or' he-has taken,'and ;
.

1•

tQ. Wouidyousay,'He has tore,' or 'he has torn,' and

~1
1

.

\

'

',

.

'

!'Q. Would you say,' She ·t orn,' or' she tore the' book,' and
·
"·.
·
' why1 r
Q. Would you say, 'She ·stfove,' or · ' she striven,' and
why1·
Q. Would you say, 'They sat here,' or 'they sit here,' and

why1:
·
t Q::- Would you say, 'They stole it,' or ' they stolen it," and
why r
·
" Q. ' Set, set, set.'

Set,

mea~s

to place,

a~ to set a

thing

down; but sit, sat, sat, means to occupy a seat, as ·'William
in his chair,' we set a chair for others to sit in.
• Q; It is common to -hear good speakers, inadverten Uy no
doubt, misapply these words. I will '11ow see if you can use
aherri ·correctly. Would you say- ·

~)IJ,Jlles sets here, ~r sits here1' 'The hen has set and hatched:,
•James sat here, or set here1'
or has sat aild hatched 1' ·
'limes has sit here, or has sat 'The hen is sitting, or setting1'
here 1'
' The trap is set, or sat 1' · ·
'James set, or sat his trap 11 'The squirrel sets, or sits en
'The hen sits,* or sets •to
that tree"P
,
·hatch 1'
' The man is setting, or sitting
upright1'
.
.Q. Would you say, 'l'have began, or t have begun 1'•s~~ began' or begun 1' Why 1
Q';, Would you say, 'They have borne,' or ·t they have

re the ·corpse away 1'

' Tfrey bore, or they borne it away?' .
·
~· Another mistake, ·which occui·s with good speakers
· · frequently perhaps than any other, is the wrong pro-

ou ·bade him be still,' or 'you bid him be still 1'

A• the {!jl-tridge sittetlt on · eggs :nnd hatclrnth ·them not, so J10
t ·gettetli .riche~, not by right, shalJ leave them in ~he m1dit. of
daysr-Jeremuih, xvu. ll.
·

.,. .

9*

INTELLECTUAL AND

PRACTICAi.i GRAMMAR.

nunciation of the word get, as git for get.* I will now examine you a little with regard to this word get. ' Get, got, .
got.' Would you say, 'James, git,' or 'get your place1' · ..
'Get you to bed,' or 'git you to bed 1' 'I 'cannot git,' or ·
'I cannot get on my boots 1 'Git away,' or 'getaway1'
'Thomas why do you not git up,' or 'why do you not get

desire 1 Have lovell1 Shall · have -loved 1- May or can love 1
love 1 Miiht, could, would, . or should love 1 Am 1
Was 1 Have been 1 Shall or will be 1 Ha:ve run; and use
Mary for she"'! May or can swim; by using boys for they 1H~ve made, by using any noun you please for she 1 Am, by
usmg a noun for they 1 Am, by usil1g a noun for it 1 Am
loved, and use a noun fd'r it 1 Use a noun with hath been
. loved 1

102

up1'
What has he written 1·
To what then, and by w.hat rule, 1s James in . the nominative
case 1 Who has written 1 vVhat t.hcn does has written agree·.
with 1 What . is the rule 1 What did Jam es write 1 What:·
the_n is the objective case, and what is the rule 1 Will you
join the pronouns to 'has wntten~ 1 You cannot say, 'I has,' '
but vou must begin to say,' I have written.' What pronoun;
do you join with has written 1 vVhat then is the number · and~ .
person of has written 1 Why 1 Is it not because he, or James, ,
being the agent or nominative, is of the third person singular'1 · '
Q. \Viii you join all the pronouns to ' - - have written,!
except he, and when you come to that, put William instead ,?~

Q. ' James has written his copy.'

it1
.
-~
Q. Join all the pronouns to, ' - - wrote,' except they..~,
~md use boys in its place 1
q,. Join all the pronouns except he, she, an<l .it;
have learned,' and use girl, in the place of them 1
Q. Vv ould it or would it not, be convenient to have a name,
{t ·
for joining the pro.nQ1ms . together as above.1
Q. Now since co1~ugation (from the Latin .con, togeth,eJ'~
andjugo, to join, or yoke,) means joining together, wouW
npt conjugation be a . good naine for. thus joining the pro ..
and verbs together, throughol.lt all thefr modes, tenses, n .
bers, and persons, thereby sbo'Ying the different endings, ,
Q. ·well~ then, if I ask yot• to .conjµgate love, for ins
do I or do I not, mean that you are to join the pronoUD:1'
the word lovo 1 ..Will you then ..conjugate love 1 . Conjti .
• l\lm1t teachers, in a few daya, .would find nmpfo proo(~o ·.
tr.uth of this statemeut, by allowrng their pupils to correct, U
:is to be corrected.
··
·

If-.·-

' Q. 'James has been punished.'

'Vho has been punished 1
To what then is James the nominative case 1 By what rule 1·
~ Q. Conjugate, has been punished, by using James in its
proper place. Of what person and number do you find the
yerb to be, and· why 1 What is the rule for its agreement 1
Q. You have learned . that the nominative case ii; the
~gent:, this is true, .butthis is uot all. \Vhen I say,' James
· - strikes Charles,' which is the a(J"ent ·or nominative 1 To what
. i,, l .
.
.
::> •
111 it the nommati ve case 1 What is. the rule? Which: Word is
the object .and by what is it governed 1 . What is therule for
its government 1
,
_~.. Q. 'James strikes Charles,' then Charles is struck . by
, James~ Does Charles then, receifo the action;. in the last
> phrase 1 Is not Charles the object then 1 True, Charllls is,:
. ,. but can we say Boys is 1-. Do
not say, Charles, or he is 1
· Do you not see then, that Charles governs the verb is 1
: Q. Well, then, may or may not every name or ·rioun, thatr
governs the verb, be considered the nominative case to the
~rb 1 whether it ·be the agent or the object 1
Q; Ttue, it may; hence do you or do you not see, that the·
~ominative -case may be sometimes the agent, and;sometimes
·tile.object 1

we

1

Q .: 'w·11·
· wise.
· , Can we say; ' William are 1'~
. . 1 1am 1s

, .hat then governs is 1 ;To what then is.•William nomina""'.
Je?
• What is the rule for William 1 .·What.: are the -rules ·for
.·

.. ;and wise 1

'Q.· You hav:e. the i111pression,

perhap.11;- that verbs·

mer~ly

104

INTELLECTUAL AND

tell what the nouns do, and no more, but it is time that we' .
become more particular. 'James is at home.' Does or does :
not this mean that James docs any thing at home l Does it ·
mean any thing more than that James exists, lives, or has a
being, at home?
r. ·
Q. 'James rests.' 'James sleeps.' Does this imply ac_. · .
tion, or does it not simply imply being, or existence, in ii. '
certain state 1
Q. Active verbs, you know, carry an action to an objed~
passive verbs, denote an action received, and neuter verbs
have no object after them; some neuter verbs, as we have i. '
just seen, imply simply being or existence; now, then, sine& ·
active, and passive, and some neuters, imvly action, and
liome neuters merely existence or being, would you say, in
defining verbs, that they merely tell what the nouns do, or
that they denote ACTION or BEING l
Q. Will you repeat this definition of a verb l
Q. ' James is loved.' Does or does not, is loved,
an action received?
Q. Is it, or is it not, a verb then 1
Q. Who is lornd ? \Vhat then is the nominative to
IOved l
Q. Again, do we ever say,' James are loved'· l .
Q. Does then or does not, James govern, that is,
mine, whether we are to use is, or are 1
Q. What Uren, dQcs is lovc1l, agree with?
Q. 'Troy was.' Does or does not, was, denote that Tror
once existed l i
Q. What part of speech then, is was, and why -~
Q. 'I am athome, thou art at home, he is at home, 'we are
at home, l was at home, thou wast at home, they were at home,
I have been at home, I shall be at home.' How many pri
cipal verbs are there in these nine ·phrases ? Why are th8l
verbs l Do you1 hot see that the same verb is med in each ·
example, and that it is only varled to express differenc_e .;~
fune?
j

PRACTICAL , GRAI\f]rfAR.

105

.'~ Q •. Does this v~rb denote _actiop., or , simply the ,fact -0f be ..
mg at home l Is it active or neuter then 1

is .an important littie wor.d ~ntl bec~use
it denotes .being, as you .have seen, . it . has henc:·been . called
the v.er? To BE, that is, to exist. . Will ·you just rEWeatto. ~e
th<?se nme words ,abol'e, which constitute this· verb-tQ. be such
a~ . ain, a:rt, &c.l
. 'I-·
'
·

· »Q. This. word

AM,

· , ·Q_. 'Mar! loves her mo~he~' Then the mother is loved by
Macy. , Is loved, you know, is a passive verb but if we take
.
' .
away is, from the phrase, mother is loved, will it .o r will . it
oot,·then stand, the .mother lov,e d?
. ' '
. ' . . '
: Q. 'James was seen by Thomas.; Is or is ~·ot, was see.n ,
. ..
. .> .
- -apassi veverb?
. . Q. Is or is not, w.as; a part of the verb to be ? .
· Q. 'See, ~aw, seen.' . Is seen, a participle or a verb l :
: :Q. What kind of participle is it l Is it perfect or present?
Q.
you ?ot see that the perfect participle,· of any active
T:eFb, Jomed with the . verb to be, makes it passive l .
_ Q. ' Strike, struck, struck.' Can we not .by putti_ng is, be•fore -struck, make a passive verb? '\Vhat .will the passive
~rb be 1 . ·

?.o

, -Q. ' r Shake, shook, shaken.' . Hl).ve been,, you know; i~ theperfect tense of the verb to be, -can we then or can .we riot,
~~.the same tense in the passive, by })utting the pcrf&>ct
arhc1ple, shaken, with have been l What will the passi ve be1
·~· If the passive verb is always composed· of the verb to
be, and the perfed participle of some active .verb, will it or,
it not, be difficult to distinguish a passive verb 1 ,
· ·
.' Q. Will you make a passive verb with the followinll'-' '\•et'b'.
a....\b 'J
. .
0
~ . e, . ames i s - -· 1' With· thls, 'I may. or can . be~ - ?'
fhe ,shal~ or .·will .be l~ WitQ. . this; and le~v.:e out ~ at
~. ;·' .'.. James was at home f.' . .·
.. ·' · . · ·
..
you now inform me of what two things, a ~as~i~-e
jt coi:npounded, and ho\\' it may .always be formed 1
· .:
•1Q. If in forming the passive ·verb, you use the· p.resent
_.,of ~he ver? to be, as is hated, . in what tens~ will the-

1'fll

Q..r:Wm

106

1,01

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

INTELLECTUAL AND

passive verb be 1 Will or will it not, be in the same tense·as
the verb to be 1
· l"i
. ·Q. True, it will, hence it cannot be difficult to tell the tehsc;
~nd mode of the passive·verb, for they will be determined
the mode and tense of the verb to be. Consequently, if she
may or can be, is the present, potential, of the Yerb to be; 111'
or is not, may or can be loved, the present potential, passive I: ·
Q. 'Evil communications corrupt good manners.' How
many adjectives are there in this sentence 1 Why are thP.f"
adjectives 1
Q. Will you compare them? Are they regular or irregular ?1
Why1
Q. What is their degree! Why 1
Q. How many nouns are there 1 Why are th ey nouns 1
What is their gender, number, and person ? Why 1
Q. What do commumcatiorts do ? To what then is com·
munications the nominative case 1 Ily what rule ?
'·
Q. What corrupt good manners ! What then does corrupt~ ·.
agree with! By what rule!
1"
Q. What do evil communications corrupt! What then · ~
the objective case, by what is it governed, and by what rule 1
Q. Does the verb, corrupt, here, indicate a fact! In what
mode then is it!
J {
Q. Do not communications corrupt, now! In
then is the ·verb 1
Q. Will you conjugate corrupt, using communications in lti
proper place ?
Q. In what number and person do you find corrupt to ·bdJ1
Why!
.
Q. What did you say that it agreed with !
~
Q. Would it not be proper to have a pnrticular name . f
this process of taking up each of the words in a sentence~ teli ·
ing what part of Rpeech it is, giving an account of its fo
tion and variation, its agreement with, and its gove
ment of, other words ?
i .
Q. Parsing is a wor<l derived from the Latin pars, a p·,

·by

and signifies resol~ing a sentence l_nto its elements or parts of
' : speech, as we have done in the above example; will iiot this
be a good name for our purpose !
'
·
v Q:"' James study now.' . Does study, imply a comm~nd o.t
an entreaty 1 In what mode then is it? Who is cominauded to
1tudy 1 What th~n does study · ag'ree with, arid ~what · i~ · th~

ruler

..

.

·

.

: Q. The nature of the iiJl-perative mod~ is to cqmmand or
•. entreat ; but can we command or e11treat a person, to-day, fo
:, do a thing or action yesterday l Wh.enever a ·person commands, must then or · must . not, the time when the co~mand
is given be the present tense or time 1 · · ·
· ·
·
1
. Q. When I say; 'John, go and get some wood ' d~· I .hot
·
'
·
speak to J olm 1
Q. When we command, must we or must we not, ·always
·
·
·
..
, 1pe~k to some one!
Q. What person is the person, spoken to 1
. .
.·
Q: Well, then, is or is not the i mperative mode al~vays confined to the present tense and the second person !
i1 Q. Will you parse the following sei1tences :
1

' 'A good boy loves study.'
1,
· . Jol~n may play.'
:Philosophers may flourish.'
,Good people detest vice.'
'If llove him.'
~ I l.ove the man who practices
'Virtue.'
·
1

I

'The man whoml saw hasflecl.'
''\Villiam, \vhose brother I saw
is dead.' .
'
'I saw the wild animals which
· they caught.' .
'They saw the fox catching a
goose.'
.

Q. ' ·If 11e does learn.' ' If he do but learii.' In what mode

ate these verbs 1 Why !

-

-~:Hence, do yo~ not see that we can say, : ' If he doe~,

~~ . I~ he do, sometimes varying the endings of the verb, and
.~t~r:ies not! Yo~ may, perhaps, ask,. 'How shall · I
. ~w · In reply, I will ask you whether this phrase ' If he

~µt

learn,' implies doubt or condition whether h~ learn! '
,,.or hereafter, that is, in future timd
·
Q•.' He.r eafter ; well then, wh~n fµture time and doubt are ·
~ 1mplied, clo we or do we not, vary the endings of th~
b in conjugating it 1
·

108

INTELLECTUAL AND

Q. Right, we do not.· In thi~ case we have the word bui,
~e
as a si·gn. In phrases ' however, without but, when. futu.
<ilro
.t._.1me a.nd doubt , or contingency, are implied, would it m~r

aiiy difference 1
.
,
,. ·.
.Q. How then w.ould you, conjugate, do touch, · m .thi1 ·
.)J Inase,: 'If.he do but
. touch 1'
. 'Slay,' in· this phrase,' Thol!g~
· ;..
he ~lay me 1'
.
'
..
. Q c If she is but sincere, then I am happy. Does this
mea;:i, c If she .is now. sincere, then I am happy 1' Is th.ere.
wretimeili~?
.
I
Q Well then, is ~10 t the verb, to be, varied as usual 11
..,
How' tl>en would you conjugate aiii ?
·.
Q. ,•If she be but sincere, then I shall ~e h.appy .' Is t11ere ,
or is there not, implied in the first part of tlus sentence; bo.tJ.i
future time, and doubt 1
Q. Do you not noti ce tliat in one case we . use ' be,' . and \n.
the other 'is,' ' .a re,' &c 1

fJ!~

Q:

Q. ·which do we use, ·wJicn future time .and doubt, . ,ar~
implied
. 1·
· . ·oi
Q. ' If thou be aillicted, repine not. ' vVhy is ' be,' us·et
here rather than ' arc' 1
.
r i
Q. c Thrmgh he is poor, lie is happy.' Why <lo we use'~~'
here rather than ' be'?
. :i
c No po";P.r, except it were given him from above ' 1
Why 'were,' aud not 'was' 1
··
•
Q. c Jf,I were to write, he woultl not regard it.' vVhy 'were,
and not 'was'?

Q.'

Q. c Though he was rich, yet for our sakes he
poor.' Why' was,' and not' were'!
Q. You know that in certain cases, 'be,' is not varied
agree with different persons, and thatit is used for 'am,'".
&c. We do not change all verb~ thus as you may have se
this change. is confined to the present and. imperfect tenses
the ~erb ' to. be,' and these, like others, do not in general, ,
1
ry their endings. Do we ever say, 'If thou 'vere 1' Do.iW
not say, 1 If thou wert 1'

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

109
· Q. Do you or do you not see, from the foregoing, that the
imperfect tense is varied 011Iy to agree with the second person 'jhou' ?
, Q. Will you conjugate, F If I were' 1 'IfI be' 1 'If I was'1
If I am' 1

r

Q. 'Though an angel were to address you.'
, Why not 'was' 1

\Vliy 'were' ?

.
,,Q.UESTIONS
ON. THE CONJUGATION OF THE

'

VERB.

Q. How many variatipns are
.or verb for the imperfect . tlrnre of this verb 1 Will
tense 1
you repeat them 1 ·
· Q. Why is 'I <lid it, j correct, . Q.: How is a passive verb
; , rather· than 'I doM it 1' ·
1ormed 1
· Q. Do we use the participle . Q; What is its mode and
tens,e always like?
or· verb with 'have' and
'had '1
Q. Is .the verb 'to be' an acQ. What is the meaning of
· tive or neuter verb 1
the word coajugation 1
. Q:. Why is it neuter 1
Q. What does it mean asap_"'.' . :,Q. Will you form a passive
verb with ' n.m' and' loved,'
plied to verbs~ · · . .. ·. ' · ·
Q. Will you conj ugate · Am 1
'and conjugate it 1
.
: Lo"'.c L\-Yalk 1· ·. ·•
· Q. Will you conjugate any
q,·wm you conjugate the passive verb that you can
think of in the imperfect
imperfect tense of-Iove1
hater tense? In the perfect 1 In
"am 1 . :see 1 desire 1
the pluperfect 1 In the presQ. Will you conjugate , the
ent potential 1 In the pres:ent !ntlicative ~ctive 1
.
pluperfect o~' lo.ve,' by usmg boys 111 its proper Q. Will you conJugate 'arn '
· place 1
, in the present 1 Jn·the po'Q. Does an object ever betential 1
come the nominative case 1 Q. How many tenses and per. .How then can you tell the
sons lrns the in~perative
11nominative case 1
mode, a:nd why 1
Q. When is the ending of the
• What is the most accuverb not varied ?
rate definition of verb 1
· What is the meaning of Q. When do you use ' be,'
.the verb 'to. be 1'
and 'were,' for 'am,' ahd
'was,' &c.
Q. "no we use the participle

Q; Will you tell wl1y the following expressions are wr~ng.
correct them, as I read to you 1
10

110

INTELLECTUAL AND

'A old horse.'
'They is .'
'They comes.'
'She wilt hear.'
'The men runs.'
'A ox draw.'
'The man go by.'
'I 'is very well.'
'Great pains is nef?d ful?'
'James 'vrite yesterday .'
' William wrote now.'
'A g-irls nm '
'Him that came.'
'How dost thee do, Samuel.'
'Art thee well 1'
' Has th ee been home1'
' Them that seek wisdom shall
find it.'
' Git me a book.'
'I snw him teachin g she.'
' William's book was loosed.'

Ill ·

PRACTICAL· GRAMMAR.

'I love he and she.'
'He admires she.'
' Whom <lo come 1'
'The girls does run.'
' Do the girl run 1'
' They have did it.'
' The boy sets here.'
'The hen is setting.'
' The man to who I gave the
book 1'
,
' Shall th em that oppress the
poor be prospered 1'
'I di1l saw him teaching.' ..
'Did I seen him weeping1' ~)
' Sinners is unhappy.'
' Is sinners unhappy?'
'The man which comes.'
' The most great pains hlll
been taken.'
\)
' The most properest to be
said.'

..

EXERCISES FOR 'l'HE SLATE OR PAPER • .\

Q. \.Vill you write ten different phrases, each cont~ining
·p
an article, acljective, and noun 1
Q. Now will you make each one of the nouns,
have written down, do some thing 1
({. Next, will you m·ite wlrnt they do, for objects 1
Q. V\Till you write phrases enou gh to embrace all the per•
r •
sonal prcnmms 1 Enough to crnbrnce all the relative pror
nouns 1
.
.
Q. Six phrases havin g th e same nominatives, but differ~dl'
verbs in the indicative mule, and the same objects? W~lt
the same meaning and cli:rnge the verbs to passim 1 F.o
ha.ving the same . nominati r es , but the verbs different;.
neuter 1 Twentv different nominatives to this ' -.- is :
ning 1' Thirty different obj cc ts t6 this, 'Jam es . is cat~
--1' Twenty different participles to this, ' Jam es ~s .,
Thomas 1' Six phrases having a potential mode in e•ch
\V rite the same in the form of questions 1 Six in the subj
tive mode 1 Forty having the pronoun' I,' v.nd the verb' to

In each 1 Forty different verbs in the infinitive mode ? r I am

the man whom you saw.' 'The soul that sinneth shall
die.' 'Moses' rod became a living s.erpeut.' 'Washington
was e.ateemed a great patriot.' I will now class each word
ln the last four sentences, as a model for you, whe~ I require
you to do the same.
·
'
Art. , Nouns.
Th e
M on
Tl1e . Soul
A
Moses'
A
· Rod
a

1

Verbs.
,
Am
Saw
Sinneth
Shall die
Washi~gton
Became
Patrtot Was esteemed
Scrper.t ,

1Pr.IPer../Pr.
Re·l. .lld'
t
"'· · p ar.
Wh"m Great _Living

I

I I

I

I

You

v

'J

· 'fJ1at ·
·

I

.Q. Will you class, on your slate, the words in the folJow, Ing sentences, in the same manner 1
'Johnsori's Dictionary.' ' The best man is · the happiest
man.' 'They will come/ ' Susan h.as learned her lesson.'
•I will .begin.' 'Jam es is tryi11g to come.' · 'Mary will be re, 1pected.' ' I . saw the boys rµnning, playing, and jumping.'
'William found my pocket-book.' 'Did William fli1d my
pocket-book' 1 'Who comes' 1 'William.'-

LESSON XXVIII.
MENTAL EXERCISES.

Q~ Having explained to you the different modes, tenses,
hers, and persons of verbs, I will, in the next place, give
u .a general and concise view of the whole, to which you
"" ~t~hy time refer.

L

INDICATIVE

MODE.
Neuter Verb.

Passi'De Verb .

.ficti'De Verb.

I am struck,
by Charles nt homt.
I wa~ strm.k,
THEN
by Charle< ::it home.
I have bPen stru<·k,
THEN
by · Cha rl t>s a t home.

Pru. Charles strikes or does strike,
Me IU he.me.
lmp. Charles struck or did strike,

!

AND

THEN

!

Me at home.

I'<r. Charles has struck,
Me at home.
/>lu. Charles bad '!'truck,

THEN

Me at home.
lll Fu. Charles •hall or will strike,

}THEN

M~ al home .
2d Fu. Charlt's iha ll have struck,
llle at home.

f'l'HEN

· I

Me nt home.
.
could, would or should strike,

Charl~s m~bt,

P er.

I\le at horue.
Charles may or can have struck,

1

I had been stru c k,

I

at homt.
I had been,
a. t home.
'"D I shlill or will he,
A.,
a l 11ome
AND I sLall i1ave been,

5 AND

by Charl t"s at home.

l

I sh all or will be struck,
by Charles at home.
I sl..ia ll h av ~ been struck,
by Charles at home.

}

at home.

POTENTIAL MODE.

1 • I mftY nr can be,
1
or Char
can be
at hocou.1d
me
Sl
THEN I m"ay by
les struck,
a t home.
}S Alil D
might
would or should be,
1
AND
·•
'
S
1 · I1t could would or should be struck,
THEN
mig by c 1rnr'les at home.
md~~ ~~,~=~ ha•·e been,
I 1nay 01 can have been struck,
AND 1
·t
THEN
by Charl es at home.
}
·a ht1iomeid would or should
been,}
·ab
ould wo uld o r should have bee n struck,} AND 1 mig • t.o u t
THEN 1 mJ b ~' cCl.ia;les at home.
at home.
y

Prtt. Charles may or can strike,
Imp.

~ am~t home.

.AND l wa~i. ho.:ne.
AND I have been,

ha~e

J\fe at bomt!.
Plu· Charles mig ht, could, would, or should have struck,
llle at bum o.

l

SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.
l

5THEN

Pru.
·

cha~, ~"h.it~ 1h~~ or
. .Ille at "bowe.

do thou

st~ik.e,
·

i

A~'\'D Ifl :;~~ ...

l THEN Be tliou

~ tru c k , or du thou u~ struck,
aL uomt!.

S

t

ti.ND If I be,
·
at home.

If I bP. st ruck,
by Charles at home.
wer-e struck,
by Che.des at home..

l
If I
.S THEN

I

~AND Be th ou, or do thou be, .

S

,

. }

~ND

al

home.

llVFINITIYE MODE.
Pres. To strike,
Me at home.
Per. To have struck,
Ille at home.

TH EN

l

To be stru ck.

a t bom.e.

THE~ To ha~~ ~:~~:c~truck,

.......

Toh~,

at home.
-\ND T o ha ve been,

'

at home-

PARTICIPLES .

0

* l'l'ts. Strikini;,
at home.

Ptr. S_lruck,
at horn•.
Corn. Per. Having struck,
atuowe.

B eing struck,
a thn1oe.
THEN Stiuck,a t home.
been struck,
THEN Having
· at home.

THEN

!

\

!

.

I

iAND Bemg.

5

at. uume.

}

*The remainiilg teiises of this mode are varied precisely like · the same tenses of the Indicative and
Potential modes. The only difference consists in placing if, although, $r.c. before those tenses respectively.
By placing if, although, &c. before, 'I should go,' thus, ' Although I should go,' it is easy to s..ee, that doubt,
c~ndition, &c. will be i~flied. Consequently, the potential mode will prope~ly b.ecome the subjunctive. It
will be well for the pupi · to go through all the tenses of both modes, by placmg if) unless, &c. before each
tense respectively.
·
·

'

114

INTELLECTUAL AND
PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

QUES'l'IONS,
TO BE ANSWERED BY LOOKING ON THE TABLE.

Norn.-The above tau le ' need not be repeated at fir~t; but it is'
expected that the scholar will hereafter becom~ so familiar w_ith the ,
different mode!'1 and teusei,1 1 OS to be nu)e to do It fluently, It IS to be ,
read thus: Indicative mode, Present active, Cha1l es strikes, me at
home, then Pres. Pass. I am struck, at home, and Pres. neut. I nm,
at home. The imperfect is to be rea~ ncross ~n the same ma~n~r,
omitting, perhaps, the mention of the mo<le, till you come to 1t m
the table.

Q. Will you now read the entire Table, including the subjunctive mode, varie<l through all the tenses of the in<licativ~ ·
and potential modes, by using 'loves,' as a principal verb in
the place of ' strikes' 1 Will you read the Table by using
'desire, ' in place of strikes'1 By using 'see'1 By using ' hate'1 '
By using 'bind' 1 By using' catch' 1 By using 'walk' 1 ca·n _
you use walks a!Hl sny, 'Charles walks,' me at home, nnd '
,.
make sense 1
·
.. ;
· Q. Can you put an object after walks 1 Is walks then ~ ·
active or neuter \·erb 1 Hence do you or do you not see, that ·
when you cannot use,' me at home,' after the verb, that it i1
neuter ?
Q. If you can use the whole phrase, what kind of a verb will
it be 1 \!\rill it then be diflicull to tell an adi ve from a neute~
verb 1
Q. Is 'strike,' an active, or neuter verb ? Is 'desire' 1 II
' sleep' 1 Is 'am ' 1 Can you put, 'me at home,' after ' I nm't
Is it then neuter or active ?
Q. You cannot put an object after, ' am loved,' but is' abl
loved,' neuter ? How then can you tell a passive from a neu•
ter ,·erb?
Q. Does not a passive Yerb denote an action received b
the nominative, and cannot you turn a passive into an acti!t
verb, as well as an active into a passim 1
Q. Can you tell me by looking on the Table, in what modi
an<l tense this phrase is found, viz. 'I shall be beaten,'·J
whether it is active, passive, or neuter 1
T•

115

Q. Where is this found, 'I shall be' .1 Is this, 'If I be' ?
cIf I be disposed' 1 Are these, ' I strike, thou strikest, he or
Cha'rles striketh or strikes' 1 Is thi~, ' Thou struckst' ? Is
., thi,s, .'Thou hadst struck' 1 Is this, ' .HecShall oi\ will strike' ?
Is this, 'Thou shalt have struek' 1 Is this, 'Thoii. mayest or
canst jump' 1 Is this, 'Thou mightst, couldst, wouldst, or
lihouldst leap' 1 Is leap active or neut.e r 1 Why ?
Q. How can you ascertain this 1
' Q. Is 'may be,' active or neuter? C;m you put,' me' after
' ..'. be' 1

Q. This is a good test, you must try to remember it. ·when
· ·• you put, 'me at ho~e,' after a' verb, are you sure that it is
not neuter 1
· Q. Do you notice, in the Table, that the passive verb is in ·
. ', every respect similar to the active, with this exception, it has
one word more ?

' . Q. Will you read the Table interrogativ~y, tlms, c Does
Charles strike me at home 1' Will you read it interrogatively by using 'love' ?

LESSON XXIX.
QUESTIONS
RE ANSWERED WITHOUT LOOKING ON THE TABLE.

· Q. Will you conjugate 'strike,' in the indicative mode
present tense 1 The present passive 1 The present of the verb'
' l,to be' ? The present with 'do,' as, 'I do strike' 1 The imt>erfect with 'did' 1 The perfect of'' love' ? The perfoct paslve of' love' ? The perfect of 'to be' l The imperative of
·. love' 1 The present potential neuter of' be' 1
. . Q. What is the imperative passive of' see' 1 Of' hate' 1
,_Q. Will you tell me what kind of verb; in what mode, and
what tense, 'I am,' is 1 In what mode . and what tense is
•_Thou art' 1 ·Is, ~Thou artlol'ed' 1 Is, 'I <lo strike' 1 Is;
'Thou didst strike' 1 Is, 'William has struck' 1 Is,' William
~ll been' 1 Is, 'William has been struck' 1 Is',' Strike thou'1

·---~: --

116

INTELLECTUAL AND

. PRACTICAL GRAMMA·n .

Is~ ' Be thou struck' 1 Is, 'The girls have been' 1 Is, ' The
girls had been loved' 1 Is, 'A man shall be' 1 Is,' A man '
~hall be hung' l Is, 'A man shall hang'? Is, 'Mary shall 111\Vo·· •
sung' ? Is, 'Thou nuwst or canst be'? Is, 'Thou mnyst or11
canst be taken'! Is, 'James might love' 1 Is, 'I could love' 1 '
IS, ' She should love' 1 Is, 'They would ~ove'! Is, 'If I love'?
Is, 'If I be' 1 Is, ' If I be lornd' ! Is, 'Although thou -.hasf'
been despised ' ? Is, 'Unless he had come' 1 Is, 'If I am' 1
Is, 'If I were' ? Is,' Were I able' 1 Is, 'Except he go' 1 Is,
'He must go' 1 Is, 'Thou must go' 1 ls, 'To go' 1 Is "To '
be' 1 Is, 'To be loved' ? Is, ' To laugh' 1 Is, 'If the-dog
· could ham been kill ed'? Is, 'If th e cat coultl scratch'1 Is, /
'If men shall hav e lirnd' ? Is, 'Living' 1 I s, 'Ha Ying been' f .'
Is, 'Havin g been lov etl'? Is, 'Bein g lovell' 1 Is,' Do I loYe'1
1
Is, 'Have I lo\·ed' 1 Is, 'Shall I be' 1 Is, 'May I be loved' 1
Is, 'Slwll I have been loved' 1 Is , ' May I write' 1
Q: Will you now begin and r epeat the whol e Table by
using' lorn,' inste:ul of' strike' 1 Will you repeat the whole
Table, i11terro~ati\'e ly, by usin!.;' write,' instead of' 'strike' 1/
Q. YVill you repc:it the wh ole Tal;lc by co nju gating the •
1
verb 'lore' in ead1 tense as you proceed 1
Q . Hrin• ~·n11 noti ced tha.t any word which will run in tlui... ~
:ih n n' T <i hlP. is a Yerb 1
Q. If it cannot be made to run in the Ji<.tssi 1 c, i:; it adire
or neuter ·!
Q. \\'i ll yon rr1wnt the TaUlo l.1 y Clll1j u~ ,, !i n:i; 'see,'
' strikes' 1
Q. "\Vill you conju gate 'drsire' throu gh the Table? .. J •
Q. Can you say ' Charles sleeps me at home 1' Is sleeps, . ,
active then 1 Have yo11 not seen that if you cannot put ' m;
1
at home,' after a verb, that it is neuter. 1
Q . This is true in almost all cases, but the verb 'to be•
sometimes, wiJI admit, 'me at home,' thus 'he took it to. ~
me at home.' I will explain thi11 to you hereafter; . it w
however lead into no mistake; for do you not know that .
verb ' to be' is always neuter 1
· ~

th'

.
117 .
Q ; W 1'll you conjugate ' '1
·
'. .
after' go' 1 Is it act'
go . Can you put 'me at home• .
ive or neuter then l B t · ·
. to say 'He is gone' ? Wh t t .
u is it not correct·
a wo verbs compose , · ()'
,
·
is ,,one 1
. Q. D oes, or does uot then h
y . a passive form 1
' t e neuter v~rb 'go', admit o(
Q. Well, let us see if it is reall

.
'
y passive. Does it denote
'.
at>en . Can you p t
is gone', and make sense
u an agent after
'He is loved by Joh11' '1 C. as we can with 'is loved' thus;
'
·
· an we say c H ·
' '
e is gone by-', any
person or thinO''l
t> .
Q. Do you not see . from this that '.
' .
passive 1 Jt will be well then t 'l' • l~ gone ' IS not really
those that are really pass1' ve
~II<_ itstrngu1sh such verbs from
'
, w1 1 not ~
. Q. We have seen that they are )assiv~ .
·m meaning, would then or would! t m form, but neuter
good term for such verbs 1
no , neuter passive, be a

an action received by an ,,. t '1

Q. 'James is come ' c Jam
.
1,
•
es 1s 1oved ' H
ver..,s; which is really p '
.
ere are two
.
ass1ve, and whicl
. f;
l Is m act neuter,
bemg passive only in form ti t .
. Q c W'J)'
' la IS, neuter passive?
.
.
i •am went before I left ' 'w· .
-'William was foun<l by his {-ti
,·
Ilham was gone.'
which is neuter passive a11d a. l1?rh. . Herc arc three verbs;
w uc sunnly ne t
d
.
'
, Wluch really passive, and why 1
~
u er, an why 1

- e9•····
LESSON XXX.
M.E.N 'l'AL EXERCISES.

·_Q. Now since yotl understand . .

,
on .of active passive a d
, m substance , the conjuga,
'
n neuter verbs I ·11
fore
you all ti d"ffi
' wi spread out be1e I erent persons of verbs
, together with all the d'ffi
, accurately adjus1 erent tenses mod
&
.
th
'.
es, c. t1iat m
you should doubt respect'
b
mg e endmg of anj
ti
.. '" . Ver ' you m:iy have something to refer to as a .gu'dpar
cuI e,

~ -~~

118

INTELLECTUAL AND

VERB TO DE.
INDICATIVE MODE.-Prese11t Tc111r,.
l'lrtrnl.
SiJtgular.
I I nm.
2 Thou urt.
a Ue, sho or it is.

1 We nro.
2 Yo 01· you nre.
3 '!'hoy uro.

Imperfect Tense.
1 We were.
I I wns.
2 We ur you wore.
2 Thou wast.
3 'l'hey were.
3 Ile wn11.
Pc1fect Tense.
J I hnve been.
1 W o ha Ye been.
2 Yo or you liuvo been.
2 Thou hn'>t been .
3 They hnve boon.
3 He hath or hns beon.
Pluperfect Tense.
1 We had been.
I I hud heen.
~ Yo or you hud IJCon.
2 Thou hnJ st been.
3 They !Jud beun.
3. He hud been.
First Future Tense.
1 I shnll or will be.
1 Wo shall or will be.
2 Thou shnlt or wilt be.
2 Yo or you shall o·r will he.
3 Th ey shull 01 will be;
3 He shull or will be.
Second Future Tense.
I I shnll hnve boen.
l Wo sh nil hnvo boon. ·
2 Yo or you will hnve been, It
2 'l'hou wilt huve been.
3 Ho will have been.
:3 They will huvc beau.
IMPERATIVE MODE-Present Tense.
.,(
1
2 Be thou, or do thou be.
2 Bo ye or you, or do ye be.~
POTENTIAL MODE.-Prcsent Tense.
l Wo mny or cnn be.
1 I mny or r.nn be.
2 Ye or you mny or can be.
2 Thou muyst or canst be.
3 They muy or can be.
3 He may or can be.
Imperfect Tense.
1 I might, could, would, or l We might, could, would,~,.
should be.
should bo.
2 'l'hou mightst,couldst,wouldst, 2 Ye or you might, could,wou~ ·
or shouldst he.
or should bo.
·
3 He might; could, would, or 3 Th ey might, could, would, · ~ ·
sho~ld be.
should be.
., ,
Perfect T ense.
1 We may or can have been •.
1 I may or can have been.
Q Thou mayst or ca nst have 2 Ye or you may or can har
heen.
been.
3 They may or can have been.
3 He may or can have been.

119

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

Pluperfect Tense.
I We might, could, wouJJ 1 or
should have been.
should have been.
·
· · 2 Thou mightst,cmildst,wouldst, 2 Ye or you mitrht,could,wouid,
,
or shouldst have been.
or should l:Uve been.
3 He might, could, would, . or ' 3 They might, could, would, or_
·: Ehould Jia,·e been.
· should hltve been. ·
·'
•
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.-Prtsent. Tt-nse.
1.If I be.
1 If we be.
2 Ifthou be.
2 Ifye or you be.
3. If he be.
3 If they be.
·
bnpe1fect Tense.
I If I were.
l ' If we were.
· ·2 If thou wert.
2 If ye or you were.
· 3 If he were.
3 ~fthey were.*

1 I might, could, ·Would or

INFINITIVE MOD:E.
,Present T ense, To be.

.

Perfect, To have been.

PARTICIPLES.
Present, Ileing.
Pe1fect, Deen.
Compound Pe1feet, Having been.

ACTIVE VER!J.

INDICATIVE MODE.-Prcsent Tci1se.
· 1 I Love.
1 We love.
2 Thou Invest.
,
2 Ye or you love'.
3 He, she, or it loveth or lc,ves. 3 They love.
Impe1fe ct Tense.
1'1 loved.
1 \iV e loved . .
.,2 Tlu;rn lovcdst.
2 Ye .o r yo u loved.
3 He loved.
3 They l()ved.
Pe1fect Tense.
I W c have loved.
2 Y c or yo u ·!Jave loved.
3 He liath or has loved.
3 They have loved.
Pluperfeet Tense..
1 I had loved .
1 W e harl loved.
2 Thou hadst loved.
2 Ye or you had .loved
3 He had loved. ·
3 They had loved. ' . ·
First Future T ense.
t I !lhall or will love. ·
l We shall or will love.
i Thou shalt or wilt love.
2 Ye or you shall or will love.
8 He shall or will love.
.3 They shall or will Jove.

*'.fh~ remaining tenses of the Subjunctive,· arc varied like tl1e
.bd1cat1ve and Potential Modes.

'I

120

-

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

INTELLECTUAL AND

PASS IVE VERB.

Second Future Tc1~se . .
· 1 I shall have loved.
I We shall have loved.
2 'fhou wilt have loved.
· 2 Ye or you will have loved,
3 lie will have lov ctl.
3 Th ey will have loved. · •

INDICATIVE MODE.-Present Tense.
1 We arc lovecl.
~ 1'hot.i art loved.
2 Ye or you are loved.
- 3 He is loved.
3 They are loved .
1

1 I nm loved.

. IMPERATIVE l\'IODE.

2 Love thou, or do thou love.

2 Love ye or you, er du ye love,. .

POTENTIAL MODE.-Prcsent Tense.
1 I may or can lov e .
I \V e mriy or can love . . .. .
2 Thou may st or c::inst love.
2 Ye or yo n may
ca n love.
3 He may or can love.
3 Th ey .may or ca11 love.
•· ' .
I111.pe1fcct Tense.
I I might, conlil, would, or 1 We might, could; woi11tl 1 .
~huuld love.
should love .
2. Thou mig i1tst,could st,wouldst, 2 Ye or you might, co1,11tl,
or s hould ~ t lo\' P,,
would, or should Juve.
3 H e mi g ht, could, woulrl, or 3 Th ey might, could; would, ·or
should love.
should love.
P erf ect T ense.
· 1 I nrny or can hav e love d.
1 \V c rnny or cnn ham loved.
2 Thllu mayst or can st have· 2 Ye or you may or can hnve .
' loved. ·
hl\' ed.
3 Th ey may or can have loved.
3 He may or can have loved.

or

Pl11pe1f ect T en se .
1 I might, cou lcl, would, or l \V n might , could, w~:iuld, ,~
should have loved.
s huuld have lov ed.
·. ' ·
2 Thou m1ghtst,co uld;;t,wouldst, 2 Ye or you might, coultl,wo\)I ;
or should st have love d.
or i::hould hav e loved . · · . .. '
3 H e might, co uld, would; or 3 They might, cou ld, would,
sh ould have loved .
~d10uld have lov(:d.
·

or

SUBJUNCTIVE MODE .-Pr escnt Tense .
] If W C ]llVC.
1 If I lov e.
2 lf ye or you love.
2 Jr thon love.
3 Ifthey love.
3 If he love.

1 If I lo\•ed
2 If thou love<l,,t.
3 J f he loved.

Imperfect Tens e.
l Jfw e loved.
2 If ye or you loved.
3 If they loved.

INFINITIVE MODE.
Perfect, To have loved '·
P1·esct1.t, To love.

PARTICIPLES.
Present, Loving.

Perfect, Loved

Compound Perfect, Having loved.

121

Imperfect Tense.
1 We were loved.
2 Thou wast loved.
2 Ye or, you were loved.
3 He was loved.
. 3 They were loved.
Perfect Tense.
1·1 have been loved.
1 We have been loved. ·
91 Thou hast been loved.
2 Ye
YOU have' been loved.
3 He hath or has been loved.
3 They i1ave been loved ..
"Pluperfect Tense.
· 1 J had been loved.
1 We had been loved.
. i Thou hadst been loved. ·
2 Ye or you had been loved.
'' 3. He had been loved.
3 They h~d been loved.
First Futu1·e Tense.
1 I ,11hnll or will be. loved.
1 We shall or will be lov~d.
~
9 'Ihou shalt or wilt be loved. 2 Ye or you shall or will be · -·
loved.
'
.
3 He shall or will be loved.
3 They .shall or. will be loved.

J I was loved.

or

Second Future Tense.
1 ~ I s.hnll · have been loved.
1 We shall have been loved.
t 'fhou wilt have been loved.
2 Ye or you will havf' been loved.
3 They will have been loved.

I. Be thou

. IMPERATIVE MODE.
2 Be ye or you loved, or do ye

loved, or do thou be

loved .

beloved .
I

POTENTIAL MODE.-Prcsent Tense.
can be loved.
1 We may or can be loved. · .
I 'l'hou mayst or canst be lov- 2 Ye you ~ay or can be lov~
' ed. ·
ed.
•
~He may or ca,n be loved.
3 They may or can be loved.

fl may or

1

or

l .

Imperfect Tense.
•'
1 might, could, would or 1 ·we might, could, wou'id, or
· · should be loved.
should be loved.
I Thou mightst,couldst,wouldst, 2 Ye or · you might, could,
• or shouldst be loved. ·
would, or should be. lovfld.
.S Ne might, could, would, or 3 They might, "could1 would) or
·; ! should be loved.
; should be loved.
,
·

l

JI

,

122
1
2
3

1

2
3

'1
2

3

1
2
3
1
2
3
1
2
3
]
2
3

1
2
3

PRACTICAL
GRAMMAR.
.
. .
' .

INTELLECTUAL AND

~.

Pcrfect Tense.
I may or can 1, ave b een l ov· 1 We may or can have been .
loved .
·
ed. mayst or cans t l1a"' e 2 Ye or )·Ou m ay or r.an
Thou
been loved.
bee n loved.
.
..
He may or can have been 3 Th ey may or can have been··.
loved.
lovt:d.
·
Pluperfect T ense.
.
· Id , . or 1 We mi ght , could, would,
I might, cou Id , wou
d o~•,
should have been loved .
sh ould hu vc been 1ovc .
d
Id t 2 Ye or you mi ght ,could,would,
Thou mightst, coul st,wou s
or should hav e been lov•
or shouldst h a ve bE:e'n lovecl.
·•
J.i!dr:ii11ht, could, would, or 3 They might ,
shot~d have been lo\' ed.
should have men ove .
SUBJUNCTIVE MODE.-Pr esent T ense.
1 If we he lov ed.
If I he loved.
2 If ye or you be loved.
If thou be loved .
3 If ih ey be loved.
If he be loved .
Imperfeel Ten se .
1 If we were love d.
1
If I were lov 1~ d .
2 If ye or you w ere loved.
If thou wer t loved.
3 If they were lov ed.
If he were Jo,·ed.
P e1fect T ense.
If I have been loved.
1 If we have been loved.
If thou hast been loved.
2 lf ye or you ha ve been lovt1d.,
If he hath or has bee n loved .
3 If th ey h av e be en loved. '
J'lup e1f ec t Tense.
'J d
] 1f we had been loved.
Ifl l1a db een l ovc d .
b
lfthou hadst Lee n loved.
2 If ye orlydubhad l e~ nd ove , .
If he had been loved.
3 If th ey rn
een O\ e ·
'
First F uture Tense .
If I shall or will be love d:
1 If we ~hall or ~v i\\ be lo~jf'
If thou shalt or wilt be lo\•ed.
2 If ye or yous 18 or WI • ,
loved.
.
.I'
If he shall or will be loYcll
3 If they shall or will be loYil~
Second Future T ense.
~f
If I shall have been loved .
1 If we shall have been loved.
If thou shalt have been loved. 2 If ye or you shall have
loved.
If he sha11 have been lov ed.
3 If they shall ha v.e been l~J

h~, v~,

c~uld, Ivou~,, ot-

INFINITIVE MODE.
Present Tense, To be loved.

Perfec.t 1 To have been l~ve

p ARTICIPLES.

Preient, Being loved.
Compound Perfect,

Perfect or Passive,
Having been loved.

Loved.

MEN'r AL E.XERCISES.

.
Q. 'I see, I saw, I have seen.' Which word is the participle here, ' sa"" or 'seen' 1 Which is · the impeyfoct: te~se,
'saw' or' seen' 1 Are they alike 1
,
Q. 'I loved, I have loved.' Ate the imperfe_ct tense ~d
perfoct participle alike here? Do~s the ve.rb 'love,' appe~r
~o be more regular in this r~s.pect, than the word ' see' 1
Q. ' .I hate, hated, have hated.' Or PRES. hate, l.111P.
~ated, PER. p AR. hated. .Does 'hate' . form its imperfect
tense and perfect participle by adding D or ED to the present,
~.hate' 1 ·
.

i,

r

· Q. PRES. honor, IMP. honored, PER. PAR. honored.What <lo you add to ' honor' here, to form its imperfect tense,
and perfect participle 1
Q.· Do you . not no\v see that the imperfect tense, and perfect participle, of some '°'erbs, are alike, and some unlike 1
Also that some are formed by adding D or ED to the present,
• 'honor,' and some not, as 'see.'
Q. Well, then, when the imperfect tense !\lld perfoct partit'iple are alike, and formed by adding v or Eb to the present,
are they or are they not, more regular in these respects, than
f4ose verbs which are formed differently, such as 'see, saw,
1_een,' and " write, wrote, written' 1
Q. Would you then call such verbs as are formed by addjng
nor ED to the present; regular, or irregular verbs 1
Q. If n or ED is not added to the present, as in the for~go­
Jog manner, would you call the verb regular or .irregular 1
.~ Is 'despise,' ·. a regular or irregular verb,, 1md why 1. h
1
11)41ke,' a regular or irr-egular verb 1 Is 'abominate,' regular
~ 1,l'regular 1 Why 1 What kind of verb is }~ope'.? Why 1 I~
•feJoice'.? Why 1 Is 'love'? Why 1 Is ' adJµst' 1 Why~ ls
•write.'
1. ·Why 1 Is 'dream' ? Why 1 Is f dispose'
1 Why· ,1 ·:
~ .
..
PJ;tES.
IMP.
PER. :fAR.
I write now.' ' I wrote yesterday. 1 ' I have written to-day.'

'no you or do you not see th~t we .~an joiri
to the .
jluent, yesterday, to the impe1fect1 and ltave with .the pet"-

.4:

now,

124

P'RACTICA.L G'RAM~AR.

INTELLECTUAL AND

feet participle of any verb, in the indicative mode, and make .,
sense 1
!'
Q. Will you join these words in this manner with 'lov~'1 '
With ' thou' 1 With ' ta_ke' 1 With 'wear'1 With ' shake' 1' '.
Q. You need not speak the words ' now,' ' yesterday,' and ·.
' have,' for can you not join them in your mind, and merely.
speak the PRESENT, IMP. PER. PAR . thus, PRES. write IMP.
write, PER. PAR. written.
1
Q. Will you speak 'throw' in this manner 1 Will you speak
'strike '1 Speak 'wear'? Is ' wear' a regular or irregular
verb, and why 1 Will you speak 'cost' 1 ·wm you speak·
' feed' 1 Will you speak ' am,' or the verb ' to be' 1 Is thi1
regular or irregular, and why 1 ·w ill you speak 'confine' 1i Ii•
1
this regular or irregular, and why 1
:,T •
Q. Since all verbs may be reduced into two great div1sion9,
or classes, the one regular and the other irregular, it will con-+
sequently be necessary to state this fact. But, in doing thft,
you may sometimes be in doubt with regard to the imperfect
tenses, and the participles; for in some verbs, as you hate
seen, these are like the present, and in others again the im~
perfect and perfect participles, are sometimes alike aildsom'•
times different. To answer any doubts which you at
time may have, resp ecting the irregular verbs, the followi ' ·
list is inserted. Will you speak the present ancl imperijd .
tenses, also the perfect participle, of the whole list, !lS I name ·
the present of each verb 1
.$ 1

anf\,

. ' Pruent.
·· .. '<Brina ·
"
Build
: Bmst
' Buy
Cast ,
:•.catch · ·
· ., Chide

Choose
Cleave*
'Cleilvet
Cling
Clothe
Come
Cost
· Crow
Creep
~. Cut
Daret ~
Dareif 5
Deal
Dirr0
Do

Dr~w

· Jlrive
Drink
Dwell
Eat
Fall
' Feed ·
• Feel
Fight
P'ind ·
•Flee
Fllng

'Fly
Fo~~et

A LIS'r OF IRREGULAR VERBS.
Present.

bnpr.1fcct. Per. Part.

Present.

Impe1fect . Per.Ptl;J

Abide
Am
Arise
Awalrn

abode
was
arose
awoke
bare
bore
beat

Bereave
Beseech
Bid

bereft
beref\ •lii
besought _besougb '
bid 1 bade bidden 1.l
·
bid ·tt •f
bound
bound ' bit
bitlt'n
bled
hied"
blew
hlowia.
broke
brok '
bred
· brod

Bare* .
Bearf
Beat

Re gin
Bend

began
bent ·

*To bring forth.

nhode
been
arisen
awakcd R
born
borne
beaten, ~
beat
5
begun
bent R

tTo carry

Bind
Bite
Bl erd
Blow
llreak
Breed

l1nperfect . Per.Par.
brought
brought
built
built
· hurst
burst
bought
bought
cast
cast
caught
caught tt
chid
chidden'1 ~
chose
clove, or
cleft
clung ·
clothed
came

. chid - S
chosen

?

cleft,

)

Scloven R)

cut

clung
clad R
come
cost
crowed I\
crept
cut

durst

dared

cost
crew
crept

cl ea It

dealt R
dng R
done
drew
drawn
drove
drive n
drank
drunk
dwelt
'dwelt R
eat or ate§ eaten
fell
fallen
fed
fed ·
felt
felt
fought
fought
found
found
fled
fled

~rJ

flun(J'
0

flung

flew
flown
forgot forgotten, ~

forgot
forsook

5

forsaken

Have
Hang
Hear

Hew
Hide
Hit
Hold
Hurt
Keep
Knit
Know
Lade
Lay
Lead

Leave
Lend

L~t

laded
laid
Jed
left
lent
let .

Per.Par.
grown
had
hung
heard
hewn it
hidden;~
hid
hit
held
hurt
ke_{lt
knit R
known
laden

s

laid
led
left

lent
let
lain
faden R
lost :

made

Put
Read

p~t

met
mown
paid
put

read

read .

Uend

rent '

Rid
Ride

R!ng
Rise

Rive
Run

paid

·rent
rid
rid
rode
rode, or l
riddenf S
rung, rang . r~ng
rose
risen
rived
riven .
ran

run
sawn ,R

Say

sawed
said

See
Seek
Sell

saw
sought
solil

~end

sent ,set
shook
shaped

Saw

Set
Shake

went

gone ·

Shape :

graved

graven

ground

ground

'Pronounced et,

hurt
ltept
knit
knew,

Joy

frozen

• ' T~ stick, or adh(;lre. t'ro split.
1
' "tTo venture. 1T To challenge.

Jiit
held

loaded
lost
made
met
mowed

got
gilt R
girt R
given

gave

grew
had
hung_
heard
hewed
hid '

Li ell

got
girt

lmperfe~e.

Load
Lose
Mako
Meet
Mow
Pay

froze

gilt

1

Present.
Grow

' 125

said
seen
sought
sold ·
sent_ .
set
11haken
shaped, l

sbapen RS

Shave
11haved
shaven it
l!To lie down.
'' · . · '
t Ridden is nearly obsolete •. _;
11"

..
12G
Present.
Shear
Shed
Shine
Show
Shoe
Shoot
Shrink
Shred
Shut
f.ling
Sink
Sit
Slay
Sleep
Slide
Sling
Slink
Slit
Snute
Sow
· Speak
Sp~ed

Spend
Spill
Spin
Spit
Split
Spreacl
Spring .
St11n1l :· ·
Steal · ·
Stick ..
Sting :_

bnpe7fect. Per.Part.
sheared
shorn
shed
shed
shone
shone* R
shown
eh owed
shod
shod
shot
i::hot
sl1runk
shrunk
shred
shred
shut
shut
sung,sang sung
sunk 1sank sunk
sat
sat
sl ain
slew
sl ept
slept
slidden .
slid
slung
sl11n"
slunk
slunk
slit .s litted a
slit
smote
s111itt e11
sowed
sown H
spoke.n
spoke
sped
!>ped
spent
spent
. spilt R
s~ilt ·
r:ipun
spun
spit ·
Ppat, spit }
spittent
split
eplit
spread
spread
sprung
sprnng ~
sprung )
stood
stood
stole
stolen
stuck
stuck
stung
stul'lg ·

*Pronounced slwn.

Present.

127

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

INTELLECTUAL AND·

Imperfect. Per .Part:

Stink
Stride

stunk
stunk J ,,·
strode or } stridden.
strid
·
.'
Strike
Etruck
struck
st.rick en
strnncr
String
str~111g _ · .1 .
"'
strove
Strivo
stnven .
Strow or ~ strowed or~ strow"
strew
strewed
. strowecl
sfrewed
swore
Swe3 r
sworn
swet
swet
Sweat
swell eel swollen R
Swell
swum
Swim
swam ~ :»
swum
Swing
swung
swung
took
Talrn
tak en
T each
taught
taught
tore
Tear
torn
told
told
T ell
Think
thought tlw11glit
th riv.en
Thrive
th rove
Throw
threw
thrown I
thrust
Thrust
thru;;t
Tread
trod
trodden ,
wax ed
'Vux
\Vear
wore
worn
Weave
wove
woven \1
Weep
wept
w ept
Win
won
won
Wind
wound wound
Work
'nought wrought ~r
worked a
Wring
wrun~
Write
wrote

OTl

j

••

t Spitten is nearly obsolete.

Q. Quoth, you know; means said, as 'quoth he,' but can
we say ' he hath quothed'1 Is ' quoth,' then, a regular or de., lective verb 1 Why1 The principal defectiw Yerbs_are these :
PREStNT.

May,
Can, ·
'V'ill,
Shall,
Must,
Ought,

IMPERFECT.

:P1m. PARTICIPLE.

Might,
Could,
Would,
Should,
Must;
Ought,
Quoth,

Q. Which Yerbs, in the foregoing list, are auxiliary, aud
I
which
'
-~ . '
. are not?
.
, · . Q. Is the perfect and imperfect tense of' ought' the sam e!
1
Q. This, however, need not confi.1se you, for can you make
1 a sentence with 'ought,' without haring an infinitive following
it, as, 'He ought - - ' what 1 ' He o(tght to <lo, to act,' &c. 1
Q. 'He ought to go now.' Is 'ought' here of -the prese11t.
or imperfect tense 1 True, it is present; and is not ' to go'
present also? Welli then, when an infinitive, of the present
tense, follows ought, in what tense will 'ought' be.1
Q. 'James ought to htive gone.' Does this phrase den o t~
. 1omething passing now or sometime ago, yesterday, perhaps 1
In wiiaf tense then is 'ought' 1
: Q. In what tense is 'to ha\•c gone;' after 'ought'1 vVell,
then, when 'ought,' has an infinitive of the perfect tense, af'i ter it, in what tense will 'ought' be, present or impe~fect t

MENTAL EXERCISES.

Q. ' I ought to go, I ought to have gone.>
er say, 'I shall ought,' or 'I may ought' 1
Q. Is 'ought', then, or is it not, used only in some oft
the modes and tenses 1 Well, then, since some of its model
and tenses are wanting, and since defective means wanting.
what would be a good namo for all such \"erbs ' as are def ·
the, either as it regards modes 1 tenses, or participles .1

LESSON XXXI.
.

MENTAL

I

EXERCIS~S.

Do you recollect how the perfed tense of a verb in tha
lndi~atjve mode is formed 1 Is it formed by joining ' .l1a\·c,'
.· ith the perfect participle 1
·
·

\Q•. Will you examine the foregoing list of irregular n~tbs.
I 1,

I

128

129

INTELLECTUA I. AND

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

and then correct the following expressions as I read thern to
you, at the same time telling why they are wrong1
; ii
'They have cleaved the wood.' ' I seen him at play.'
·', i)
'The snake creep yesterday.' ' They sat their trap.' ·. .. 1!
'Wood is cleave.'
'The oak is shakes.'
' They have d1·ew water.'
' The men sawn the wood.' '
' I done it sir.'
' The bird has sit sometime.'
' They drive me away yester- ' They slain him.'
day.'
' The man was slew.'
. ,
' They have did it.'
' The soldiers smit him., '
' They speak to me yesler' Boys ate now too fast.'
day.'
' She fallen from a tree.'
' The birds have Jlew away.' ' Charles stolen my cake.' .
'I forsaken him.'
'The boys have strove to ex·
'He has get his vlace .'
eel.'
' They gone yesterday.'
' The wind strown the seeds.'
' William has gave his book ' He swimmed over the river.'
away.'
'He was took in his 'own
' \\Then the grass is grew.'
guile.'
' I known him a long time.'
' The instructor
'They have lade<l the ship.'
well.'
'They laden the slnp.'
'He thrown the ball.'
' The i:un has rose, let us ' He has wrote his copy.' ·
risen.'
'He come to school.'
Q. ' 'W illiam found his son pursuing a bird which had b~
tamed.' How many nouns are there in this sentcnc(; 1 Why ·
a.re they nouns ? Arc they proper or common, and . why t ·
W.hat is their gentler, number and person 1 Why 1 What cj.id _
William do 1 To what then is William the nominative and
by what rule 1 What was tho son pursuing ? What then 'the rule for 'bird' ?
Q. How many verbs are in the sentence, an<l why are that
verbs 1 Are they regular or irregular, and why 't Active, pU•
she, or neuter, and why ? Will you speak the present an~~
imperfect tenses of the indicative, and their perfect pafticP
ples 1 In what. mode are they, and why 1 Will you conju~
each 1 In what person is each; and why 1 In wl1at numbe~ll'
each, and why 1 What or who, found t What then ii*
'found' agree with, and by what rule t
•t
({. What 'had been tamed' 1 Is it not 'which,' ref~
to bird 1 What then does ' has been tamed,' agree w.ith,,Mil
by what rule 1

· ; t, Q·. Are there any personal pronouns in the sentence 1

What . is their gender, number, and per,son? Why ?· With

What do · they agree, and by what rule ?'- Will you decline
th'ern? In what case are they, and why 1 If in the possessive,
by what word are they governed, and . what is the rule for
. the possessive case of 1iouns t
·
'\ ·
' Q. 'Which word in the sentence is a participle, and why 1
Is it a present, or a perfect participle, and why ? Who was
pursuing 1 What then does 'pursumg' refer to, and by what
rule'!
·
·

Q. 'Which word is. the relative, and why 1 What is its gender, number, and person, and why t What does it relate to, and
by what rule ? Does it not determine the P.nding ol' had been
~amed'1 To what then is it the nominative case, and by what
rule 1
·
·
~" Q.. Will you now parse the followit1g seri.tences in the same
manner as the last sentence was parsed 1 .
1
The best men have faults.' 'William's hat was lost.'
' T~1ey ~egan to improve their · 'Jam es wrote his last copy.'
· tuna.
· 'Human nature commits ma, '1Envy. nou,rishes many " bad
ny errors.' .
· r pass10ns.
' Jes us had finished all these
'.The man whom my friends
· sayings.'
·
· support misuses him.'
.... ~ '

'

. EX~RCISES
FOR 'J'HE SLATE
OR PAPER:
.
.
.
. .
.
'

Q. Will you class on your slate as you did a few lessons
~l!,c~, ea.c h word in the foregoing parsing exercises t .
.
• · Q. Will you write down twenty phrases each having the
~9:1re nominatives arn:i the sa1ne objects, but different irregu, ~'. ,verbs in the ~ndicative mode, present tense 1 Will you
',.:'Yfite the same verbs with their nominative and objective
. cases in the potential mode, present tense 1 Will° you write
, t n sep.tences, each ,having the same nominaforns and the
Jame objective cases, but .P-ach '.verb different, and regular 1
~ill you write the same phrases interrogatively J Will you
wr~te twenty sentences, .having the same nominati ms, and the
.-!ame ·r egular verbs, but each having a different irregular verb

•

I

130

INT~LLECTUAL

AND

131

PRACT1CAL GRAMMAR.

in the infinitive mode, present tense 1 Will you w,rite twenty
sentences,. each having the verb 'to be,' and each in a ~iffer~
e.nt mode, or tense; also, join to each, a perfect participle,,u
'I was/change, to ' I was loved 1' ·w m you write fifteea
phrases, each having a different present active participle, th~•. ,
same agents and the same verbs, in the subjunctive mod~ :\ '
Will you write fifty objects to this phrase, ' Harry is beat·
ing-- ?'

LESSON XXXII.

·. 'Q. 'Rufus has beaten him shatrtefttlly.' · Which is the ad. verb here, and why 1
·· ' ·
, : ''Q. ., He learns well.'· Which is the adverb here, ·and why1
' Q. 'I must go soon.' · What w'o td describes the-·ad of go. Ing either as to time, or in.some other respect 1..'
·:.:. Q. What part of speech then is 'sooh,' and wl1y.1
Q. 'Where shall I go ?' What 'vord describes the act of
going as it regards the place 1 What part of speech, then is
'.where,' and why1
·
: Q. 'I love you much.' What word her.e desc~ibes the act
of loving, as it regards tlie degree 1 What part of speech then
is ' much 1'
.
'
. . ' .'
·· Q, Well, then, do you .not see that adverbs.may describe
, the manner; place, time and degree, of actions 1
Q. This is. a good definition of adverbs, will you repeat it 1
· · · Q. ' ~ ery industrious girls will learn.' Can we say ' very
. girls' 1 ·
1
, Q. Does.' very' describe girls, then 1 Does it not describe
'industrious,' that is, tell in what degree, or how much, they
[the girls] are 1ildustrious 1
. : •Q. ·' He writes very diligently.' What word describes
the act of writing?· What part of speech then is 'diljgently'·1'.
What word tells how ' diligently' 1 Whai part of speech
does 'very' describe no'v 1
• , Q. 'l saw him writing attentively.' Is theserb 'saw,' or
the participle 'writing~' described by the word 'attentively' t
What part of speech does 'attentively' descriqe · then 1 . · .
.~·Q. , Adjectives and participles, you know, describe ·nouns,
~ly~ but have we not now found other parts
speech des:...
Cfibed by words that are neither adjectives. nor p1,uticipl~s? ..
,.· Q . .Well then let us class . them all under one head, ~nd
1iq~ .the verb is mo.re frequently described or qualified .by.
these· words, than .. any other parts of speech, would or would
i.oj1Adverb. be a gc;>od name for these describing words,1, . ,. ..
· Q. When we meet adverbs, it will be". "\vell to state:: how,
parts of speech they qualify. Would . you, then, or
•

MENTAL EXERCISES.
Q. 'Rufus highly esteems him.' ·what parts of speecb:
are these words, 'Rufus,' 'esteems,' and' him'1 Why 1
Q. Does 'highly' describe 'Rufus' or 'him,' or does it
rather describe 'esteems,' that is tell how he esteems him ?.t
Q. < William sings admirably.' Does the' word 'admir~-'
bly,' describe the manner of singmg 1
Q. Does admirably then describe' sings' 1 Adjectives, .you
know, describe nouns, can' admirably,' be an adjective if i\
describes a verb 1
'
Q. Have you not noticed a vast many words of this -de·
scription 1 Well, then, we shall want a name for this class, ·
shall we not 1
Q. Did you observe that 'highly,' was joined to the Vf!rb
' esteems,' and ' admirably,' to the verb sings 1
Q. Well, then, since a.d, (from the Latin ad-to,) signifiea
1•
to, can we .or can we not, make a word with ad, and verb, tbU
will give nn idea of a word joined to a verb 1 What will tha(
word be then ?
· ·
Q. Adverb, you are right ; will you now explain to . ~
when a word is called an, adverb, and why it is so calle<l ( .· ,,
Q. ' James acts nobly.' Does ' nobly' describe the man _
ner of acting1 What part of speech then is' nobly,' aml · w~·
I

"
'

-

,

'

,

l

,· ,

'

of

•any
•

I

•

•

•

'

,

"

'

'

1

'

' I

'

132

!.RAC'.l 'I,CJ\L P-¥-~MAR.

INTELLECTUAL AND

would you not say, that adverbs describe or qualify verbs,
participles, adjectives, and other adverbs 1
· ;
Q. You shall now have the rule stated for you as a con~
venient reference : will you repeat it1
RULE XI.

Adverbs qualify verbs, participles, adjectives, ·and other
adverbs.
Q. ' He will come soon.' ' She will come sooner than
he, and Mary will come soonest.' Which are the adverbs
here 1 Are they compared 1 Hence you see that adverbs
have comparison like adjectives, do they not 1
Q. What degree is ' soon' 1 Is ' sooner' 1 Ts ' soonest' 1
Q. 'Wisely, more wisely, most wisely.' From the!le
examples, how do adverbs ending in LY, appear lo be com~·
pared 1
Q. ' Industrious, more industrious, most industrious.' ·In·
dustrious, you know, is an adjective. By what words is it
described or qualified 1 What part of speech then · is more
and most?
· .~.
Q. ' Prudent, less prudent, least prudent.' What lvordt
qualify the adjective 'prudent' 1 What part of speech then ii
' less' and 'least' 1 Why ? In what degree is each adjecti\·t''
and why 1
1t l
Q. ' I love you none at all,' ' I love you much,' ' I' lov6
you a great deal,' 'I have struck you many times,' ' I struck
you a few days ago.' Are there any phrases here that mere
ly describe the manner or time of acting 1 Is, 'none at ·all1
one describing phrase 1 Which are the others 1 Well, then,
since the whole phrase describes, would you call those
ses adverbs or adverbial phrases 1
Q. ' The more diligently he studi~s, the better he ·W '
learn.' Here are three adverbs, which are they, and why~
Q. Are there any alfticlcs? What do they come befonf
Are U1ere any nouns for them to agree with 1 according 'to
rul~ for the article 1
·

phif

...

': i~s

.·>··'Q. ·Do rtot:these ar~i,des .,d,µ _ for;c~; to _the. .comparative ·.de- .

·. gi:~.e ?fad. v~rbs 1_Can ;r.ou . in~. parsing: .an artid~ s~y, ·that .it
,f·~~longs to a noun, when th.e re .is, nope11 , · · ~ ., " ::-, "" . . ·
··, 1,:·Q._ Would you rather say, that articles a.r e put. b~fore the
I' ~omparab ve and superla~iye ·degr.ee.s to add force to them 1 ·'
·': .;.·.Q. -Will you e~plain .to .me ·when articies qo\10t belong to
tiouns, and what is to be dorie with 'them in parsing 1
. .
·, : : Q. ~ M~re men than b9YS ~ame to town.' Does ' mor~ '
1 . d¢scribe or qualify .a11 adj~·etive: or the ,noun 'men 1' Is it
1.:'.ll~.verb then 1 Why not?. If it cilescribes I.a noun; · and 'not a
·, ~erb; participle, adject~yc, or, adyero, what prt,of spe~cb is
·"It, · a.~d why 1
· , ·
·
·.
;,• ··;:Q., .' I a~· mor~ temperate than he:' · Wl~at par~ qf spe~ch
,does nlore q~ahfy, here 1 What part of spct'ech then is it
· · and why 1
·
.
···::Q. D.o Y.ou see then that :~ word may. be one .part of '
.
; '.speech m one place, and another. in a different place 1 ..
·: ,Q:. 9an you,. howe~·er, or .can.you no~, al~ays tell by the
sense, what part of speech each word is 1 . · · · ·. : · ·
~;.:'. .Q: ,' Yesterd~y .he :came here.' 'Ye~ierday's lesson.'~as
\m~re difficult than to:. daJ'~.'. rn the first example does, Yes:~~.r,day ,' specify the time .o f co1i1ing ? . ·Wh~t p~rt ·o f speech is
~~t. then 1 ' Yesterday's · ,l,e sson.' Is · not · ~Yesterday'~' . thtl
r r.~!11'~• merely; of some portioi1 .?f tirne, ~nd. if~· nan\~ :wliat
p~rt~of speech is it 1 .
- .,
· · · .-·· :,.·

1

:n

1

.

,

•

'

·• .. :.Q; .What ar~ the

two parts of speech that' 'Ye~terday's'
~~d .:'Y esterda:y ,' !!ta~1d. fo_r, in these last two exaclples 1 ":. ·
· ~:~· · ' Where urnch is given lnuch will be required.' ·What
)1- ~~yen ~ Is not' much,'_' that is, a great niany tl1ings 1· .Wh~t
p~rt of spe~ch then is ' much 1' ·
·
· · · -~'
1
'Much . ~oney · is trc;mb1esome.' ~Yhat does ',much'
Nc~i~e l~~re 1 tyhat ~art of speech is ' much~ · now:1
,
.....Q. I~ :IS much better to suffer .wrong than 'to do .' wrong..'
W~~.t - ~.oe~ ; 'much' . a~scrip~ now 1. 'What part ~f speecn·is it
en1 .
·
:,
· ·, 1

.

,.,9'·

..,Q. How many

different parts of .speecl;
12

h~·ve· ~e. lfouhi:l

134

-

INTELLECTUAL AND

PR;AC'rICAL ·,GRAMMAR.

that the single word, 'much,' may be, by being placed in .di(~
1
ferent situations 1
i
'
·
· ·'
· · ~ '! • ~,..(
· · Q. '.Men eagerly pursue happiness but they often lnista~e·
the true way.' How many adverbs are there in this 1 !en~~~
tence, and wl1y are they adverbs 1 What is the :rule foi: each~ ·
Is either of them compared 1 Which is it, and ~ill . you .co~· ·
pare it 1·
.
· · ' ,., ·· •

. \V~·: us~ 'smells' in th,e other, 'is.' In orde.r to assist you . in .
. re~ov~ng any doubt, ·respecting: the U~e . of the ll4verb; I .will .
die;. you a test. .The verb '.to ·be', a:s :f'ou, may .see_. ~bo~e, -:
fe.q~ires the word immediately joined 'Yith it to be .an adj~c­
~ye, and cons~quently when any ye_rl;>,, in any mode am~ tense~ ,
m~~ be chang~d ~or ·the ve.r b, 'to .~e.,' without cJestroying th'l
~ sens~, t.he qua.hfy1.n~ word must be an adjective. · ' To ilJ.usJ~te th1~, I , will gIYe you, son,ie :. examples. Would you then.

Q. Will you now begin and parse
going sentence, and also in the following senteilces 1 ·
'He that acts wisely, deserve:3 praise.' Modesty is a qualA ·
ity that highly adorns a woman.' 'Ann does well, Charlotte(,.
does better, and \Villiam does the best of all.' 'The sooner .
we confess our faults the better.' 'He cheerfully perfurm~ ·
his task.'
·
·'. ~i'
.Q. In the following expressions, adjectives and
are in some instances used correctly, and in others in~or~~ct­
Jy, will you teH me which are ' wrong and why; as I ·t!!.Bd
them to you 1
·.:·'
,;He is indifferent honest.' 'Mary reads proper, recit~ct
(If wrong, why 1)
handsome and compmi.es ac·"
'Charles acts noble.'
curate.' ,
:1 ·
' William is a noble fellow.'
' She replied very gravely';t,' '
'It w.as in17enio~s contrived.' 'Of a true good man ..' ~. ~
'He 1s an rngemous man.'
'The rose smells sweet, ·or
'His money is near spent.'
the rose smells sweetly?!.
'James acts agreeable to his . Q . Perhaps it may be di(lic'tik
orders.'
for you to decide in the'
Q..' Docs this mean tliatJnm cs
expressions, whether to'u11
is agreeable or does agreeathe acljective sweet or"'
ble t1ualify his acting 1 n;r nst
adverb sweetly.' . ' _. ~,
the word then be an adJcc: - Q. 'The rose smells· swee
tive or au· adverb 1
noes not this mean ihat
'He performed his task exrose is sweet 1
.:•11
cellent well.'
.
.,, (l
Q . . \<Vell then, is the verb 'smells' qualified by s\ve~t, ~..:nq,minalive, 'rose' 1 If a noun is qualified must you us~ t •
a.dje~tive <SWeet,' Or the adverb, <Sweetly' 1
,• I
Q. 'The rose smells sweet.' ',The rose is sweet.' Is th ~
&ny material difference here in the sense ? In the one ·~·

,?>

'

!.A"·;\~

,,y,.

(.

~

'

:. ( .

.

·,'He i~ diligently and att~ntively ~or diligent and attentive'1 .
; . 'She will be happy, or happily' 1
.
. .:
; .'.}le looks eold, or coldly' 1
. .- .
: ':' She looks cold on,him' 1 Cai1 ~e· u.s~ . ' is,' ,for '<tookss and .
J1l~e sense 1 Would you then say ' She ~ooks cold on him,'
Ot'' coldly on him' 1

Will you correct th~ following ' examples that'
.· ~~ong, and tell me why, as I ·r ead them to you 1
.. , ~he lives freely [is] from ·- care.'. : : ·

~e

,.Q_.

·
·

;'.~~' He liv~s . free at anothe(s. expense.' ·
'He .feels warmly
'· ·
•
•

sil'

"ffi, ,

·

.

·

·

·

'. 1

••

I

(f He feels warm the insult offered . hhn.' · i

' .

· '

:. ' '.H e .became ·sincerely and ".Irt1.1otisly.'
I
' '
·. . '
( .'
l'f... H.
e became sincere vittuous.·'
··
., , .
' :
,.,, i lfllrriet always .a ppears neatly. I . . 'She dresses ·ne~t..,. '
.· ~ Q~aries has grown great 'by his ~isdom> '.. ~ · iJ~ · ·is grown
· ahn his reputation.'
· ·. · ·
· ·· - .~.;... · ; · .: : ·

' ~fheyr ·now

appear happily. . They now·. appea;

.
nest'.
··~?e: statement seems exa~tly.'

•• j

. '

hap~y
·in
. .. . .

.

,\

..

·.":

·r?e st,atement .seems · exact in point.; ·
1

. H.o~: ii'w eetly .the

hay smells.'
· ..
·. o\v dElligh~ful .the couqtry 'appears.' .
i:ffqw 'pleasant .t he, fields look.'·
)rhe : Clouds look darkly'. ' .'· ·· •: .,
t he' appl~s taste · sourly.~;
,a ) •

·,

j

I

'

.

_\,,

.

'

'

,,.

J

.

,,
,r

·.

~

..

\

1

~:

•

' ~·
'

;_

-~

;, \

.
'·

'

;·

-

t.:if
!i
'~
~'
1;

't i.

~~~
·:! \~
·~ -.~

"
:~ !
JJJ
;.;.-

-~

'~~-;·

,I

..

;..:

'i..ll.

~~~{

"'

y:

:.~

·'r-<

~·

,.'\.\

J~,:·

136

1NTELLECTUAL AND

liRAc~~cA~

No'I't.-"The directions contained in the above examples an<I ;
observations are offered as useful; not ns completo and unexcep· 1 1
tionable. Anomalies in language every where encounter us, but ' i
we must not reject rules, because they arc attended with exce~· 'i ' ·.,
tions.
. ··
' Advei:bs thou~h very numerous may be reduced to a few class, 1.
es. 'l'he followm~ are the pria~ipal. .
.. '
1. : 0f number: as,' Once, twice, thrice,' &c.
·
• ,
2. Of order: as' First, secondly,thirdly 1 fourthly 1 fifihly,lastly, ~ ,
finally, &c.
3. Of place : a~ ' Here, there, wher'e, el~ewhere, anywhel'e, ·1
somewhere, nowhere, herein, whither, hith e r, thither, upwnrdl!l'i:
downwards, forwards, backwards, whence, hence, thence, whither• · .~
soever, &c.
·· ·
'
4. Of time .
, .·.·
Of time present: as 'NO\••, to-day,' &c.
Of time past : as ' Already, before, lately, yesterday, heretofqre,
hitherto, long since, long ago,' &c.
•.
Of time to come: as' To-morrow, not yet, hereafter, henceforth, l
henceforward, by and by, instantly: presently, immediately,
straightways,' &c.
. ,.
Of time indefinite: as, 'Oil, often, oft-times, oflentin.e.s, sortie- ·•
tim,e s, soon; seldom, d'.1ily, wemdy, monthly, yearly, always, w.he~,
..,'
1
then, ever, never, again,' &c.
. •
5. Of quantity: as, 'Much, little, sufficiently, how mtiqh,.
enough, abundantly,' &c.
.
'.
6. Of manner or quality: as,' Wisely, foolishly, justly, 11nj1ist•
ly, quickl,y, slowly,' &c. Adverbs of quality ar~ the. most nu•
merous lond; and they arc genetally formed by nddtng the .termination ly to nn ndjcctive or participle, or changing · le intq ly 1
as ' Bad, badly; cheerful, cheerfully; able, ably ; admirable, !id•
mirably.'
.
·
,. . ·
7. Of doubt: as, 1 Perhnps, peradventure, possibly, perchance.'
.S. Of aj}irmation: as 'Verily, truly, undoubtedly, doubtle18,
c~ttainly, yea,,res, !llne,ly, il'ldeed, really,' &c.
·,·,;:'·
9. Of negation: as, Nay, no, not, by. no means, not at 011 1 .~ ·
no wise,' &c.
·
~ ..
10. Ofinte1•togation: as,' How, why, wherefore, whither;' &f. '
11. Of comparison : as,' More, most, better, best, worsei w, .
less, least, very, almost, little; alike;' &c. .
.:
, · · ,. ~·
Besides the adverbs alr.eady mentioned, there are many ~~iOJ!
are formed by a combmat10n of several ·of the preposttlofli
with 'the adverbs of place, licte, there and where : as, ' Hereo~
thereof, whereof; hereunto, thereto, \Vhereto; hereby; thereli7,
. whereby; herewith, therewith, wherewith; herein, · ther~i~
wherein; therefore, (i. e. there-for,) wherefore, (i. e. wher,e·f'ot,)
here'tipo.n, or hereon, thereupon.,pr thereon, whereupon, or W,ff~
on, &c. Except
therefore, these are seldom used.
. """~
.
.\ "
. ~~
'

There are also some adverbs wliich
ate co1rtposed'.of. i(d\ild'
'
' .;,; ·""'""" .
.and.th~ l~tter ~ inste~d of' 11.t' '· Qn/ &c, ~s ',Aside/' athitth!
'

·;·

tU\Ml.M,,\ll. '

: .~31

,f~foot,' _ ' asleep,'· ·' abqard, t ·,1a~qqr~/i ·: .hJl.bed, j; ~ ~ITT'..ql!J.191'
,,.a.float , ; a•c i

··

11

1•'1 \

I

;: :

':

·

. ~ '•

. ~~·~~"". ·!·: . ,

'

· .., · " l·

•:• ,4'\· '','..

t • ., -: ·

. . . ,.

.
.

,

}

t · ' /"

~. ~• ...

'

•

: . . ·"\ ·

I

, \,

~ ~'

I

I

,·:

;'

X,XXlIJ.·. I':: < '. ", ,'·.':;.
'

'.

L~SSON

·. '

'

QUESTIONS. ON TH~ 'ADVERB.

· .1 !·

'{

,..

' · _ What is an adverb 1 .
• ,.., Q ~ What is the nile · when
Q. Why is it so called 1
you parse an adverb 1
.
. Q. What parts of speech d~~s .· Q. For .what purpose .· does ·
, · it qualify or describe ? -· · · . ': tile · article ·re for to the ad-·
: Q. Are adverbs compared l .
verb 3 ;. .
·
_''
. .Q. .How are those ending in ' Q. What ' is ·· an adverbial
..»i LY compared 1 · · · .
. · " phrase 1 · ·
•:·1 ' , 5i
,Q. ·How are ·some , others
.•
-;
, .
· .
' '•., , compare41
''

I

•'

Q. Will you 'give: an example of an adverb . of n~mber 1
One of order 1 . One of place 1 . One of time prese:q.t 1 One of
,';time to come1 · One of time indefi,*e.1 One of: qu3,J1tity? One
, of. quality i One of tnann~r 1 Ol!e of qo:ubt.1 One .o f ~r.. c~ation 1 One of negation:1 Qne, of interr~ga~i~n 1-: Pn,~. of
1.£?.D!J>arison 1.
. , ; ,·.. ·, :·- 1 , : "
'i'.

w

•:

; ,'.,

.," ' .i."-;_· E~~RCISES .FOJt THE SLA:TE OR PAPEit. ·'

f·~~··Q. 'wm ·you \vriie down a· sjntem;~· "t~ntaiding· ~n·"· irt~c1~, .
'· ·.adjective, agent, verb,, and an :objeet, verh iti .the iriqnitlve
'
- -- - . - ' 1
"IJlOde, and an object after it 1 vVill you· write four s~qtel)ces,
each containing an .ad'\'erb . of numbed ' FoU:r; eac;l) ~,or.i.- ,
: t~~Jiing· · one of order1 Four, , hav~n~. ~dv~rbs, of"~l~c~· 1.-:-:­
rFour, two havin~ adverbs of t~me present, and two· <?fti~e
.jpe'.st!'' Twenty, tw:o having ·aqverbs ' of time to .¢oxµ.~, tw9 qf
\rm.0·1,ndefinite, two of ·qua~tlty,-\tw'o of. ~anµ.er or. q,uality,
<
rtwb of doubt, two of affi.rmahqn, tw9 of negahi:m, hyo 9f
! -•
interro$alio~, ~nd four of ~o?1pai;is_qn 1 . ·
;, . , · 1• ~· •
I Q.: Will you write ~en S,entence~, each ha".ing a. verbJin
t~1c
.l· ,
-··r "'
,,~u~Ju!1ctive mp~e, ~µ~ a_ ditr~r~n.~ te~se ~ ~i.x~. f~~~\.?~yi~tan .
.~egulai'
verb; an 11gent
1 ~nd an ~pject 1· T~? 1 each)~~yjng·~Jl
..
.
· . ··
r,
. . 1 ,
«:.of ,
-~
12""
' ' -. •.. , ._,.... '1·, '"' t~ ...
."

a

! I i~, • • I '

•

t

"

.

'

•

"

-

•

•

' ;

• 1- • '

. ~-

"'

'

•

-~

'

'

•

j-.;. ' •t

I

L

,

•

•

.

'

•

.

-

.

•

•

•

•

•

•

.

i

.

, ,

•

•

{

•

I

~

f

}

-

_..;r-

'•

138

.'

-

iN1'ELtECTUAt A:Ntl

adverb in the superlative degree 1 One, · having a pas~iV,e '
verb 1 The same meaning in an active form 1
,
,
Q. Will you write two sentences, each
hav,ing
a noun •in ..i ·
.
.
the possessive case 1 Three, with an article in e:!.ch 1 Three,
with a present and an active participle, and an object after
eacp 1 Three, each having a relative pronoun 1 Two, ,each
having a · neuter verb 1 Two, each having a
verb 1

...

.. ~ :·

.·

,

..
'

LESSON XXXIV.
·. MENTAL QUESTIONS.
' .

t,l'

Q. 'A rat run across the road, oYer the drain, into a house,.
. over th.e. bridge, ne~u the street, beside the water, froni the , ;
river, in the town of .Hartford, in the state of Connecticut.'•
.How many nouns are there in this sentence 1 Why are they ~
nouns ? How many articles are there, and why 1 ·
.. ·.1..i_· :;
Q. How many verbs are there 1 Which are they, and whyt '
'What ar~ the rules for each 1
·., ·
Q. Perhaps you do not know what parts of speech 'across,'
' ·over/ 'near,' &c. are. Let us see if they have a gene~
meaning, for if they have, we shall of course wish to claa1
them as we have others, and give them a name. Wiil yJu .
pick out the words in this example that have a kind of
~
eral meaning 1
, ·:·:·
Q. Will you name them as I read the sentence 1
'. ·.·
. . Q. Do these w~rds ~o any thi~g ~ore tha~ simply ~~9J
ne?t the nouns by shewrng the d1recbop, or chstance cif .O~~
object or noun, from another noun, in the same sente~ce 'f
Thus, '?harles w~nt _over t~e bridge, near the meeting ho.l!~~t(
Does this or does it not, show that the bridge is not situ.ated
far from the meeting house 1
·,
'
.
."~;~
Q. Do .not these wofds connect nouns, and show the ·~la..
tion, ~sit regards place, distance, &c. between thein1 . ~~ -'
. Q. 'James was in the well.'In what condition wasJ.Jn
Does or does not in show this conditfon ?
· · :J' .·

.ge;.

..

.,.

PRACTICAL .GRAMMAR.

,139

'

If we should say;:,·' ,James ..was ·''"'--:--'. the well,' would this
1 Does .or does not, the~ Jittle w<fr'l
' in ,.' show
" "cbe the meaning
'
'
• 't'
the relation between James and the Well 1
, , ,
·
Q. Will you fill up these/sentences. by·solne such, words ' ~
·: .will denote a. proper relation between the nouns as I ,read
. •
• •
·.:: · them to you 1 ·
·
'. :
·. .
1
: ·Y, Q.

, ·. , . ' James fell - -. the top of :th~ h;ou~~·' . 'Ja'me$ ea,ts - . ;, ,his plate ..' 'Bread is baked - -. theove~.' . ' The boy~ . go
' ·-school.'. 'The bridge is made--· the .river.'
; · Q. 'Jam es lost his knile, and in°th~. sea~c!1 h~ looked upon
.the ground, near the gate, before ~he window, fowi:Lrds the
·well, against the barn, ab9ut the yard, over the fence, acro.<1,41 .
, Jhe street, besi~e the door, ttroun~ the hedge, wit~in · tP:e b'~sh. . es, before the shed, between the trees, 'by the steps; with~
.:cntl the d~or, into the house .• up the stairs, up.on the car'.,p,et, .behind the · !lesk, through the trunk, abof!e the fire.'· ,.place, on the shelf, beyond the bed, . t~tkin .. the closet at the
,,'.pureau, benea.th the chest, from the table, to the storn, and
I
b
I
'
.
.
..
-'·".a
out tie room.
. . .. . 11
• ', .
, :~•. '." Q. · w~at words in tlus lp~g ~e~te11ce m ~y b~ cla~~~d 4;1qer .
. ,
.
..
. ·• . .
1. one head .
I'
: ,, , :Q. Do you not notice that they are generally placell bd°or~
·:,l~h.e.i10uns 1 Well then, since p~epositim,\,L (from,, the L~tin
, ·pre, before, an? positum plac~d,) mearis p~a~ed l~efore, , "'~hat
/ .would you call such words as are placed befor~ h.ouns, ·to
· Jhow relation between them 1
•. :..·. Q. W:ill you now explain to me w)iat a pr.epq~ition : c~n,.,
· p,~cts, what it sho~s, and why it is called a prepositi~n? ... ~· ·:
... _Q. 'James went in the steamboat from New.J.York·to Al'1 briny.' What words here denote the r~Iation betweeh: an1~s ' .
~ ' .st~amboat/ · and 'New-York,' and ~ Alb,a~y'1. ; · : .~ . . ·, .·.l
"; ' Q. Are they prepositions then, and why ,1
, . ·
;,i1 i ~· 'To' him.' 'To her."' From him.' Which.a~e ,th6 preJ>OS.itions her'e, and why ! , In what case are hima.nci heri .. '. :
~· .9an we say,' To '.he;' 'To she "1 Well,:' the~~"~: ;~.~
:•oo th~t there is a?.object after prepositio~s 1 Is .this. th~ bb' .jeet of an action, or ,of a relation 1
. · ·
·
"

I

.

,

.

'

I

~ j

•

.

'

'

H

I

•

.

,

'

I' I ~

' •

•

'a

K,

.

'

'

.

..•

~

14~

PRACTICAL GR.A)f.M:AR.

140

INTELLECTlTAL AND

"'Throughout · the house.'
. "Against the post.' : ;
."
· '~ccording to the custom.'; . 'Amongst . the boy.:s.' .. :. ••· ·.
1
'nehind
ti.e
·
Tr.
·' •
,
'f ·hill.' .
, c, upon
t he· t op .1 . ·
''Beside the house.' ·
' On the · bro\v:~ .1 · • ··
'Towards the house.' .
" ''0.U' his:· gu_a rd.'
· ~Athwa~t .his purpose.'
'Before th~ house.' . ..
., ' Excep~ one. book.' . . . >; , ' ·D9wn the hill.J .. , 1 • •
. ';Across the street'
, · ' Up the hill.; · \
·· • '· ·
,, '"qt!er ·the hill.'
· ·.·• .f Near the city.' "'" ... ·

Q. Since it is a fact, then, that prepositions have an ogject
after them, I - will state it in the form of a rule: Will ·y6• ;
repeat it 1
., tr
RULE XII.
The objective case may be governed by prepositions.-

Q. ' I ·saw Jam es catching fish in the river.' What pre po- ' ·
sition does river come after 1
-· : .
Q. In what case then is river, by what is it governed, alid ·
what is the rule 1
,
: '
. Q. ' He 'vas in a state of despondency.' How many ver~s ·•
are there in this sentence, and if but one, what is the rule f~r
if.<; agreement ?
Q. Is there any pronoun 1 Why is it a pronoun 1 , What' 1•
the rule for it ?
. . : ·' .
' Q. Is th.ere any article, and if any, of what kind 1 Wi1y'l '
Q. Are there any words that show the relation between'
'he,' 'state,' and 'des pomlency' 1 Which are they 1 WHat
part of speech are they then 1
\· ''~'...
Q: Ho': m~ny .nouns are there in the sentence 1 Ar~ they
not 111 the objective case and governed by the prepositfons'
befo1·e them? What is the rule for each 1
, ··.ri,
Q. I will now giYe you a list of the princi1)al JH'ep. osition9
. I
wl 11c i Y.ou ma!. refer to at pleasure; will you tell ~e which
are the prepositions, as I read the phrases to you 1
· '•
I

'

-

l ' "t

I

' Of the man.'
' Ottt of the house.'
' To the house.'
'For the house.'
'By the house.'
' With the house.'
' Within the house.'
'Without the house.'
'Around the house.'
'In the house.'
'Into the house.'
' Over the house.'
' Under the house.'
' Th,rough the house.'

,

'About the house.'
'Below the house.'
.
'Arnidst the troubles.' : ,i
'Between the bmldings.' ~/
'Betwixt the houses.'
•·
' Beneath the house.'
' From the town.' ·
'Beyond the city.'
'At the hill.'
'Instead of that word.' ·r j · •
'Notwithstanding the diffi · -.,
ty.' ·
·
· · · "m
' Concerning his case..' t .
' .Lrno:ucriing
I .
Ius
. c.ase. ,. -.;.'"t·. I

'. ;·Q. Will you 'now go back and parse ·all' th~ foreaoin~ phrases; arid be particular to give the rules for each w~rd 1 ' ' .
Q. 'He casts seed into the ~ gr~und.' To cast,' ·means fo
t~row. 'He cast up his · 'accounts.' To cast up means to .
., compute. Hence do you not ·see .that ptepositions, when .jo.i~­
, : e~ to ,verbs, affect the mea1\ing of verbs, very materially? ,._
~·· 'When prepositions thus affeet , the meanirig o( verbs,.
,. ought they or ought they no~, to be considered as part~ or'. the

•

4
• '.

. · ve:rb 1

·

·

\·

· ; ..

1

·. ·

•

:· ' Q. Well then, if the preposition is to be considered as part
.' bf the verb, ought the preposition above, to goverh ' the ob-

)~~i aft~r it, or ought the .prepositi~n, and.1yerb toget,h er, to
govern 1t 1

1

•

•

, .Q., 'He gives up all hopes/

Is 'hopes/ the : ohj.e ct after
· 'up,' alone, or after 'gives up' taken together, as. one active.
'yerb 1 What then is the rule for ~ope,s. ?,

LESSON XXXV .'
r

· t -...

QUESTIONS ON · .THE ~REPOS.ITlOlY.

.:·. .Q. What is the meaning· of the wotd preposition ?
: • 1 Q~ ' What is a ptoper definition of' prepositions ?
·
' ·Q. What case does the preposition go•ern 1
.
.'
Q. Is a preposition evet 'compounded ;1th a verbl
Q . . 'W!ll .you mention a few prepositions ? 1 '
i.

~ l : _' nxERCISES . ~FOll TH~ ·sLAT~

;.~, · '4. Wnr

.~ ''erb,
;,

,"

you

w~~te . d~wn

i>.AJ>Eit."' ·
artjcle, adjective, ; age~t,' a
oR

a·n:
a prepo~ition, another article, and an object of 'lhe rela-.

/

•
142

INTELLECTUAL AND

tion 1 Will you parse the sentence which you have writt~n 1 ·
Will · you write six sentences, each containing the sam~·;
agents, the snme verbs and the same objects, but differel)~ ,
adverbs 1 Will you write an article, agent, verb neuter, pre.- 1 •
position, article and objective case to be governed by the pre_:(
position 1 Will you write twelrn phrases, each having a dif- .,' ·'
. ferent preposition, article, · and noun 1 Six, having different • .
prepositions, but the same articles, and nouns 1 Will you . ·
write as many sentences as there ~re relative pronou~s, ,
with a relative either in a different case, or a different r~l­
ntive, in each 1 Will you write an example of each mode 1 '
and tense, of active, passive, an~ neuter verbs 1 Will you ;
write the same interrogatively 1 ·wm you write a sentence in ,
•
"hich the article does not belong to the noun, but is u~ed
merely to add force to a comparative adverb ? Twenty sen·
tehces, having the same nominatives, the same irregular verbs, .'."·
a second irregular verb, in the infinitive mode, different' in ·
ef\ch, and a different obj ect after each 1 .
Q. Will each one in the class examine the first example, ·, ..
illustrating the nature of prepositions, and then see whQ ~ ·
will write a sentence containing the greatest number of preJ· _.
positions 1
j

LESSON XXXVI.
MENTAL EXERCISES.

Q. 'James learns well at school and behaves · well
home.'
'>
Q. Which words are the nouns here, and why are
nouns1
Q. Which. are the adverbs, and why 1 , .
Q. Which are the verbs, and w,hy.1
..
Q. ·'James learns well at school,' is one sentence; 'he be'-.
haves w~ll a~ home,' is another. What .word connects these '
two s~ntences togeth~r, in the first example 1

143

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

· ~i";· Q. 'I will not desist-·-

. he chide me.; Can we, or can·we
' riot connect these sentences by putting in 'l\lthough 1' · Will
1 U1is word make the sentence comp.l ete 1
~ ,;o ~· Q. 'James or John writes.' · If we leave out 'or,' will
· · there be any sense in the sentence 1 What' word joins 'James
.. a1id John,' togethed
·
·
· \
i1Q. Iri this case are words pnly connected, or are sentences
,! connected, by 'or' 1
1 '. Q. These words which thus join sentences and "words to: gether are different, in many respects, from any to :which we
. have attended; can we not then form a new class of \Vonb
· · .,with them 1
Q. The name for this class. of words, since they join words
'land sentences together, must of course resemble conjugation,
;: do you relnember what that word mean~:l
.. .·
, '' .
., Q. Will you turn back, if you do
recollect, and tell

nor

Now since conjunction, that is, joining together, means
nearly the same, would it · not be a good name for these
.• words th\lt join sentences, and sometimes only · words . to· · ·
·
·
I' .
·. . , . ·
. ,gether 1
I
1"." .Q. Will you now tell me what · words arc called·conjunc.;.
" ~ions, and what the word means 1
.. · Q. 'I love him, or I fear him.' What word connects the.
two phrases here 1 Does the sentenc~ mean that I both love
· J1im and fear him 1
'
·- ·-·
·
Q. Well, then, are the clauses of the sentence connected
.··and combined, or separate and disjoined 1
: · ·Q. Disjoined, you are fight; now since disjunctive, means
1disjoined, would it, or would it not, be a suitable name for
tho,se conjunctions ·that join sentences but disj.oii1 the sense 1 ·
Q._ DisJunctive expresses the idea very well; will you . iri
order to fix it in your mind, explain to me what a disjunctive
COOjUnction does; and Why it is SO Called 1 I·' ' '
• J'.,
,
' Q. · ' 1 eith.e r ·love him or fear him.' What.word h~re conie~ts· the' phrases, but disjoins or separates the 's~nse ~,1," Jn.
0

I

I

'
I

'
•'

•

I

•

144

'

'· 1

INTELLECTUAL AND

disjoining the sense, is there not a kind of opposition of mean~ '
ing 1 In ·other words, do not the phrases express directly 1.~p.,. .•
posite ideas 1
Q. What kind of conjunction then) to be more ac~umte, _
would you call those that · join sentences, sometimes only
;words, and at the same time disjoin the sense, by expressi~g ·
opposition of hrnaning in differe!1t degrees 1
Q. Will you now explain what a disjunctive conjunction. .,
joins; and what it disjoins, also what it expresses
irig the sense?
Q. 'Mary sings well and behaves prettily.'
mean that she both behaves prettily and sings well 1
word is the conjunction 1
Q. Does it connect the phrases only, or does it
the sense also 1
Q. Well, then, since !::ome conjunctions connect both ·sen-,.
tcnces and the sense, and some connect sentences and dis· •
join the sense, ·ought we not to make a distinction between .
them ?
" ' r1.'! ;
Q. We have alrea1ly named those that disjoin the sen~,
disjunctive, and since c~pulative, means j oining or couplinr
would not this be a good name for those conjunctions which
join or connect, not only words and sentences, but also th~ .
sense of the sentences 1
,.· ·
Q. Disjunctive conjunctions, you say, connect senten~ ,
hut dis.Join the sc11sc by expressing opposit1011 of meaning·, .,.
By this definition you can distinguish them, but you m~y be ~
puzzled, sometimes, to distinguish the copulative conju~-.
tions, for do not prepositions connect words as well as ~Jl·
junctions 1
•
. ·· · , ;
1 \1
Q. What do prepositions shew when they connect .. · .
Q. ' The man is happy because he is good.'. DQe!I
does not the conjunction, ' because,' connect both the .se. .
and the phrase 1 Is it then a copulative or disjunctiye.:,CCJlto.:
junction~

Q. ''I will go if he will.' What conjunction here conne$
and implies a doubt, or condition 1

.

PRACTIC~L ?~~,M~~it~·

.,

145

.·

:""-:' Q. ·Wel~, then, does _or. d~e~ ;~not :~he copulative conjunc. :: tion. serve to connect and. continue a sentence~ by expressing
.,·· a conditioni a supposition,. a cause, &c.1 •.
. ··
•._
·, ·Q: Wili you now inform
:what the coP,ulative conjunc~
· };' .tion e~presses, whei~ it connects 1. What the disjunctive does,
; and what it . expresses 1 · Also, : ·w hat' it shchv!'I \vhe~ it corr~·
·'. nects ?
· · ·· · · ·
.·
:

me

'·

. ' ' Q . You mustJemembe~' accurately these distincti6ns . .. By
".SO doing, can you or can you not, ~lways tell
, · from a preposition 1
··
·
· · ·.

a conjuncti~n

' ·. Q. 'James will not go unless Charles does.' · Does 'un ...
·· less,' here express condition' 1 What kind · of conjunction is it
~. ·then 1
~ ··
Q. Since you have paid so good atten,ti~n, I will give some
sentences containing the principal copu fttive conjuctions.- .
:· Will you tell .which they are, as I read them to you 1 · ·..

If I write.'
'
' Since fruth and consistency
'James and John write .'
· are vain.' .
t., .'1 study ·thatl may learn.'
. 'I.punish.e d you . because you
· :~ If.·you say so then I am
dei,lerved ·it'
· , ·
" .. right.'
·
'
blushed, therefQ.re he is ·
/-c-:n will operate both for your ' guilty." .
' . " .\
•1 ~. good and mine.'
· .
·. 'T¥herefore; gaze this goodly
'. · 'For I must learn.' .
company' 1 ·
"· · .
,
'Besides, I do not believe it.' ·
'·: Q. , ·wm you now pick ~ut those words iii th~/ollowing sen·tEmces that are disjunctive conjunct'ions, and give me area, ' son why they are so called 1
·
.
.·
=;-; 'James writes, but Joseph will 'I will tespect him ·though he
· not.'
·
chide me.'
.
·;'John or I willassistyou.'
.· 'I shall. do it,notwitiistandi.ng
'I neither love.nor fear, thee.' . he has forbidden ' me.' .
. 'It is ,either a few great inen, . 'It has been the question
·.•' that decide, or the multi•
some curious wits whether
.~.;_tude.'
.
·
· in · the world, · ' there , ar~,
. ''As I live, s.11ith the Lord.'
more heads than feet.'
' How .can w.e do
duty:t~' .Thou art wi~ er than I.' ·
; . Lest they famt'
· .cept w.~· know it 1.~ O:, ~ .'-:\i· ·~
Unless he, even like Phc:e-"
.· · : , ,. :':' N · 1..
. · bus, young.'
.
, ., ..q, Will you now go back and reckon up how many copu.
l~
'
.
.
. 1

He

of

our

-·- ...fil

146

PRAC'.J'ICAL GRAMM~R.

INTELLECTUAL AND

lative conjunctions, and how many disjunctive, ar~ contaille~
;in the above sentences?
.\
Q. Will you name a few copulative conjunctions 1
· · ·Q ·. Will you name a few disjunctive conjunctions 1

I,

LESSON xxxv1i:.
lUJ~N'I'AL

EXERCISES.

.. -·:Q. 'James and \Villia1i1 write.'. What word is the con· '·
.· ~undion here, and why 1 Is it copulative or disjunctive, ,and .'
\~~)¥' L \Vho writes, or how many write 1 How many agents ..·
orr n~minatives are there then 1 Is William the nominative
case 'as well as James? Do then conjunctions connect the
same. cases of J\OUnS, and consequently of pron(')UllS 1
·. · \.
Q. 'James writes and reads.' Does this mean the same •
as, ' Jam es writes and Jam es reads 1' Is ' reads' connected .to
:
\ '
'writes,' by the conjunction' and'1
1 · •
. -. ,Q. In what mode and tcn~e are ' reads' and ' writes ?'-· ·, .•
Well, then, do conjunctions, or do they not connect the
sanie modes, and tenses of verbs, and cases of nouns and ~
pronouns1
Q. 'James is eating and drinking.' How many present par:- '
ticipies are there here 1 Arc they connected, and if so, 'by.: ~\.
what1
Q : Do you see then that the same kind of participl~s ~~ connected by copulative conjundions ?
Q. Do then or do not, copulative conjqnctions, connect-the
same cases, modes, tenses, and participles of the same kind,f
Q. Since COnJ'unctions,. like prepositions
and adverbs, are .- •
I
not varied, can we, when we parse them, say anything mote
than simply to state what kind of col1junctions they ar~,, ~~ .:
is, whether copulative or disjunctive? ·
Q. Will you now state to me in what respects
tions connect nouns, verl:Js, and participles 1
r

•

'

I

,

; ,, . Q .. I will sum up these facts in ·, th~ form of a rule ; will
• 1y.ou ,repeat it 1
·
. . :> ·.· . . ., , :
.. .. ~ 1
· }l,ULE XIII • .
\
·'
. '
'

Conjunctions connect the ~ame cas~s of no?ns and 'pro" nouns, the same modes and tenses of verbs, an,d partipiple~
-of the same kind. · ·
·
.
.
· .
· ... :, ·
1
· • ; Q .. 'Mary ·sings and plays well on fhe harpsichord.'
111
. what mode and tellse are · the verbs ~ in this se1itence 1 To
· .1vhat·theh is 'plays'· connected, and by ;what rule 1
··,. Q .. ' He and I passed by you.' ·what are the rules for
. each word in this sentence 1 .
'- ·
·., .Q'. Will you tell the .. rule for each word .i11 tQ.e,following
: ~entences 1
·
· ·
·
,.They told the whole affair . <.J do not believe hi~, rwr.
to him and me.'
· her, ri~ryou.''
'·!X OU 'do not care for him or ' I will ' say it between ·you
t me.
.
and me.'
.
1
Q. Will you, in correcting tl~e followmg sentences, tell
. m,e why they are . wrong, ,and give. the r~l1, as I read them.
.
.
· '. ' .; .
.
. .,
.to you ?
'I will say it between you
. and I.' .
· '
·
. H~ will write fo; you or she.'
.':Will you pernut Jam es and
I I to read H~e letter1' .
! Do you prefer thern an:d I to
•. C.l~arles 1'
. ·
.
•You ' and us enjoy niany .
.
'.
. p~ivileges'.'
l ~aw the boat an? ha~·e,been
. ;:much plea~ed with it.
·
''ij_~ ca.me with me and thou ;'

I.' ,·

'He promis~d the~ and
·'Will you perniit George ·· and
I to go,;out ?' · · · · · ,. .
' She and him are v~r;y l\hhap~' ·
pily situated,'
. . . ·
' Did .h e 1iot tell thee his
· 'f ault, and ' elifreat thee' to
forgive him'1
.
'
' Seeing the forts, and hayih
been tnuch gratified, he re~
. mained there sonie time.'
,, .

..
:

LES$0N XXXVIll.' ·
f 1 •

I,

'.

',

'I

'

'

:

•

I

'

J

•

. .~ ., , '" •

llIENTA:f,.. EXERCISES., .
•

..

'

'

,

j ·~

1
'

\ ( :•

1

·;Q. '·Mary and Rufus learn well.' ' To what is 'Ruftis~ ,C
,on-:

'Weii

'cted, and what is the rule for it1 Ho~ many Iea.'.n
·1,·,
0. How many a~ents are t.li"'"" 1 You recollect that th~

.

I

148

INTELLECTUAL . AND

PRACTICAL GftAMM.Ait.

verb must be of the same number with its nominative or
agent; when then there are two or more agents, must the
verb be of the singular or plural number 1
Q. What kind of a conjunction connects ' Rufus' w,ith . •

'Mary?'

.

Q. Well, then, when two or more nouns are connected by
a copulative conjunction, must the verb which agrees with.

them be of the singular or plural number 1
:·
Q. It \vill be necessary to remember this, so I will give .
you a rule, which I wish you to repeat.
RULE XIV.

Two or more nouns in the singular number, coupled to-.. '
gether by a copulative conjunction, must have verbs agreei~1g
with them in the plural number.

Q. 'James and Thomas

run to school.'

Why is run piural 1 What then <locs it agree with? What is the rule for its
agreement with both those nouns 1
'
,.
'
f
.
· Q. 'Idleness and ignorance are the parents o many vices. f ·
Why is ' are' used in this sentence, rather tlnm ' is' 1 What is,. :
the rule for ' are' 1
Q. Will you give the rules for each word in the following ,
sen.tences ?
·' '
'You and I are young.'
'You and George did complain.'
'You and he will have run.'
'He and I write.'

'You and he write.'
·'1 '
'They and I had written.~ i
' '!:hey ~ml you had been pup·~
1s)1~d
. , :.
'Wilham and he do lea~.,,.,. 1

Q. Will you, in correcting each of the foll~wing sentenc~lt'
tell why they are wrong, and what the rule is for each"'?~
which you correct, as I read them to you 1
·.
'
d
,
'.Jflmes and he does stu y . .. •
' Thou and I 'Writes.'
' Do Thomas and I learns 1'
'My wife and cousin w:~ ~.
the country.' ·
. ··
'He and she plays prettily.'
'James and William has been ' Innocence · and happine~
punished.' .
.
'
dwells together.' . . .. , .
'
' Pride and meanness is des·... j.;."
..
pised.'
'

'

Q ·The foilowing phrases ar~ incorrect according to one

or the other of the

preceding rules' ; :Wm 'y'ou ~orrect them in
· the same manner as last requested 1· , , .
,
· ' 'Thomas ~nd yoµ 1 is writhig
He and her is disappointed.' · now.'
. . ,
' .'You and nie does well .'
"Will Mary and .them ~o1'
1 James' brother and us is go"' · 'Does Wilham and' hiin in:.
' ing· to play together:'
tend to go 1
fl
'.Mary and me . is going to
· schooUo-day.'

'I and he walks fast.'

.! '

>'

Q. ' He learns his book in time of school.' How' · friany
: . nouns ~re there here; in what case are they, and by, wh'a t ate
,· they governed 1 What are the rules for them·1 :· .. ' QUESTIONS ON TI-IE CON.TUNCTI?.NS. '

..Q.. What is the . m~an:ing . of
the word disjunctive r . .
Q. What does a disjunctive
conjunction do ? • ''
·· Q. What doe~ it express 1
Q. How can you tell a con- ,
·junction from a·preposition? ·
Q. How many conjunctions ·
can you rememberl · ·

· Q. What is the meaning of the
· word conjunction 1
. , Q.· What do conjunctions con'
. nect ?
Q. How many .kinds of con'junctions are there 1 .
Q·. What are they 1
Q. What is the meaning of
: tJ~e word copulative 1
.
Q'. What is a copulative con.. junction 1
' (

.,

·

' i'
'

.,

•' EXERCISES FOR THE SLATE O:~LP.A.PER.
1

1

•

~. 1 1Q.

'

.Will you write a sentence having an article,

adjectiv~;

and noun, another article, adjective and noun connected by a·
eol)junction; also a verb, an object; and a pre.s ent participle .
eeing with the object 1
.
.Qi Will you write sen ten ~\:JS enough to embrace all the
n)unctions, included in the list, a few pages back 1 Will you
tea single sentence containing' .ten prepositions 1 Wi~I. you
01
te five sentences, having a differeqt ad vet~ in each 1'. Wi~l -:
·write five sentences, each·'having a, different' conjtirtctio1ft ..
Will you class the words 'Yhich you have nowl. writtei~l·.,,

Q'.
,

'

~

13*

' 1,

,,

,

' i \'

·(: 1.~} 1,~;
,"

,J..;' '

I
I

·. '

,
150

J

INTEJ.LECTUAL AND

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

LESSON XXXJX.
MEN'l'AL EXERCISES,

I

\,

l

Q. ' Oh ! dear me!' 'What shall I do 1' ' Alas! I die!' '
' Oh ! I have ruined my friend !' ' Strange! people will act •'.
so!' Do you here notice a particular kind of words that we
have not yet classed 1 Let us eJ:amine their meaning.
Q. Do these words denote no feeling, or do they on the
contrary denote deep and sudden feeling of surprise, wonder,
admiration, &c.1
Q. Do these word s appear to be connected with other
parts of speech, or are they thrown between parts of sentences
merely to denote some powerful feeling, as surprise, fear, ·
wonder, admiration, &c. 1
.. •·
'
,
· : q;:'·· ~i~~ there arc ~omc few wnnls of this <lcs ~ription ; ·
·· clj~~~·~_nf'.. !,kh~ any, which .we han bcfo1'e found; let us class, 1
them~· a~i.i:i ·t. ~on for' youi; encoura gement let me tell you, that
you may 'e xamine as many s entences as you please, and you'_
will find no words except such as bdong to some one of the,
preceding classes. For tliis last class we will no\v f111<l a na~ne.~
Interjection, (from the Latin, inter, between, and je.ctuitt,
thrown) si gnifies thrown between; and since this class' of
words which we are now upon, i~, as we have seen, thrown
between the parts of a sentence, would or would not thig ,
term, interjection, be a proper name for all this di,-ision of
words?
·
Q. This word it is true will answer our purpose well.
ca:n easily tell tl~e words which are to be dassed under thi1,
head, especially as they, for the most part, haYe an exclama :.
tion point after them.
. Q. Will you now inform me what an
why it is so called 1
Q. '0 ! me!' 'Oh! me!' 'Ah! me!'
1
terjections here 1
-1

..

Q. What person are the pronouns after them 1

151 ·-

case are they 1 In what case .then 'are personal pronow1s of
the first person required to be after O; oh, and ah '!
'
· Cl. '0, thou persecutor!' .·,Oh, -. ye hypocrites!' '0,
thou who dwellest here !' ..·Which. are the i11terjections here, .
a.i1<l why 1 In what case are the pronouns ·her~ 1 In what person are they 1. ·
.·
·

Q. \,Vhat case of the personal pronouns of the second pet.,. .
son, do the i11terjections, 0, oh, Ah, require after them'!
1
Q. I will now state these facts in the forin of a' rule; will
you repeat
·
RULE XV.

The inte1jectiot1s, 6, oh, and ah," require the obj~ctivc c.ase
of a pronoun of the first person after them, buf the rto1tnina-.
live cr.se of the · second person.
·

Q. . 'Ah!· me!'
interjection 1

What is the rule 11ror 1ne 'l. WI iy is
· aI1,

at~

r

. Q. In

parsing interjections, since they are not varied, and .
, ·generally stand by themselves, can you say any thing more
· '. ' ofthcm th~m t.hat they are interjections, ond the reason for it1
'.Q . .What . is. the. m~aning of . Q. C:an· ~ou mention . auy inh·t:1ections 1 · · ·
. ·
the word mterJecbon 1
· ·Q. W~ class of words are Q. What cases follow cer, . called inte1jections 1
tain inteijections 1

LESSON . XL.
MENTAL EXERClSES.
'

.. Q. 'Five men ~ere struggling against the waves, but, .
· , .al~! they all perished.' ' Which is. the i,1terjectioh here and
•
h 1
'
. /. .
.
'
.· . . . . ·, '
..w y.
.
.
.'
'
.
. ' . .
c ' . Q." What are the rules
each noun? .
.
.
,.' · Q-: There i~ one P3:rticiple. i~ the .se!llen~~' what is ~he". ·rul~ ·'

for

t'.
'4-n '
l'
'
1
·. . ' ' '
,. · ' ; .. • ' l ' ~ I
._.1or·.11.11 :re1erring. . .
· , , . _ . .;_". . ·.: ". . '·;. ·t..;~ ! '., ~
' ,'. .Q. What word · describ.es, · or · r:ather · speci,fies,: the '' .e~act
.. nwnber of inen 1 ·
·
·
·1• · · · ~-. ;·: 1 ·~ !•• :· 1 ·,: " "
.

'"

~

.

.

\

.• •

~.

'

~. t,

.' . .. 1

.t

1.•

.;

t"~ • ~

•

•• • : ' ·.,.. .

• ;, ';..

152
I~ or

INTELLECTUAL AND

is not, 'five,' th en added to the noun, 'men,' to

PRACTiCAL GRAMMAR.

Si)(~cify

or describe it in some respects like an adjective 1
Q . \Vould you or would you not then, call all such words
as specify as well as describ e, by the general name of acljec- "
tives, or by sorno other name 1
Q. ' Fifty men came to town.' Is there any specifying wotd
here ? What part of speech is it th en 1 If an a<ljechve, to
what does it belon g, and what is the nlle for it 1
Q. 'One, two, three,' &c. are called, by some grammari~
ans, · n11mcral adjectives, but is or is not tho tonn, speci fying ·
adjective, a sufficiently good name 1
Q . What th en appears to be a more accurate defi nition of
adjectives 1
Q. 'The wisest man.' . YVhat p:-nt or speech is '\\'isest,'
and ,\:hy 1 vVill you compare it 1 Is it regular or irregular,
and why 1 In what degree is it, and why 1
Q. Can you compare 'one, two,' &c.? \\Tell, then, in parsing specifying adj ectirns, such as' ten, tw enty,' &c. would.·
you compare them, or say they arc not to be compared ?
Q. 'A square table.' vVhich is the adjective here, and
why 1 Can any thing be squarer than square 1 \Veil, then,
can you compare su ch acijecti vos as square, round, circular, ·' ·
perfect, chief, principal, &c. when their meaning cannot be
increased or climini slic:d 1
<i. ' My father gave me two lmiYes; I Jin.Ye kept both, but
one is better than the other.' Do or do not the wonls 'both,'
'one,' and other,' stand for' knife' or' knives' 1
Q. Well, then, if these words frequ ently stand for nouns,
ought they or ought they not, to be called pronouns ?
Q. 'I bought, as I supposed, two good knives, but one, .
knifo is not worth a cent: both knives cost me fifty cents.'
Are not the words ' both,' and ' one,' here, joined to nouns, ·.
and do they ~ot spedfy and describe them 1 Oug-ht they or ;
ought they no~, ·for this reason, to be classed with a<ljective.s , · .
or should they be classed with pronouns ?
1
Q. Hence do you or do you not see that some words pa:~· , · '
take of the properties both of adjectives and pronouns 1

153

·Q. These words seem. to· be somewhat peculi~r_; let u~
get a name. for the~. 'Which,' you doubtless remember is
called an adjective pronoun .for reasons similar to'. the above:
,why will not the term, adjective pronmlns, _meet our ·pr~sent
purpose 1 Will it not ,be a ·good name for all words that' are ·
frequently used either as adjectives 6r pronouns ?
·
Q. Can we use tl,ie pronouns 'he/' she,' 'thou,' &c·. as ad:o:
jective~ by joiriing them to 'nouns for the purpose of speci-.
fying or describing them 1. Are they ·not invariably' ·used· to
supply the place of nouns 1
· Q. Adjective pronouns, 've have· seen, are used differently,
will you explain this difference 1 .· ·
~ - . · . . .- .
·. :. . ·
· Q. When adjective pronouns stand for nouns, ought they ·
or ought they not to have tlie same gender, number, -person,
and case as the nouns for which they stand 1
' .
··
Q. Right, they ought, and they do as , you d~ubtless saw
above; · will it be difficult, then, to tell what g~nder, :numb;r,
person, and case, theiie a~jective pronouns ate, \\.'heri used as
nouns1
·

Q. 'Some pursue one thing,. . others anoth~r.' Here are
· three adjective pronouns, which are they, an~ wl~y . afe f~iey.
so called 1
·
·
. .
· · ' · · · .1 • ,
Q. ' • e likes one's self.' 'I gave the book to one, I know
not to whom.' Here are two adjective prunouns, '01ie,' (used twice,) and 'one's,' in what ca~e is ~add· ·
Q. Do you not see then, that the adject'ive pronoun,' one,'
. . is regularly declined ·1
·
.·'

Q. Will you decline it.1
Sing.
Nom, ONE.
· Pos.~. 0NE'.s.
Obj. ONE.
.
Q. Do we not sometimes. see sµ'ch an expression as tJ.i is,
, : '«The great ones· of the earth 1' Does not 'one,'-thenJ' have
:'J; plura~ 1 Will toil decline.it fn th~ ph~ral f · ' 1 · ·,· ' 'r .i· -'.: ~

a

!1

."": ' . ·

.~ . i ~ ; ; \
l ·.

..

~

•
154

INTELLECTUAL ANP

Plttr.

(

Nom.
Poss.
Obj.

ONES.

PRACTICAL GRAMil,IAR.
':t

' r'

ONES'.
ONES.

"'

It . . ,'

Q. 'Another's property·" ' Others' property/ ''l'he -forr,f ·
. mer's phlegm was a check upon the latter'!! vivacity.' . Here:·
are · four adjective pronouns, which are they, and why 't •In , .
1vhat case is each, and by what words are they governed? . • ~ - ~­
Q. What is the rule for the possessive case of pronouns •Qf.;
·nouns!
·
Q: By observing these four sentences, you
possessive cases arc, the others are easily told.
dine ' other' !
: '\
Sing.
Plur.
Nom. OTHER.
Norn. ·OTHERS.
Poss. OTHER'S. Poss. OTHERS'.
Obj. OTHER.
Obj. OTHERS:
Q. ' One man will injure another.'
or plural 1
Q. True, it is singular, and can we then, ever say., 'anolh'-:
ers,' meaning more than one! Will you decline · another; i~ ~..
being, as we ~ave seen, used only in the singular 1
.
Nam. ANOTHER.
Poss. ANOTHER'S.
'
Obj. ANOTHER. '
' : ,f
Q. By exami111ng a few sentenc~s back do you not see tha~ ~
' former' and 'latter' may be used in the possessive case L f ·· .
,
Q. I will now give you a list of adjective pronouns, dis1101~
ed in sentences in which they are used both as adjectives and
pronouns. They are in italics, but you must decide which i
are italicised as pronouns, . and which as adjectives; als()•,1
what the pronouns stand for, wheri used a~ such, will you do
this as I read them to you !
t ··,:i;;
j Must I endui·e all tliis .'!'
' Tlds c1pple I will give :you.' I .
1
I .k~1ow that but I cannot help ' The end of tliat man is' penc
1•

it.

' Those call it pleasure, and con·
· t.entment tltese.'

·

· ' These }iears Jiere . are biltt
than tltose apples yonder·. '

Q •. By examitung , the foregoing examples,· you wilL 1see
jhat 't})is,' and 'thes~,' denote :objects · of thing!f!Which are
near,· but, 'that;' and 'thdse,' more' dis.tan~,, -or ' abserit.~hen, however, in a disc~urse we say; '~h,is;' Y.oi.( k?~w: that .
"{ refors to something -last•.mentioned,'and· 'that,'. \ to· ..1mme,jhh1g before mentio11ecl. · ' Thi·s mah/ 'Th·ese hien;• '':That
man.' --' 'Those men.' Here we see that th~ plural' of' this,'
·~~; 'these,' oU that,' ·, thos~.; · - - :· , . -. .,. , , · · ,,,. ·..
i Q. How many adjective pronouns have ·already. beep named!
.,;Q. What (J~ ' this'/ and' these,'. refer t9, the · n~arest or
~~~t distant· person or thing !
'. · · ··
'~ ·Q.: ·To what po 'that/ and .' those,~ ref~r! What_is.,tQe P,l~­
'9,( of' this~ 1 Of 'that'1 " · · · .
' . ·
.. ·
·. ! •.

. NoTE -This, that, these and those, are'

~o~etimes

called . by

i~aminar~ans, clemoneyir~tive adjec!ive pronouns, becaus,e they p_re~

c1sE1ly pomt -out the subjects to which _they relate.

." Q. Will y~u now point: qut ~he a~jective' pronou":s _ in the
following,, as you did in the foregoing sentences !

S~e

talk too much, others,
. .
·not enough'.' .
ffiet.dnother praise thee.'
If a ~oul shall sin against any
oftilla.cotnmandments.' ·
~tie w'Pl'r either hate the one and
·love the other.• ·
·
~U . that come, in to the tent,
"-nd all that is in the tent,
z ihall bo unclean seven days."
If ve .do such things y'e shall

d(e;' -

On' the other side.'
{Q,. How many adj_ective
'

' tences
e~

1.

. ,

Q. 'Nor;ie,' you know

·' Some considerations · swerve
. , me .'
.
, '. ·
·
· '.!Jnother mri~ has ap{>eared.'. ·'
·'I will .take · any' tlnn.g w~i~h
you m,ay ciio?se to_give m.e. ,
I I have but one apple.'
:
..
' .fill thing; were made by God."
'Abel was the father. o( such ' as
·dwell in 'tents.' -~ - ·
.
' Thy life shall hang hea_vh in
doubt, and thou shalt ave
none assurance_of this life,' '

pr~mouns, are there in these ,last

.

.. · . . .

.

.

mean~ no one; but iu. ~his se~tence,

·enns of peac~ were none vouchsafed/yoµ see that it is µs,in the plural as well as the singul~r' f!Upiber~ _· ·., , · ,; : : .

\,,~.---Some: other;· another,

any,

one~ nil, · such, have', he~n .

te~ in~efinite a~j0,ctivo 1 p_ronouns, b~cause .th~Y. e~p;'ess! 1 rh~1~
·,e·cts'iri a general manner~ ·
.
·
: , "/-.,',
•

,· J

• •

.

'

/

;

•

(

156

'

-

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

157

INTELL£CTUAL AN!l
1
A third is like the former.'
'The difference between reason
au<l revelation, and in what
sense the latter is superior.'
1
And the children of Israel <lid
so, and gathered some, more
and some, less.'
'I am not worthy of the least of
the · mercies showed to thy
servant.'
'Both boys are here.'
' ·The tenor of man's life holds
on th e same.'
i I saw the same things to-day.'
i Thero are many men lint few
philosophers.'
'I saw the first man go in and
the last man co me out.'
' In fonne :r times.'
'Hath not navi ga tion discovered in th ese latter tim es whole
r.ations '1.t th e bay of Saldonia'? ·
'Harbor more craft.'
'Mary tlie mother of Jam es th e
less.'
'The least favor will be acceptabl e.'
' They tha.t would have more

Q. Will you point out the foUowing adjectirn pronouns :hi.
the manner last described 1
· ··.Of

1 The four beasts had each of ·.,
man hns a part.'
Every of the clauses and conthem six wings.'
· ··
ditions.'
'Impart to eury mnn his due."
'Neither oflice is filled, but 'Eitlier of the roads is a good
neither of the offices will suit
one, · consequently you - may
the candidnt<'s.'
tnkc either mad.'
Non:.-From the preceding ex nmµles we. fin_d that!' cnch,' re· .
fers to two or more persons or things, nnd s1g111fic!', either of the· ·
two, or evcrj• one of any number tal1e!1 s~paratcl.y;. ~11d thnt, ,
'every' relates to severa l pcr~ons or thrn_g;;_, and s1g111hf's, each
one oftlicm, all talrnn ~cparnti:ly . Wl1crl 1t 1~ ur.c(l as a pr~rn~JUn,
'.'it is chiefly in the law style.'' 'Ev ery, th e lenst Yan~bon:'' ..
Here we see th a t' every,' is separat~d from the noun to wh1~h 1t
belongs by a definite ar ti cle. This how e".er.does not.occur \'ery
frequ ently. 'Ev ery sevc 11 years' . H~re 1t 1s used with a plural ,
noun, but the term implies a eollecl1ve id ea .
.
.
' Either' sig11ifie.s only one of two persons or tl11.ngs, 'E1.ther ~f
the three,' \Yould cons(·quently Le improper.
. · ". .:
'Neither' means, 11ot either, that is 11either on e nor th o other.:

c EacTl

Q. How many atljective pronouns have been natned
~~1

.

Q. What docs 'each,' refer to 1 What does' every' denote·l ·
Is it ever separated from the noun to which ·it belongs .1 11~
what cases is it used as a pronoun?
·.
Q. What does 'either' signify? Woulcl it be propcr '.to
say, ' either bf the three' 1 What does 'neither' mean 1 · · · 1
NoTE.-End1,.ev cry, either, and ne ither arc sometimes called,
distributive adjective pronouns, because they denote th ? person•
or things that 1nnkc up a number, takenseparntcly atHl s111gly. .
'

. II

L ESSO.N XLI.
l\IENT AL. EXERCISES.

.,

: ' l.

.._ Q. Will yon pick out the following adjective
you have the. foregoing ones 1 ,
'Abraham took sheep nnrl oxen 1 Many are called but fe'tC c,bo~·
and gn,v e them unto Abime- . . sen.'
I
Jech, nnd botlL of them made 1 The last shall be .first and t~'­
.a covenant.'
.first shall be last.'
·,

I

and more can never have
enough.'
' He began to upbraid the cities
wherein most of his mighty
works were done:
·
' He came unto his own and his
own rec eived him not.'
' Several of my unknown cor, respond(•nt s.'
1
It is not 1r111 tr,rin,l wltat names
are ass i;,: 1n:d to thee.'
'In wltatevc·r condition I am, I
will be cu11ten t. •
'Give me more love or more
disdaiu.'
1
.Most men pursue pleasure as
their chief good.'
'I will att_e nd tu my own con-

r erns.'

' Tl1 is is the book itself.' Self
is used here Jor the sake of
emphasis.'
.
1
1 have several things to say to
you.'
·
NoTE.-This word several
you see is used in the plural, as
expressive of no particular number, but nut large.

Q . vVe have seen that' what,' and' whatever,' are com. pound pronouns when they stand for two words ; also that
' what' is used as an interrogative pronoun in asking questions,
and sometimes as an interrogative adjective pro~oun, when it
is ad<led to a noun in asking a question ; but in the phrase
above, both words are joined to nouns and no questions are
asked. Are the words 'what' and ' whatever' joined to the
nouns after them, to describe or specify, something like
adjectives 1
· Q. Are they then compound, or simply, adjectiv~ pronouns 1
Q. ' I will send such books as will please him.' In this
sentence it is evident the mean,ing is, that those books which
I send, will please him. Now since it is 'books' . which will
please, 'as,' must stand for books, else we shall I.lave no
• J

.

\

14

.

'

158

INTELLECTUAL AND

159

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

nominative to 'will seml.' If' as' stands for books, then it
must be a pronoun; and because the word for which · it
sta 111 Js, is before it, as an antece1lcnt, perhaps it is more correct to call 'as,' a rclalirn pronoun, taking the gender, mnnber, and person of its antecedent.
Q. 'I will take what goods arc on board his vessel.'' vVhat,' we hare seen before, when it is used as a pronoun, .
was considered a kind of compound pronoun. But in the
last example,' what goods,' it is an :vljcctirn agreeing with
books.
Q. Do we sar, ' These book,' or 'these books 1' 'That
books,' or' That book 1' Do adjectire pronouns then, or do
they not, agree in number with their nouns 1
Q. This is sufficiently important to constitute a rule.-

Q. Will_ you correct the following sentences, and in doing
H, will you give the rules and the reasons for the same 1
I l Wartt them uook11.'
'Do you know them young Ja.
' who owns them horses?'
dies r ·
' What i;; tl1e price of them hand- 'Observe them three persons.'

1

kerchiefs?'
I wish to see them knives.'

'Them are one dollar.'
'Where is them buys?'

Q. I will now give you a list of adjective pron::rnns, which
ham Leen illustrate1l by exampies, that you ·may consult
at _pleasure.
T1-ns,

THAT, THESE, THOSE, SOME,

ANY, ONE, ALL, SUCH,

OTHER, ANOTHER,

NONE, BOTH, SAME, MANY, FEW,

FIRST, LAST,· FORMER, LATTER, LESS, LEAST, MORE, MOST,
OWN,

EACH, EVERY, EITHER, NEITHER, .SEVERAL, WHAT,

WHATEVER.

Will you repeat
RULE XVI.

Adjective pronouns must

agree in llUJ!lber 'rith their

nouns.

Q. Will you tell me whicJ1 of the words in the following ·
sentences are adjectirn pronouns, and why; also, what the
rule is for their agreemr.nt 1 'This man. These men.That book. Those books. All men. Each man. Some
men.'

Q. Will you, in correcting the following sentences, as I
read them to you, gi,·e the reasons first, and then the rule 1
'These man. This man. Those horse. That horses.Each men. All man. Erery men. Both man. Each .of
the four.'
Q. Did you never henr people in conversation say, 'Them
cost me so much, or 'I bought them articles very low' 1
'Them books arc cheap'?
Q. 'In what case is 'them' 1 ..'Besides, is it not joined to •
'hooks,' to specify, arnl can it specify, if it is a simple pronoun in the objective, joined with a nominative 1 Ought it, Of I
ought it not, to be changed to ' those' 1 Thus, instead of say"'. :.
ing, 'Them books,' ought we not to say, 'Those booki"i'? 1:~

Norn.-The foregoing is a list of tho;;e adjectives which do
frcq•w~tly su!11d for 11.arnes .. Jn tlws? phrases, 'The rich · rriny ·
have fr1enJ~, ' Assocrnte with the wtsc and rrood,' ' The future
will rcs e111lile tlir~ past,' tlic adjectives are used''as nouns, and they
rn:iy ah~ays uc s~ considered, when they describe persons or
thmgs wnh a suffic.aent clearness, without the name to which they
bduug.

·

·

·

Q. 'Rufus and William came to town, and both of . them
went ~to the muse.um.' What does'. ~ ~oth,' stand for hcre 1
1
Wha~ender, numoer, and perso n is it then 1 What therefore ;vill i( agree with 1 ·w hat is t!10 rule for its agreement 1
Who weat into foe rnuscmn, W J. .> it not' both' 1 To what
then
. is 'both' the nominative cas() !
,.
Q. Who, or how many came L1 town ·1 How many agents
are there then? To what may 'William' be connected 1
·. What is the rule 1 You say there are two agents, connected
by ancl; what then dnes 'came' agree with ? What is the
rule for such agreement 1
Q. What are the rules for the rest of the words in the sentl3nce 1
Q. ' Both roads lead to' Boston.'

Does ' both stand for a

·~ noun her'e ·? Is it not rather added to the noun ·' roads,' to spetifv SJmcthing 1 Which is it then, an alljectire or pronoun 1
I

~

160

INTELLECTUAL AND

Q. If an adjective, what is the rule for it 1 What are the
rules for the remaining words in the sentence 1
Q; 'Both,' you see, is used in the latter sentence as an atl~
jcctivc, and in the former as a pronoun; what i9 the name
given to such words 1
Q. In parsing acljective pronouns, used either as pronoun~
or adjectives, ought you not to mention what they are called,
also, why they are so called, and then lo proceed ns in the
last two examples 1

LESSON XLII.
MENTAL EXER(JISES.

Q. In speaking of the sun, do we not sometimes soy, 'H~
is setting,' and of the moon, 'She shines brightly' 1
Q. Do not the pronouns ' he,' and 'she,' refer, the former
to sun, and the latter to moon 1 Of what gentler must ' sun~
and 'moon' be then 1
Q. ';£'rue, sun is conside;·cd masculine ancl moon feminine,
by a figure of speech, as it is called. Will you no\v tell me
how \:vorcls, naturally neuter, may be made masculine or fem- '
inine 1
Q. 'James, the mechanic, has arrived.' Who has arrived ? Have two persons or only one arrived 1 James and the
mechanic are one pcn;on, very true, ought not then these two
nouns to agree in case 1
Q. When two nouns_ then come together, signifying the
same thing, would you or would you not say, that they agree
in case 1
l
Q. What ~herefore would you ~ay in parsing 'mechanic' ?
If y;ou make mechanic agree in case with 'James,' which is ,
correct, what is the nominative case to 'has arrived' ?
Q. As it is importmlt to re1ne111ber ihis, l will give a,rule

for it.

P!tACTICAL GRAMMAR.

161

RULE XVII.

When . two nouns coine. together, signifyitig the same thing,
they agree in case .'
.
·' ' ·, ·

Q. · 'John, the blacksmith, is deall.' ''l saw William, the
lawyer.' Does 'blacksmith' mean tlw same pers·o,n as 'Jolin' 1
With what then <loes 'blacksniithj agree in case, ''a nd what is
the rule for it 1
·· ·
Q. In · the second example just given, is·. ' lawy~r' ;and
'Wiliiam,' the same person 1 In what case then, · is ., lawyer,'
with what docs it agree, a,1d what is the rule for it l
·
Q. 'John i~ a blacksmith.' 'William is a lawyer.' · 'Js,'.
you k1iow, is a variation of the verb t~ be; which, is always
neuter, can it then have an object after it, and governed by
it 1 · Beside'3, is not 'John' and .' the blacksmith,' the sam.e,
person, and is not 'William' an~ the 'lawyer/ th~ _same·per:.
son 1
·
·
- · ·
· Q. Well, then, ~ught they or ough~ they nqt to be in· the
same case 1
Q. True, they ou~ht; for the same reason as in the foriner
exa.mples; the pi"inciple is obviously tl~e same. · The o.n ly
difference is that now, one of the \vonis comes before · u~e
' · v~rb, a~_tJrn othe.r after; in th~ former i'.1stances, both came . ·
. either ~"More or after. Would then or..woul<l not, the followJ ing be a good rule_ for cases of this kind 1
RULE XVIII • .

Any Nerb may have the same case after {t as before it,
when both words refer to the same thing 1

Q. 'I took her to be Mary.'

Is ' Mary' after ' the verb,
.' and does ' her' . and ' Mar.f' mean the same person 1 Well,
.then, in what case must 'Mary''. tie 1 What is the rule for i~ 1
Q.. If you have been att1mfo-e to the foregoing, you have.
~ observed one thing, which ought to be remembered, viz. that
' it makes no difference what case comes before the verb, whe-.ther nominative, possess}ve, or objective, the verb will still
' ~v:e the same case aftet- it .as beforQ. it.. Well, ,then, if it .
14*

;
/.

1&2

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

have an objective case before it, what case will it have after .
it, by the last rule 1

Q. 'She walks a queen~' Do 'queen' and 'she' refer t() .
the same person 1 What then is the rule for ' queen,' since
it is after the verb 1
Q. ' She is considered a lady of distinction.' Do these two
nouns, one before and the other after the verb, both refer to
the same thing or person 1 What then is the rule for ' lady' 1
Q. What is the rule for the rest of the words iii the sentence 1
Q . The following are proper examples under the two rules
.last illustrated; will you parse the words which fall under.,
these rules 1
'George will become a greal
'Ye are they.'
scholar.'
' She moves a queen.'
'They are good companions.'
'Thou art my friend.'
' Peter and Edward are bro- 'Virtue is a precious jewel.' "
'Varro ':Vas esteemed a great
thets.'
man.'
·
'Plautus was accounte<l a po'I took it to be him.'
et.'
' Cicero was a very e_loquent ' Alexander the Great subdued Asia.'
\
inan.'
'I considered him to be a phi- ' Claudius N ero, Caligul~;s ' ·
uncle,D rustis ·s son, a ser se-' ·
losopher.'
less, fooli sh fellow, obtain~. ·
'Julius c~sar, a Roman general, ccmquered the Gauls.'
ed the kingdom.'
.. i'
'He sat judge.'
Q. Will you correct the following, as I read them to you ; ·. ·
1
also give the rules, and tell why they are wrong1
'

'It is me.'
'Was it me 1'
'It was he that did it.'
'It was not me, it was him.',
~I took it to be she, but it was
hrm.'

'It was him .'
' It was them.'
'I thought him to be thou.'. >
' It could not have been her.;
' Mary is often taken to be •
n1e.'

163

LESSON °.XLIIt.
QUESTIONS ON
PRONOUNS.
.. ADJECTIVE
....
.
.
Q. Are the numbers · tone, Q. ·When · are ' what' and
. two, three,' &c. adjectives1 · ' whate vl:'.r' c<'.nnl?olind pro: nom'ls 1 · · · ·
. · ·
Q. What then is a more ac'."'
curate definition of adjec- Q. When is ' whae an intertives,. than the one before
rogative pronoun 1 ·
.
1
.given.
.
Q. Wh.en is' it' ~ n interroga· Q. Are adjectives of number
tive adjective profioun?
. · compared~
Q. When are ' what' . and
, · Q. ·Are there ·any oth~rs that
' whatever' adjective pronouns 1 · · .
, are not compared 1 vVhy
ar13 they not 1
.·
· Q. Is 'as~ · ever ·used as a re,Q. Will you mention some ot . lative ~
this description 1
Q. Are there riot otherwor<ls,
besides · those enumerated
Q. What is the rneaning of
the term adjective .pronoun1
in the for egoing list, whid1
Q. When are words · called
are sometimes used as adjective pronouns 1
··
acljective pronouns 1
Q., Is 'both' an adjective pro- · Q. Why then are they . not
noulf 1 ·w hy 1
classed with these, and callQ. What kind of art adjective
ed by the same flame 1
is 'this' 1 Why 1 · ·
· Q. Are adjective ·pronouns
Q. What kind of an adjective . · ever compared 1
is 'that' 1 Is 'these' 1
Q. vVhat is the rule for ad· Q... When do we use ' tlirit'?
jectives agreeing with n6uns1
, , ~hen' these '1
Q. Why is it not correct then
Q. Are any of these ac\jecto say, ' This books' 1
~ive pronouns declined 1
Q. Is it correct to say,' Them
books' 1
Q. \Vil! you decline ' one 1'
'Another' 1 . .
·" ·
Q., Why is ;it improper to say,
Q. Poes 'one' hav~ a plural 1 · ' Them men are go1w' 1 ·
Q. Does 'an.o ther' have a plu- Q. Are nouns natur&lly neuter, ever used as masculine
·, · ral?
....
or feminine 1· - . · · ,' · ·'
Y , Q. In how many cases may
,,
'1 • ' former'
and ' latter' be Q . . When two nouns come
·
·used 1
tog~ther, signifying the same
Q. ' What does, ' each'' denote?
thing, are they in the sam.,e,
·' ·. Q. Is it proper to say, 'each or differei1t cases 1 Stlppose
j ' of t1ie three, four,' &c. 1
a verb intervenes, \vhat is
;
the rule then 1 ;, ' '·" .
. ~"<. Q. Is 'every' sometimes joinQ. Why then is it not correct
:_ • n' ' ed with a plural noun 1
i
Q. What does' neither' mean1
to say, 'I am ,~ier whom
you saw'1
.: _Q. How is 'itse.lf' used 1 .·
·

'

:.;

'I

....

;
r

·164

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

JNTELLECTUAL ' AND

165

Q. What will ' a good man' <lo 1 To what then is ' man'

tlie nominative 1 \Vhat is the rule for the nominative 1 What
will he respect 1 What then is the object ol 'respect,' that
• is, th e objective case 1 By what is ' rights' governed 1 What

LESSON XLIV.
MEN'I'AL EXERCISES.

'A gooll man will
rc~pcct his neighbours' rights.'
'The man, whom
I saw, perished on
th e mountains.'
. ' Hi'." w ifc and chilclren are forsaken by
their best friend .'
'James and J olm
are the persons de.
' ,1 .."·
s1gnatcd. ·, ··
'Ah! me! I die.'
' I caught him
striking his brother
shamefully.'

Q. Th ese sentences contain all the
different parts of speech, and exemplify
nearly all the rules which you at present understand. Will you answer .all
·the questions respeding th ese examples 1 You will th en h ave a model for .
parsing other sentences. In. the first . :
place, how many articles are there 1fl.
th ese sentcnces,of what kind, and whr1
To what does the first article
, •be..

long !
Q. Wliat is the rul e fo r the definite
article? For the other articles 1
Q. Which arc the adjectives, and
why are they adjective s 1 Will" you
compare each of them ? Are they reg- .•
ularly or irregularly compared, and
why 1 In what degree is each, and why 1 ·what does 'good_>,.
describe; or qualify 1
Q. To what then does 'good' belong 1 vVhat is the t;ule • ,
.
1· .. '!
for adjectives 1
Q . There arc scrn;1 verbs, which are they, and why ar~ <i ·
.

. l

they verbs 1
.
· ..
Q. '"Will you name the present and i mperfoct indicat.ive'.
active, and the perfect participle of each? Are they regular.,
or irregular, aml why 1 There are thre e active verbs~ which •
are they,. and why! There are three neuter and one passive,
which are they, and why 1 In what mode and tense is eac}\
verb in the examples, and why 1 Will you conjugate each t :,.
In what person and number is each, and why 1
Q. In the first sentence, 'who will respect!' What the. : ,
does 'will respect,' agree with, and what is the rule 1 Wh~~ t;,\
is the rule for each of the remaining verbs 1

Is

th e rule for it 1 ·

Q. "What are the rules for the remaining houns in all the
examples 1
q,. There is one relative, and nine personal pronouns.
Which are the personali and 'vhy 1 V\Thich is \ the rel a ti rn,
· and why 1 \Vhat do the personal pronouns stand for 1 What
thon is their gentler, numbor, and person ? What is the rule
for each ?. Docs, 'his,> denote posscs:>ion 1 In what case is it
then 1 ·what is the rule for the possessive ease 1
Q . Vvlmt is the rule for each of the remuiniug pronouns 1
Q. If' whom,' stands for, and refers to 'man,' in what
gender; number, and person, must it be ? What is the rule
~ for its agreement with 'man'1 Is not 'whom,' referrhig to
1
man,' the object of' saw' ? In what c:ase then is 'whom,'
and why 1 By what w,o rd is it governed, and what is . the
rule 1
. Q. There are two participlqs. 'W hich is present and which
· · isyerfect'! Who are ' designated' ?' To what then does ·"<ld·
·
signuftd' refer? What is the rulEj. for it ?
{l,. What is the rule by which ' striking' agrees \'iith hun 1 ·
Q. There are two conjunctions. Whicl~ are they, and
;why 1 Are they copulative or disju1ictive, and why 1
. Q. There is but one word that describes or qualifies . the
·action of a verb or participle, which i~ it 1 What part of
apeech would you call it 1 What is the nile for the adverb 1
·~ Q. Is there an interjection in the example ? Which is It,
and why 1
1
. · Q. ·wm you pane the following sentences, and give the
reasons as above 1
CJam es is a mechanic.'
'He went behind the house,
II will do all my pleasure.,
before tire J10use, beside the
·,Modesty is a quality that
house, · on the top of the
' highly adorns a woman.'
house, into the house,

--

...

IG7

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

166

INTELLECTUAL AND

through the house, into the
parlor, up the chimney, and
down the roof, but could
not find him.'
'James, the mechanic, has
left us.'
' He that ac.ts wisely deserves
prail'.l0 .'
'John Nokes is a worthy citize n.'
'Tlwre nre many m en or many minds.'
' There are many birds of many kinds.'

' There are many fishes in the
sea.'
' And there are many · men
that do decree .'
' There is a boy whose nan1e
is John.'
' He might lerirn if he would.' · ;
' Industry will be rewarded.'
'I will respect lii11t Chough he
cl1ille m r.?.'
'Hc 111 c11ti.' 1_>.r the sabbath day.'
'I k ept two doss but neither
of th em is now Ji,·ing.'

EXERCISE§ FOR THE SLA'.l'E OR PAPER.
(~.

'iVill you write down four senten ces containing an article, an adjective, in th e superl ative degree, and a nouu; also,
four lun-ing the indefinite article ' an,' used correctiy, the adj cc ti ms in the co111parati ve degree, an<l four neuter nouns,
all in the plural 1 Four sentences having four adjectives in
the positive degree, and four nouns in the feminine gender.
Write twelve se nte nces, each having a personal pronoun,
verb, anti obj ect 1 '\Till you write as mauy s011tences as
there arc relative pronouns, with two verbs an<l two objects
in each? Will you wri·~e four examples in whid1 it shall be
more elegant to use ' that,' than 'who' or 'whid1' 1 Twenty, each having a specify ing adjective of number, joined
with the same noun'! .Will you write tl1irty sentences, having
the sa111e 1Jo1ninnt.irns anll objects, but each rnrlJ different 1
Will you write the last exrimples in the passiYe form? Write .
the following examples jn the possessive case, retaining tho,"
same m eaning, viz. 'The book of Jolm,' 'The lrnt of man,'
' The bonnet of my sister' 1
Will you change the following into other forms of expres-' ' .
sion, retaining the same meaning, viz. 'John's slate,' 'Ru- .,
fus's pen,' ' 'iVilliam's top,'' Susan's handkerchief'? Will ,
you write your owl'! name correctly joined with the wo~d
book 1 An exam pie of each mode and ten~e of an acti.-e, pas"' t
sive, and nettter verb? Will you write five sentences, each

having a different pers9na.1 pronoun, for .an agent, or the nominative case, two Yerbs, one in the indicative and tl~e other
in the infinitive mode 1 Several sente~ees each having pres.:
ent particip~e 1 Several having a present participle, reforring
to a noun, also governing a1i object 1 Several having the
same agents, but different verbs, each in a differ(')-nt . mode or
tense? Twelve sentences, each having an adjecti~·e pronoun
use~ ag a noun 1 Also, twelve sentences, each having an ad. jectivc pronoun use<l as an adjective? Twelve objects for
this-' William is striking - -'1 Twenty different adjec tives to this-' A -. boy' 1 Twenty different verbs to this' John - - William' 1 ~wenty different verbs in . the infinitive after this-' I began - - ' 1 Supply the words in the following sentences: 'John went-- ·the house - - the room
~garden - - wall - - the boat-·- the river - - the
hill - - the top of Jt - - its side - - his brother and sister'1
Q. What part of speech do you call the words which you
have supplied in this sentence 1
Q. Some of the conJ·unctions you recollect arc 'and if
'
' '
•~,s,' &c. Will you supply conjunctions to make out the
sense to these phrases . ' He ·i s younger - - I am.' 'She
can impr. - - she pleases.' 'He has time - - opportunity - - he would only improve them'. ' He writes - he may learn.'
Q. Will you write four sentences each having I\ verb quali·fiecl by an a<lverb 1 Four, each having a participle qualified
by an adverb 1 Four, each having an · adverb, qualified by
,another adverb 1
, Q. Will you write two sontences, each containing an in-;
1
terjection?
Q. Will you write a sentence containing all the different
parts of speech 1

a

'

.,

Q. Will you now give an example of an article agreeing
with a noun 1 Of a noun that shall be nominative to a yerb 1

Will you thus illustrate every rule which you have used by
1Uitable examples ?

..1
I:"\TE LLECT L\T, .-\-:\'D

(~.

\-Vill

.P n AC TIC' AL GRAllIM A n .

l1 qrin wit!t tlw fir•: t r>\;1rnpl<' whi"l' \"Oii
fnr 1~a.d 1 wo ;·d i;1 .l.h;1I. and Lhe
s1 11· 1·r·<'din'.r r-\:n:qd f's ! Th;·n '':ill y1111 1·0111! 1t "tW•' '' " l11 •r•m ',
:111d C"l:i-'-< 1•;1:·11 \\l>\",j liii"llll.:'. iHll li :1\ l Iii'' ~l' lil t 'lll '< ' '-' !
v011 111•w

".,., ~1 c dO \''il, rind ~·: iv" 1l1 ;-, rnl f' .~

l
q.

I

, L
I

'Jnnws , wl1t~!·c i" th al· knifo1' l o;; J:lf•t •'$ spnl•r·n to ·!
In wh at p c r~ 0 11 tlwn i-: J :1111 r_•s 1 Do!'S .J;111ws ;1p1 •·~nr to hP an
:1•~<' 111 nr :111 ohi <'.l'i. of 1h ~ vr. r!i , n r w~ilhf•r 1
Q. '\Vliy is .1 :11!1''" :1 11•11111 '! N;n·; rl o yo1 1 o ;- tl o yo!J nnL
rccoll cet that tl H' n 0111;1 i:ili1·1' l'il"" i> <n <'<1 1\Fll, lwca11~ " it j,
the U;ln1 ln1;, or I ~ ~!.: ! i :1~~ ~::~~; '..! ?'
q. J\ µ:ai n; :l ow: or 1i:> :., s 11 '. 1L th e word' .J :11 n0s' st.nnd hy
il s1M, tlwl i<; , docs ii or 1lnf'8 it nnt ( !;·p 1: 11d at a ll 0 11 t!w rC' sl
of th e Sl'!l(C ll ("C?
li. T nw, it. d e w ~: 111 >1: ii j , i;11kp1•11d!'lll. nf" ii . :--;i 11 rn il 11·11
,l ;111ws is si111pl y ;1 11 :111 1<.:, :1: 1:! :1 :; tli .~ 11 rn 1 i1 1 : 1li il~ j.; l! 1c 11 ~111 1 i11 ~ :
or k:-irli11 ;i; <'.:1 "1'., wrnilil : · 1111 Pl' W!ll :!d .-!·Cl ll 11 :)t <:;1 y nf F::l!'h
11 0 1111 s n s sl :1 1Hl li y U1 :·1w;d -l :>, h" in g th e 11 :rn w'.' o f' p r r~ oll'i ..
s polc c n t.o, that. lh r._v <'re i1 1 th e 110:.1i n;l! iYe case intl C' pcndcn t?
Q. V ery trn c, th ey arc pl a('c! l i11d cpcnd c11tly . .I \Yi.l l tli crcfore stat e it in the fo r m or a rul e, will yo u r epeat

A noun or pronoun, 1k noti ng the name of a person or thing
addressed, is in the nomir1..ati rn case inucpendcnL

Q. 'Ladies, I ri se wil.lt astonishtnellt.' Dons thi~ WPnl
'ladies,' st.and by il sf'l f~ and is it in the second J>l'l"SO ti! Whal
then is the rnle for i L1
<-l. Whnt an~ tltn ruks for the rc 111a111i11~ won1s in tho example 1
{~ . 'Joseph, I am astoni shed.'
What is the rule for' Jo ~eph 1'

I
l
I
t

I
l
~

Q . '\Vliat an: 1ltP nile<i f(lr the remaining wrml.:: in the Sl'nlcnce 1
Q . \Vill Jv1i11 gin' tl1 e nih•s for (he wonls in (lie followin"h
scnlPncrs 1
' <~f'. 11l!P111"11 or1lw .J "n· .'
' Fat ltrr, l li:wc done wrong .'
'HcH'n ' 11d S ir, l 1;:n: i1 c!l 'Oh! 1111 n1oll1n ! what shall
yum ll'ltcr.'
I tlu !1;,. t!1 ce.'
Q. 'The annr bC'ing taken, "-e rclinq11ish c(l all hopes.'
Docs or do cs not, 'tl!f nrmy bein g taken,' stnncl i11rl npcndcnt
nf th e l"!' S l of tl11 : sr 1dc tH'<' 1
<( Do yott or do yon not. sec, that we haYc a nominat1Yc
< 01~c i1nlcpc ndc11L here, as 11wch as in the former examples 1
<-{. Dues or lloes not the nominaiir c here, haYe a participle
joined wi 1h it, nlike i ncl epcnd cnt of tltn rest of the sen tcn<'c 1
fl.. vV('ll , ihen, since the exampl e is so silllilar to th e las! ,
we mighl class them to gc t.l1cr, mi ght ''"" not 1 P crlwp s, how ever, fur llie sake of dis tinguishing th e m, ii lllay be well to
give the la st example a new name. Since 'absolute' mean s
' independent,' would it not be a good name for in stances of
thi s descrip ti on, ":hrrc a no11n allll a particip!I'. j oincll H"illi it,
nrc ronncdc!l with the rest of tl1e scntf'tH'C 1
Q. Tru e, it would. I will now girn you 1his rule. \Vilt
you repeat it 1

•

RULE XX •

A nou n or pronoun joined with a participle, and not depending on the remaming part of the sentence, is put in tlie
nominativ e case absolute.
Q. 'The army being taken, all hopes were abandoned.'
What is the rule for 'army' 1 What are the rules for the remaining words in that and the following sentences 1
whole estate devohed on
'Shame b eing lost, all virtue
him.'
is lost.'
' The sun lrnYin[); arisen, all
'John's father having tlie1l, the
things appcarctl lovely.'
Q. ' To concJudc, the power can never return.' ' Has to
conclude,' any verb or any thing before it, to govern it? Ras
it any thing to do with the res t of the sentence 1 Does it then

15
/.

'·

lG!.l

liO

PRA CT ICAL GRAMMAR .

JNTE LI.ECTUAL AND

or do c.~ it not, starnl inrl cpc111lcnlly of t.lt c rest or the scntencc1
Q. \Vcll , then , if ii is lllrl cpc11il cnt, <'<lll wc rlo any thing
11H11'\\ 11lte n w1: p<ir,;n ii, lk111 f' i1upl y lo <;l;1lc tl1i .~ L1d1 YctJ
lrnc, we ca 1111n!. \Viii you th 1'.11 n·p<·al. it ·1

' To (lo rnenn acts rlegrnrlcs a man.'
Q. \Vlr:1l :-ire Ute noininatiyes to tire nrbs, 'requires ' :rnd

' tl eg rn11c,; ' 1
Q. 'W ill yo u give the rnles for each word of the precedin g
sentences' :rnd n!so or llic followin g ones 1
'To Le ortcn ' 'cxcil shows
for a new on~ 1s not good
· v;erilrn css.'
policy.'
'To reli eYc the oppressed is 'To beg in is the best way to
co mrn cnd riblo.
accomplish.'
'To r cn0uncf' an 0l<l friend
Q. "l'o g-q1·c n1 tli at i111;·1ily membe r, the ton g11e, i .~ ,;;;1) lll Ctim c::; 1li1Tir·11ll.' TTow m:111_v words ron <: lit11tc the n01ni11ati n:
(' :1 ., •• ( ' • ' ; ., , ' i: 1 1l 11-· las t ",. 111•·n .- (' 1
.
r
Q . J ) ne .~ or docs not th e \ YOi'il 'difli cnlt ' describe thi s nominati..- c 1

!lllLE XX!.

Tl1c infi11ili ,-e mode i,; frequ ently i111lqH'1Hlcnt.

q . \Yill yo11 r:;i1·c th e
fi>llol\'i ne: S<'l il !~ o re~ ·1

rnl c~

cot1fi-:~s 1l1 i: trnlli , I 1ra;;
1n1wli i11 L11ilt .'

' Tn

' To «p<::1k 1ilainly ,
IPil liiin.'

coJl11i c!-

L11·

e :icli o r th e \H•rrh m th e

( ·1· . , nrcicecd _f e ~- , :--,, t f11e sa cTfi i ,·.e 1 1 1 0 :.; ~ :H'. 1n ·1dfl
' T~1 c \1 •ri hi ,; p·•1·•cr, lie 01• pr <'s~ 1·rl hi " l!H ' ll.'

J

I

Q. . \ '1-,. Jl,

i!1 c n, 1'. li1' :1 i h 1 •r1 ~ i ·; :111 <1•l.i«di 1c <k..;niliiw; a11y

plrr:-i "r. or 11r1111i11:1fi 110, 11111 :- d. ii.

fl.

'Tn r·,:cf' l n· rp1i1·r": l! Jl :•·li ''l".J.1 ' 1 ~ 'fn 1•\r·r> l ' irnk!'en<l:'11I of' tli:; r (':> I uf' tir e :~ r: td. t::i:·:; :1 ~ i11 tk~ forme r cxnm -

rlf''?
Q.. Docs not ' to c. ·cd,' do r.n 111dhin i;- ? \Vlr:il. docs il do 1

Q. lf' it

j .;: 'fq <' \t'r

I,' i l.:i1 I< T' ;r r ·- , i " n r

i ~ 11 11 1 'i r1 r'\< Tl' ;1

kind ot :1 gc nl or 11o: n:: i:!i1'.·c !'. :i ~;e to' rc q11in~ s' (
(~ Tn10, it i-: fl1 r> w1min:1 1i,: r r'~l~f', ~11rl ~ <: th " , -0rh i<: of

llw ll1ird !""'""111,
ll('I' 111 :1y ' f•.>

~; i11 .: .'.11h r 1111111lwr, i11 \\ l1:tl

r'\<Ti,' ii ·: 11:i 11 1i11 :'.!i , : , ;:· 1·,
t~1q; :. r...:

.:

'will

d e;~rad c '

a

Jn il n

;\, ill

1'''"·~011, ;111d 1111111 -

l w ':111..:id 1·11 ·il

dn ·_r(.1 iJ1 •.
.;

(l

! l s iL not ' to sin:; n il ~a r

I
J

'

\II'

11111 :; L if 11\ll lwlrn1 g fo tlr:lf

plit'<I"' ' 111· li" i1:i •1:rii1"?
Q. 111 p:1 r.;iwr s iwli ~:c 11 t.~ 11 u: 01 , Ct :: dilL rcnt pnrt s of' s peec h
may be pa rsed by !110 111.;ch cs, :11 11 [ the infiniti ve, only. be
ronsid c rcd tl1 e n r;:nin :iti vc to~ 'F: " .' ;-!·1. VV il! yo u par.~c !hr
fol!mvin~; SP11(1"11' "'"" ?
' To SUjlpnr! a j11 s ( c:111 ~ r. is ' To h:1YP a rompr!1•11r y 1s
flw d11\ v n l ;ill
ve ry d• ;'-' i mlJ!n . '
'To lie ·ridiculed is unpl ea. I
. sanl.'

-···"/!~~

1

....

l!t i- 111 . ~

so 11 1'.s'

! VVc l!,

then, may or may nnl., 1lic wlt olc phn1 sc 'lo sin µ: yu]gar

son gs' be consi(lcrctl as foe nominatiH~ case to ' dcgr:ld e' 1
Q. Let us now put lhe:i c fads into the form ofa rule. \Viii
you repeat
1n ~ 1,r;

171

-xxn.

The infinitive mode, or part of a sentence, may be used as
t he nominative case to Yerbs of the third pers on si ngular.
' Tu be learned require s much study.'

l\IENT A J_, EXER CTS RS.

'He came to in -: trnct.'
'He was endeavouring
learn.'

'He \\·as worthy lo Le rcgar-

to

dcd.'
'Ih" is ;11\ olijec( lo he pitied.'

'I took it 1n b e h er.'
(.l . In tlif' first cxnrnpk 11h;ii dnc s fire infinitive ,' In insfrnd ,'
follow 1 Wlwt dm~s the infinitive follow in the se co nd!
What in th e third 1 Tlw fonrtld Fi fth 1

172

..

INTELLECTUAL AND

Q. Can we then, or can we not, make a rule with these
facts 1 When the infinitirn comes after, either a verb, participle, acljecti,·e, noun or pronoun, 011 which it depends, may
it or may it not be said .to be go,·erned by either of these
parts of speech 1
Q. W ell, th en, in parsiug, yo u mny state the whole rule or
only that part which appli es to one instance . Will you
repeat
R ULE XXIII.

The infiniti ve moue may be goverened by verbs, participles,
nouns, pronouns or ::uljectfrcs.
Q. Will you exami ne the five for egoing examples, at the
commencement of the lesson, and parse each word in them,
also in the following 1

'He was eager to learn.'
' The instructor regucstc<l
him 1.o wri le.'
' I saw 'William trfing to
swim.'

'Jrimes prerniled on William
to study.'
' H e end eavo ured to make
progress in his studies. '

Q. 'They love to play.' ' T hey love to read books.' In
these two examples, what do 'to play' and ' to read,' follow 1
Q. What th en is the rul e for each 1 But what <lo they
'love 1 What then is the object of 'love' in both examples 1
Q. True, 'to pl ay ' is an obj ect, and 'to read' books is
anoth er; but the infinitive .11111 all the words may be governed without considering this fact.
Q. Wh en then we parse the verb, can we or can we not,
in this manner, <let.e rmine whether the verb befo re the infini·
tive is active, or not 1
Q. Hence llo you see t.hat the infiniti ve or part of a sentence does sometimes perform the office of an agent, or nominative, and sometimes of an object or objective case 1
Q. 'They desire to make progress in learning.' vVhat docs
' to make,' follow i11 this sentence 1 What then is the rul~
for 'to make' 1

Pii.AcTicA:i.. drtAMMAli;

173

Q. But what do they 'desire' ? Is not 'to inake progress
m learning' the object in fact 1 Is 'desire' then an active or
passive verb ?
Q. This object, being a sentence, consists of several
for the other words· besides 'to make ) >
words, what is the rule
.
also for those in the following sentences 1
'William desires to excel.'
' The boys love to slide on the
'Man likes to associate with
ice.'
man.'
'A good boy hates to be idle.'
' I bade him do it.' What is the rule for 'I' 1 For ' bade'?
For ' him' 1 Now .it would seem that ' do,' ought to be in the
infini tive, since it follows another verb, but has it the sign
'to ' 1 Well let us see if we cannot supply it, although it
should not sound quite so well. 'I bade him to do it.'Now since '~o,' is understood, what rule would you give for
'do'1

Q. I will now give you several exampl es to be parsed, in
which there is 11-n infiniti ve, without the sign ' to.' ·will
you tell me which they arc, and what is the rule for each as I
read them to yo u 1
' I bid you rlo it.'
'He dares · not repeat that
'James saw him catch the
speech.'
bird.' ~
'I heard him decla1e it.',
'I hear him breathe.'
'James, let him go.'
Q. How many verbs are in the foregoing sentences, in the
mfiniti ve mode, without. the si gn ' to'1 \Vhich are they 1
Q. There may be some verbs, besides those named above,
that have an inllnitivc after them without the sign of the preposil it10n ; but you can easily tell them by the sense of
the sentence. I
give you a list of the most common ones
in a rule. Will you repeat

'vill

RULE XXIV.
Vetb s that follow mu, DA }tE, L ET, SEE, HEAR, FEEL,
MAKE, and some others, are iu the infinitive mode "ithout
• the sign of the preposition 'to'.
Q. Will you parse the follov•in g exampl es 1
'He saw the lion jump.'
'Susan, let Catharine have
'Boys, let the dog go .'
her book.'
Hi*
' They heard Mary sing.'

.

.

l' IlACTLCAL GHAJ\IMAH .

INTELLE CTUAL Al\'ll

175

(~ .

I.A ESSON XL VIII.
lUEN'l'AL :EXERCISES.

Q. In speakin g of th e boys in a11y schoo l, wouhl you say
' A part is out,' or 'a pnrt arc out' 1 V\T hat arc out 1 Is it, or i ~
it not, a part oJ' the boys, whi ch is th e no111inatirn caso to
'arc' 1 Is, or is not, 'a rc,' pl ura l ·?
Q. Is thi s then a ~~rccnb le (o t11 c rul e tlwt a Yc rb mu st agre e
with its no111iu ati1·c, in m11111J cr 1 L et us cxarnin c the cxa 111 pl c a littl e. Do 11 c not by 'p:1 rt' mean more boys than one!
If ' part' signiJi cs 111 nrc th an on e, is it, or is it. not, plural, in
fat t 1

Q. ' Veil, th en, since parl sla ud s fo r rnor , l!1 an 011e, th at
i<:, for several, inusl it ha Ye a sing1ilar or a plll rn l ' erb 1
Q. 'T li c :-in 11 y 1·0111111 it.s 111:111 y dcprcd:1.tio11-: .' Tl1i .;; i,; 111or ·~
corrcl'l llian Lo say,' eo1111 11!L 111:111y dcprc:LiLi o:1 s,' is it nol !
D ocs, or tl ocs 1101, 'arwy,' i1tduJ c the idc:t or :nany so ldi ers J
Q,. H erc tl1 c11 is a no11n ~ i g nif y in ,<!; 111a11 r, n ocd as a 11omi nati1·c Lo a si11g1il a r l"crb, an1l in U1 t: otlin ca ~,~ tlic fiH'.t. wa,.
1\ ircctly contrary . D o you th en, o r do you nut sec , that a
nou n meani n ~; 111:-i ny, 111ny ]Jc th e 11011 1i;1;1'irn P; l lier to a singular or plural \ eru?
Q. We mtt ~3 l examine th ese two exam pl es , and see if th crr
is not a diffe rc1u·.e between th em. When I Ra y ,' A part of
the !Joys arc 011!.,' do I or do J 11 o l 11 ic;1 11 , that several, Rny
pe rhaps a dozen or more, arc oul 1 \Vhen I say, 'The army
commits many deprc(lati ons,' do I mean that se veral soldiers
commit, or do I mean that the whole army, taken as a body,
commits many tlcpredations 1
Q. Now then do you not see a plain difference in the two
mstances ~.
Q. When, t.h on, we have a noun standing for many iudi·
vi duals, and in using it, we refer to a part of them only, but ,
more than onel must the verb agreeing with it.l be singular or ,

plural 1

'Vhen we use the noun which stands for many imliYid uals , ;rnd 111 ca 11 Ili c whole, t:-iken as one sin gle body, in wh:1t.
num ber mu st the verb he, that :-i grccs 1vith it 1
Q. I will give ynu a rule for .this , wi ll yon repeat it1
RUJ... E

XXV .

A 11 ct1111, si nguhr in form but w eaning m a11y imli1 i<lu;il ,.:,
may l m\'I'~ a \' erb agreeing with it in the plural, wh en referen ce is had to a part, only, of those indiYiduals; but 1Yh ci1
rc fr rr ncc is ]rn(l tr> th em, as a " ·hole, !li e 1crb mu st Le s111 gul ar.

(l. ' Vill you parse t.l1 c foll owing

sc nl~ nr es 1

( i\ 1 · ~1 rl o r th e boys arc out.'
( Tli c lillil!.iltHfo ru ~ h .'
p ~ut of the boys arc <lis- 'A part ~ poi! the :ii tars.'
missed.'
'The m11ltiti.Hl e C<l!!;c rl y pm' T 11c r') t!llcil were not 11n:.rni s 11 .-~ pl eas ure as th e ir C'hief'
r:u 11s wli 011 t ltf!f sc parntcd.'
good.'
<i. 'Tli f! fr-1ccti11 :.; w:1s larµ;f! .' l lc ro ' 111 cc li11 g' stand :; for
m a ny in rli1 idu als, i( is I m e, hut j.~ C s it 110l re for j,, 1l11 ·1n as a
body 1 l s it then pl um! in fact ? Ought the n~ r b then (o br
'w:u ' or' 11·crc ' 1
Q. D or· s tlwn 0r do<''l not, ''Ya<:,' :~g re e wil.11 ' lllcc ti11;.::,'
ac('.(m ]in ; lo th e ge11cral rule, 'A Ycrb 11111 st. ab11 :•J \\ ith j[.;

·'A

uuwi1mli1e, &1.»1
Q. Th e following :c;e n tenccs cu11lai11 \'iolation s of th e ab;Y e
rule. vVill you iiarsc th c111, co rrerl th c111, and tell why th ey
arc incorred 1
' A part of the boys has returned .'
'In th e Jays of youth the
multitude eagerly pursues
pleasure.'

' The nation are pow erful.'
'The church have n<> r0as0 n
to proceed in thi s man ner.'
' The people has man y priYilcges.'
·

LESSON XLIX.
MENTAL EXERCISES.

Q. 'He walked a mile.' Did he walk any thing 1 Does
'walked,' then, have an object after it ?

176

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.
INTELLECTUAL AND

Q. Is 'mile' then in the objective case, an<l governed by
'walked' 1
Q. Well, th en, let us suppose it to be in the nominative.
But can it be in the nominati ve after the verb, for does it
mean or refer to the same person, as, 'he,' the nominative
b efore the verb 1
Q. H it were the nominalirn after the verb, what would
be the rule for it 1
Q. \Ve will next see if th ere are any wor<ls omitted, as in
a former exampl e. D oes the sentence me(ln th e smne, as
'He walked over the space of a mile' 1
Q . In what case is 'mile,' in this instance hav ing the preposition b efore it.
Q. Now since it is customary in speaking to olllil i11 this
manner, several words in a sentence, as in speakin g of time,
lrl Ca Slll'c ,
to say, (The 1!Cnllcman Yisit.c1l me a week ';
'The Chinese ha ve built a wall fifteen feet high'; a nd of dis tan ce, 'He ran a mil e'; would you not say th at nouns signif)"ing time, di:_;:tance, and meas ure , arc put in the objective
c<~se, aml go ye rn e<l by a prcpos i!1on undcrstnnil 1
Q. In what case !lien arc' wee k,' ' fee t,' aml ' mi lP,' in till'
foregoing cx:rn qil r.s ~
Q. As lll<lli_\' GISC,j
t11i :~ J;i111 l nrn y oec m , it "'ill he \Yell
to ki.n: a rul e Lo dispose of' ll1crn. \Vill y ~nt l''' l"' :1l

jects of 'taught' and 'gave' 1 What are the rules for each 1
Is not 'me' in the objective 1
(~. \Vcll, then, we have · two objective cases after each
verb, ha vq we not 1
Q. Herc, perhaps, we shall have a little difficulty, for do
you know of any rul e by which we can govern 'me' 1 Let us
examin e th ese exam.pies, and see if there is not some little
word le ft out before 'me,' in each instance. ' H e gave a
book-- me.'' H e taught grammar--mc.' '\Vhat ' vo rd,
and "·hat part of speech is there, tha t you can insert, and
make sense 1

Q. '\Vhat th en is 'me' governed by, in each example, and
wh a t is the rule 1
Q. 'He ask ed me a ques tion .' \Vhat did he ask ? Of
whom <lirl he ask 1
Q. \Vhat then arc the rnks for' m e,' nnd 'f)Hcslion'?
Q. \Nell , now, since it is customarr to omit the prepos ition after some ~erbs, we can make a ~·ulc to ~ uit this fact.
Will you rep eat

ur

or

J!.UJ_..E

xxrr.

Nouns signifying time, measure, distance, Llirection, or
space, arc in the ohj ective case, and governed hy a preposition understood.

Q. Will you parse the following exatnples 1
'He li,·ed twenty years.'
'Th ey were carried six hundred miles.'
' They built a wall twenty
feet in thickness.'

'He was confinc1l thirty rlays.'
' Cong ress continued in session six months .'
'The last summer I visited
New-Haven.'

Q. 'He taught me grammar.' 'He gave me a book.' What
did he teach, and what di<l he give 1 What then are ob-

~77

RUJ,J.J /G{tTL

l

Adi Ye verbs of asking, t eac hin~ , and some others, arc follow crl by lW O objective <'aS !~S , the OllC oi' a tl ifug-, t.ltc olher of
a perso n; a prep os iti on being 11nd crs!oo d.
Q. \Vill you parse the follo \\ inµ; examples!

'The lecture r tau;ht me as trnnmnv e \·erv dav.'
'My fath~r gave me food and
clothing twenty-on e y ea.rs .,

'J Te asked me some fJUCS t ions r<'sp ec tin g that. scie nc e. '
' lle wrote me a very Ion;; letter las t winter.'

.....eeLESSON L.
MENTAL EXERCISES.
Q. 'He taught me grammar.' Then grammar was taught
ine, by him. Do you see in the last example after the passive verb, 'was taught,' we have' me,' in the Qbjcctive case,
~md governed by ' to,' understood ?

.'
17 ~

(~. Yn n l1arc Jc:nn c<l tlwl nc ry actirn ycr!J

1n ;1y

he 111ade

passi\·c, by mal\ irn~ th e ob,iccl lhc 110111i11ali\e cnsc, Lut tlo we
nof. somrtimcs mccl \Yith thi s ~;11n c n1 ca ni11 !;, e.': prcs~c (l thu~

- ' I wris tau ght gn111111rnr Ly him'?
Q. In thi s pl1r.:sc , inslcatl of maki11~ tl1<' oh,ied of Pie nctio11 , tl w 11 orni11;11iYr i11 tL c p a~:~: i1c , i ~' il wd 1:1:'('"•1 :il'kr ll 1t>
Hrh '

(i. ] -.; jf (~I' i·i it ]1f'I <: fill in file> 0]1jM·jj,·t> r ~Cf' r
f? . 'Vr ll , -: i nrP tli i ~ ;>!"1 ~i11 1ihr nin,Jr <: nf f'\'j'l!' r, ~ ; n n k11·p

(' il Jlll' i1i111 ! ! · ' ', ( :11 1 \ i' I' n;· (' '.111 \\'[' IH ' l '~ :·>_\· , fl::•f ]''""."\" l,( ' r \ 10
li;nc cn111rC;11 .~ c; :111 r:!jr rt. th: 1l 1,, :111 ol·.iccii'. c t. :'. "l' al'i<.'r

th C"rn
C~.

7

'IIc :.1. . : l,;,."l H1 i'

~l

q1! ~ ;; ;·1 1.
1

..

'\Vlrnt ditl he a:dc 111 e '! l s 'qu es tion' th e objcd in lw th cxn m ·
l'lcs 1 N w.1· ld 11'' l''d t!i PS!' liH'f !' info 111< ~ lnn 11 n t' :·1 rnlr .
·w ill you repeal
Pass i re Ycrbs

or a ~ lrn1 g,

teachin g, riml some others, arc fo l-

Jo\Yt~'~ ! · .;~ Lit e ot.,; (_·~!i '~ e n~c .

Q. or tlt c folio" i ; 1 ~~, some nrc prop er cxa 1npkc. under Uin
last rule, arnl others und er the lnst but one.
them cor rcctl y 1
'I ask')d him 1hc qu c~ tion. '
'The ques tion was asl< ecl him.'
' He was nskc(\ th e qnes tion.'
'A ktf.cr wn s wrif.t<-11111<'.'
'The Lisliops a11d :1IJ!Jnfs were
all allowed their scats in
the house oflonls .'
' The emperor foruid Theresa his presence.'

' He lnu ght me 1~r;i1nmHr .'
'H e 1u0te 111 e :t. let!cr.'
'They <l llow cd lii111 hi s seat.'
'Thcrrsn. 1rn s f(>rhid t.li c prcSl'll<'< ~ uf tl1c c 11q icror.'
'The pres ence o f' th e emperor was forbiLl Theresa.'

J~ESSON
lU EN'l'AL

\ Vj\l you parse

LJ.

J~XERCJSES .

Q. 'In the beginning of the world.' What kind of participle is ' beginning' 1

.'

({ . \\'l 1u ur 11 li:il. 11as ' licg i1111i11 g,' or i11 olli!·r 1n1rd,-, is
l11 crc a1 1.r 1l1i11g for 'lic gi1111i11 g ' to rcf'!.'r to'l Trn c, tl1 crc is 1wl,
!ml pn~~:ilil.r it m;iy p;i rtnkc of' 1llC' 11:11111·c of' :1110tlicr p:tr! nl
spePf'li. .I>o<"S ii , or dorf: i( not ltl ('H ll tl1P ~;)\II( ~ i\S Cl!lllllH: lll'l' 1r:P11l., thnt. is , docs ii, or docs it 11ot l1:1xe tl.i c sen~c of a nnun?
(./,. Tr1\!', it dill' '-'. a11d ii h:1 :' ;111 ;1rli(' ll ' j,.·i'orc ii. \\'hat
part t1C " l't '•'.cl1 ll1P1 1, 111<1} a p:1rli <"ij il t• lw ,.;11111\'ii11te~ <'<Ill('d,
11)1 Cll i i. h;1 ;; :111 :11'iil'\I' htJill'I'. i i ?
. •
({. \\'c s li;ill sn111"1 1111cs wi ~ li lo di :; tin t-:1 1i ~li tl1i .s cla ss (lf
i.l!l\1 1 1 dl1r· 1 "~. ~ ) i ;ill \\t '. 11:>! 1
<2. ~-;ill('C '11:1rii1·i11i;il,' 111";111 '-' r<'l;d i11 !~ tri 1';1rfi1·i11!1·c, , "01ild
itor \ \ ' (\lild it not i.>1~ ; i tu>od n;11n c i~1r ~ 1H · li l';nlicipk,;; as arc
ll Otllb

11.'l'.d \I" ll<>llll°' ·I
(~.. 'T hey s1w11d lnrgc s ums iii clccr1rati11 !~ thei r houses.' Jn
d crn rati11 ~: 1~ ;11 ! \\' li at tli c11 i .~ tli e rn lc for g111 · c rnin~ 'l1011~cs,"

hy tlw 1·:irfi1·.i1dr: ' d1" '"rnfi11g' '!
Q. 'J)ccora1i11 !.:;' li <i<: n n arti cl e hrf',irc· it, ii is trn1'., ln1Ld uc~
it refnr to <111}' tlii11 g, d o1;' it. 1101. r;it!icr h;irn the mrflnin g of
oninrn cn11 Let m sne: 'in tl1 c onw1J1c111s of their houses .'
Does no1 this 111 a1zc se n se -~
(i,. H 11i c11, ' dccor:i ii11 g 1 mea11 s th ~ sn mc as the 1101111 'ornament s,' ou ght. it , or ongltt it 1101., nll11oug;h it has 1w article
before' if, tu 1.r< ~ c;1lletl ;1 parti cipial 11011111
""
Q. vVcll, if it is a 1101111 , what wortl is there before it, by
whid1 it lllUSt be gornrneil 1
Q. Frmn the~ f'nrcgo i11 g- remarks, whrit. docs it. rippear, fliat
all part ici pl es, \Ylt c l11 e r they t ake an ohjcd aflc r them or not,
11iay b e call ed, when they ha ye the sense of nou ns 1
Q. Participial nouns is a good term for them; they gene rally h arn an article before them, though not always. Do
you recollect whether the participial noun, 'decorating,' go verned ' h ouses' in the objective casc1 It may be well to remember wlwt case participial nouns govern. ·wm you therefore
repeat

RULE XXIX.
The objective case m ay be gorerne<l by participial nouns.

I:

I~
ISO

INTELLECTUAL AND

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

Q. '1Vill you parse the following sentences, illustrating the use
of a participial noun, both with and without an objective caset
' Some thin gs peri sh in the ' Please d with the whistling of
using, others in the using
a name.'
.
.
become more ' 'aluable.'
'He bore Ins misfortunes
'By the fea r o.f raisin g ~nvy.'
wit~1011,t uttering one com ·
'Without havuw0 Leen m the
plamt.
world.'
'He was bu sy in making prep'Reading is useful.' .
ai:ati ons .for his depa~t~re;'
' Do you teach readm g and 'Bemg prai sed w.as !us ~um.
writin g 1'
'By the observrng of these
'Jn correcting hi s sentcn~cs,
rules l~e s11c~cct!ed.',
he made some mi sta kes.
'Exccss 1rn dnukmg 1s nun'
ous to a man 's health.'

LESSON Lii.

~

JU EN'l'AJ~ EXERCISES.

Q . 'He 1locs nothing.' Docs this mean that he does any
thing 1
Q. ' He docs not tlo nothin g.' D oes thi s 1ncan the same
as the other 1
Q. W ell, th en, if he does not do nothin g, 1l ocs he or docs
he not clo so methin g 1
Q. 'He does evi l.' Docs this phrase affirm or tleny any-

thin g 1
Q. ' Ile 1loes 110(. do eyi l.' Docs thi s nllirm nr 1lc11y anylhin g 1
Q. W ell, now, since n q~ali vc m ca11s denying, and aflirmatirn means allinning, w o11ld you call this sentence, 'he docs
good,' an affirmative or ncgatin~ sentence 1
Q. ' He does not do goo d.' Is this a negative or an affirmati,·e sentence 1
Q. Is this a negative or an affirmative sentence, ' He does
not do nothing 1'
Q. Nothing you know, means not any thing, nnd is there
not another negativ e word!

181

Q . How many negative words then, are there in the sentence 1
'

Q. You say there are two and a]so that it is an affirmative
sentence. Well, th en, do not two negatives destroy each
other, th at is, are they not equal to an.affirmative 1
Q. It will be useful to remember this, perhaps it is of importance sufficient to constitute a ru]e. vVill you therefore
repeat

RULE XXX.
Two n egatives destroy one another or are equal to :rn a.ffirmati vc.
C-l. ' Vill you co.r r ect the following sentences, and in doing
it, tell what a sente nce having two negatives means, and then
gi \' e th'c rnle 1
'He docs not do no harm.'
'Be hon est,nor take no shape,
11 or se mblan ce of disguis e. '

'Nor did I not p erce ive him.'

'I nm poor, I do not possess
no proverly.'
I

i! ,

I

LESSON Lill .
I\IENT AL EXERC ISES .

Q. ' I detain ed you that yon mi ght see that man 1.hat was
m11rdcr1~ 1l.' llow many 'thats' am there here! They arc
each of a <liffc rcnt part of speec h as you doubtless sec. Let
us see if w e can pi ck them out. What does the last 'that'
stand for, or relate to 1
Q. "\Vhat part of speech is it then 1 Can 'who' or 'which'
be substituted for this word in this place and make sense,
tlms, ' that man who' or' which was murdered 1'
Q. vVhen, then, you can substitute ' who' or ' which' for
'that' and make sense, what part of speech is it ?
({. Can you use 'who' or 'which' for the 'tliat,' which

16

!l

I·
11

I!
I
II

II

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

182

IS3

INTELLECTUAL AND

stands before' man' 1 Is it a relative then, or is it added to
the noun to specify 1 Is it not then an adjective pronoun 1
<!. fa the fir<;t 'that' in thr. sm1h•11cr., ntldr.d tn a noun
Can 'who' or ' which' be used in its place 1 Js it then either
an adjective or relative pronoun?
Q. J)ocs it not assign a cause, or give a r eason, why I detained you, and at the same time connect the clauses of the
sentence togethe r 1
Q. 'Vell, if it connects by expressing addition, caus(', &c.
is the 'rnnl a pronoun, or conjunction 1
Q. In such phrases as th e above, th e sense is tho, best
guide, it i'l true, to determine the parts of speech. nut "~
this word 'that,' is a relative when you can substitute 'who'
or 'which' for it, and an adjcctiYc pronoun when joined with
a noun to specify, of course then, when it is ne ith er of these
parts of speech, it mu st be a conjunction, must it not ?
Q. ' I dislike such folks as Ju,·c idle ne ss.' 'Vliat is the
object after 'dislikes' 1 By what then is 'folks' goYc rnt::d 1
Q. Is it not 'folks' that love ;tllcncss 1 Then what can be
th e 11cm inati' e lo ')O\·c' unl ess it is ' as' 1
Q. Does 'as' stand for 'folk:>' then 1 What part of speech
t!i P. n is' as,' when it stands for or refers to a noun 1
Q. What is the rule for its agreement with 'folks'? In
what case is 'as' ? Do you notice tha t it follows 'such' in
the same sentence 1
Q. When then 'as' follows 'such,' in the same sentence,
what part of speech is it ge nerally called 1
Q. Can you also tell by the sense, as well as by the word
'such,' wh en 'as' is a rel aliYe pronoun 1
q. 'I found such a thing as I never saw before.' What
did I find 1 What then is the object of found, and what is the
rule for it 1
Q. What did I never sec before 1 Does ' as' stand for
'thing,' then, here, or docs it not 1
Q. If it does, what is its gender, number, and person 1
Q. You say that 'thing,' is, strictly speaking, the object of

'
d r
tl ·
cl 'th'n"''
· 1'11 what
and that 'as stan s 1or us wor
1 o ·
case then, is 'as,' and what is the rule by which it is govcrn-

',.nw,'

d by' saw '~
Q. D o you f111cl from the fore;;oing, that 'as' may be in
the objed iVfi, n!'! well as in the nominative case 1
Q. 'Do as w ell as you can.' Docs (he first 'as' de sC'ribe
th e adverb, 'well,' that is, tell how well 1
Q. ·w hat part of speech must it b~ then, if it describes or
qtnlifies a verb, participle, adjecti\·e, or adverb 1
({. Jlad it desc ribed a noun, " ·hat part of speech wou1d it
harn been?
q,. 'Do as well as you can .'

Docs or docs not the second

'a•' con n r.ct the phrases on each side of it 1 \Vhat part of
~peech mu st it b e th en, in this, and in all instances where it
conn ects sentences ·1
Q. Ca:1 yon snbslitute 'so' for the first 'as' and not destroy the sense 1
·
Q. H e nce, do you sec, that we can always tell each part
of speech by th e sense, and someLi1n es by the word joined
with it 1 Thus, when 'as' follows 'such,' what part of
speech 1lid you say it was 1 vVhen you can u se ' s.o' for.' ~s,'
what part of speech is 'as'? vVhen. you can do neither, 1s it a
·r ebtive , conj unction, or adverb 1
Q. 'I will take eith er road.' 'I will take eitherlhis w.ul or
that.' In the first example, 'either,' is an adjective pronoun,
in the secon1l, a conjunction, will you tell me why 1
Q. I s 'either,' in the last example, followed by 'or' 1 ·what
part of speech is it iri this case 1 In the first it is joined to a
noun, wh a t part of speech is it then 1
Q. 'I will take all the fruit but two apples.' ' This i~
but doin g our duty.' In these two sentences, 'but,' is used
bo th as an adverb and a preposition, will you tell me which
is the one, and which is the other 1 Why?
Q. Does the first 'but' mean the same :ts 'except,' and
the ]ast the same as 'only'1
Q. Can you then or can you not, distinguish them by .th~ir
meaning 1

- !I

184

INTELLECTUAL AND

. Q. 'He works for me.' 'I !!ubmittcd, for it was v;\in to
resist.' What is ' me' governed by, in the first phrase 1 Doe..;
'for,' in the second, mean the same as 'b C<'.flllSC
·
,,. 1n
vY hnt
parts of >:peech are each then ·1

1

Q. ' Since things arc so, we must. part.' ' He lrns not seen
me since Urnt time.' '\'Ve Jinished our studies some time
since.' The word 'since' is used here for three different parts
of speech. \Vhen it means 'because,' is it, or is it not a conjunction 1 "When it is placed before a noun, and dc110tes relation between one noun and another, is it a preposition or
adverb 1 'When it simply tells when an action is performed
that is, relalPf' lo li11w, "iU11Jut haviu;; auy nou n ,Jler it, is j~
an adverb or a prcpositiun 1

I

I
-

JJ ESSON J_,,JV.
Q,UES'l'JONS

I

Q. Docs the second ' then' refer simp ly to the time of coming 1 Is it then an atlverb or conjunction 1

Q. 'He is respeeted both on his own and on hi s father's

Q. ' Ye take too much on you.' ' Thou shalt carry much
seed out.' 'Thou art much mightier than we> '.Mm:e men.'
'1\Iore ingenious rncn .' 'The desire of having more, will
never have an end.' In tlies<l P.Xatnplcs, 'much, anti 'more'
arc each used for three different parts of speech.
When

'much,' anJ 'more,' stand for quantity, are they nouns or
adjectives 1 What part of speech are they when joineu to
nouns l vVhat, when .ioi11cd to ad,iccfo·cs, adrcrhs, &c.1
Q.. < Tl1t~ walk on the mill is 1lr.li ghtful, and I freq uently
walk there with a friend .' vVhat two tlifferq1t parts of speech

usc(l in tlifferenl senses, and consequently ClS different parts of
speech. But by these illustrations, if you have pnid gornl at tention, can you or can you not tell what part of speech any
wor'l may h r., in any sense in which it may be used 1

when a preposition Jocs not govern any case, it is an adverb 1
Q. 'If he has come, then I must go.' 'He came then.'
Docs the first' then' refer to time, or docs it mean' therefore'
implyrn g reason, cause, &c. 1 Is it then a conjunction or. a~
adverb ?

·'

18.J

is' walk, ' in this sentence 1
Q. The foregoing are a few of the many wonls that arc

Q.. Do you, or do you not, see by the last example, that

a_ctounL' You have seen th at' both' is sometimes an adjective pronoun; llllt when il corresponds with ';inrl,' as in this
example, is it nn adjective pronoun, or conjunction!
Q. 'Yct Jove 1locs tltc111 to slan~ry cl raw.' 'They aUe~l
'.acts th:y haYe heard, while they were yet heathen.' 'Yet,'
m the first example, means 'nevertheless;' would you then
call it an adverb or a conjunction 1 In the second it means
'still,' or 'at that time;' is it in this case a conjunction or an
adverb 1

PILACTICAL GllA:\i.MAh.

i

I
I
i

1

I

l

o~

wonns

USED !;'1)11. l>lf.'FEltF:NT PARTS

C{. 'Vlien is 'that' a rn~al.i~e1
Q . vVhcn is it an a(\j ectivc
pronoun 1
.
.
({. \.Yhcn is it a conJUllcl~on 1
({. · \'Vh e n is ' as' a :·clati.ve 1
(l \Vh cn is it a <'.On.Jnnct10111
Q. \VIH»n i;; it an aL1verb !
Q. '\Vhen is 'eitlwr' a coi1juncl ion ~
.
,
Q. \.Yhcn 1s ' either an adjPcl iv<~ prn11<11111?
Q. \Vhen is ' hltl,' a pn~posi­

tion

·1

Q. \,Yhen is' bul' a conjunc tion 1
Q. ·w hen is 'for' a preposition 1
Q. \Vhen is 'for' a conjunction 1
Q. When is ' since' a conjunction ?
Q. When is 'since' a preposition 1
Q. ·when is 'since' an adverb '!

OF SPEECH.

Q. \:V!tc11 rnay any preposition be used as nn arln»rb 1
Q. "vVhcn is 'then' a conjunc-

tion?
Q. \.Yhen i!'l 'then' ;in aclverb1
Q . Wlwn is 'both' an a1lj ecl i 1c1
.
Q. \Vhcn is 'both' a cOllJlll1Ctinn 1
Q. \Vli c n is 'yet' a conjunct inn 1
Q . When is 'yet' :rn advcrM
Q.. \Vlten arc ' murh' antl
'more' nouns 1
ore
thev
\/'\
..:,. \ul1en
.y
.
• arljectivc~1
•
?
(.{. \.Vhen are they ad vcrhs .
Q. \\Then is ' walk' a noun 1
Q. When is it a verb 1
Q. Arc there any othP,r '~~nT~
user\ for two or more ddtcrent parts of spcccl.1 '.
.
Q. How can you d1slmgn1sl1
them 1
IG*

186

,

INTELLECTUAL AND

EXERCISES J'OR 'l'HE S_L A'l'E OR PAPER.
Q. ·wm yo u compose three sentences containing the word
'that' us ed for a differe nt part. of sp eech in each sentence 1Three, each co ntainin g th e wonl 'as' lls ccl for a different
part of !'pec('h 1 Two, l1a v in ~ th e w ore! ' ei ther ' t1sc1l ns
an a11verb ancl co r~jundi o n 1 Two, !tarin g th e word' ht1t' used as a prepositio n and conjunction 1 T,rn , h aYin g the word
'for' used as a conj uncti on a nd prcposition 1 Three, having
the word ' sin ce ' us ed for three different parts of speech 1
On e, containing a J1rCpos itio11 usc1l as an ath ·c rb 1 Two, exemplifying th e diffe re nt parts of s peech of 'yet ' ! Two, each
having 'then ' used as an ad\' crb and conjunc ti o n1 T,vo, having the w ord 'b oth ,' 11scd as an adj ective a nd co nj1111elio111
Two, exernp lif~yin g th e different mes of' m ore' and 'much'!
Two, containing the same word u se d as a noun in one, all(]
as a n~ rb in the o th er 1

J,ESSON LY.
1'£ E~ 'I' A L l.! XE RC lS J~ S .

Q. As th e tru e object of gram mar is not onl y to write
correctly, but to speak >:o too, I will now direct your atte ntion
to so me improp er modes of sp eech, pronunciation , &c. frequently heard, but carefully lo be avoicld by acrnratc scholars.

(f I will r ead t!t e incorrec t example s , will you repeat the
correct ones whi ch follow 1
Q . 'I Rhould ndrnirc to go.'
Q. ' I am 11i r.e ly. J th .mk you.'
I s ho uld be pl eased to go.
Q. ' Git your !'eat.'
Get your seat.
Q. 'An 11wful follow .'
A disagre ea ble follow.
Q . 'I am very poorly.'
I am very ill.
Q . ' He sot in the chair.'
Ile sat in tlrn chair.
Q . ' He had'nt ou11ht to go.'
Ifo ought no~
go.

to

I am well, I th a ul< y o u.

Q. ' Thi s bee f is mi"l~ty
good,
0

Sir.'
This be e f is very good, Sir.
Q . 'James is to l1orno.'
James is at lwmc.
Q. ' I gucs3 I shall go homo
soon.'
I thiulc I shall go homo soon.
Q . 'I guess it rains a little.'
I l>olicve it rams a liltle.

PRA CTICAL GilAMMAil.

187

Q . 'Do not pint your fing e r at Q . ' Will you lay down after
tlinn e r?
me .'
\Viii yon lie down after din Do not po int your fin ge r at me.
n e r?
Q. ' Will y ou close th e s h elte r?'
(l. <He hr.longs to m ee ting .'
Will yon c lose the Rlmttcr?
Ct. 'A re there a gllod many s tu- · H e bclon(!;s to the c hurch .
Q . 'llo mu st'nt go.'
d en ts in c oll ege ?'
He m1.i st not go.
Arc th e re a great mnny stuQ. < I wish I. could get red of
dents in college?
this head-ac h e.'
Q. ' D o th a t. th e fust thing .'
I "vi s h 1 could g c ~ rid of this
D o that th e first thin g .
h e::1 d-ach e.
Q. ' I wish we could have the
Q_ 'I !'lee your broth e r tl1 e other
d oo r sh et. '
day.'
I wi s h we co uld have the
I saw your brother the other
d oo r shut.
day.
(i. I Jes t Jo o k al th e m hou ses .'
Q. 'I have go t to go and seem y
_J u:st look at those hou ses.
·
aunt.'
Q ' What a sig ht o f c hurches
I mu~t /!')and sec my a1111t.
that are t ow n h as.'
VVl1at a n111nb m o f churches Q . 'Do not s pilo your book, rn y
c hild .'
th :1t town ha s.'
D o n o t ~ poi! your book, my
Q,. < J. cant go th e re n owa~·s . '
c hild.
J ca nn ot go th ere nowi se.
Q. <I ca lc ul ate to study hard Q. ' Il e sa t ont on his way
h o m e.'
this yea r.'
H e se t out on his " -ay hom e .
I inte nd to study hard th is
Q . < l\Ir . L. c liaw s to bacco.'
y ea r.
l\ir. L. chews tob acco .
Q. ' I rec kon so.'
Q. 'The nigger h as run nway .'
I think so.
Th e n eg ro lws ru11 away . .
Q _ ' Op e n th e winder or I shall
Q. ' W li e re 1!0 they set. m
faint.'.
church ?'
Op e n th e window or I shall
\Vh e re rJo th ey s it i11 chnr c h.
faint.
Q . 'Nary one of' tlirm saw tha
Q <Ile leu rnt hi s lesso n w ell.'
,.,-b a le .'
He lea rn e d hi s lesso n well.
Neith e r of th e m saw the
Q . ' Did your instructor learn
whal e.
y o u that ?'
Did yo ur in stru ctor teach you Q. 'Jam es rfl~de out to ~t
h o nrn.'
that?
James succeeded in getti11g
Q . ' The lesso n is extremely
hom e.
toucrh .'
Th e l e~son is ex trem e ly h a rd . Q. 'Th e h eft of it is very g1f:aL '
Th e w e ight of it is very great.
Q. ' He is otherways employed.'
Ile is otherwise employed. (--l,. 'Do h e ft me, arnl liee hoVf
·much I weigh.'
Q. ' Shall I go or no?'
Do
lift
mP-, an<l seo how RJUch
Sh a ll I go or not?
I wei g h.
Q. ' They done it poorly.'
Q. ' I dare l1ot rcsk it .'
Th e y did it p ~o rly .
1 <larc nut mik it.
Q. ' This 'ere is very pretty.'
Thill is very pretty.

,

ISS

INTELLECTUAL AND

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

<i. ' He

het it hot.'
H e is very good to go of er·
He hcnted it hot.
rands .
(:t. 'The min hend ere cl my see- Q. ''Vould you rcn sc them ?;
ing the city. '
\Vould you rinse them ~
The rain hintrcrcd my sccinrr (~. 'lfe behav es awfully.'
the city.
"
Ile be hav es barlly.
Q. 1 Y 011 ha vc .g0t some crock Q. 'He is a very !re tie fellow.'
011 your til cc .'
lie is a very littl e follow.
You have gut some smut on Q. 'Arc you cleverly to-day?
your foce.
/\re you w ell to-clay?
Q. ' De you going befo re nme Q. 'Tlie lalo ck is i11 bloom.'
o"clock ?' ~
Th e ldnc is in bloom.
Are )'Oii going before n111e Q. ' Th e boys were all drown<l.
o clock ?
ed.'
Q. 'Th P- water hi ks.'
Th e boy s were all drowned.
Tl1c water boils.
Q. 'I am a ch1111l;c ~ d follow.'
Q. 1 Il e l1ad a span nf horses. '
I rin1 a ~ t11 1Ch li· llow.
Ile had a pair 11fhnn:1Js.
Q. 'Il e rn111!11' <I°the dand er from
({. ' ,\re yo u fi111d 111' 1·.011·slops'?
hi ~ l11·<1d.'
/\re yn11 f;1nd nf" cnwslips;
He c111 1:h cd th e clandrnff
Q. ' !\.Ir. \V . expc~clcd tu have
fi""" his l11':1 d.
gntH ~ .'
Q.. 'Tl1 c horse 's J11i1\" is badly'
l\I r .· \V. expected to t:;n.
1111 rt.'
Q. 'l live Y()ry fi1r l'ro111 hc10.'
The horse 's hoof is badly
I li1·e very for frorn hero.
hurt.
Q . 'Th e llowcr wilted a11tl Q. 1 Li e is :the c<m 1pos ni st of
<lied.'
111:1n y pieces.'
Tli n flower witl1ered and
lfo is th e co111posr:r of many
di1·d.
11i ncc~.
Q. 'Coidtl yn11 get i11 thn h011sc?' Q. ( r l1av c a fill () hoss. '
Cn1t!d yo11 !!el i11 to th e h o 11 ~c?
I ha ve a fin e ltnrsr.
Q. ' Cra111hnrry i;:a11 cc i ~ Ye1J Q. 'Tl1 e dr ce 11 is lini ~ lt ccl. '
,!!.OOd. '
Tl1 c drain is lini ~ h c d.
Cr;l·1bcrry sa uce 1s ve1y Q. 'I lie:.: r'.1t ch th e money I
gnnd.

Q,. 'f tonk a pec k infn flu' ronm.'
r look a pcr~p into !hr~ 1'!10111 .
Q, 'I nev1)r saw• s1cl1 curious
tJ Ii ll!!S.'
I nnv e r saw snch curious
thinrrs.
Q. 1 \Vhen · the rufl" c;111nht on
fire all was in vai1~ '
Vthen the roof c;n11rl1t ou
fire all was in vair;~
Q . 1 lseldorn ever ride;'
I sudom ride .
Q. '1-h lrns nogarcl ce n.'
Ile \ins no guardian.
Q. ' He'is very good to go of
a1Tants.'

!!'H\'C' .
(),.

l !!r.11dg() the 111n11 P.y T ga\·e.
1 Tl1 cre arc t11<1ny lwu s' n in
l O\V n .

1

Tl1 ere arc man y l1ouscs m
ton: n.
(1. ' I hav e not got none.'
I have got none.
Q. 'lie is comin, walkin, or
rid in. '
He 1s coming, walking, or
riding.
Q . 'I would rnther go tlrnn not.'
I would rath er g1) than not.
Q. 'He is a very mu sical mnn.'
Ile is a very humorous man,

189

Q.

1
That is poor luther.'
Q. ' From whence does the
That is poor leather.
noi8e come ?'
Q. ' How perk he is to·dny.'
'\Vhence does the noise come?
How lively he is to·day.
Q : 'Do you know how many
there is?'
Q. ' He fell down the sullar
,;ta i rs.'
Do you know how many
tliere aro? ·
IT e fol I down the cellar stn irs.
Q. ' I wish [ had tvvo milliou Q. 1 Jt was a tight match for u11
such.'
to do it.'
I wish I had two millions
It wa;; with difficulty we did
~11 c h.
it.
Q. 1 The stick is twenty foot Q. 1 You must do like he does·'
lo ng.'
You must do as he does.'
The stick is twenty feet long. Q. 'Oh, no, says 1.'
Q. ' How many pound do they
Oh, no said I.
wci<.rh ?'
Q. ' He rode five mild.'
H ow 11ian y pounds do they
He rode five miles.
weigh ?

LESSON L VJ.
MENTAL EXERCI_SES.

I,

Q. I will in the next place present you with a list of prepo~itions, which are derived from the Latin and Greek languages, and which enter into the composition of a great many
English words. If you study them correctly you will be able
b understand easily the meaning of many ,of our words, of
which they form an important part.
A, An, An s-siµ;ni fy .from or awciy : as, to ar-crt, to turn from ; to
abstract, to draw away.
AD-signifies to or at: as, to adhere, to stick to; to admire, to
w onder at.
ANTE-means bPforc : as, cmtciedcnt, going beforo; to antedate,
lo date before.
crncuM-means round about: as, to circU?nna1'igatc, to sail round .
coN, coM, co, voL-siqnify together: as, to conjoin, to join tol!eth·
er; to compress, to press together ; to co-operate, to work t~·
gether; to collapse, to fall together.
CON'l'R A-a,gainst: as, to contradict, to speak against.
DE-signifies from, down: as, to depart, to retire from: to deject~
to cast down.
·
DI-asunder: as, tlilaccrate, to tear asunder.
DJs-reverses the meaning of the word to which it is prefixed.:.
as, to disagree, to dispossess.

... .

·1

J

l 90

l NTF. LJ.F:CTt AJ, AND

ns , to ej ect , to throw out ; to ci:cf11 dr . to f' lint o ut.
J-:XTTlA-b cyond: :-rn, r:rlruonli1u1ry , b0 yon d th1 ~ ;,rdinnry co11rsr .
JN-bcfor P- un udj ectin!, lik e v.n, ~ign ific s prirati on : us, 'indcrc11t ,
~10t d ece nt; b e ~o r c a ~·e rb it. has its simple 111 e P11ing : as, to
111fu sc, to pom 111 ; to wji1:, to fix in.
I NTE"-bct1r ccn: us, tu i11 lc·1venc, Lu come bet\\·ee n; to i nl mp Ju,
F. , J' x - o ut :

to

p11t l1 PtWP!'fl.

INTRo-in to~

to turn

0

inwards: ns, lo introduce, to lead in to; to introurt,

111 wanl s.

on-d e n otes oppos itio n : ns , to ol~jcr.t , tn npr n"": tn nk<!nirt , lo
bl oc k np; obslrrcl c, ~ur;ict lrin g shn rl inp: in (lr110sit.io n .
FEil-thro11g'I;: :i s, to pcrrnn /; u.' ,;tc, t u \\"all, il1ru11gh: l<> J'ofuralc,
to born tnrouf)1.
rn s -r -1~/ir'r , :-1<1, }'OS/-111rri1!ir111, ;1flrrn on n; poslsr rip t. writ.t en
ali.1 '. r , tl11lt j,.,, ;!lin lli l' l! '. tlt: r.
rH JE -h cfor c, ;.i s, (O }1 1'1'-l'J'is f . to r xi ~ t hf'f;ll' I' ; ff• J'l"lfT, t n fl :;
bc fbr e.
·
rno~fo rlil o r fo r~crt.1'!/s: ns , to rrn tr nd, to s tretc h fort h ; to prnJCd, to s h oot furw:1rds.
rR JETF. tt-p asl or hr:yonrl: ns _
, prrlrrpofer:t , pn s tp crfrc t : prcternatural, beyo nd tlt c co 11rsc of 11at11re.
RE-lll[ain or /Jack : as, rrprinl , to print 11 gu i11 ; t o 1'1'/rncc , to
trace ba c k.
·
RETH o-liachwards , rcl rospccti·cc : lookin g bac kwards ; retrog rade,

going had;ward s.
5F.-aside, apart: as, to seduce . to draw a~ id c : tn srrrrfr , tn rut

I

as;

to

su-rJ-:l~-abo vc, or 01· er :
s up er.sc rib e,
write abo Yc; t o snpcrl' l-St! . tu u V1'. rlook.
TltA Ns-over, !J cyund , j'ru'J/l. one place to n n ol/;cr : a;; , to 1rat1-'purt,
to carry ov~ r; to t r11 11S!J,'1'f!ss, to pass bcy o11d; to tr11.11 .<j1/nu t ,
to remove from 1111 p s nd lo an ut. hnr.
~ ; r ec~ l< prt: p<>,:ifi<>11s ;111d partid cs, nsP d in th fl c:o111pn1' ition
of L.11gl.1 ~ h wo!·d s,nrc 1.111 '. li1 l111wi 11 µ; : 11., ll'//l f 1'1i, r111t i. /11111rr , & c.
A-s1g111h e;; privation: as, 1uu111.!J;11cms, wit.ho11t 1111111 c. AMr111-both , or the lwo : us, a mphibious, partaking o f' bo th or of
two 11aturcR.
'
AllT1~ag1~ins~: u.s' .11-11.l i- 1'.1.un.r1.r1:!1ir:a.f, [.1 gai11 st g n~·~ n11111 ~ 11t by a
smgle pei so n , rn1.!1 -111 t"1uslc rw.l, ag:uns t th e 1nm1s l1T .
llYrJ,; R -OVC1' fl!'.d ab~re: as, hypercritical , O\' C I' 01' ( r) O critical.
nvro -u11~ler , 1,mply1n.g t:•Jnccalm cnt ur disguis e : as , h y11ocrite ,
one d1 sscmul111g In s real c haracte r.
·
JIETA-d l' not cn c ltange o r tran smutat ion ; as, to 111 ctam01phose. to
c h:mge th e i;J1apc.
·
n;ll1 - round abont: af' , pcriphra.sis, circnmlouuti on.
s i· N, s YM-togct!1.r.r: 11s , S!Jnod , a mcc tirw or co m in"
toge tit er;
0
.•y111pathy, fellow-foeling, feeling togeth er .

'l'!•c

191

Q. Herc follows below a mun her of sentences exemplifying the si gnification and use of the fore go ing prepositions,These you will carefully peruse, and th en I will examiue you
by th e c1u es li ons annexed to each sentence, first reading it to
you. This is particularly important, as it will illustrate more
fully th e trl ea11in g of many terms co nstantly in use.
'His attention j.:; nhs tractcd.'
' May G od a Ycrt th a t cYi l.'

I

<l.

' H e abhorred the de ed.'
\Vh al is th e meaning of A, All, or ABS! \ Vl iat i~ the

mc<rni11 •r of 'au .~tra ctcJ ' 1 Of c al'Crl'1 Of 'abhorrc<l '1 \Vh al
pre positi ons arc usc<l in th e cornposition of th ese words 1
' 1\d \' r rb signifiC's :irld 1:d tu a \"C'rh.'
'Wtll ia 111 ad111in~ d t liP- rni,d11v A nd el'!.'
' T h e w ax ad h eres to 111<' tn li.ie '

Ii

I

Q. \Vhat is the m ea ning of AD1 What is the m eanin g o f
'admired ' 1 \Vith ·wh a t prepos ili 011 are I.hey compounded!
'N n l1 ost. il e hnnd ra n n11 l1·d:1t c 111v rl nn m .'
'Th e no un , with which th e rcl J ti\ c a i:: rc <'s , i ~ ca ll e d a11tcccd c 11t.'

Q. \Vhat is th e mea ning of A NTF: 1 \V hal is the m eaning of
'anted a te' 1 Of 'antecedent' 1 \ Vi th what proposition are

aside.
·
·
sun-under: as , s11/:tcrronr,rrn , hi n.,,. und e r th e cart l1 ; to subscribe, to snhsig n, to w rit e u(1d c~.
s1rnTER-11.nder: a s , sa.h!N(lu o11 s. ll owi n.'! mHl Pr.

PRACTICAL GRAl\Il\1AIL

i

I

t11csc wonls compounded 1
'Capt. Cook circumn av iga tfl d th e globe.'
q,. \Vhat is the meaning of cmcuM 1 Of 'circumnaYigalt>1 l'

!

'The conjunction is used lo cnnncct wo rd s nnd se nte nces tog C'tlier_.~
' 011r interests are co 11join ed.'
'The <:o tt o n wns much cnrnprc•ssc~tl.'
'L et us co-opi:rulc with tho wi~o aud good .'

I

•A pa rt of the engine cullapsed.'

Q. \Vhut is the meaning of

co. COL.! \Vhat jg
lhe meaning of 'conjunction' 1 Of 'compressed' 1 Of' 1:0COM. C ON.

opcrate' 1 Of' collapsed' 1
' He will depart to-morrow.
He was dej ect e d .'

1

Q. What is the meaning of DE 1 Of' depart' 1 Of' <leject~d'

?
'His limbs were dilacerated.'

Q. What ie the meaning of DI 1 Of' dilacerated' 1
1

James and William disagree.'

192

INTELLE CTUA L AND

' H c is dispos~css c d of what he claimed to be his own property.'

Q. What is the meaning of ms 1 Of' disagree' 1 Of ' dis possessed' 1
'He

r~jcc t c d

'Il e was cxc lucl e<l from the school. '

'Frank is nn e.xtrnoruinary sc h olar.'

Q . \Vhat is the ll1 P,~ Pi11 g of I''.S TI L\ 1 Of 'cx(raon] inary' 1
'J l e inf"11 R c~ d Ilic poi so n.'
'I le is all inc1 Pc•.•11t fo ll ow .'
',\or all is an ind e finit e artic le.'
q,. \.Vhat is th e meaning of IN ? Of' in fused ' 1 Of' in1ler r nt' 1 Of' ind efinite' 1
'A wa ll in lc rYr n cLl. '
'U c ill lerposcd b etwee n th em .

'Vhat is th e mean ing of

Of' i11lc n ·c nc1l' 1 01

IN TE R ?

' i1ll1' rposcd ' ?

'J l1 ~

(-i.

w:i ~;

i11t ro d11 c<'d fo th e P r esid e nt.

\ Vhat is Ili c rn ca11ing of INTn o 1 O f' inlrorlucctl' 1
'Jl p ohjcet ed lo llJC• 11 11 d crt;1k i11 g.'
' T li e p :1~~an c w.1 s n h ~ l.ri1 c f Pd .'
'li e enco untere d an obstac le.'

({. Wha.t is th e meani11g o f on 1 Of' obj ected' ·1 Of' ob. tructe11' 1 Of ' obs tacl e 1'
'Il e p cra mh11l a tcd the streets .'
'T h e boar<l was p e>rfora t c d .'

Q . vVhat is the meaning of p ER 1 Of
' perforated ' ?

c

pcrnmlrnlated' 1 Of

'The news ca me, post m eridian .'
A p ostc ript wus a<l<lcd to th e le tter .'

1

<{. What is the meaning of

POST

? Of' post meridian' 1

Of' postscript' ?
'r;od is prc-c .xistr nt.'

PRO

1 Of

c protended

'1 Of

'proj ected ' 1

Q. What is the m r- aning of
Of 'preternatnrnl' ?

PR..IETE R

1

or

'preterperfect' 1

' Th o h ook was rcprintccl. '
'J le rclrace tl his steps.'

<-l,. ·w hat is the meaning of
traced' 1

RE ?

Of 'reprinted' 1 Of' re -

' S l1 n \\":ts lakin g h retrospective v ie w of h e r lifo.'

' Yum improvem e nt should be progressive, not r e trograde.'
Q. 'Vh at is the meaning of RETRO 1 Of 'retrospective' 1
Of 'ret ro ~ rml e' 1
' S l1 e \\"ns se cl11eed fr om th e paths of rectitud e.'
' ll e s ec reted hi s stole n treasure .'

Q. What is the mea nin.!j of SE 1 Of 'se1luce ' ? Of' see1:e l.c1l ' 1
'Ifo s 11hsc rib orl lc1r th e pap e r.'
'Jto11 sP d w itl1in f li e suhf e rrnn can world .'
'Uc s11l rn igned wit h hi s cross.'

Q . What. is th e m eaning of sun 1 Of ' subscribed' 1 Of
'subterranean' 1 Of 'subsigned' 1
' H e f'1tp e rscrih cd th e letter .'
'H e sup e rvised th e publi cation.'

Q. What .is th e meanin g of
Of 'supervised' 1

SUPER

? Of 'superscribed' 1

'Engli s h r:o nvi ct!'I arc tran s ported to Uotnny Day.'

'J i n lia ~ frnn ~g rr~ sse d th o bw .'
'Tl1 e potato ha s Li con transplanted from America to Europe.'

Q. What is the meaning of TRANS 1 Of 'transported' 1 Of
'transp;rcssed'? Of 'transplanted'?
'Th e secretary rece ived nn anony mous lotter.'

' T hcsc co nditio ns were prefi xe d .'

Q.. ' 'That is the meaning of
Of 'prefixed' 1

~s the meaning of

Q. vVh'at

'TJ1 " vr:rh was in the preterp e rfcct te nse.'
'It wns a prete rnatural e ffort.'

th e r0g11 e.'

Q. 'Vlwt is th e meanin g of E? Of EX 1 Of 'cj edcd'1' Of
' cx clll(lccl' 1

<-!

193

PRACTICAL GRAJ\IMAR.

PHJE 1

of 'pre-existent' 1

'All stood with their protende<l spenrs prepared.'
'A large 8to11e wus proj cc tc<l from Lliu baltlc1J1c11ts.'

Q. What is the rneaning of

A

1 Of 'anonymous' 1

'The seal is an amphibious animal.'

Q. What is the meanin g of AMP HI 1 Of' ampl1ibious'?
' He is an anti-ma son.'
' A republi ea n is anti-monarchi cal.'
'A part of the community are anti-administration.'

17

Hl-1

INTELLECTUAL AND

PRA CT ICAL GRAMM.An.

Q. Wlial is lh c m eaning or ANTI 1 or 'n nli - tn ason ' ? Of
'anli -w o11archi cal'1 Of' a11li-adrni11islralio11 ' ?
' l>r. Blair's re mark s ar e hyp ercriti cal.'

Q. \,Yhal is

lh1 ~

111 ea11i11 µ; or11Yl'En? Or'hypc rnitir 1il'!

'A hy pocrite is dcles talJl c .'
"\'hal is lh c 11iea11i11g of ll Yl'O 1 Or 'hypocrite'?
' li e ca 11 111 ela111orphose lii111 sc lf"w u11<l t! rl1d ly .'
<i. VVhat is lh e meaning o r J\U:TA 1 or 'm eta111orplwsc'1
'lie c o 111 111 c 11c c d hi s speech aft er 11111 c li pc riplir:i,;i ".'
Q . /flJi al is lite meaning or PF: Hl 1 or 'p criphrasis'1
'Th P sy11 ud is 11 ss1)111hkd .'

(-i .

1

Il e li:d ss_y 111palh ) liHth e 1111f; 1rt 1111 a ti: .·

Ci. \\'h a t is lhc 111ean i11 g or s Y:• ? 0 r s nr 1 0 r

' sy 11 otl '1

or (symp a th) 'l

I~E S S O N

1H

2~ i'i ' l'AL

EX

I .. YII.
EH.VISE .~ .

(l . \,Ye f"rnq11 enll y li11tl exarnpJ cc; o r \Y Ord s, f'or111 t: d n ri t. on ly i11 pa rt , as lhose in th r lasl Jc,;so n, but wholly fro111 other
l a n .~ uagcs .
\Vh cn such l'ascs occur, il is dcsira!Jlc lo know
li 1n1· lo tlisposc o r th ern . To do lh is , you arc scnsil>lc wc
111\I St kn ow their sig11ifkatio11 . Or th e fo ll owing CXHlllplcs
I will rca<l lhosc containing the lcr llls allude<l lo, am! "ill
-you .~ i rn the sc11t.c11ccs, which co ntain th eir rncanin g-1
Hl:t\' he di1·i<l c <l 11d
i n. fi.11itum .' L.-..
l\la i t" r ""'} be Ji1 iul'<l with out

U.. ' i\Tarti·r

(" lid .

<l :

' -~ ngli i:c ,

thi s is th e 111 ctt11-

1n ~ .

In E11glish tl1i s is I.he 11H·ani11g.
Cl. ' II <: drew cu 1H: lus iu11 s a

posll'r iori .' L .
( l . ' Thin gs sh n111d be cstimat<' <l ad mtlnrr,m. ' L .
Ik dn)\Y conclu sion s from what
fu ll owr~d .
Thin gs s hou ld li e es tim ale<l according lo th e ir vain;;.
(l,. ' .I-,lc drew co11cl11siuns a.priQ . ' l [i s JJlmn.Matr:r hns sent forth
ori. L .
many exce ll e nt sd1 o lars.' L.
H e drew condusiomi fr om wlint
The University a.t whi ch he was
lwd ~o n e lrnfor0 .
gra duated , h :rn Hr!nt forth ma- Q . ' The bcn11.111011de [pronoun n)' exce ll e nt scholars.
ced bo- mond] arc prcci1;;c in

" L . s ta11J H for Latin, thnt is, tliat the phrase made use of is ~
L1tlin one. F. Fr enc h.

m~nn rn~.'

F.
w or ld are prcc i ~ n in th ei r •11an11 prs::.
q. ' Th e co ntract was made
/Jo II.II .fi rf r..' I..
Tli n en11tract w:i ~ rnaJc in good
fo it h .
Q. ' A hon 1/lf1l [ho-111 o] nm y
1if11\«)ke re,.P 11 t111e ut .' 1•'.
A 1\·· itty re par tee lllay provo ke
l"f.'~ (' II t1111• II l.
Q. ' llis 1n a11 11 c rs a rc quite the
ton .' F .
Bi s 11.1 ;u111 c rs :ire rp1ite th e fa sh'
"Ill.
Q . ' 1[ j,- r, /i ri t rr1 11. [~lia-to] is tl cli g li tfi ill y s if11<tled .' F .
IE~ cn1111try seat is delightfully
s ir1wt e c.I.
Cl.. ' That p;ii11ti11 g is a i;/t rf
11H ·ir

'fl w

n.~lii1J11a lil c

rl ' u •11rrr•. [ ~ iil'f~rl1 : 11 v rn . ] I:' .
Tli;i!' pai11ti11 g is a ina~ter [>i m:c .
Q. ' "- "is w1 11.r011111os 111.r11.tis .' L.
JI•: is 11 111 .. r srn11HI 111i11rl .
0 ... ' 'l'lin cit1· wa s f.alw11 h v a
C o 1111 rl c 'll i.11.1:n · [1:.00 <le 11;in]
F.
T!1 n .1:ify was t;i l(f' ll by a darin g
e lli•rt.
Q. ' 'J_' Ii c pr op le rf'l1 e li ed en
nws .«1•. [ n11 111 :1s .J F.
Tiu~ p•' " pl r n ·l,.. ll Pd in a h<11l y .
Q. ' T!t e 111 011 .. or tl11) U. :::i. is
E pl 11 r il111s u 1w111 .' L.
Th e lll •>f.l n nf !. hn U. :). is on i:i
lc 1rll1< !d or 111 :111.r .·•
Q.. 'Tl11 ~ Vi · r. l'r .. ;;: id r: nt of Ili c
U .S . is l, n ·s id P11 t uf the tle11ate , r,1:- 0(/i.tio. ' L .
T!i n Vi .. 1)- f'n ,s id <' nt nfr hn U.S.
is l' n ·sid1 ·11t oftli•: bn 11ate. bv
virf 111• or hi s <Jfli :·c).
' ·'
Q, . 'A n c1: parl c co 1111 r il is called . L .
A co1111 .. il on onr s i •Jr~ is c:i ll ed.
Q. 'H.: i hin ~o 11 ' s h i,.t •>n' «Olltains
a .Jiu: si111.itr. of t h o h:llld
writi11~ of lhe s i,'! IH' rR nf 0 11r
lk c l:1ra Li1111 o f i11d c p1:nd c nce '

L.

Ilohin so n 'R hi story co ntain s an
ex act copy of ilie hand writi11g o f' th e s i ~ n ers of our dec larati o n of illd Ppcnd<'m:c.
(l. 'Thn .fil/r, tl c ,./111.mhrc [ti-d es ho111hreJ ha s gn rrn out.' F .
Th e chambe r maid has gone
O llt.

Q. 'The grns rl'arnws [;;ho n<lann c] pararfod the stree ts.'

F.
Th e poli ce soldi ers paraded th e
s t.r cc t.s.

(._{.. ' Tl1 e judge iss ned a writ of
lui.lrnn.s r.orpus .' L.
Th e ju <lge iss11 ed a writ by
w hi c h (h e sa id ,) you may
ha,·e the body .
Q . 'Th em is 11 0 data from
w hi c h lo f'a lntlate.' L .
'J.'lwn: is nothin g giv en fr om
whll'.h to cale11lalc.
Q.. 'He 111ad e his rlclmt [d ebn]
In st ev eni ng' . F.
Ifo 111:u lc hi s fi rst appearance
J:i s t. llVPlli11g.
Q. . '0 11 sn 111 e coin is st:nnpccl ,
Dri gratin.' L.
0 11 !illlllf) coin is stam ped , by
t l1 c grace of <..iod .
Q . 'At Port srnonth is a nav al
tlrpnt. , [d a-po] .' l''.
At. l'orts111uu1l1 is a naval deposit.
Q . ' ! ~m s.11hj ecl. to r,nn11.i, [cnlllll]. J· .
) ;u 11 suhjr:c t tn low spirits.
Q. ' H e i:; good anrl she is good ,
Cr!.!·o hoth arn !!ond .' L.
IT n ];o good at H
f s he is good,
th1 •rd(1 r e hnt h a r c good .
Q. 'T l11!rn is an Hotel Dien
L0 -1c!l-diP11].' F.
Thnre i1; a ho 11<:n of G0<1. (It
U;<llall _v 1111•nns a l1 ospital in
Frf'nl'!1.)
(l. 'T hn atli1ir rrm:i in s £n sfflf-n
lflfO .'
L.
T !H : aH"nir rP111:1.ins in tl1 e same
~t:1t e, m: bedim ~.

• Thirl.1.•u11 stal eR furnwcl a co 11fccl<:r:ition.

19G

INTELLE CTUAL AND

Q . 'Jlav e you an crral<i in the
1.
uoo I{ •?. I ,.
H ave you a li st of erro rs in th e
buo k?
ci. ' Th e state m e nt was fal se in

toto.' ... J,.

'l'lrnt re mark w:is p ertin ent.
"""' · ' Tli ut was sa id m.al.- ap-ropos. [11i1d11p-ro-po '] F.
Tliat wa~ said unseasu 11 nb ly.
Q,. ' \ Va:< hi11 glu 11 wa s pater pa ·
tri11:.' L.
\V : 1 ~d1i11 gto n wus the father uf
lii s eo 1111lrr .
(l. ; So 11n: ·:ire e111ploy ecl •pcr
tl icm, oth e r ~ 711:r 1rn11.u·m .' L .
So1w: arn e11 1p lt•.11 ~ d liy th e J ay ,
u tl1 <' 1· ~-· Iii·
J tl: e .i·c:1r.
ll. ' l k IH·li c1 1·s that kings
rcig 11 , .i11rc tl i. r i110 .' L.
li t· ht ·li1 ·1•c:< 11! :1t l;i11 ;0s rc ig 11 liy
a Ji1i11 c ri !l lit.
Q. ' \\' li c 11 't11i::; is said, exeunt

Th e statc lllc nt was fi il ~c in cn;ry
p:ir t.
Q . 'Ui:> ipsc di.1;i,t needs prouf'. '
L.
Hi s as"<'rfion ll <'cd s proof".
· g lran ·11 cc l uirng.
fl. ' 'l'I. t <\ J' 1n
n ilo (u r i 11 c;.,g.) L . .
Th e ki11g tr:11·l'l lPd <11 "J.! " lsl' d .
U, ..' / m;iri m is, 11·ill 11 utic c tlut
c1rc1 111 1~tar. re . L.
In tlie fir st pla ce l \\'ill u oti ce
tl1 at c irc111n sta 11 cc .
0 11mcs.
(-l. 'l!n ca m e in prop ria p er- \ Vlie11 tlti~ i::; s:tid , all p;u <Jl1L,
sn nn .' L.
·
( ~. '.l\ly l)llUHrl a 1n t11 tu r JS dead .
li c c:uuc i11 pe rsn 11 .
L.
.
'r jud!,\I! so, 'i11s'.1 f11rto .•• L. ll l l y ;0 1; 1nrr~ tutor ! ~. dc~1:l. .
) j11d '.!,e Sil f'ro 111 fli t: 1.11'1 1! ;;1dl.
U,. _J 1,' l//,, 11/fll/ll"' f [•C l I Li lla·
<i. 'S 0111 u 11 1e 11 :1r1 : fi111d of" a
t r l'] po11 r 1.! 11 11 .~J' , i LI C oh.JCt:ls
jr,n t!r lllOt:. r/.llll-tl"-llllJ.]' l<'.
~of' pity. ' F.
l' ''P> p ou r ll1i1 1gs, am obj ec ts
1:1111 e 11 w 11 ar c f 11 11 d Ill' ;i p:11 1.
Q,. 'Sllf' is di sli11 !.( lll >il1 1• cl fnr )1~ /l . ol pit y ._
rf' esi1 ril. [zli11 -.l •·:'J'I'•:.) F.
({,. ' I.'" ill tal< e 11 0 part, pro or
She isdi sti11 !.!; ui,.;licd li1r li e r 11·itI'''"· I ..
ty ~p ecc hc s .
I 11·ill t:1kc 11 0 p a rl, fer or aQ,. 'Th e magnn clwrln of E11!!ga11 1>;t.
. .
Jish lib erty wa :; ol1tai 11 eJ in Q . 'ln tli P. ;1 l1se 11 ce o f !\I r. A., I
th e rei" n of J ol 111 . L.
w:1;; a1•pD 111te d scc n:tary, pro
Th e grc:~ c li ;nter o l'l':11 ~ l i s h ~ih t c11111or c, or p1:1~, l cm." L.
ert. y was outaim:d 111 I. li e reign )11 tlt u nhsc 11 ce (Jf ,d1. c\ .~ I wa~
of' Jol 11 1.
;1ppn 111 tcd sec retary Jur tli e
U.. 'Jlcmcnlo mori. ' L.
ti111 c hci11 g. .
.
Re 111 ctll her tltnt t.li o 11 111ust die.
Q .. ' / li1.lio11 g h 1t ll"il l d n no good,
(1,. 'Th e inini'll11t1n Jf\t.y is su ili·
st ill I. w ill do it.1nofornw. ' L.
c ie n t. L.
A ltlt o11g!t it: \\·ill .do .n o guo~I,
'l'h e lowest duty is s1tllicicnt.
stil l I will <lo it lur form 8
Q. 'Thi s wo r k, w ill, l hope,
sa ke.
contain mu /tum. in zrnr vo.' L. Q. ' H e labo red pro /Jona publiThi s \\·ork will , I l1 ope, ca 11t ai11
co.' L .
much in a littl e ~ p nce .
He lab ore d for th e goo d of tli c
Q. ' To succe ed iu that, was the
puuli c .'
nc pl11s ult ra of !ti s wi shes. ' L. Q . ' \V h e n se ntence o f dculh
wa s passe d on lii111, h e hea rd
T o succec<l in that, was the utmost ex te11t of lii s wishes.
it with mu ch sang froid [song
Q . 'Th a t re mark was a71ropos.
froy. '] F.
[appropo."] .f.

!

1

n.
s

107
\Vl irn !"<1l11r nr r. o f 11enth wns Tlin h ill passed, no one oppos·
pa ~s1~d 011 him, he henrd it
ill l! it.
wit.Ii .~reat eoo l11 css , or with· Q. 'J ' he hill pn!"s<'d 111w. rnrc.' L.
011t f)lllfJ li on.
Th f! hill pn s~ed 11na11i111011 sly.
q,. ' l.f)t tho Bihle he vo ur 1;rirlc (l. 'The pri1 :~ f. wc~ n t. i11 to the
m r. 1:11111. '
L.
"
s11.nr,l111n so.11rl or11111.. ' L.
L <'t t.lt e flihl c: he you r co nst1111t TI J() pri est wrut into the most
{'l)lllJ1:tll 10 ll .
holy pl :1cc.
Q. ' \Vhc n w ick ed men hear Q. 'il e wa ~ nc<]uitted by pro\'·
s wa_v, we 1Jxclai 111, V tcm.pora,
in!!n1111Jihi.' L.
1/ll))'f; S .'' L.
Il e \v;is acq11ift <'d by proYing
\Vh r, 11 wir.ked rn <' n henr i;;way,
hi111 sc lf' c lsew hc rn.
we c ~xc l:1i111, Oh, the ti111 es , Q. ' Tlin rnhli e rs nttacked !11m
Uh t li n ma 1111 1'\ rs !
1•i cf n rm.is .' L .
Q . ' R1111 t;'C [ rooz li c] hr,:rnti fips Th n rolilll'r s :!l.lad<ed l1im wit h
the t:1r:e, b11t n ot tltP 111i11d .' F.
fo rce an d arms.
Pai11t bc:ll!fifies th e fa ce , but not Q. 'Thin gs that are C<] ll al to
t hll Ill i II d.
t he same :ire eq11al t o on e
(l. 'Tlw 11rnc ti11 g was adj ourn <rnoth P. r, and 1.>icc 1;crsa.' L .
ed sinr, t/i c.' L.
Thin!!S thnt are eq 11 al tn tho
The~ 111 Pf't111g wns
atljn11 rn ed
s:1111 e nm cr1n al to one nnotliwit li o11t. d;i•.·, nr i11ilr•li11it PIV .
c r, :in d th e n•ycrse.
Cl.. ~J'li r) r;:1 s1!."ll t1i :il \\',l s .J, ;l111- Q . 'Tl1n li11 sin P;:s was don e
so 11 ·1~ 1: rs11s (rs.) Ht.olw,;. L .
· sc1·1111.dwn nrtr:m,. ' I"
Th e r..:1s1) 0 11 tria l was .J ul111 so 11 Tlin hu ~ i n e ss was do ne nceo ragn i11 st ~ lol ws.
di11 g to urt.
q ,. ' Tl1 e lct.tl' r w:1s sent via ci. ' /\ I iss C's l1f'arl clr <'ss wns
1! 0~10 11. ' L .
q11it n rmfnit. [o:fi1J F.
Th e IPLter was sent by the w ay l\1iss C's hea d dress was just as
of Bosto n.
it shnulJ be.
Q . ' I Li s ralrt d e ch.r1.mhrc [ vn l- Q. ' Th e alteration mny he
11-dn·shn111brc!J co nstantly atm ade if it can be tlnn e .salvo
tn 11ds l11m. ' F.
sensu.. ' L .
lli ;; fuut111an always attends Th e a lwration rn:iv he ma<l e if it
l1i111 .
can he done, 1;rescrv in g th e
Q. ' Virlc such a pa;e .' L.
se n ~n .
S ec rn c h a p:ige.
Q. ' none! orrfor, in sd 1oo l, is a
lt. ' .John so n w:is nppointed
sine qun, no n.' L.
post maste r, vice Di ckso n, re- Good <>rUN. i 11 sc hool, is an inm oved .' L.
disp e n~abl e TC<JUisite.
J ohn so n was nppoint ed post- Q. ' I wi ll gi ve an acco unt of
master, in place of Dickson,
the trnnsaction salvo pn·
r emoved .'
dore.' L.
Q ' Some place th e summum I will give an account of thn
tran sact ion w ithout offence tu
bonll1n in pl easure.' L.
modesty.
Some pl ace the chi ef good in
Q. Quod erat dcmo11strandnm,
pleasure .
or Q. E. D.' L.
Q.. ' Th e bill pnsfled, 11.emi110
contradiccntc, (ncm. con.) L. Which was to Le proved.

u

l
II.

r~
I

0, . . Y 011 now nntl crstnn<l, it is hoped, how to rla ~s rn~ ry worJ in
tli1 : l•:n ;,; li :-d1 l:i11 ;;11:1 gc. Clas,;i11g words , yo11 do1tl1tl1:s,; know , is a11
exe rci;:o di"tinct from gi ving tl1e rule:; for their ng rec1m:111.. H ence
we s liall nee d so111e 11aine for e ac h of th ese ex ercis1·s. Tl1is t.h e11
shal I be 011 r nex t ohj ect. Y 011 know perhaps th at w e Ii ave a word
cty mrm, wlticl1 sig ni fi es an ori gin al " ·ord or root , and by takini;
tli u !3rc('\ w urd. logos , a discourse , we can fu r111 a cou 1pouud wonl
of tl11 :c;c tw1 >, a11d IJy a s light variation it w ill iJ,: J:T\'\101. o aY. Etymol ogy , w ill t.!t e11 n1 c a11 , lite r all y, di s c o11r~i11 g re:'pet:t i::g the origi1ial
signi lic:1ti(l11 id' \Vord s, l111t i11 dni11 g thi s it \Vill he 11al!ll':!I to noti e1~
tl11·ir dilfor.,111. sorts O\' cla ss1:;-; , :1 s 1101111 ;:, v1·rli :;, :111d t.li e Yario11 :;
clian g r:c. wlti c l1 tll(:y 1.111d nrgn; lir:n•;c t.lt cse ex1:rcisr:;: :ire g1:11 erall y
call ed E tymol ogy. Ety mology t.lt c n will tn.: at of :ill th e diffe rent
P:irt.s of t'peec. h, v iz. noun, artic.l e, allj ccti ve , pr onoun , verb, parti cipl e, ad vc rh, prepos ition, co11jurn;tiP11, and i11tc rj1·cti o11.
'1.'IH: n1~.xt name for wlti c h we are in i111n1 cdi:i te \1-:111t is on e for
tlte due arran ge ment of th ese wonh in so11t.encrs . Jn the list of
Grnd< pr<"po si1 ion s , lt nre toforn gi vr:n, y ou " .ill fi nil that S Y N ,
1111•:t11 :' 7,,//,/1 , :111d t.h• ' rr~ is a <Jrcek word 'I' .'\ xn , to 11 1'/'1111.!!,· r,. Uy a
littL: :ilt1·rat.io11 of' t.ltl' ;;e word s w n fima tl11: c1J111jHJ11111l word SY N T .\ X .
Uy Syntax tlt e 11 , w e are to u11d 1.~ r s ta11d tltat s11hj ec t whic h
trc:tts of th e d1ie arr:wge tnent and ag recJJ1cnt of \v nrds in a scnt c 111·. 1 ~ .

\ y, \ 11nw ltaVf.• t.wo 11:11r11)S that w i11 rt \pn· ;:1' 11 t: n II t 1!1 : 1·mio11s 1)xcrciscs in l:i11 g11:ige, whicl1 yon lt :tvc tl1w; for bee n c:ill cd upon to
perforn1. \ Viii it. .n ot be co n.v c.nic n.t , sn1tieti11ws t.n hav e a single
name for hnth suh,1 ectf' , to d1stm gu1 slt th em frorn 1u:111y others at
school? 'l'ltc obj ect of' all the exercises in tl1i;; work , is to teach
you to speak and write ngreeably to the usage of the best writers
and speakers.
·
\V c will next find the name for tlt i;se i;xcr ciscs of which we
nrc now speakfrig . Grmmnur, in Gree k, signifies a letter, and a~
a le tter is the firs t element of l:rnguage, we will cnll the whol e
subject of speaking or writing the Engli s h Langunge , according to
establi shed us:.w e, by the general name of G rr .UIMA n.
\Vhen any Grammar treats of the lead ing principles C<]trnlly npplicuble to all languages, it is callf)d Universal or Philosophical
Grammar. When it is confined to the peculiar e x pression~ and

200

PRACTICAL

JNTELJ,ECTt: AL A ~D

i :linms of a sin~fp ln11g1w , it is 1·:ill1'rl l'ar1i1·11 1;•r C:ran11rwr, or
pcrlr:1ps 111orc co111111(111f_v h_r t!H• i-inq.!1• t1!r111. ( ;r:1111r11:ir.
\V1• lr:tl"f '- stwrr 1'r:it tlw ,.:11hj1·1·t 11r<;r:1111111:1r i1wli11I•· ~ l-:ty111olnf!y
u11d ~nrf:I\, :111d 1d11' 11 1\'nrd" :11·1· :1rr:111~1·d 1·1111li1r111:dilv 111 t.lin
rnlPs (,r tlreh1ttcr , ."u" h111111· that th•·y 11·i)I 1; 1rr1t f'1•11t1·r"'1·~~. '.1111!11
lnarns hi s le;::so 11," ;,., a s i111plt: sm11PT1t'.1!, so als11 is t liis. 'Tl1e i11d11striom•a11t , in the t.i111< ~ ofs11111111er, lays 1rpfood i11 ah11r1d:1111 '.c :1gainst
th e ravages of" dr1•ar_v Willtf'r,' hct.::tllS() tlwrn is IJ11t. Ollt: VPl'IJ lllld
on e 11on1i11atin._ i11 caf' lr of tlrPrrr. 'Jolin 11-•a rrr s lri" '""son, l11rt H.ulii s l11n~ R J1l11y, ' is :i ''""'l""'"d sc11tcnl'e, l1 cc a11,.;e it. cu ntaim; tw1J
11or11i11at.il'l'i" and t11·0 1·1·rl1,.:.'
llnr11 :1: w1• "''" tli:1t :i >' i1!1p!1• ~P 11t1·11"" r11ay 1·011t:1i11 ,:p 1·1·r:il parts
ofsp<!1wlr, li11t it: 1·;111 1'<1 11tai11 '""Y 11r11· firrit• "'·- y1·rh, :111d """ 110111i11ative to tho v<'rli. ;\ '"" • t.lr:it· a c11111p•111111l s<·rrt•:11 en 11111st co n·
tai11 at lna;;t. t11·11 finitn \'l'rlif', arrd two 111q11i11:1ti1·1·"·
'Vhcn t11·0 nr r1111r1 '- 11·!lrds :1n._ p11t. to ,•!f'! l11 •r s11 :1s t•i 11r:ih; sr, 11sP,
fornring e ith e r a sc r1t.c11ce o r part uf a se nt e nce, s 1td1 ex pr e~~iu 11s
am ndlc:cl phrases.

Q. ls it di!linitc or indefinite ,
and wliy ?
A. fodnlii1it.e, because it docs
11ot 1111!:1.11 any part.icnlar 111 tu 1.
Q. To \\'hat. <loes it belong-?
A. To 1Uan.
Q. ·what is the rule?
A. 'Tlt e indefinite article A, or
,\ 'i, hr.:lo11 gs to 11011ns iii tl1c
si 1r g 1:lar r111111h cr 011ly.'

({U.ES TIO NS .

wiser, SUl' .Ell L AT!H: w ises t.
Q. l s it rn g 11larly nr irregnlarly
C•Jll!lfll rcd , ;;rrd wl1y?
A. I t i,.; n• g 11l11rl y ro1np:irccl, 111>
c:1t1 'w it 1;11·111s ii :; r:11111par:1li1·e
IJ.)' :u !di ll [j rt 1.ri t lr c posi t i I'• !,
a:1d t!ic s 1qJ11rlati ve by addi11g
S T to t!t e ·s:i11w.
lt can :il ~ o
l1e rcg11L;r1 y compared by
1111;rc and n1,, ,;L
Q. Tu w l1at d ocs it belong, uncl

Q. \Vlrnt cl ocs t.lte worcl t?ty11wn Q. \ V li:it rlrws Un i 1:n·s1r1 C ramsignif)· '
111.11 r 1111 ~ a11 ?
Q. \\'hat. cl111•s thr, wnril t'. fyuw- Q. \\ ' lr:it. dnf's l'/1il11:;1;pltic11l
lo!!·!/ sig11il y'
(.'r11111 ·111rrr llll':tll '
Q . (If wl1at docs nty1110lngy Q. \\ ' 111'11 is ( ;r:111rn1ar raflccf
11orti"11!11r ?
t.n·at?
Q. Jlnw many p:rrls of" i-:pectlr Q. I~ tl1 D <;r;111rrnar of ll'hirlr
are tlrNe?
tlti,:: 11·nrl\ tn ·ats U11irt'Ts11.I,
Q. \Vl1:it :r re tf1 Pir 11:1111cs '
l'/11J11s11 ;1hirnl. 11r 1'11rtir11/11.r ."
Q. \flrat cl\IC' S S Y:" o: ig nif}' , 111 q. \\rlrat c·1111o<tit11t1•s a 1<1·11te rn·c:
cn111positin11'
<i!,. lln w 111:1111' kind :; of sell·
Q. vVlr:rt do es s1111l.r1~; 1111•;m?
1<: 11t' ns :1rn tJ°;, ._ .... ?
(~ . ()f wltat ,-1rl1j1',d d oc~ it trc·af:' Q. \V li :1t i,; :r sirnpfn f'PlltCJll"'.() ?
<J. \Vl1:rt i~ th o mca11i11g: of the Q. J\l 11 st a. 1<irnplt: S(•Jll1•111 "e Iii~
word G n1111.m11r, and \v .lt;it i~
1·1111lirr cd to two parts of
tlin olijnc'.t of" it?
~1""''"11?
Q. 'Vl1:1 t is tlw true : clcfi11it.io11 Q. \'\iliat is a co111)1nt1rHl senof Grnm·111.ar?
t<".Tlf "C?
Q. \Vlr:rt. is a plrra sc)'

Q.. Not.witlrsta11cling yn11 liavr, lmrnr<'<I all tire prop<:rtimi of nadr
pnrt of'spt~el'lr, still yon rrray not I< now the nrost co11ve11imrt ordnr
ofrran1i11g tlre111. Besidrs, it will be bes t to oh;H~n' <! alwnys tire
sanw orc_lc-~ r, i;;o a~ to bn cerl.nin that you lr:rv e ornitlrnl nothir1g. I
tlr1irelnrc rceurrnneml to you to rnake yourself fouriliur with the
following

PARSING

A. J\n articl e, lwca11!'lo it pointR

.AnTJCJ.1': .

JI avisc m.an.
Q.. \Vhnt part of t=;pecch 1s
nml why r
.

'r ADLE.

1

A,'

nut th e mrnrning, or limits the
m eaning of the noun.

• Fi11ite to distinguish them from those in the i11jiniti-re mode.

,\ i>.I E C TIVE.

/ } 11,isc ·11111.n.
<-.).. V/li:tl.1'<11"l uf":'jli~cel r is '\vise,'
a11d wl11· ?
A . \ Vis 1: -i ~; an :ulj()r·t.ive," he1 · ~ u1 se it desci'ibe::; tire noull,
It l:l 11.
Q.. \Vi 11 yo n P.nmp:ue it. ?
A. l'u s 1T 11· 1.; wis•:,CoM I' A lt!TIVE

w_li;t'
A. ff.}!' IH'l nngs to 'rnan,' beC<it!s,; it d c~;,. rii H·s '11 1a11.'

Q . ' V l1al. is tl1< i rnl e fi i r it?

'\\ 'Adjeetivcs belong to nouns.'
' ·

NOUN.

Jl w ise m1m rrn.clisr.s ?Jirluc.
Q. "\Vlr:i.t !'art uf,;pccc h is '111a11,'
and wl1 y ?
A . .l\ia11 i:; a nr11111 , lirir;ause it is
the 11au1e of a pe rso11.
Q. I s it proper or co11r111011, and
wiry?
A. lt. is a co nnn o n noun, bec:i 11 sc it is a ge11 e ral name.
Q. Of \\"hat person is ' man,'
and wl1y?
A . It is of" tire tlrircl person, becau se it is spoke n of:
Q. Of what ge11cler is 'man,'
aml why?

GllA~OL\fi.

201

A. l\lasc·.uli11e , lrncnusc .it is tlw
11an1e of a 111ale.

·

Q. Uf wlrat. n11111li e r, :rnd wiry?
A. 'l'lie si11g11lar r111111ber, because it Hwa11s but one.

Q. 111 \vlrnt case is 'wan,' uml
why ?
A. 111 the nominative ease, be?a1 1se it is tlrn ag ellt or subj ect S[rnkcn o f.
Q. To w h a t i:-; it the nor11inatiYe
C':l SO , :Ilic! w J1y?
A. lt. i:; 11owi11:rl.i HJ to 'prartit.:c i1·i,' li cr· ;111 sc it dut.ernrilJ(•;.:
or gnycr11:.; tlt r> j• e r,; un all{[
11111111.wr of ' pral'ti scs .'
Q. 'Vli:11: is tl1e rul e for the 11 0mi11:r1i ve ca se ?
A . 'Tlic no111!nat.ive case governs th e v erb .'
vJ:nn.
.!J. wisr; 111.rra praclis r•s 1jirt11c.
Q. \V iral pnrl: of 1<[H:cclr is' pract.i >'• ·s :' :11111 \\·liy?
A. 'l' r:w :i:.:ec;' is a \·c rli. because
it t;_,'ll(ltcs :<r.tillll or IJein•r.
Q. Will yuu 11;:mo i !s pri11~ipal
p:i rt ~;'
A. P1n; ~rnN T pr:icli se , IM!' Ell ·
FECT pra c ti se d , l'i-:llFECT l'AHT! CJPLJ; pr <:c1.iscd.
Q. Is it a rr g ular or irregular
vcrh, aud wi ry ?
A. I'radisc s is a rP g11br verb,
bnc a11 sc it s irllperl(:ct tcn ;:t•
nnd pe rfoc t p:1rtif'iple arc•
for111 ed liy adding v to the
p1·v;;c 11I..
Q. 111 .wli:i t. 111ocl c is it, n11cl why'
A. It i" i11 the i11cli cat.ivc modc,
licca11 ~;e it si111ply declares :1
thing.
Q. l n what tens e is it, and

why'

A. It is in the presen I. tense ,
l.rncause it d e notes that tire
action is cluing now.
Q. ·will yo n conjuga te it?
A..
SINGULAH.
]st Per. l praetisc.
;2tl Per. 'flrou practiscsl.

202

11\" TELI.E CT tT AT, J\ N n

:Jd P .·r. II P, sh e, it , or man
prn cli t<1·s.

"·c

l' J.!I H A L.

ht P< '- 1' .
pr;wti f: r .
!!d 1'1·r. Y ,. or \'" " l'r;wti ,..c.
:Jd p.,,.. '1' "''.Y ll":t (' t j,..,,.
Q. I 11 wlrat f't ' r ~u 11 i,; ' pra cti ses,'
a11d "'" r ?
;\ . hi :< i.r; 1li1 · third 111' rsn 11 . ht• '. ':1 11 ".n ~t " 11 n11ti11at.i1·c · J11 :111 ,'
_ IS 11f 1111 ,_ JWl'S<> ll.
<~ - 111 \\·l1at. 111111tlw r is it , nrrcl
\\°1 11·?
A . It . is ,, frl1 r ~ i11 !! 1tl:1 r 1111111 lwr.
~H~ • ·:ur ;: e it s 110 111.111 ati1·e ' 11ia11 ;
IS.
Q. " ' lwt d n 1 · ~ it :1grec \Yilh.a nrl
\l"l1 :1 t is 1'11 · r1rl 1· '
·
A. It :1g n •1·" 11·i1 lt it" 11 11111 i11 :1ti 1·e
111 a11 . ·A 1·t·riJ :t~:r1·1 · " 11·it.l1
it s 1J•H11i1111 tiYe in 1; t; 11ti1er a u<l

i

Jl ' ~ l' St1 1l .'
P ,\ ll '1' I t · I I' I.

I

Sf1 11' ./(I/I/ I' S

I~ .

r1111 11 /11rr.

Q. " "Ital l':t rt 11 f' ;; pt·• T lt ~~ ' rn11-

PR A CTI CAL G RAJ\IM A R.

Q. '\"lt 11 t is th <' rnl n for it?
A . ' ]'11rti1·i('l m• l11•l ong to noun s. '
I' 110

~ ll lJN

ll}: T. .-l'f'J n ·; ,

I sou· .l111111·s u·ho 1ros hurt .
h1t f flllfl OJ'Ff!f' t!('li i;. 'll"hfl 1
a 1111 w It r ?
'
A. It is :'t 11rn11n11n , l wc a1t~P. it
sl 111tds for tlH' ""1111 . .1111111·~
Q . '" it a f" (' l:t ti t·n Ill' J' Cl'SO;lld
pro11111111 , :tnd wlt1· ?
A . It is a r<' l11t iY1 : J•ron nnn , he·
<.:: 1" "') it n ·f1 :r<" t11 .f;11111 :s f'ur an
:J ll ff'l'f' "• 'llf .
Q . \Yl111t i ~ it ~ 1w rsn 11 , 1111 ,J wit)?
A . It 1 ~ o f tl 11· llt irrl pt ·rs t!li, bec:11t sf: 1ls 1111f1•1·1·d Pnt is .
Q . 1 If ll'h :1t 1111t 11 ber is it , nnrl •
w/11· ?
A . Jt. -is 11 f ilt n "i11 !.'11l :H nm nucr
b1· 1·1111 "t ' it s 11111 1•;·1·d1·11t is .
'
n . \\ "l11t l is it" g t' tlli t·r, ancl
11·111· ;>
A . !\l ~ t sr· 11 li11 (' , l: <'rn 11 ;:r: it s ant ec1•d"- 11 I ii' ., f' I1111t .,,, 11 ,Ji·r
Q. \\ itlt \\"lt:1 I tf, ,,:; it ll"t:,.,. ;
\ ,~ ~
..
1 •
•". tlli J: 11 111· ~- it ;: 11 111 l' ce dc11l.
<{. \\ It al 1;: 1ht : 111l e'
A . ' l'r" 111 11 111 s t1111 1' I :1cTP e wirh
11 11 ' " '""'" f;, ,. wlt.i..Jt 1l11:v
rt: tJ td , in g- 1·11d cr, r11rmL er a11;1

n. \\

11 i11 g ,' 1t11 d 11-Jtr ?
J\ . H.1;1111_in1r i;: ,; p:•r li1·ipl r , li r" :111 "'' rt h1>1 /t d1·:'ni l11 ·s :tnd
i111pli1 ·:< :lf' ii<r n .
Q. \\ ' lt 11t. 1·1·rh i" it f'rnnt ?
A . Fn 1t11 1111 · u ·r h ' n 111. "
fll'l" Sl •ll .'
(J . \\ ' ill y 1111 11 :1 11t •· tit ,• pri rlf'i jl: tl U 111 11·li111. c:1se is • wh n,' and
J'l tl'f S '
\I 111· ?
J\. e 1 u: ~1':NT 1'11 11 , )'!!'J:nFr:r T A. lt ' is i11 _tft p 11 nmi11 .1 ti l"f C:t~P.,
1
r an, I' J-: J: F J•: C" I' ] '.~ B'l'I C I J'J, T·: ,
li t·1>;1 t1 S"- ti. st.: t11rl s fi 1 r 1111 age llt
1"1111 .
Ill' f' llh.J l' l'f o f f ilf' Yl'. l'i> .
Q . \ \i lt nt l•i nd uf' 1·nrL is ' ru1t ,' 0 'l'n n-l t: tl 1· 1·rb is it th e 11 om:rnd wl11· ?
i II :1 f j \ · n t · ;1 ~f~ ?
A . J t is 11°11 . i1-rr''..'. ttl 11 r 1T rh. ht'- ; \ . ' j O' 11·;i s,'
.-.. : 111 ~ •' it " "'' " ,·1n l f( 1n 11 it ~ i1 11 - Q \\ 11 :11 is tlt n rirl n ?
l"' rfi·l't fl' !! "(' a ri d / H·rf ~· .-t p:tr- i\ · ' Th n 11 11 11ti1111ti1·e ca;:e
lH'tp J.. b ~- :idd 11t ~ 11 ur J-:J> tu
e rn ~ 1111: l'< ' rh '
tlt n prt•st• 11 t:.
]'1!0 N f11T N P EH~n ,·.\. r
Q. Js it a p rns1·11t , jlnfi•d, or This /.~ 71"rs1•d i 11 1/11· s11 111; mnncn 111 p11111Jd p<'r li:i;t j':tr t. i!' ipl e
u rr as t/11• r r/ 111 / r r . c rl'l:?i /. /n ,,
and w l11·?
'
t/111 1. ·1i;1; t r/ I ·11•/, !! It . i s p1:r~11 n1d
A . It is _:1"1•r"l''' llf p11 rfi 1· ipli-. lw111s!111 d 1 ~/ r 1·!11// 1·1.,
1'1111-""- II do !lflff 'S pr1·;:1•11f. tint<> .
,, t11· 1:11 ll .
Q . \\ ltat do''" it. rl'f i: r to , a11d
.Tr:111
1·s 111·/s 11 ,,h/,1.
wlt v :>
Q . \\' !1111 part of' Sjll '- CC.lt i~' 110 •
A " 'l_t. -ri·fi·rs lo .l :11 111•s. l11 •1·a11 se
l1h·,_·:11td w lt J '
Jl is J a t1H:s tl1 at. is l"Ullllill"
A.
1t ts an a d r crh , bec11 u;:o it i~
'"

'ft.

n<l<l ed to tl1e ve rb to d esc ribe
it:< ad ion.
Q. \Vii .it dot~ ~ it <]Ualify or de~cril11 ", a11d 1\· liat. i ~ tlto rnlt! ?
A. It. q11alili es tlt e 1·t!rl1 act,;.' ;\d1·1:rl is q11alify vcrhs, partic ip,1 ·~ . 11dj ot:tivcs, aud utli er
utherb ~ .'
I' ll

J11,m es

11; 1·11t

r

l·: l' O~ l'l'I ON.

fmm th e cit y to the
Cll l//1,//'lf .

2J3

city :ind cou ntr y, to sl1ow lh o
relati on li etwec 11 il1 e u1.
CON .J IJNf' TJO N,

.T11111 r.s mul John w ril c.

ci . 'Vl1:.it p11r1 uf' ,.:p eecl1 is •an tP '
A . It is a cu 11j1111 ction. uec a11 so
it cor11 ieds · togeth er J .11rn~ ;i
a11d John .
Q . Ts it cop11la1i ve or <li,.jun o·
tinJ, and wh y ?
A . C11p11lati vc, hec:ruse it co nn e i:t ~ the word s toget her, a11 rl
al so co nn et ls tlw !::i CB5e of th e
se11te 11 ce.

Q . \Vltat part ul' sji coc h do yn11
cnll ' fi·111 11 ' a11d ' to ,' and wit,· ?
.A. Pn : po ~ it.i1111 s, licc: au ,;c tlley
11re pla ce d li efi1 re tir e rw un s,
Non: r1 > T1'A CHEHS. -Th e pnpil should be required at an earl y
stag e of' l1i ~ par,.: in !!," , a lWHJS to g iv e tl1 e reaso 11 fo r eac h ste p i11 tli e
pro cc ~::<- Tiil! s11bj <!ct, in tlii s wa y, w ill Im n!llre clearl y 11ndcrsto 11cl 1111rl C1 >11 se qut~11tl y r11 o re i11t.e resti11 g to th e sc holar . Tu do
thi s p11rti c11l:trh·, 11111 y he ~ 0111 •• wha t t1011hl es••lll e , at fir st , hut it will
en :11t11 :ill y pro1·e tlio 111 1>;.:t ce rta i11, a:; well as 1u ost cxpc<liLi ous lll etliutl uf' l c arni11 ~ (,; r:1111111ar.

S ~'f NT A C 'l' I CAL E X E llClSES .
HULE I.

Th e 110111inati,·e case go Yerns th e yerb in number and per-

son .
H UJ.E II.

A nrL mu st agree with its nominatire rn number and

.l(Crso n.

~~,,

\

F.X A MPLES.

.fl,iwns.- fl cgula r J\·cutcr I 'crbs-fllllicnth ·c J,[ude.
Rufi.r s return l'rl.
Henry walk s.
Susa n will dan ce .
ll11ys play.
Ja111 es will s hout.
Men sirrn e<l .
James lr as de part ed .
Rufir s has triumph ed.
Am eri can s will fl ouris h.
Mankind s h all pass away .
Tree::; shall Ira ve blossom ed.
George will have expired .

G eo rge !ms re plied .
hail reti red .
Diamond s sparkle.
Bircls migrate.
P eace will endure.
\Va s hin~ton

R egular Neuter Verbs-Potential .Mode.

Jnhn mny retire.
William can rej oice.
SuRan might wee p.
Mary could r eturn .
Watflrfalls should roar.
George should remain .

Ste ph en may have remain ed.
Susan can have rememhcred .
Harri et might have np ologi~ l' d •
.I\ nimal~ cu11ld havc breatlr e<l.
\Villiam s honlrl hnvc cared .
Augustus could havo liTe<l.

2Jt

INTELLECTUAL

i
I!

. hixi/·i ary Vrrh, Do .
(h:1 :11 do low .
.f :111w~ dor" mnnrn.
1'1•fpr did ln11~d1.
~t1·pli1·11 dw· s play .
Tlto111as do1's l't1n1 .zr.
\Villi:1111 did d1dil11 :rate.
(':1-,,:ir did 1ri11111pl1.
J\l:iry dons r•'l'IY.
Boys do q11:1rr1·I.
l'd• ·r did dn·:1111 .
f11t1·1Top·11t:r ·.· Z.'orm. .lltg 11/11r ,1\'wtcr f 'l'l' hs.
J)O('!' J:l!'IJI' " pl;1y I
J\?:iy I\:1111'.y f'('lll0\'1 ; I
])ir! '.l.'!11111101 ~ j11111p I
C:11; j11l'li1·1; r1· 111:1i11 I
C111il;I r11 :-:1·:-: lil o1 n11 '
Ila" S11s•111 l:111i:li 1· d 0
Find l\l:1ry n ·.i•~'i•· " cl 1
\\'1>11!d l'1 ·11 •r '° f:11· I
Sh;ill \Villi:1111 IT 1lll'll )
f~ li n 11ld 11liil11 ~o l'i1_y pn;y:1il I
l\ f i!:·l11 ,i ;; 111' l'I •111 I'll ;
f\11all .l11s1·1i!1 !1011·" ':m·d 1
May Ca·l'ar !10111'. tri11111]'li('d 1
C11;;1i1 .1111111 li:11 ,. clr1·:1111c1I '

RtJLE IV.

Active Ycrbs g.Jvcrn I.he objective case.
EXAMPLES.

'
l: ll lY 111 .

AN

bclvn ~s

to

110111t~ 111

the ~in­

!.!;Ular 1111111licr

ltULF. IV.

The dclinilc r1rticlc THE, may bchn g to n1Ju;1 ~; cit lier of the
or plmal 1111111li c r.

sin,~11lrir

I·: :\ 1\

i lrlir/.1·s, J\inrns, irrrg11l11r

~l

nc11f.1.,-

.fJ.ctivc Verbs. Nouns.
'1Villi:1m calls C: eorge.
The l:irnp-lighter sho~il<l light
the street.
:ll1ili1s lo ved 'l'lirlln:i ~.
liarri1:t fo:in·d tJi, , l'lll'llll' .
The 111:iid rn:ty hare observed
. George li:i 8 01>e 11t'.d tlw ;Joor.
th e direction.
'1.'111 , s1 111 will fi1rni s li li g ht..
'1''11) lady would hav e procured
the fan.
Thn 111an will J1avc delighted.
.Tames must demand the goods.
George.
1
A tl1ie f m a~· suffer puni shment. Thomas can injure the perfor
mruwe.
.l
Irrcg nlar Jhl ine Vcrhs.
.
(J
Jnm ns may catc h t.hc ·t.hief.
Th e lllan do es hear the 1to1se.
'J'ho111as nrny s trike Charles.
A woman sold the thread.
\Villiam would read the book. George knew th e voice.
Harri et may ha vc made an \Vi lliar!1 has _smitten the robber.
apror l('.
.
The wrnd will slmke the tree.
Snsan wL,e ld ha1o·e seen the gwnt.

1

"'-

l ' l. I ·~ ~;,

A mn11 \1·1·pt.
Th e wi11d l1a s lJJ,)1..-11.
Th() ;::un h:ul ri sen.
A hinl 11·ill fly.
An apple will l1n ve hung.
hacrroga.li i:c for in .
Dn f he mnn d n•;1111 1
Did 1.hn 1na11 jlf~ risli'
Hus a bird esc:iped?
H:id the hop; jn111pe1l '
YVill men refo'rm ?
Shall grass l1cLve 1.-itherell ?

J':XEltClSES l " Oll. 'f'Jll': ST,ATI': Oil l'J\l'P.ll.

U .. \Viii yn11 writc six. se11te11r:c8, each l1aving tlw f'arnc 110111inative and verb, but different objects? Six, having different nomi-

h :rbs, i11r/irati1.:r·, r111il potr.11ti.al
Thi: hoys 111:1 v freeze .
A o:n:1k(: c;111 ·hif(' '
Th e ('O\Ys slrn11ld cnrn e.
'l'J1e gr:i><s nii g lil grt' W.
A dog n1:1y '"'"'' rn11.
The 111<:'n slio11ld have rode.
Rcp:u.Z.rrr u c11t er l'crb.
l\11:iy t.!t e h1111 s1·s h11rn 1
C:lll t Ii• : st !'l':n11 s stop ?
Co1ild th e girl s rrtmn?
l\by tli•~ ro :- 1' s l1a ve bloornP,rf 1
m101t]d th e lrnl!Ht:S !Jurn I
'\Vould th e 111a11 hav e subsisted

.

R~gnfar

111urfrs.

The hoy s foll.

KXEHCISES FOll THE SLATE OR PAT'EH.

U. ' '' ill y o11 write down six proper exan:1ples, yrnlcr the mi es
11a1iyr,s prdix an articln? S rx ngn nts cnn11nP,ncmg with a YO\V~'I,
and :111 ;irt.i11l1! IH' l;>r<) <•:ti:.11, also six rngnlar 111:1.11.e r verbs? \i\Tntc
duwn as 11i:u1y 1101111s :i s y on can think of, that li cg ir~ with a vowe l, b0forc 1vhii:h it s hall he proper t~ us? A_? Wnte ten nouns,
,,r,rrin11i11rr wit Ir a cn nsnnnnt, before wl11ch it I S proper to nse A?
;;.; i ~ v er b ~; , , 11,r, J.•11te nt:ial mode, with the s_ame nominative to
••:;ch? \ '. ii l J " " ;·:n·s c all I.he sentences wlu ch you have now
\:1 ri l.(•' 11 >

Ct. \Viii ·;11u 11· rit1' 011 tlw sl:111 • tli 1· '"1 111 · 11 11 111i11;!1i l'n, 111 ;:i\
diff1•n •11t ,.,...rl 1s I ~~i x dill'l'1T11t 11 0111 i11:1ti 1·1·s , :11111 1111· s; 111w n'ii11l:ir
111•1111:r Yl'rl1 ° f ~ i-: ,·:i 1l(·1·1·11t. 1•11111i11 :lfil't'l' . :111cl "i\ t!iffrri ·11t. irn·gul:ir
1·<.'rlis, e:lt' li in :1 dill<·r1 •11t 1:'11"'" ' ~' i x . tlir1 ·c i11 dill'1•1T1 :t t1·t1H'<', liut
in tl1t: s;11111• r11r1d1 ·. :111tl 1lm •p i11 dili< . r1·11t 11 :od1·s . l>1 1f t 111 ~ s:111H·
t1 ·w:i: 1 \Vritn f;111r 1 :11111 •s 111' wild 111·:1;: !< "" 11111 1! in:iti1·1·l' <':lt'.h 1•1
:111 irn·;r11L:r 1·1·rli 1 \/rift '. six 11:i1111·s 11! ' l1ird s tli:1t. s11;1r i11 tl11 '. :1ir ,
a11d Pa..J1 1llf• 1111111i11ali1·(· to "ix dilli·rr·nt n · rh ~ . i11 a dill<_•rt •11t rnorl('
nr l t: ll ~ <'' Vi i II y o11 p: 1rf'c: all tl1 ('. H'ltt\'111: 1•s 11·l1il'li yu11 Ji;11·1· 111 : 1'.·

The iudcliilit e article;\ or
only.

205

fiir thr) :1i·ticl1!s? Six irrcg11lar vcr_bs, each Ill a dilfo~·nnf: mode t~r
tcn sr., wit.Ii s ix 1lilforent nor~1inativcs, and to ea~ h of _these norn1-

EXE,, C l S ES FOH THE SLATE Olt l'Al'EH .

1:0111 posr:d

P llACTICAL GllAM.MAH.

l

J\.;,11

natives, different regular active verbs, and different objects? Six,
having 1.l1e sn me objects, but different irregular active verbs, and
the n olllinati ves to each, the names of things you love best? Six,
like tire last , excepting the nominati ves to be the nam es of things
which you hate most? \Viii you parse all the sentences which
you have now composed.
RULE V.

l
1

t
f

Adjectives belong to nouns which they describe or define.
EXAMPLES.

Rr(J'ular a.nd Irregular Verbs. .fl.t{jcctivcs.
An industriou; man gains wealth. An idle fellow will find pov~
erty.

IS

.

'

'' •·1·\i

IN TELJ.E CTlJ ,\ J. AND

PR :\ CT I CAL G il AMl\iA .n ..

Hili 1!Nlf. hn_r s s li o11ld rP cc ivf' 'l\n><· hil d rr 11 di ~ f11rb tli r fW'Jl' lr.
T11·1·11f_1· sliilli r: gs 111 ukc 1.>J1t ·
praise.
po11 nd .
Tl w a1:cl io n 0e r will S•·ll guod
Tw<dn• p• :ll< T 111ab: 0 11 p ~ l1il ­
hnnk,; .
li11 g .
Frank will p11rrha , 1: a pour
i" i\ ll'Cll drnn1 :.: 1;::11:.: Ollt: OlllJCt'.
lrnili: .
\\'illi:nn rnay 1>btai11 a ..J1 cnp 8 i x t 1 : • ~ JJ 1111111·.1· .-<111 ak" 01 11 : 1'• >1111 11.
l l111J1• Qt.1· g:1iw< 1!1:111 y fr i<.· 1111 :.:.
lihr:1ry .
Tli• ~ i:1;n1111it11:c will ,·i,;it tl11 : 1\11 instrnd or v:i ll lov!: g•.• "d
\•:)y ....:.
•1Jdj1:rtius .

l n·r{!u f1:·; J\ ',;•1'"·" r ·,,rf1 '1'11

J11h 11 is intl11 s tri t1 11 ~.
William mi s pl ay lid .
:-in s:1n ha s h• :1:11 l'r" t1 .1·.
l\Ltry had lw 1•11 lw: 111tiliil .
T lll· rnan s ha ll b1 : dilig• ·11t .
.l us, ·pl1 s hall han : b t·P 11 int nlli-

g• ·nt .
.l '. ·11· r w ill li a n : li1 •1:11 illi11 ·rate.
'l'lJt· bo ys :ire l:i z.) .

'rb·.

l··~

! lJ 111·:\'

'l"h· : .>! 1 > ·. r ~;
Tl :•'- p ::u:

J;•

1

z.,,_
l ·"f ' " • " · ;· I ~

:-; i1 o ·•l :!

J

:

C>t·;1. r

n1 :iy ii: 11·1· 1,, :,. 11 I'·' ·

li• ·nl .
Tli1: 111:1ids 1v1 111 !d h:J \ c b, c!':
:ihsc nt .
\-\ ' illia111 11111st ht! :itt e uti ve .
~ 11 s; rn 1111 1:- t lw dilig•' Ul .

J.:XEH. C ! SES F O.lt TllE S l. 1\TE Olt l ',\l'l·:l·: .

<'a..!1 l1:1 Yi r11-' llH: sa 1J1~
;i t!i lli ·r1· 11l :i dj<'dir1 : '
~·;is, h:ivin g th e sarn e irn ·g11lar 1w11Le r ve rb , t1J hi ', tli " saJ1 11 : l!o111i nati v1', h11t tlilfon :11t ;1dje.-t iYcs, pl :wrd ;.Jfi i·r tlr !' 1 l·rli ; ~ ix , '''ll'h
haY ing lin ;1 11<> 11 1i 11 ali Yn th e 11 01111 ' !1 011 sP, · :ilso t 1:1· irr1 •g 11 l:1r Ycrli.
' :•> bo ,' in .t difli :n; nt t1·11 s1!, a11 d. six dilfrn ·11 t adj1 :diH:s 1.knoti11;;
1·fllor ; f; ix , i11 lik1: J11 a11n cr \Yitli tli e las t, but til e ;11lj ectiYc <le11t;!in ~ thP size of tlH: !J q11 :;1: '
Ct. \\'ill you pa r..;t· ;ill tl1t : s1:11 t<·11 r;1•s 1v liid1 yo n ha vp llO\Y t: Olll l'(>,; 1· d )
l t . \\' ill yu 11 \Yrili! down si.\ sr•1ll<:JJ!T "'
~r t i1 · h, no111i11 :1ti vc, 1·1:rlr , and ohj<' ct, l>11t

H.U f. E

P n•p o~: il. ions ~ovr~ m

VI.

the olijet:Lirn case .
EX I\ M 1' .LES .

l'r rpos ilim1 s,
llp th<' h11n::,1'.
«h l'l' tl H' hill.
J ld1 i11 1I th e 111011nl.aiJ1 .
!>r>t.wr'.•: n tli n s tn:e ts.
i\ 111011g tlw appl r:~ .
Oown tli1; nwl; s.
4)11 tllf~ Sllllllllil.

~-r .

J\crnri ling to hi s plan
!\~ t.11 tire olij cr; t.
Con!'crnin g 'th e affair
or th e me rit.
From th e ci t.y .
'\Vitl1i11 th e pre cin cts .
D11ri11g I.li e trial.

Jht1:vr, Verbs, Prepositions , Nouns, ~'r..

•lamp;; caught John iu the watr r.
\Vil.lia1n fouurl 'l.'li11111 a.o; on the
l1q l.

James brou g ht the boo k to Iha
hou se .
·
llarri e t >vnslir.s th e <lislics i1t
1!:1.: 1'itch cu.

~r, -: ;in

,,- ;1 ~ l1 r s

tl11: tl oo r \Yi th
:r , ,:I".
Marv \1·i II fl 11i sli th e task 111 a
1< ·11· 111i1111 lf',: _
Joh11 " ·ill r" 111i11d C harl es ofl1is
d111 y.
J'a ssinc mul
.l a 111• ~ s :""''S C li:irl(' s.
Cl 1arl.1·:< is lor<' ti hy .l:1111 cs.
\Villia111 l:un f:11tcd tl1 c d eath of
H 11fi1 s.
Tl w d 1· a: ~ 1 nf' R11f11 s w as lame nt.1:tl li y \ Villia111 .
Tl11 : 1;,,_rs ":r11glit t.111~ tl1i cf' in
tl11 ~ li:1rn .
l ' lir• thi ef \ns cmwht
hy the
0
IJ., ys in th e barn.
r
;\ g•;n ri ma.n w il 1 he r esp ected
:1111n11 g hi s ;u-.riuaint.;111 ccs .
Tim sn ldi crs \1·ill he di sc h:1 rged
i11 a 1; •w d:r y~.
Tli1\ 1'11r s 11 0 r ~ s hlllild li:11·c as, _i..; t1 :rl at B "~ to11.

'." I ti

II'

207

Thnm:is will 111akc p1: ns w ith :1
good lmi fo.
U n c xec11tcd the work an:or ding t.o th e plan.

11.rtiDc f"crhs.
Tlr() Scnat1~ 111ay impcacl 1 tl11~
P resid e nt.
'l'h cy will he forgotten by all
goo<l p cop l1~ .
Th e mon ey w as lent on pl cdg•'!~oo rl sr.i:urit y waR gi ven to tl11:
Conrl.
Tlw solid wall c; w ere :-<haken t11
th e gro111Hl.
'l'l1c garment was wov en witliont se am.
\Villian1" was reproyed Liy his
111a~t1:r.
Th e sdrn ol ,,·a s in creased whil e
1111d cr lii s earn.
Th e c 1tcl nowns th e work .

F.:XE: ltCISES FOlt T H F. SLATE Ort PAl'E lt.

ll . \\'ill yo 11 write dow n the no11n ' li ou~e,' and place I.e n pr1:l" '-" i1,V1 11 s , n r 111 111T , hc f'or<: it. , i11 scparnt.c 11hra scs, tlt;it ;viii nrak• ~
:<f: ll ~<:? \'\' ill yo 11 w rit• : six. S!' nt. c11 ce s ill11 strat.i11 g th e 11 ~c of Jtul1 :
V.. ? :-:.: i.\, n:1c l1 l1 av i11 ~ diffore nt norninati vrn:;, differe nt p assiv e verbs,
'llld dill'crc 11 t ohj ec ts of differen t pre posi tions? vVill yo u write six
i<e1 1t.c 11<' es, cac h ha ving an ;1gc nt. , an activ e vcr h , an object, a pre P""itio11 , :1 11d a 1w1111 gu ve rnPd hy the pre pos ition? The sa11w in
lir.e passi ve !U ru1 , by UJ a kiug th e obj ec ts of the former cxmnpl c:<,
th e n ominatives in th ese? S ix se nt e nces, ea ch containing a. pas "i\'I: 1·1:rh, and tlw11 111akc th e nnrnin a t.i vcs th e obj ects, by altering;
111,{i'' 1:rhs 10 pa ss ive 011cs, rct.ai11i11g t.h(' samn rn canin g?
\,1.ill } 'Jll parse all t.l1c scnt.cnccs wlti clt you !Jave n<nv writtei1 ?
RULE Vll.

Th e possessive case is gove rnecl by the noun whi ch fol lows it, that be rng the uame of the thin g possessed .
EXAllfPLES .

Prepositions, Nouns, Verbs.
.l ames horrow ed J oln1 's boo k .
George ' s m other will reward
.la111 0,; borrowed the book of
hi111 .
J ohn .
\Villiam will Yi sit Mr. 1J c111f11
William '!' hnt is lost.
school.
The !tat. nf \Villiarn if. lost.
Th e s.i st.c r of the \Yifo of \Vil .Hary fo trn d SuHau' s hon11 et.
lia1u is in town .
The boys ' hatfi arc mispl ac ed.

208

J? UACTIC AL GUAMMAn.

I NTE J.L F. C T!J/\ T. 11<" 1'

\V illi :11 n ·s

Tl1 n111 :1 s 's li nt " :1 < h1 · 11~ht in l ltt
f 11\\' lf o f' \\· ,,, ,.f , 1,,,.k .
Cltildn · 11 ·~ "" "'·w nri• 111ad
lft
111 :111 y 1'1 111 · 1 · ~ .

wifr"s s isfr. r is i11

f O \\" ll.

Fnr c11llY <' lli1 ·1H·n' s ;il;i•, .ln1111·s
;11l opl s .lol111 "s 1110'fl1flrl .
J.111fi1 s's 11111 tllf'r 111 :1d e Jl1 ·urJ"s
ball.
EXF: H.C I S l·: S

FUlt THI·: SL J\ Tt·:

Oil l'Af'J'. 11 .

ro-.

tt. Will }'<> II \\'rilr ~ d n \\'11 y 1111r g in ·11 1111111<' , i11 ,,,,,
cnse, p < > ssc~s i11 g- lw 1il< ' llnllt } "Ill' 11 :1111 f' s l' " ~F 1 · 0 ~ i 11~ ' ""' ~ t M
t ir e 1w11 1e ' .la111 cs ,' fo pn~H · ~s l\\ 1· h 1· o ll 11·r 11 n111r• ' '1 11 ~0 C'lt
th ese. n a m es sf;111J ;r s :1gc 11f s r 1'J;d;c c.r(' lt nµ nr t <l e• •omf:t
Mak n tir e word s r:-; prc,,: i11 g 1l11 ·ir ;1,. lifl11s r< g11 l11 r nrti u ! ' "
\Vril e :iff c r 1•:1d1 \ f'rh , :i s 11 11 o l•.ir 'f' f, "l 111 t 1l 11·y " " 1 <l 111.lify tJt,
ohj ccl lr y a d1 ·s1., rilti11 g word ? f\ 1•\t will )" " fln l11 \l llf•n ~r t. If'~
tio n t:.i k cs pl:if' e? '!'V iii )' fill 1'1 11111!! <' 111 11 f11 ll 11\\ i11 g c·:l. ]' lf' ••1on• lo
olh nrs, m e a11 i11 g- 1l1 n snllf( ' , l• y 1 l1 :1 11 gi11 ;! 11111: 11 11 1111 i11 1•n 1 h lo t
p osscss i\'c c :i ~ c , Yi:1.. 'Th r• I" '" ,,,. Cli:1rl• ·< ' '1'1 11• lwifo C>f \\' U•
lia 111 ,' 'Tlrn s11 11 o f' ll1111 ;i l' :i rl 1· ,' ' /I. 11 111 11 11 f 11 11• ki11f! .'
N ow will yo 11 !! " l i: ir ·I; '" " I 1-:11·''' tLe ~ 1 · 11t 1 · 1 1 r1 ·• "h irl1 JOU lune
been di rec ted tu c1i11q 11Jse?
ll l ' TY

PrrH101111s 11111 s f :1g r<'<'

\ ' I If .

1\ iflr tllf' ir n1rf 1•rr11'-11t 11 ,

•1111

1110

nollns for \\'hi (' lr 11 11')' ~ ! :i ncl , in l'.l' llrl n, 111111 1hrr, 111111 prrton.
EX 1\ '.1 11' I. ES .

P crsonnl l'ro11.m111 s i11. thr rr: r11 srs ,
Th e i11 st:ru<::to r I m· , .,~ \ \' illi :i 111 hoca use Ir e lr::1r11 s l1i s l c~ ,0 11 ~.
S u san 111:t1k :t l'i1 J1 · 11 ~ l 1io 11 , :r11tl
~ l ro g:1 v1 ~ it t11 lilll ,. J\ l:iry.

C 11 11) 1111.-1i1111 .• .

1·,,1.,,, .Y11111u,4 ....

b i rd ~ 1111 .J tlr •·y ' ' " ' " •olJ f;oy
lr1111 fi 11 f\\ 1·111y n ·nt•
.1 11 11 11 ·~ rnrrr<'d 111• d1n1te1• f,
~ · 111111 !.

A !.'.'""' ' "')' Im"' Iii• l>f>f'k, 11111
Ir •• wi ll ri~•' in 1)11' 111 otnin1, •
Ff' :1•11 11, ll'i lli 1111• 111m C.il.

ltufi.r s IJ0 11 g !it. :111 1·x1·1 ·1l 1·11t :t l'pl c
and g:r. \•e ii. t•• lri ~ l i ttl• ~ ~ i ~ fl · r.
T llll l11111l1 ·r l; ill1 ·d ll i.r r• ·:it 1111111y

rit y.

I' rrso11.{(l l'rmun111 s,

in

thr N

r 11 s r s • •'l 11 f 1' r 1./rnl1

/•' 'l .. ""tltj

sfnnd

J love l1i111 fi 1r Iri s :i111i ;. lil 1· 111'"·

I

11111" t' •l•' l'llUHI

httr

'°'

tlUW-

e d~ e.

occas iom-.

~ 1 a f '' ·

We shall Jr;i, vc prcrn il ed with 'rlr ey eo uld ncg lec t lire lrs;:;oh.
difficul ty .
Th on wou ld st p ersec ute th em.
I may search fli c lrnrtse for it.
Ile 8hould co nvin ce lier.
We rn a.y dec()iv e ourse lves Lut T hou mays t have bl essed !rim.
not G od.
Sh e may Jia ve des pised reproo f:
. We mig ht learn th e lesso n Le- I m ight ha ve se arched the eel·
fore them.
Jar.
Subjunctive .Mo de, Ve rb s , Nouns .
If I do love him fo r his amia- Tr S 11 s:tn co uld re m ain .
bleness .
Un less she stay at horne.
If yo u transgress you w ill be A lthoug h we depart in peace.
puni sheu.
If J were an gry, I wa s 11ot co 11If I have nrr()d i11 111 y opini on.
"'"iOli s of j t.
If he st ud y t ir e lrouk Ir e will \ Vere I irrn nac 11 late.
If I be so rrow fiil .
J earn tir e lc"'so n .
If John sing nobody w ill th ank l f Susan detcrnrin e she will perhim .

fo rm.

If Harry ha Ye.
If Willi am m:.i y go.

U nless he return we can do 110tlrin g.

Intcrrngntivcly .
Do I lnve !rim 1: 1r hi s am iabl e- Rho11l1l Ir e remain at ho111c?
ncss '
W il.1 Th omus decid e th e •1u es·
Have they <lecciveJ me to my
tion?
sorro w?
Can W illiam do it withou t difliDid I mi stake the road by his
cu lty?
info rmation ?
.l\'I ust J ohn repeat the requ est ?
Have I see n !rim and did he not D id she appear in her new
kn ow ,.me ?
dress ?
hall J fo provc them for th eir
negli ge nce?
E X E R C I S.F.S FOR T HE S L A TE OR P AP E R.

Q. ' Vill you write 1lown four sentences each containing "
10mi1P,~vr:, ve rh , obj ect., j'rc pos it.in11 , pronoun in f.lr n JH> ssns~ iY P
sc~111l a 1101111 hy whi1: 1 th n pro11 o u11 ifl gove rn ed ? \Viii yoL
1

.itc 'th e same interrogati vely? Six sentences eac h having diifor mt prono un s, the same irreg ular neuter verb , and th e antecedent:<

h 0f

p~

Th ou l o n · ~ l 11,.r f< ,r It • r !11':1 111 "'
' y.
Il e s l11111 s '" " l w1 · :i 11 ~ ,. I 11f l',,11d1:d Tl 1:rr l1n1l 11 ln1 r 1I !rim (1
~ Il l.
Ji j II I.
\oVe 11 :1\·1· d1 ·c1·iy1·d 1111 ·111 t11 ' " " Tl 11·y n••i• I lri " li1 11t lw r ~.
Ir•· i . If l' 1'1I \'.
so rro w.
Yo u w ill S lll'J' :l ~!'l 11 •4 i11 l<11 owl - I Ii• ro·1•11 tu t i1;n ~ • 11 111!M high In tlt i

Th ey co rnm er 11l1 ~ d t 111 · 1~ i11 l11 g h
term s.
S ir e .lr :rs r ns pcr;tr: J lii111 •Jll nil

20\J

'~

J\I y tl 11 1) iq pl 11i 11 ,11 1111 I will,..
f; If r:! it .
"
\\' " •lr :r ll n :!I "fl •·r h i ~'' ·
#
T lr u11 \\·il t ret11 111 i111 i11t•.

1nderstood? \ Vill you write th e same interrogatively?
Will you parse all the se ntences which yo u have now written ?
E XA MPLES .

Perso nal and R clatirJc Pronmms, A ntecedents E xpressed.
I love th e m an who practis es
little broth er, who was a t
virtue.
home.
Ho respects the Loy who im· I found Charles whom yon de. prov es his tim e.
sired to see.
)admire the patri ot who sh eds I oblai11ccl an interview with the
his blood for his country .
man to whom you appli ed.
William
made
a
whis
tl
e
for
his
I
i s~

!
I ,

210

IN T E Ll,ECTUAT. ANn

211

Pll ACT I CA J, GJtAMMA TI .

'I• .
f,
'I

Rufu s m et hi s co usin wh om you
kn ow .
J\11 i11d11~tri o w : 111:111 w ill mak!~
a fri1 !11d of all iliP:'I' 1.11 wlilllll
Iri s rq>ul al.i o 11 i,.; li11 nw 11.
Th e beas t w lri cli bit l1i111 di ed.
Th e m cns 11r f' s \d1i cli ho ad opt s
will S U C !'. C l~ tl .
ll y par ent ", w hom I lovr. , arc
kin d t o n1 0.
Th ey th at a rn fo11 li sl1 w ill bo
di spka se d w i1li 1l1 n :1r1:1ir.
Tl1 e ex i ~ L l' ll CC or ( j lll( , w lii r: h 11 0
ma n ca n <li sucli cve, n wy b e

in fo rrerl fr om all , thin g~ 111:1 1
a re in th e w orld .
.T:111H·s is grntf'.f"11l to Iii ~ l1P11 r fi1I' ·
I. o r \\'lio lr : 1 ~; l1 cr, u lti111l In
Iii 111.
'V e 11rnst do our du! y to nnr
n ei!! hh ors, i f th ey he nol
11 e ig ltlmrl y to us .
\Ve rn;u\ c pea ce w ith th e pPnpl e \rh o111 h e had co nq11 crcd .

I s:1\\' th " 11rn11 w l10sc book I
\J1 Jr !" f)\VC d .

kn ow m a ny mf! n w hose
_I

fault ~

will not 111 c11tiun .

F.XERC I SES FOJt THE SLATE OR P APElt.

(!,. \ i\l ill yo 11 writ r, dow n six sr.11 1.!, 11 cc", <~ ac h ha vin g u rclati v"
1iro no1111 i11 it ' S ix , <' ac h lr av i11 !!: a n:lali Yc pronoun in the pn !'s~'·
~ iv c c;isc' S ix, e,ic h haY i11 g a rdat. ive pro noun thf! a nt ec<·~ d e nt o t'
w hi l: lr is n ot t ir e na 111c of <t pe rso n ? S ix, lt a\'i ng antece dents tJ 11 ,
nn minat.i YP. cases t. n th e ve rb" r.•Jte r tlt e rc!:tl.Jve' Six, havin g in
Pacl1 a r1 d:ili vn l!" vc rru:d Ly tl 1e nonn ; d ic ~ r ,
"Viii yo u parse all th e se11lenccn \Ylr icl1 yo u Jr ;tv c no w co mpM·

ed?
HU l. E: J X.

Noun s s ig nify in g 1he same thin ;;

agn~c

in rasl'

JlU L E

I•
I'

X.

.·,

T he i1ili11iti ve m0<l e may follow verbs , parti ciples, n.dj ec-·
tiv n<:, 1101111 ~ a 11d pro1101111s .

•

Geo r~e

EXAMP Ll': S.

Th e Infinitive .Mode ofte r VtTo.~.
P eter m ay learn to re ad.
JJ e •:onld l ~a rn to c iph er.
Co ntd he lea rn to cipher ?
Did she endea vor to exce l
Thonw s.

loves t.o read.
\ ¥ illi:t'111 desires t o lea rn .
R 11f11s is d r te nnined to pl ay .
[s R11fii 8 <l r: t.e 1111i11 e d to play?
She nxp r-ct(' cl t u eo111 e to tow n.

1'/u; fofr,niti.re .Mode ofter J' a.rtid71les, .'ld:i ectil:rs, <\-·1;.
Ji n was learn ing to w ritr,.
Th e boys arc w ait i11g to be exR11~a n was learning to sin g.
cused .
\V illiam was ap t to 111 a ke mis- The e nemy was a ttempting lo
1ak cf'.
scal e the w all.
'I'l w four t h of.J11ly i;; a d ay to he C harlcf' is t!agr. r to learn .
n · 111 e 111h :~ r c d hy A mr. ri ca ns.
Tir ey s11ppose<l him to be intel\ Villiam is a uoy wo rth y to be
li ge nt.
lovc cl .

•·

1.'•

' ·:

.'

,."

Jl U LF: X I .

Verbs that liJll ow Lid , dare, let, sec, nP-cd, tn ake, hear,
fee l, and some others, are in the infiniti,·c mo<le with out the si gn lo.

.I.

F.X1\ MP L ES.
E:XA!l l £'LES.

l3ro \v n , tli e m erc hant , lws arriv .
e d in tow n.
saw S tokes , th e n pnth cca ry, in
th o mar ket.
m et J ohn son, th e bro k er, in a
\V aggo n .

.Joh n the Baptist, prea chccl 111
tir e ·wi ld e rn es~ .
l'a ul th o ap os tl e, prcachecl at
Rome .

S usa n , tire sea rrr strcss , will 11.c nil
) ' <l llr cCJa t w hic h yon lcfl in
yn ur roo 11 1.
\ Vi lli a rr1 111et T lr nm as, th e rn11
of' li irn w h o was murdered hy
Peter, th e bla ck m an.
Ci cero, th e ora tor, ~ p o k e tl1r
Mi lo .

F.XF. r. c n n:s F 0 1t T H E SLAT F. O il PAPE TI.

{~ . \ Viii yn u w rit e six S~! llt e n ccfl, eac h hav ing a noun n~ r cr i11 1!
w ith nnutl11!r 1to 1111 ' S ix, caelr ha v ing nn objec t a nd a nc>Ull O!!rer. ·
ing with th e obj cr t ? S ix lravin ~ a relati ve pro noun in e;rd1 ( :3 i1,
each hal'i11 g a no1111 a!r rceing with anoth er 11 oun , and a verb in 1111•
pnlP 111i :t! 111odr: \)I r!. a diffo rcnt tc11se ' S ix Lav in g a pe rsn n'1 l prn·
11 01111 in f!:11:lr , a11d :1 ve rb i11 tir e i11 d1r.at iv e rnod n; li nt. in a difli·1rr1t
tense? ~ i x h ; 1 v i11 !~ 11 0 1111 ~ as agent s, and th e vc ru ll i11 th o suhj111w tivo mode, an ti in diflc rcnt te ns es~ i-J ix, h av in~ ohj ccts d c~c rihc~ ~
by differen t adj ec ti ves? S ix havin g nouns in the possessive t• nse ~
Will yo u parse th e sentences which yo u have n ow w ritt e n ~

.J;1 mcs , Jct us depart.
W~ lli am bid him do it.
I co u l<l hear her s peak .
Il e wo uld not da rn speak to
hi m.
Ca n he make m e submit '
Ui<l yu n sec him die ?
"

EXERC I SES PO P. TH E

H e fe lt the blood curdl e in hi•
VC ITI R.

I will let yo u have it.
O ur in stru ct.or makes us study.
T hey n ec1l not. do it.
li e w ill m ake th e boys yield.
L et the girl s study.
SLAT E

Oit

P A P E lt.

Q.. "Vi II yo u compose six sentence8, eac h having th e sam~
:1.go nt , th e sam e fi n ite verh fo ll ow ed by different ve rbs in th e in ti11i1 ive mode? S ix, each hav ing a d iffere nt verb in th e in fi nitive'
m o(k passive? . S ix h a.ving verbs. in the . infir~i~iv e m ode . foll o" :ing
parti cipl es? Six, hav rn g verbs m th e rnfi111t1v e foll owrn g ad3 cc ti ves? Six , havin g verbs in th e infiniti ve foll owing nouns and
prnn ouns? vVill yo ~1 write six pro per exampl es und e ~ eac h of th e
for egoing rnl e8 ? Will you parse a ll the se ntences wluch you hava
no w written?
ItULE

XII.

Any verb may have the same case after it, when both worcL"
refer to the same person or thing.

11 :

212

EXAJ\IP J. ES .

EXAMPLES.

lrrr.![ lllar .J\'rm tcr Ve rb to he, Nv~ms, ,~· r.

,Tam rs is n good hoy.
I 111 cl ll in hoy 11·li 11 11-.1~ tli n lie
1\1.nry is a n cxce llr.111. ~c h o lnr .
sd w lar i11 iii ,. lo\\' 11 ,:r ho11l.
TJ10111 ns will I.Jc a g reat states- J~ ng c 11 e w ill l1n th o 111 11 11 wli or11
man.
th e peopl e, nt ~11 11w fi1t 11 rr
'\Villinm ma y h•) a wi ~c 111 :1 11 .
d;1y, 11·ill 111:drn l'n·•i c.l cnl o(
Ja111l'8 mi g h t he all excdl cllt artl1 0 United ~lnl r~.
tist.
Passivt and Xculer Verbs having the same casr. r(ftcr ilirr11 "' ft ·
for e th em..
I took li er to IJ c th e seamstress. ~ h i; l1 :1s br-:r: ll <"o t1 si rl 1• rr 1l 11 Indy .
.f\'1 r11 y 11·ill IJ o j11dgP rl 11 th irf.
~li e 11·ill 1J eco u1 e u lad y.
By mi stake I took William to IJc A Yirt11 011 s 1111111 is • ·~ l <'r. m Nl n
1·al11 abl e 111 c111h r r of ~rH" it ~ ty .
'fhorn as.
Th e hoo k i ~ 1• 11ti1! cd, 'Tlio Or·
She wa lk s a qu een.
pli a 11 .'
l\I any m e n consid er lwp pi 11 cs~
1 lti is !< I y Jp, ] ( 'n)11 11d of t Ii <' l1ouc.
th e chief goo d.
Willi am lias gro w n to I.Hi a grr-: a t Jl r. 11·;i~- c h o~1· 11 1;1111· 11111 r.
'V ilh :11 11 \\' a ~ "J ,.,.,,.,, n Cn pt ain .
b oy.
f: li o is rn li: d 11 Rhip .. r 1h o li111'.
I will rcclrn n hilll ;rn 011 !' ho y.
Ile wa s c all ed J ohll hJ l1i '.'l par c uts.
.B XE H C I Rl·: R FO i\ T JH: Al. t\ T1" 011. !' 1\ l'F.ll.

(l . \'Vill you 111 a ke th111·,.rh i11 th1 • f1.Jln w i11 g pli ri1 ~'', pn••i1 '', 1 \V o
t ~ a ll t• d

li i111 .loh11 ,' 1l'i tl11 11 1I 11 ll iTt i11 g if q 1111·1111i 11 g ) \\'ri t" fi111r p nt1•
v11rh>i tha t :1d111 it tl 1t: s:1111 n c:tHP :111 1· 1 11 11· 111 1 1 ~ lwfi1ri• 1J,..111 ~
Will }'< HJ wri l.<: six ~ 1 · 11t c 11 c 1 :s, r:nd1 1·r·rh l1111·i11 g tlt ri ~11 111 11 cu
nfler it :i s hf'fi1rn it. ' 'Will } "" writ•· Hi x 1•x11 111).J"H1111tl1•r H1il o \'Ill '
S ix 111ul1:r lt11l n VII ? ~ ix 1111.lf'I' 1!11l o \"I : :-;" 1111d <'r lt11 l11 \' > His
under ]{11le l V ? 8 ix und er Jt11l 1: I 11 ) f:i i.x 1111dr: r H11l o 11 ? fl ix un ·
der Rui c I ?
\'Viii you parno th e Rr nl encr. .• whi ch yo u l1 a1· 0 now \Vrill n '
:i;ivc

H ll J. F: X III .

P artici ples belong to Nou ns.
F:X .H!T'T.F. !I.

!'resat l'11 rtir i1ilr11,
~Jan wR

is ru n nin g .
\Villia m w :1R j11111pi11 g.
'J.'homas has h• ~ <'l l 1i ~ lt i n g .
'\Tilliam i;liall h'! pla_v i11 :r.
Rufus came runni 11 g to 11 i ~ fath er.
He was repos ing in th n ~ h a rk

./'l,"m111.• .

H 11fi1 • f.11111 .J Th nmaq fi p:h li n,.
~" ":t !I ra 11 ght lll' r hall rnll i11g.
II ,. 111 ~)' li al' r' hN• n ~twl yi 11 11.
i-:h P will hi' tl : 111 ri n ~ .
'l'hn h :1~ li a w \\' 1 1 ~ !'l'! · linin~ 0 1

!1 iR ?10 fa> 1m10 ki11g t•Jltneco.

1\11 L I·: :XI V.

The objective cusc may !Jc goycrn cd hy 1v;foc p:irt iriplOI,

213

rnACT I CA L GnAj\[J'l!A IL

!NT2LLECTUAL AND

Jam es was catchin g fi sh in th e
po11rl .
Susan l1a s bee n w riting a lo ng
let lcr.
H e "''as rea ding poetry.
Tim e1H' 111 y, be li cv i ng 1llf!m s!' l l"f :s sa fo , were t a ken hy smpri sc.

Th e ofli ce r W <l S for m ing th e
lin e.
vV:is l1 i11 gton was uhsc n ·in g t l1 c
11 1u ti ons of th e Ilrili sh troops.
" ' illi a 111 ca me draggin g l'etcr
hy tl1 e a rm .

I'a rlicit>ial .!lrl;j cr·th cs.
A dese rted man comrnit tql su icid e.
'fl1 c romp1e rctl nr111 y !t ad no
It o pe o r reli ef.
Il e was a 11 aba ndon ed child .
CJ1il d ren, spoiled by imlul gc ncc ,
arc u11h appy bein gs.

lllJ.ll'l1111rlll g

Charlt' S. snw a
strca111.
Hi s g lowi ng ho pes :i re hnn ishecl.
ltii fi1s is a !' puik d cltil d.
William lias bce11 a forsaken
"" child.
E~ CllC l ~ ES

FOTt T ll E

S LAT E

n1:

rA l' E IL

11 1<1 ~:l ilt !' :tg!' nl.
and Y!' rh , Ji11 t :I. difl'm 1•11 t parti cipl e ' 'J' f' ll !<G lll t:nt' ('S, (•;w Ji O I°
whir "lt s h:tll ha ve a par t.i c ipl c agrc1·i 11 g \v itlt on e llflllll. a11d go\" ·
1m1i1 1g :111 otl11·r ? T r. 11 plt r:1~1·s , c:n1t f: i ~ ti 11 g of 11 01111s, :1r1 i1· lcs, and
prr. posi ti o11 f: gov ern in g the 11 ouns? Te n , r:ad 1 ('011 tai11i11 g a pc rso11 :d prn11 011n , ;1 differe nt. mode or tense nf the YPrli ' to he,'
:lllfl :1. 11 0111in ati vo cnl'r. ;1fi Pr 1.lt n Y1irh ? S ix, cx 1·rnplil\in g tlt c
pri1tt' ipJ ., tl 1:1 t 111 1 11n ~, w l1 1· 11 tl u:y ~ i g nit :r tl w s: 111 H· tl1i11 g, 11111 ,.: t
ngn · 1~ i 11 •· : 1 ~ ,, ?
\Viii y •111 pa rse :i ll t lw s1· nleno :s whid1 yo 11 l1 av1i 11 ow cu111poscd ?,

q ,. \\"ill yo u wril1 ) fl' tl sr· 111<' 11 (' 1'f:,

H U I.JI.

The ol.Jj cdivc case

m<"ly he

l'H(' lt

h : 11· i11~

XV .

govercd by parti cipial noun s.

EXi\MPJ.ES .

W iI li ;l1 11 d1·ri \'('~ pk:i!'m c fr111n
pet\~ 111 g nf; f'f ul hon ks.
M:i ry' 11 c\·c r foa rcrl losi11 g a
fri e11d .
A gnotl 11w11 is ahoYC doing a
mean ai;I ion.
Yo n fop[ 11 0 rli sco11ni gc 111 r. nt
fr om u11 1lcrt·ak i11 g th e stud y
or t·lt c ,;cic nce .
dis li ke ca lli ng nam es.
George spen ds his time in am using hi s fri end s.

i ~ fi111d of s l:1rli11 g di ~ p1tf <'.~.
No i11 ~ l rnc1 11 r l' it rnd d cl c lig lt t i11
p11nis hin g bnp:.
P an' nts a n : p leased at ser in g
th n progress of th eir child ren.
.T:i 11H'f: is mak ing great e ffo rt ~
lo IP :trtl.
.J olin ':-: readin g has hcc n usefol
in in1pro 1·iug his taste in
com positiu11 .

Sl11 :

P art icipial Nonns.
lloa1lin ~
i;d100

Is.

is

taught

111

m ust

Jn th!' li1r111:i tiou of Iii ~ scnt•:nccs li e was \·cry ex ac t.

r
l'nACTICAJ. GHAMJ\ l A ll .
i~

co n,idl'n'.J 11 ,c:r11' .
J ~ r t li c r1h'·1·n ·i11 g fl t° tl 11 ·,:1· rnl··~
is a 1: c •: c~:...: : 1r y p.irl of
· I. co :11"1 :<1111pli , !J('.d iii s p11rp n~c · .
<)cl uca ti o11.
Tli <' ;1r t n!" 1d .. :1 ~· i11 1r i ~ carr ied ll•
ll <J nn 1 (!'a c li wrili11 g ,
a '..r real pit•·lt in l"ranrc.
l1 lf•·"11 qw ral.c) il ri1 i!, i11 t,; l1 11s ruin cll .l n li 1 ·1 ·~ h1:in!! c arrcss1;d J11a c\1 :
rn a 11 y jll.: up le .
lii111 l1a 11 g l1l)".
1·:\ r·: r: ( " I ' 1 : ~ l"fJlt Tll I·: ~ !. . IT I·: (I H I' .\ r· r-. ".
q . \ 'Viii vu 11 wril o six '1• 11l : : n ('.r: ~, in w hidt ll\l' ro arr• six rlilr.: r"llt parti cipl e;; g cl\"<\1"11i11;( 1l1 n 11hj <'c ti n'. case ' ~~ ix , i11 w lii 1d1 p:irlic ip\,. s am ll :,c d a' 11 11 1111 s > :..-l ix in wl1il'\1 particip\,:s a 1e 11 ~.c'. l as :id.
jl'f:tiv cs > ' ix, <.) X c 1 111' lif )· i11 ~ J\1tl c X I 11 ? S ix, exP- 111 pld y rng tl1 e
-pri111.:ip 1e that prr.p P..:i t11111 s gln"<; rn tli e uhj cr 1i1·1: c;1,<• ' S ix, llllrl r:r
tli n H.11\ •: li y whicli tlit: ulij ec li 1·c f' asn is •"u 1· e r1 H:d liy ac :LJ1-.) \'f:rbs :
~ix, e;1f'li ll:1Y i11 1~ ;1 n :rli ii; the : s 11 l 1j11 11 ct i ~e 111 ud n, but in a dili"c ri:t1t
f.1 :11 ,:c ; > \ Vril c• ti:c · ' :11 :1< : ir llc • r10~:1t i rc l y '
\Yi !! yo u p :1 rsc :d i ;lie s c; 1 1lc · 1c t·c ~ 1d1i c li yo 1111 .tn: \\ 1il tr:11 ?
1Jrawi11g

~; 11r n: yi11 g

l tU LI ~

A•lYcrlJs qwtli!)· yc. r:J:-: ,
;i1 h cru ;: .

[~ix ii:1v in g :Hh ·e rhs q11alif)'ing adj ectives? S ix h a vi ng nclvr.rhs
•111alif) in!! otl1 e r adv e rbs? S ix prop e r exa mpl es und e r Rui c
XI.\' ? S rx, llndcr H.ule V? Six, und er Rui c IV? S ix , und e r
Jtul e \'ll. r S ix havin g activ e ve rb s? \Vrite the ame m ea ni:1rr a11<l mak e th e verbs passiv e? S ix sent e nces having th e
' f!r hs i11 tl1 c po te nti a l morl e? S ix sente nces e n ~ h havrn g .at le.ust
;111 nrlic ·lc, :111 adj ec li1·e, a nou n_, and a v·c.rh rn the SLI UJUnct1v e
modr:, hu t dilforin g in te nse ? Six, each ha ving a neuter ag<1 nt , a
11 c1 1tc r vc rh , an<l write an ubj ec t afte r eac h if JOU can do it and
lll nke s c11 se '
\Vil! y ou p urse the sentences which you have now ·written?

Jl.ULE XYJI.

A 11oun of the scconu person is in lhc nominati \"C ease m -

dcpend cnt..

X\'f.

1 n~ rf i c· i1 1 b~,

adj ecl.in·.:.;, <111d ot!H' I'

EX .''.J\1 !'LES .

.It! r nh s q11al1fyi11!d Vuh .~.
.1 :111ws :.tCl.0.cl l1i s p;1rL llflb ly.
.lan e s i11 gss w <1 1~ 1l y.
H 11 fi 1,; was drli !_'.1• 111.l y t' 111 plnyc rl.
ll c loo k ed fi·ow 11 i11 g ly.
'1'11 " ,.;u lrli c rs lll :t rc h1:d ~ l lJ\\· l y .
'l'li r:y will S• H1ll ret urn .
ll l' nrj' is i111provi11 g ra pidl y .
Jl e 11-r iles ad11 1ir:tb!y.
.-'lrlrn-/i s q11olif'!ti11g J'f/r l iri.;il r s.
Th e hnys w ere playing pl eas- I le w:1s fo1111cl phy i11 g_ l11 1sil y .
/l. 11dre1v wasah1 1s111g li1111 sha111 c·
a 11tl y.
Jo hn \vas run11i11 g ca relessly.
Ii.ill y.
~ h n wns n ot pla yi 11 ~ .
1 ?aw .J a.111 c!; eage rl y c n!--\ngcJ
.Jl) J1n li r: i11 g 11111cli caressed be·
111.111111p111 g t he m p•~ .
.-:<1111e i11 ~ o k11I..
Tli e \\·ind is lilow i11 g 1·ic.J e11tl y.
li e wa s H'. lll :t rk :il1h· i11cl11 st1i 11 11 s.
::-: 11 ~a 11 wa s lllo re (idi ge nt than
:\ I ary .
\lar y i.!:' ti1<~ 11H1s1: i11t c lli gc t1l..
'l'l10.n1as is ve ry ~ I ud ir·1;s.

.l :1 !!1e' p:1id a J1111c :l1 gn ·ate r s u111 '
1.lia11 l'dc r.
Vr·r:> lcw peo pl e l1ave tuu mu ch
111011 cy in th eir o wn c:;tima·
ti o 11 •
.'ld1:u!1s r111,tlifyi11g oth er .tldnc rl1s.
Th e Li oys w ritr) \"t• ry v;11 ll.
:::'.11~a11 i;; ad111ir :d dy w r: ll calc u-\\l illiam writ es 11 Jlll' ii bet ter th a n
ht od for li e r ~ i1.11ati1111.
h e read s
I\J:iry was Ye ry ea rl y <> 11 g:1gcd.
T lw \t oys rear! m o re: fr1 :rp 1c11tly C harl otte walk s too fa st to nppear grac e ful.
' hall ·lu nnerly .
F.XElt C I SE S FOit THI': SLATE OH. I'APJ.: H.

(~ . \\"iII \' 011 writr: do w11 ~: i x s c ntrn r:e~, eac h co 11t:1i11i111r

1111 nd ·::- · rl1 fJ. Ua lilYill g a rer b ~ ~)i~ 1 1! :11·in; a<lrcrb s rpr :: lif)· in ; p ~;1~l i1 : iple~ ~

or

/{ot r,- A ve rb ill th e imp ern tiYe mode, always agree~ wrth tho ll
you e xpresse d o r und erstood.
EXAMPLES.

J\ouns. Imperative .Mode.
.la1nr !; 1 111 i11 d you r book.
.Jnllll , d o bring som e wat er .
T h o111:1 s , all e nd to your writing . \Vi!liam , !!: Cl so m e wood.
My c hilJ, do not tear you r I.wok. Do, Jarn c~, visit m e .
JJca r si r, do not forg e t the 1c- l'ete r, finish your copy.
q11 e"; l.

DWcrcnt .Modes .
My lo rJs, I m.ie w ith asto11is hm e to be your fourth corpo
111 cu t.
ral.
Ob 1tl1'1 11 c 11 ofth e jnry , my c li en t
ha:; s uffe red 11 0 o rdin ary e mh arras~m 1 c 11t .
now ta ke my leave of yo u ,
111y cl c: ar c hilclrn11 , ()X pnc tiIJ g
lll !V l' r l.o S(!('. )' Oil ag;1111 .
F e ll ow s1ilrli c rs, l ret11r11 you
my s in ce re a nd h earty tha nks
llir th e honor yo u ha ve confi;rrc<l on m e, by choosing

.M y young fri e nds , in a short
tim e yo u will be m en, think
of this fact and improv e tho
fl ce tina and pl easing hOim:
111"yn 11n1 in acquiring trr:as1m·s
111' l11w wkdgc, tl1at will e1111bl1 ~ you to act your seve ral.
parts in lifo with bccomin"'
dignity.
"
1\Iy country, my fri ends , antl my
re lativ es, far ew ell, for e •·cr .

EXERCISES FOJl. THE SLATE OR PAPEJl..

tl, . 'W ill you write s ix se nte n ces, eac h having a n omi11 at i\·e
, ' Ke illd cpe nde nt , and a differe nt v e rb in th e illlperntive mode '

S ix , e nr: h ha vi ng th e sam e nominative ind ependent, but the verb11
in differe11t m odes o r te nses? Six, eac h having a relative pronoun goYernctl by the v erb after it? Six, in which th e relative
is gove rn ed by a pre positio n either befor e or after it? Six having perso nal pronoun s govern ccl by prepositions? Six 1.iaving pw1on!l l prowJuns in the nomirrntir c case?

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.
T£\ TELLECIT AL A l" lJ

21 G
\\ r·11
1 y ou

11 ,. 1 1·.~n,,, tltP

se 11l.c1w1:s whi ch

.Y0ll

'fhc man nn!l bov are in town.
Jl .1ry and Harriet lov e each
otl1.Jr.
Do Charles and his little brother
make much noi se in school?

l1 an1 nnw writt en ?

ltULE XVl lI .

A 11 rHlll or prn1101111 joi11cd wit Ii a p:Hticiplc, ind cpc11dc11Uy,
is in the 11orni11atirn case absolute.

EXERCISF.S FOR THE SI.ATE OR PAPER.

\Viii you write six sentences, each containing two agents, of
the smgula: number, a verb in the potential mode, a preposition,
and a11 oh,1cct after the preposition? Six proper examples under
Rui c XVJ II? Six . nnd e r Rules I and II ?
·
\Viii you parse eac h of the sentences which you have now writ·
ten '

T!t n gPnNal !icin g l-ill1·d, tl1 r
so ldi e rs .!led .
Tli1·se l'lllldi1i n11 " IJ• :ing obser·
,.r"l , tli " l1argai11 was a mutu:il u1:11 »fi t.
Tl1crc \YPrc 1111nc ldl. to s 11ppnrt him, hi s broth er bein g Tli c f'liai s1: lwi11 :: gone, w e
' ""c ut in a \\' ngnn .
d1 •:1 d .
\Y illi :u11 cr)l}scnti11g , I. will ;1s- Tlin ,:1· li uP l h(: i11 )! tli:,missc d,
t. lt r, s!'lt nlars wn1;1 din •c tly I ll
si ~ ! }Ott .
th Pir fr; \·1:r: tl h o111 «s .

Tlw so ldi r. rs n:tn:aling, Yi ctnry
\\·as lust.
Tl11~ su n bei ng ri se n, we " ·ill

I• tJ H T ll I•: SL ·\TE 0 it

A noun , singular in form but plural in meaning, requires
• \·erbs and pronouns of the plural number to agree with it.
EXAMPLES.

TJ1e people build their own
ho11ses.
J.\ parl row th e boat and a part
hoi st th e sail s .
Tlt1! 11111ltit.11dc we re cnrn gnd
a ud t:o1 111111ttcd man y excesses.

I' A I' J•: i' ·

"'" rhs in 1l1 c indi c:1.li1·1: 111od e' ~~ i x r.x:1111pks illu strallllg tltn prn1c1·
p!c nl' 1l1 c fir st ; s1;1:,,1HL :111d lif't1 :<'11tli H1il1:;; ?
\Viii yo u pars•" wl1at yu u l1avn now wntl\'11 '

FXJ\ 111 r LES.

Il e \1·as a!lgry \vit h C harl es :iml
H.ulii s .
I saw Jam es :in d J osep h playi11 g an•l ri1!lnin g :-<Lt. lt1! Ma.II.
Jol111 1':11111; 11 cit. l11 :r c:1ti11g 11ur
Jriuking

,,l

The infinitive mode or part of a sentence is sometimes used
;is the nominative case to a verb in the third person singular.

Two or more noun s or prono1rns, in the si ngular number,
conncctetl tt)ge thcr by a copulat.iYc conjunction, must haYc
verbs antl pronouns agreein g with them in the plural number.
VVilliam nnd Charl e ~ run.
Thomas and Harry are good
boys.
Harriet anrl Susan learn to read
very welt

' ·!

RULE XXJ.

Il.tTT.E X X.

EXAMI'I.F.S.

I I•'

re1p1irc ve rbs in the plural to agree with th em? Six sentences
ex.empli(ying Rule XVIU? 8ix, each having an active verb?
C han ge the ver bs in th e la st six examples to the passive form,
•ind retain th e sa m e m eaning? vVill yo u write six se ntences
nach ltavi11 g a 1101.111 or pronoun in th e possessive case ? Write a
se ntence J1aving the names of th e boys in your class used a11
agents ' One hav ing th e same names used as objects 1 One,
l1avin g- t.h e sanrn na111 cs use d in the posseRsivP. case?
\Viii yuu parse all th e scul.enccs wl1icl1 y ou Jrnvc uow written? ,

kind .

rtH L

: ::·i"

U. \Viii yo 11 write three nouns of the s ing- ular form which will

()01~jU11ctionS COll llCd llOUllS and proll OllllS of' the same
case, verbs of the same rnodc and tc11sc, and part iciplcs or

This man rccc ivcth sinn ers a nJ
rat.nth w i I h ti 11!111 .
J [1! or .I a .1111 :s wit I g11.
Th o wo rd or (;od grew uwl
multipli ed.

The community are not so easily deceived.
The Faculty were divided m
tl1eir opi11lon.
Th e jmy have not agreed m
th eir verdi ct.

,; "''.'- I'.;
; : I:
;''' jll'

EXERCISES FOR THE SLATE OR PAPER.

RULE XIX .

J oltn sits he twee n C harl es :iml

I•·.:

• 4' i •

: i' ; ,•

r:Jse ahsolut:c ? l"i vn having 11 011 11 s in t!tc case :d1sol1.1Lt~, and. tlw

sauH~

: ." !

llULE XX.

Q. \ Viii Yo u "n it1: Jive ~1., 11le 11 ces ca1'. h !t:1\·i11g a noun in tli1~

the

Thomas and ·willi1m can learn
their lessons.
Mary and her sister will assist
us, if we oblige them in thi11
business.

Ct.,

P.XA~l!'J .ES .

J·: X t-: I\! · I S !·: 3'

217

EXAMPLES.

The Infinitive .Mode the Nominative Case.
To r:itudy is delightful.
To rnn is tireso me.
To declaim is not to argue.
'l'o impro,·e was his aim.
To exercise increases strength .
To talk is not to reason.

'

l saw James and Tl1omas, a1HI
tl1ey said th ey were going to
c hurch.
J ames aml Frank, <lo you know
that you mu st get yo i' : !cEso r1 s?

To transgress is sinful.
To err is human.
To .swim is an agreeable exercise.
To confound is not to convince.

I

(' ·

,.'i,•
i,

19
I

l

iL

IN'I'EI. J.ECTUAJ. AN P

To beg in is one thing, to fini sh
is another.

To pu11i !1h at!r enemies i's to forgive them .

Parl of a Sc11lcncc usc1l as a. Nominaliu, lo a Verb.

II is l1a vi 11 g Lr: cn at sc hool, 1li1l
'l'o sec th e s un is plcas,111t.
n ot be n efit l1im .
To ex pect succr,ss by su ch
Thou shnlt n ot covet, j3 an immeans was visionary .
perat ive ohliga1ion.
That we shall succce<l is ve ry
That r.od w ill cxi!lt forevfJr, i'
doubtful.
plainly to h e in fe rr ed from
That he shoul<l make oth e rs
re:mn1. and is dir ec tl y t::rngltt
h a ppy, W<Hl to his d c lia ~c tl
hy rev elat ion .
foeli11gs, a certain so11 rcc of
misery.
EXF:r:CISF.S 1''UR

THI~

SL/I.TB

on

I

l'IlACTICAL GRAMMAR.

ComJ;rcss was in sess10n six
m ~ nths.
He rcs icl es tw e nty miles from
B oston .

\<Viii you write down s ix se nt e n ce~ in ''"!ti ch the infinitil'r
mode ;:hall be nominativ e t.o t.he verb? S ix, hav rn g the same agent~
11ml ve rbs, but diffe re nt active participl es? Write a_n o bj ect after
eac h of th e parti c iples in the> last sente n ces ! \Vnt e nl"te r th es1)
sa111 e obj ec t!'! a prepositi on a 11 d a n oun by whi c h it rna y h e gove rn ..
ed ? Six senten ces each havin g a pa ssive ve1b ! Will } ou parse tho
i;nnt.e11ccs whi c h yo u h ave now cu rnpu scd?

EXERCISES FOR TUE SJ, ATE OR !'APER .

(-1,. \Viii you write down six sentences each containing an infin·
i. ti~·e mod e used indep e nd e ntly? Six, each having an infinitive

mode u~etl as the nominative case to a ve1b? Six, having infini tives following other v e rbs, without the sign to before them ·~
8ix, havin!?; infinitiv es in the perfect tense, following other verbs1
B ix , l!avin~ 1101111s in the case :tbso lutc? Six, havin.!! nouns of
measure, 1listance, direct ion, time, &c. in the objective case ~
Will you parse what you have now composed?

-

R(JJ,F. XXIV.

Acti\·c verbs of asking, teaching, and some others, arc followed by two objective cases, lhe one of a person the other
of a thin g.
EXAi\1P .LES.

Th e i 11 sl.rn c tor ta11 g l1t mr, gra1nIt U LE :X XII .

The Infinitive Mode is often ind ependent.
EXAMPJ, ES.

remark s .
To come to the point, where
w ere you?
To conl'ess the trnth, I waa much
in fau1t.

They went that way.
The cloth was four dollars a
yard.
'l'hc horse cost seventy dcllars.

p ,\f'ER.

fl .

'.L'o conclude, I shall make a few

219

To be su re , I was n ot afraid.
To proc ee d , I e xpect that tho
sac rifi ce mu !'! be made.
T o s peak plainly, I h eard l1im
declare it.

RULE XXIII.

rn:1r.
Tl1e mal.h c rnali cian leach es m e
some thin g every day.
He who tead1cs William r eading ha s come to see him .
I gave him many hooks, which
wi ll most probably be of se rv ic e to hiu1.
Bring m e m y sh oe s.
Uring hin1 a nd m e a knife.
JlUJ.E

.lHy littl e li oy a ~ kc1l me some
q11 estiuns which were puzzli11g .
W e g ave him a peach .
H e wrote m e a le tte r l ast week
which miscarri ecl,and I did not
get it till ycster duy.
' Viii you refuse me that favor ?
Oh! grant m e this one re<1u est.
Hrin g me a whip.
Send m e a servant.
XXV.

Nouns signifying lime, direction , <lisbrnec, mcasme, an1l
price, may be put in the obj ective case without a !i::P.posilion .

Passive verbs of askin g, ((;aching, nn1l some others, arc fol low ed. by an objective case.

ltX .oHll'LE8.

EXAMl'J, E S .

He lived twenty years .
lie was co nfined thirty years .
'l'hey were carried six hundred
mil es.
The flag staff i~ sixty feet high .
'l'he earth is twenty -five thousand miles in circumference.
The last summer, I visited St.
Hele na.
Uc went a voyage to India,

'l'his book is worth a dollar.
The building was appraised a
thousand dollars.
The city is thirty miles distant .
'I'he wall was twenty feet in
thickn ess.
Cooke was three years in performing a voyage round ihe

world.

l und erstood that Thomas was
tau g ht grammar by M:r. A.
\Villiam was asked th e question.
P eter wae taught mu sic by a
pro fici rmt.
Mary a11<l Amey were tau g ht
history at the same school and
at the sam e tim e.
Thcr•J a.re v~ry many persons

who are nsked questions for
the sake of information, an1l
very many are asked idle and
impertinent questions .
That person was asked hi!'!
name, his residence and hi1
busine ss.
James was taught the Spanish
language .

220

'22i.

INTELLECTUAL ANV

xxn.
Intc1j ections require the objective case of a pronoun of tli e
first, and the norninat.i rn case of"thc seco ntl perso n.

Adjective P ronouns idcd as Adjectives.

nuLF.

}~:\AMl'l.ES.

O, thou p ersec utor !

0, ye hypo cr it es!
Oh, me! Ah m e!

0 my father! I cannot bear it.

Hail, th ou, who art l1ig lily fo .
vorcd !
O h, traitor! you i: : hall peri sh .
0, m y beloved Arthur! I will
avenge your cause.

EXERC r SF.S l'OH TllF: SLATE Oil T'Al'F.JL

_Q .. \Viii you w11tc down six proper cxu111p lcs to ill11 slrnt e tli c
~~Jll~Iplc of _t l1 c l_mit two rul es' Six inlf~ iro~alivr. sc 11tcn ce~ r
::Six .111 th e s11b1u1.1ct1vc 111otlc ' S ix in th e imperat iv e 111 oJe ? Six
~iavmg- no_u~ s o f the ma sc 11l111e gender a11d plural 11 u 111 bcr? 'J.'hrei!
rn_wh1cl~ rt Is prop_er to use an objective ca~e aficr an inlt!rj cction?
S1\,l.1av111g a.n~m111~ll.ve c:ise cor re_ctly 11 se J afi1~ r an inte r.Jcf'lion i
.Y11l yo u parse tl1 e sc11 tc11 ces wl11d1 you l1ave now written:

Adjectives agreeing with nouns un<lerstoocl.
No ·rn.-Wl1en this is th e case the atljt~c tivc should firnt be m:ufe
to helo11~ t.o
und erstood J tl1t·11
ii• 111·' 1y IJ.{, jl ,.ll .Sl! I I U. S tl If) 1101111
· t.ltc
· 11111111
f
'
wou l<l IH! 111 its l' acc.
J-:XAMPLES.

' Ve hon or tl11! l1 rnvr..

'l'l IC

~vi.se arc CO llllll tlltly l1 :tpj1y.
Dn~ptsc nut t hn poor.
The ri ch are ofte n mis erable.
The merciful sltall obtarn mercy.
The young should resp ec t the
aged .
'l'he idle may expect p ove rty.
'l'he hand of the dilige11t. iucrcaseth riches.
God will bless tire ft11111Llc.

\ Vr. rea dily pard 1>11 tl1r.

pc11i -

11

1 1te!'lo mr.n must hr, p11nish c11.
This. rna11 is int.clli~~cnt hut those
wo1 11 c 11 arc ignorant.
Each man must accou nt for
himself
All things arc mutable.
Eith ct toad. w ill conduct you to
the city.
Every man, without exception,
'co111rnits sin.
EXERCISES

•tJ.djectivc l'rono1111s 11.scd as .Nouns.
This pleases me.
Orw carne aftf.'r t l1 e o th er and
That dispkn ses you.
t hen bu! It w e re he re.
I shall ask for tl1 esc .
It is tire same to 111 e.
YQu may ha ve those.
l\lany arc call ed but firn,,·tfJOscn .
I will do my duty, le t oth ers do Th e fi rs t slr alf be last a 11d tlH'
as they will.
last sha ll uc first.
Others rnay cho ose thi s, I prefer If you choose tlie former, I will
that.
tal<n I.he lal.ter.
I wilf take n o ne tliis t.imr..
Tir e desire of getti ng more will
One lik es to be hi s o wu 1t1astnr.
c_o11 t111111.t lly stimulate Ufl to ite··
All need forgi von ess.
tum.
Either wilf do.

THE ST.ATE O R r.AI'ER.

~- · ~Viii y_ou write down six ~xampl~s oft.he proper use of tl1e

"•

:acl1ect1ve, w ithout the noun? Six, h avmg ad1ect1ve pronouns usetl
for•n o1i 11 s? Six, having adjective pron ouns used for adjectives?
Six, each having a verb in the infinitive mode? Six sentence!!)
eac h h aving an irregular neuter verb, each in a different mode o r
te nse fr om th e others? 'S ix, eac h h av ing a different mode or
tc 11sc of tir e verb ' to b e'? Six interrogative sentences, each ha..,·ing a vcrft in a fi.tt.nrc tense? Six, eac h h aving :tn adverb qualifr
in~ a vi:rft ? Six, having an adv e rb qualifying e ith er an adjectiv-e ot
~1articiplc '

Will you parse the sen tences w hi c h yo u h ave now written?

Relative pronouns referring to personal pronouns.
~· j'

l r! 1tl.

Blessed :tre tltr. po or i11 spirit.
:l:lie w~c k e tl ~l 1 a ll be ynni slred .
1 lt e v11 l.uo ns so111ct 1111 cs suflcr
fro1_n the 111i::;<.;011dut:t of th e
v1<.: rou s.
.!\Ir. IL att e mpts to ri se to th e
sublim e, but sink s to th e ridiculou s.

Fon

Some men use all diligence to
mak e t.hcnwclvPs ri c h.
If ye do such things ye s hall
p erish.
I can find another man.
You h ave your own book.
Several persons were present,
who appeared to be pleased
w ith the performances.

:EXAMl'L'Jl:S.

'l' lr o11, who art my friend, must
a<;sist m e.
I, who live by your charities,
am grateful .•
We who are !earn ed think othe rs might be so, if they would
study .
Ile gave the book to me who am
the second owner.
Ye,who have done wrong once,
do so no more.

Thou, that art th'e counsellor o
the inexperienced canst advise us.
I , that h ave received favors, am
disposed to requite them. ·
He w ho s huns vice does gener·
ally prar:.tise virtue.
He who did thus, was a righ ·
teo us man .
I am he that speaketh th ese
things.

The Conjunction, Jls, used as a Relative Pronoun.
Such as fought r eceived a pension.
Assistance was offered to suc h
as required ' it.
You may take such books as
please you.
I ask not alms of such as have
no regard for the unfortnnato
{>OOr,
19~

Such as were worthy were appointed.
I suppose they were such a•
you could not respect.
.
To all such as were fond of
parties , invitations were sent.
They gave such c1uantitie1 a•
they d1osa.

j

~.; l

:

.

i .I

r
IN'rl,:LLEC1'trAt. ANiJ

Th e duti es \rrrr s1wl1 ;1s 1111111:111
nature clocs n o t willi11gly pe r·

B11t to as 111a11 y n ~ rcccin;cl hi1n .
Hut: h thin gs as yuu do, l d espise .·

for111.

'J'hr. Co 111prmnil Nti11 liu l"ronu 1m..
U c will ; 11 : 1;0 1 11 pti ~ h any tlii11g

] rej ect. that \\'hi ch yo n offer.
J n1j<!Ct wl1at. y o11 (ltlt:r. .
Willit1111 d1•111:i11cl >< that whwh I
do 11ut e ho usc tu g i\'(1.
They know tl1at \\·Jiid1 is tlwir

whil'li he ;itt1·111]'t:s.
I.l e will :1cco111]'lish wlmtcvcr
li n :1 t.t.e 111p1 s.
I.I i: \1·]1 0 c<• 11H:R 111;1y sec it.
"\ Vli n1•1·c r {'tlll 1l's 111:i y ;;cc it.
I il f' pi n· to eve ry tlii11g th at 1 ~

<lu t.y.
They know wlwt is th e ir duty.
<! Xt'f:l! P. 111..
That whi c h is ri g ht. I will do ,
I :1s pir1• tn 1\· li:t!. 1 ~ 1· rr is cx1:<!i l<•11t.
What is ri g h t. .1 \\·ill s11pp(lrt.
Ll'l 11 s dn tlH 1 tlii11 g that om
That wlii('h is lw st I pr cll- r.
li:i11d findcth to do with o ur
I prefor w h;i t is lw"t.
111iglit.
He may att.c111pt tl1 at ;Yl1ich is
IV l1at "ri 0Yl'S m e is th a t t.he man
n ohl e.
d ic d\y 111 y negl ec t .
Ile may atte mpt w h at is n ob le.
Interrogative Pronow1 s used a.s J\ "ouns .
'Vii ~ com es here?
Whom did you sec?
\Vliic h will yn u t.uk c :'
Whose b oo k have you?
\Vh at is to be <l o ne?
"\Villiam, w l1 a t. do yo u \Yi sl1 ?
Whom do yn u i:x pci:t?
\Vho c01 uludcd y o u to this
placr ?
What do yo u m P.a n ?
J nm cR, i11•111 ire for me w hat
th ose men did?

' Yl1idi COJ l!ll J()(lt:Cd the <lifli cul "
ly ?
Wlio 1'. 1111 1.1 '. ll \Yli ar• is to he
h nreafl1• r ?
0 1" \\'lt0m did you make this i11 q11iry ?
'l'o w l10111 f' ii a ll I a pply ?
\<Vlius1: hoo k w :m that. which
hur1wd?
'W hat is y our or:c upati n n ?

·w 1iat <lid l c uurnia n d yon to
do?
"\Vha t must l do ?

lntcrrogati1Jc Pronouns used as .Ot!jccli-vrs .

Which 1l1ing tlo yo 11 pr cfor?
W hic h hoy will clo it ?
F o r what p11rpose clid y o u tak e
tliat p e n ?
J"or what man can think of <loin~ thnt thin g?
Which road will you tak e ?

'\Vhat man wi ll ask s11 ch a fa.vur '
Dy w hat aut hority <lo y•rn arm ig n m e !
I wo 11ld just i:nqu ire wliich boY .
Tliroug h w hat troul.ilcs h:t;~
we passed ?

Compound P ersonal Pronouns.

I blam e myself.
You should govern yourself.
Ho loves him self
8hc will prote c t h erself.

J o hn exa lts him self.
H e hims elf is absent.
You should not common ti 1ou r~

i;elf

PnA C·t1CAL GllAJ\UlAit.

l1c1ny

and llufits have furni s h ed
th e m se lves wi th all things nccc~sary fi..> r school.
.EX.ERCIBK3 .Fo rt

vVc pron o unce ourselves just.
If you pl ease yoursclve~ it i'
sufficient.

nm

s r,A'fF. OR l'APER.

q,. Will yo u write dow n six sente n ces havi ng the r.c lntivo pro·
n ouns' who,' •wl1 at,' or' whorn,' refo ning to perso nal pron o un s~
~ ix , havin g tlie re lat.il' e pr ono un, ' which;' i11 each I S ix, havin~
the re lativ e, ' that,' in eac h, used e lega u t ly for' wi10' o r ' which ' ?
S ix, eac h havin g i11t.•:?rrogut ivc pron ou ns 11 sed as nouns ? Six, each
!iaving inte rruga ti1'c p ro n o uns w;;ed as adj ectiv es I Six, each ha v-

111µ; a compound personal pro nouu?
\Viii yo u p urse w l1 at you h ave no w com p osed ?

J\ dj ectil'cs, Prepositions, &c. used as Adverbs .
J:X.HII' l..E3.

At last th e man came.

H e h as at the most I.Jut fort y'

Jh ge neral , h e performed his
sc holars.
part we ll.
In s h ort, he was most unm crci·
J\,t leng th th e ti lll e arrived when . fol.
li e w'.1s to depa rt .
I smok e a c iga r n ow nncl then.
The m ore I l1 ea r him th e bct- .More thnu tl1is, I do not beli eve
lcr I lik e hi111.
li e has sr.en him.
Ile is not a whi t better than his Iti fi ne .• we would not hear any
r emark s from Jiim.
brotl1 e r. [ is]
I I CJ was not at all di s pleased.
Thus, what with th e wnr, what
Il e was ju111ping, wrestling and
wi th th e pcstil euce, whrlt witl1
w 1111 t n ot.
the fon1i11c, J u111 p oo r aa,\
Il e will come hy and hy .
wret ch ed.
Conlrflrtion nf the .ll.1.n ilia.rics, lfovc ancl Uad.
I'd gone when you came .
I've pror cd you, J o hn.
::; h c"d JU St dismissed the schoof,
You've b ad yo ur day .
Th e y ' ve taken him.
as I e ntered.
Contraction of Will and Would.
H e'd sometimes laugh and som e•
J 'JI d o it for you.
tim es cry.
I'll n ot cl o it if' you do ,
They'd sing songs till midnight,
H e'll satis fy yo u .
if th ey were urge d.
I'll not stir fr om rn y scat.
I 'll finish my task before he 'll H e <lctorn11ned he' d not do it .
r equ ire m e to recite it.
Contraction of It, and I s, Cati not, and Will not.
Arni so sh e 's s:ifely r eturn ed.
'Tis tru e she's dr.ad.
I'm sorry but I can ' t h elp her. H e's miscrnble aud he won't bit
comforted.
'l'hut man 's n fool.
He won't come for they won't You can't endure so much ii.·
tiguc.
pe rmit him .

'Tn-aa a rare maid en,

.i

EXERCISES FOn THE SLAT}~ OR

PAl'F.H .

Cl. vVill you write down six sentences havin g tl1rco o r mot·c
words used a s ndvcrl1s? One, l1aving a contr:iction of'will'? An·
·other of-' would'? Another of ' it '? J\nothc r of' am'? Another of
'is'? Another of' can'? Another of' can 1 hnd' not'? Another of
' will' and' not' ? Two ~entences, each co ntaining all the parts of
speech ? Two, c nch havi:1~ four parts of s_p e ec ~1 ? Two, ' each hav·
iug six parts of speech 1 lwo, each having e 1g ltt p•irts ofspeech?
Two, each havin g nine partsof§pecch 1 Two, ea c h having thirteen
11 ctive participle;.:? Two, cad1 !1avin~ te n prepos itions? Two,
2ach liavin[~ a p<lssivc verb? Two, eac h having au aclvcrb quali·
fying an adverb?
. .
Will you purse the se ntences w hi ch you h ave now coln poserl ?

Omission <(f tlrr pri11.r:ipa1 li1:rb 1ftcr 'J'lran, and Is .
Harriet is fair e r tl1an l\Jary. [i ~.]
James is a better sc hola r tli a n
William.
Thomas is not so 1 ich ag you.
She is more bcaut.iful than he r
daughter.
Alexar1<ler f!omi shctl earli er than
C icero, and the latt er was
111ore elo"qucnt than the form ·

Tl1on1 as \':as not s o benevolent
;i;.; Hufu s.
'Villi:un i ~ rnnrn s turlious than
hi ~ s ist.e r 1\J :1rv.
S he is more ta\IZ'ative and liYC"
\ ly th a n hnr brotl1cr, but not
so w e ll inforrn ed.
Ellen is not so bca ut.if11.l as Ann .

Omission of t/1 r, Ver b r\fl cr rm I11t crrogati vr sc nicnrc,
'Who comes h ere! James.- ·w ho co mmanded that regim ent r
Rohe rt N orto11 .
( Cornes.)
\Vhat will mak e m e respectable ·w ho is th e Presid e nt of thrt
United States 1 J\nJrcw Jack1md lrnpp y? Virt11e .
son.
'Vhat enabl ed our pil~rirn forefathers to bravo the t e rrors of Who made those cl1riirs 1 John ~
son, the cu!Jinet maker.
the ocean nn<l wilderness?

Religion.

Omission of the principal Verb .
He will do it ·when he can. (do.) I l1:we not recited, have yon 1
Harriet promised to do every
Y cs, I have; h11t Thomas Im•

will.
Harriet shall ride, but you shall

not.
When Adam thus to Eve. - -

not, because he was not pro·
pared.
He entertained me just a11 I
would you, in similar circum ·
stauces
To whom thus .Adam. - -

Omission n..f the JluxiliariM, Shall and Will .

Non:.-ln sentences in which then~ nre several verbs connected
by and1 the auxiliary is usuallyJ omitted excepting bcforo thv fir1t

"rerb.

.fames will come and go to town with you.
No morn shalf nation agaill8t nation rise,
Nor ardent warriors meet with lrntefol eyes.
No more tlie rising sun shall gild the morn
Aud evening Cyntlia fill h er si!Ycr horn.

Omission of the Verb to Be.
'Unsh ed is the harp, the minstrel gone.
Sweet the pleasure after pain, .
A c hild of freedom thou,'l'lty !Jirthright the tall cliff and sky beyond.
T!te /lu:i.:iliary Verb, .May, understood.
Be 111i11r: thn lot.
" ' ho will cntrl'at thn Lord, tl1at

(;ud ltl c ~s you.
Live loug ;i nd be liappy.

h n spare our Ii \'CS?
'\V c niay die, <lie colonists, die
s lan;;:; .

T!te /hu:iliary Ver bs, Jlfight, Could, Would, rznrl Shoulil, u11dcrstood.
I eo11ld not think, nor speak,
and brca.lc the l'haiu~ nf" ~ Janor h nar.
very ? \"cs, or die in tlt e at-

H c 111igl1t 11ot weep, nor l augli,
nor play.
Should I. puni s h you and ritakc
you repeat tltc foul deed.

tclllpt.

'Vii at wouldst tliou has c

111e

<lo,

def)' his power, co 11tcmn th e
lavvs?

\V.011Jd you save your country,

·e r.

thing that she could.
Thomas will not sing, but Mary

2"25

l'RACTICAL GRAMMAR.

l.N 'I'E!,i..ECTUAL A~ii

The C011;junction before tltc Sul~jwu:tiu .Mode, understood .
If li e rel e nt, submit , an<l crave forgiv cne Es.
Un less good order Le restored, and the former offi1' crs be re-elec ted, there will be an e nd to th e due administrat ion of justice.
It were not j11;;t to expose hin1, since li e did as w e ll as h e could .
Ho w ere a fic11d in human fonn, to practise such cruelties.
EXERCISES FOR TIIE SLATE OR PAPEr:..

Q. \Viii you write down three scnte 11r.cs in vd1icl1 it sl1all li e
prop er to .;111it tlt e pri11cipi1l verb :dlcr 'titan' a nd ';1s ' ? Hix, in
whid1 it i ~ r. 11 ~1.o rnary to 0111it both the a11xili;1ry :111d tl1 u pri1H'ipal
vorl1? ~ix, ha ving an omi ss ion of' the pri11cipal vcrli afi:m an auxiliary ? Six, ha ving a prop er omission of the auxiliary vcrhs '~hall'
and' will'? 8ix prop er cxa111pl1:s 11ndcr H.ule l? Six, under lt11lc
111 Ruic I.II? ltnle IV? J{ul c V? Rule VI? Rule VII? Rulll
YJil? Rule IX 1 Rule X?
'\Viii you parse what you haYC now composed?

The conjunction understood before a Yerb in the subjunctive mode.
Non:.-This form oftlic subjunctive is the sa me as the interro110 quei;tion asked, and
consequently no interrogation point.

gative form, with this difference, there is

PnACTI C AJ, GRAMMAIL

INTELLEC TU AL AND

U:ul th e pms uc rs caug ht him, h e would h avri h ce n obliged lu
return.
O, hacl I th e wings of a dove, I wcul d fly to th e utt e rmost part~
o l tlie earth.
ll a<l I hut scrHd my G oel , with h:ilfth c z ea l I sr,ncd my king.
vV crt thn11 my l.Jrothcr, I would nss ist th ee .
Wert thou to proffer what I do n ot as k.

NoTE-ln the examp les that follo\v, by omittin f!_" th e co njunction,
:. he fo rm of th e v e rb ii; the same as that sometim es U3e d by poet;
in inte rrogativ e se nten ces.
Co m e he po or,. or rir.h , I will rece iv e m y so n .
\ Ve re h e tc nf<dd m ore th e rir.l1 er, I \\' u uld n ot fear him.
Brin g tl1 ey p e ace or war, 'tis th e Sa lli e.
H ad I my sig ht I would fo llow l1illl to the remotest c o rn e rs of th e
earth.
The Conj nnction tmf-crslood.
'.Vifo , c l1 ilrlrc n , s<' r vants, all ,
I h ea r th ee , view th ee, /.;017-e o'er ni l thy channs.
He enjoys a p eace , a dignity, an ele v atio n of mind .
Hurry is the mark of a w e ak rni11cl, d espatch, .of a strong
on e .
Uc exercises auth ority wit.h m otlmatinn , ail min ist e rs reproof with
~.c nd c rn css, co n fers favors with case and modesty.

Th. c l'r rp osit.ions To or Unto unilr:rsloorl nflrr Lihc .
l\'Iilk, lik 0. \\':1lc r , n111 s,
'Th e m ount a i 11 s s hoo k Ii kc fri g ht e n ed sh e ep,
Lik e lambs t.li e littl e hill ocks le ap .
Like an oak o n some cold m ou ntain's brow,
Lik e on e who secs a serp en t in lii s way .
Lik e C a to fi rm, lik e Arist.idesj11st,
Like ri g id C in ci11natu s, 110!.ily poor.
Jo: :u : rtC I S ES FOTt TllE SJ..\TE O ft

227

T he nomiuatiye case placed after a verb.
There liv ed a man.
Then came the sc rib es and Pharisees.
'l'hc dog s clicl bark, the c hildr c: n screamed .
Up fl e w the windows all.
Smack went the whip, round went the wheels,
\Ve re never folks so g lad .
S uc h is the power of mighty love.
Quoth Mrs. Gilpin, that's w ell said.
- - ' Vhere stand of old
Myri ads, b etw een two brnze n mountains lodged .
Thrice run g the b e ll.
(~ o tho u , Om ar, said th e o ld man.
\Vhy fa rri cs s h e o n En•rland 's shor es ?
'l'J 1c rc wo uld be n o occasion,
"'
my Lords.
Throug h all h e r train th e soft infection ran .

Tlze Objccli1;e Case before the Verb .
.l\Iusic th e fi ercest gri e f c an c h arm.
Thus God th e heave n created, · thus the earth .
And vital virtue infused and vital warmth
T hrou ghout th e fluid mass.
Tyrants no more th e ir savage nature kept,
And fo es to virtu e wondered h o w they wept.
In pitying love , w e but our weakness show.
J\tc glory summons to t h e martial sce n e.
Th e pi ous maid s th nir 111i11 g led so rrow s h e d .
\Vh c n ChccrJ'u ln css, a n ymph o r h ealthiest hue,
li er bow across h er shoulder slung.

The Auxiliary separated from the principal Verb .
If' that check s hould ever b e r e moved , if th e crown should by
corrupt m eans, by place s, pen sions and bribes, g et th e absolute
dir ection of our two h ouses of p arliament, our constitution ·will
from that mom ent be des troyed.

rAPEl~ .

EXERCISES FOil Tlll!I SLATE OR !'APER.

Q. \Vil! you sc:irc h diffor E.nt book s, nnd h avi ng found thrr.e
isente n ccs in w hi c h th e conjunction is ur1dcrs tood b e for e the verh,
write three oth ers ot' th e sa me hind? vVrite thr ee s ente nces in
whic h the c onjun ction ':ind' is und erst oo d ? S ix se ntences, in
whic hlth c prcp <>5iti on 'to ' o r 'into ' is und erstood afte r' lik e'? S ix
proper exa mpl es nn cle r Rul e XI? Six , und e r Ru ic XII? Six,
111 th e inte rro gn t.i vc form ?
Six, ench havin g a n o nn in th e poF.·
sesRive case? Six, cnch having a pronoun in th e possessive case'
S ix, eac h h avi n ~ th e preposition 'of' am! th en c han ge th e form
o f cx prnss ion re tainin g th e same meaning ' Si x prop e r cx :unplc~
w 1tlr!. r Ruic X II I ? S ix, und e r ltul c XIV ? S ix, u11tlnr Rule XV ?
\Vi ii you parse th e sentences which yo u hav e now wri tten ~

Q. Will you search different books and having found thr~•
examples in which the nominative case is placed after the verb,
write th em down? Three others, in which the objective case
comes b e fore the verb? Si~ proper examples unde r R~le XVI !
Six, und er Rule XVII? Six, under Rule XVIII? Six, undn
Rule XIX? Six, und er Rule XX?
Will you parse what you have now written?

Tkc same word used for two or more different parti of sptech .
- - Edwarrl and Ri c hard,
\'Vith fiery eyes, sparkling for very wrath,
Are at our backs.
He sails for Boston.

·'

"

I?fTELT,CC TCTAL Al'\11

- 228

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

I >Id l111 !'f•andntr•11 I at Sahi1111rn lrn e \\·,
\Vito fur a noth er yr.ar dig, plough and sow ·
For 11 r.Y 1'r 111n11 w:; s yd so old.
llnt 1111111·'1 hi:-: liii1 1~llll wint<•r 111 orf' tn lioltl. .
Jin• :i~ I did, I think a1• I d11l. I loYI' you as I dul, hut 1111
i lii ·se tu uo puq•o ~;t :: tlw world \\·i ll 110t !in:, thi11J;, uor lov e , ns I

do.f s ii nM f'Y<'ry

l <I I w f< ll C I 1 a gov"rllllll'lll of tlin world, as dc f' 1g11s our lt:tj>Jllll l'~S , as would goH1111
11~ tii r 011r :11lvantagp,?
. .
.
. .
Ea .. h man 's 1ni11d h:1s f:nmc pp,cnlwnty , : 1f' \~el l :t s lt1 ,: far e-,
y 011 know tlt: 1t Jtp, i ~ 1h:1t rog11n t h:it •·11m1111ttcd th a t thdl.
J:i t.hr•r 111an of 11 >' 1·:1 11 t'." 1·ith l' r. tlin """ \\·ay , or th•· oth r r.
.l:irnr·s 111:1y s l::v, h11t H11!11s shall not.
l will t11l;,·· :ill tli P 111f'lo11 s lint t wo.
lJid hut man nms idc r t!J p, trn c notion uf 1; ud, Il e would appear
tu Ii <' foll of goo dn l'~ S .
.
Tl1 ougl1 I trf· atr·d l1im Lindl y, ye t ho Jorsonk m<'.
)'011r ml1wation is 11nl y d co1npll)tcd.
.
..
l l e lov f's bot.Ii liuy s; st.ii! hotli are n ot cl e~r rvrng o f 1115 loYe .
Holli yo n nnd tl ic in strn ctor arc cens11rnlil e.
You s"h ould be co nt en t. with w !tat yo~1 posses~ .
.
~1.Yltat f' li :rnrrc is to li e rn:i<l c i11 lllJ circums lan cfs ~
' t'Vl1at r< ltali"':I dn, for I ::111 1111rl onc.
.
. .
/ 111rJ what* \\·i1Ji flt )' C'.lrC of Jii111, :tlli) tJ1 e _n )rJ W(llllan >' 1 and
Jiis bov';;, anti 111i.11 c, \r e 111ig ht recn11t Jinn agai11 at once,
11ml set him 11p on hi s legs .
.
'Vh at:,t tli o11g lt in sol e1 11n ~ i1<: 11 cc, a ll
Mnvc ro1111d 1l1c d :11k t. <' rrc:s trial l1:ill '
" ' h:it.t co 1tl dst tlin11 1101. wat c h one )1 pur ~ .
.
. . .
T he .T e w f:t ~ t oft en. A tru e fa s t 1s alis tatn111 g lrorn _in1qu1l J.
That man is a fa st walk r; r. 1 l e walks ve ry ~1st . .l nsep!t ~ hr e thrc i.1 r;,1 111 e and uo\1·ed down th c 1n sc ln~ s liuforc l11r11 . 1 l_is c id er
hrelltrcn cn m fl Lefore lknja111in did . .l_a111 cs w~ut all.er ill s bo ok.
H e came afte r 1 did. 'J'!tc wate r rn tl11 s well 1.s goo d . A well
rn:in often becomes a s ick ma11.
.
.
Th e sd 1olar who co11d11cts well d o!' ~ a~ a ll 1itli c 1;': w ill w1~lt tli nJ
had d nn c, wlt<'ll th ey sh:tll :1rri vc .it 111:11 t111Jod . \' 1 ·~ tnd ;1{, wa'l a
Jine Jay. l rode out yesterday. l shal 1 go to-m orrow.
u-morrow mny ti c fairer than lo-tiny. Th e eag le soared nbove the
doinls and benea th th e su n. Vi e w th e h eavens abo ve, nnd ~he
r nrth heneatli. H e ra n through the cou~t, along the wall. S!•e
j 0 0 k ed around nnd th en ra11 nlong. He 1s mu:-h cngnged. 'V1lliam has se e n mu ch of the world. l\lu ch gold 1s corr upting to the
mi11d of man.
\Viii you rep eat you r lesson before he comes ? If you rep eat it
hoforc, he will be pleased .

* Advc1b.
t

Interj ec tion~ .

I

man ·~ i11tcr.r,:t thnl th <' re. f: 1n11

229

EXllRCISES FOR THE SLATE OR PAPER.

Q . vVill you write down three sentences, each having that used
for tl1 rce.<l.iffcrnnt parts of speech? Three, ha~i1ig as in ~ikc manner 11 se d in each? Also, three having both? 'I hree, l~avrng wltat
use d fur a different part of speech ih each? Three hav1!1~ but used
in the same manner? Three having ei.the1' used for a d1fterent part
of Rpecc h in eac h? Three having fo1' used in like manner? Six
proper examples under Ruic XXI? Six, under RuI: XXII ?
l.;;ix, und er Rule XXIll? Six, under Rule XXIV~? SIX, under
flu le XXV? Six , under Rul e XXVI? Six, under Rule XXVII?
PROMISCUOUS EXERCISES.

H w e knew how much the i'Jleasures of this life deceive and
hci:"tY th eir unhappy votaries ·; and reflected on the disappointn1c nt o in pursuit, the dissatisfaction in enjoyment, or · the uncerta inty of possession, whic!• evrn'.y wh?re attend the~; '~e should
cea:;G to be enamoure d with these brittle and transrnnt JOYS; anrl
sho11ltl w isely fix our h ear ts on those virtuous attainments, which
lit e world can n either give nor take away.
.
· 'Ti s midnight: on the mountains brown , .
The cold round moon shines de.eply down;
Blue roll the waters, blu e the 'sky
Spreads l ike an ocean hung on high,
Bespangled with those isles of light,
So wi ldly, spiritually bri ght;
\Vho ever gazed upon th em shining,
And turned ts> earth without repining,
N or wish '<l for w ings to flee away,
And mix with their eternal ray?
Tho waves on either shore lay there
Calm, clear, and. azure as the air;
And scarce th eir foam the pebbles shook, ·
llut murmured m ee kly as the brook.
The winds w ere pillowed. on the waves,
The banners drooped along their staves,
And., as they foll around them furli11g,
•
Auovc them shone tho crescent curling;
And that deep silence was unbroke,
' ..
i'
Suve where the watch his signal spoke.
Save where the steed neighed oft and shrlll,
,,,·,
And echo answered from the hill,
And the wild hum of that wild host
Rustled like leaves from coast to coast,
As ruse the Muezzin's voice in air
In midnight call to wonted prayer.
Know ye the land where the cypress and myrtlo: ·
Arc emblems of deeds that are done in their ,clime?
Where the rage of the vulture, the love of_the turtle,
Now melt into sorrow, now madden to crune?
Rnow ye the land of tho cedar ancl vine,
"'

20

,l .. ..,.

-.-·
230

INTELLECTUAL AND . :;.

•

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.

Where tho flowers ever hlossom, tho benme ever
Where the light wings of Zephyr, opprese'd with,.
Wax faint o'er the gardens or Cul* in hor bloom; •
Where the citron a11d olive arc fairest of fruit,
. •Jf
And the voice of thn nightingale 11cver is muto :
..,
1'Vhere the tints of the earth, anil the l111c11 of tho 1k71
In colour though varied, in beauty may vio,
.. ' ..
And the pmplc of Ocean is deepest in dyo ;
,1 ·
Where the virgins arc sofl as the roses they twUH!,
And all, save the spirit of man, is divine ?
. ••
'Tis the clime of the cast ; 'tis .the land of tho Su
iii
Can he smile on such deeds as his children havo d - l.
Oh ! wild as the accents of lover's farewell
• '.'1 ;. ·
Are the hearts which they hear, and tho tnlc1 wbica ~
'

.,~

.

'rho. !!incere is always esteemed.
There is many occasions in life, m which silence and eim·
plicity is true ~visclom.
The generous never recounts minutely the actions they haYe
<lone, nor the prudent, those they will do.
IIc nce<l not proceed in such haste.
The business that related to ecclesiastical meetings, matters,
and persons, were to be ordered accorcling to the king's direc. tion.
In him were happily blended true dignity, with softness of
manners.
The support of so many of his relations were a heavy tax
upon his indust!·y; but thou knows he paid it cheerfully.
\\That. avnils the best sentiments, if persons do not live suita•
. bly to them?

J.'AJ.SE SYNTAX,
Including rnore critical rules for corrccting 11ra;,.m4'it'1ii, .

Death is the wages of sin.' 1 The wages of sin is death.'
From these two examples, we derive the follow{ng

i

RULE

person.
F.xampl~1

II. -

\Vhen a verb comes between two nouns, either of which
~ may'be considered the nominative, it may agree with either
,' of them ; but some regard must be had to what is more nat. · urally it nomina(i ve.

to

'l'hou doe1i1 bate instruction.
1 \Yrites better than ho.
Do it rain?
Thou mny learn.
I knows but cnrr.s not.
'l'hc animals was cxl1ibite<l.
Evil communications corrupts
good mannr.rs.
They was in much trouble .
The boys is lazy un<l they rnuet
be punished.
Ile was Ftpe1tki11g to them but

(

Examples to be corrected.
The crown of virtue is peace
and honor.
' ' His meat were locusts and wild
'
honey.
· His chief occupation and en.
:1 A great cause of the low state of
joyment were controversy.
industry was the restraints
put upon it.
1
••
.Tames, thon and I arc attachecl to our country, and we wtll
I sh ed Ollr blood in its dcfoncc.'
' In this example it would manifestly be improper, besides it
; would pervert the sense, to substitn tc 'their,' or 'yuur ,'for 'our;'
. likewise, either 'they' or 'you' for ' we.' This arises from the
circumstance of the pronoun I being in the first person, and at
. the same time the nominative case.
· 'James and thou may divide it among you.' Here 1 you' i:;
·' used because one of the nominatives is 'thou.'
Front thcst remarks we derive the f olwwing
~ The wages of sin are death. .

RULE III.

' l·· d
I

:

When several nominatives, of different persons, are con·,(·nected by a copulative conjunction, the verb will agree in
person with the first rather than the 15econd, and with seconcll
rather than the third.

-

....................__~......................_............._.......lmll!

- - --- ~.-~--~~-~~

---

'

.!32

INTELLEOTUAL~N~

' •• I , , •

23Zl

l?ltACTIPAL.· GRAMMA:R.

'
:. r hmos or Jolin· comes'-ln. ariswedtig this qu ~ stion who comes? '
We find it to bo one .or the other, nodioth j1consequently the ' verb
may agree with either.
·
· ·· 1 • · . ., 1. •' ·r 1!· 1' ' • · •
'James or the girls are. out.'-1 .'l.'he girls or James are ol!t.' / I~
both these <-•xarnples, you see et once, th~t it.is better to sa.Y 1 are
than 1 is.'. Consequently, . when two nomm~t!ve~, .the. one. sm~1;1lar
ahd tlte other plural, · are connected by a dISJUllellvc conJunct10n,
the verb mui;t agree with the plural uominative. ,
··
'James or. I aro in f;rnlt.' ' I or James is in . fault.' The propriety of these expressions is obvious, but do .you notice that the
verb agrees in person with the one nearest to it?

Examples to be corrected.
·
·
,"
'
]
bl
l
"t'l
1"
T11ou· and the gardener ~iust · sharc t l? an~e among~ 1em.' ;: , . r
My sistor and I arc daily employed m ·their respective occupli·
·
' •·· 'L1 "~ 1 '~
·tions.

"', ·

I .!"

EXERCISES

FOR THE SLATE OR PAPER.

,•; .. ,

Q. 'Vill you write down six violations of Rule I? Six,. of
Rule II? Six, of Ruic III?
.
.
' '·. ·
Will you correct each ~xpres?1on winch yo.u have no:w ~~1t-·
ten down? 'Viii you wnte six sentences m ·the subJqrrct1ve
niode? !''our in the potential mode, ea cl1 in a different tense-?;
Six interroo-dtive sentences? Six, each containing a noun of measure, dista~ce , direction, &c.?
. .
·~
Will J'OU parse the sentences winch you lw'\·e no!V composed?
RULE IV.

, ;~2 1

od.I

',

l ; \\ ., 1 \•

r

1

I

I

I
I

-

RULE Y •.

When two nominatives are connected by a disjunctive conjuiiction, the verb may agree with either,· but,iftheyar~ of dif- .
ferent persons or numbers, the verb wiil agre·e with the plural
nominative, in number, and with the ~ne nearest to it, in per- •
','
son.
'l'I

· Two or more nouns or pronouns, in the singular· num.be~, L "{·
connected by a copulative conjunction, expressed or under:n ;
stood, must have v~rbs and pronouns agreeing with them t ~.~ < , .
,the plural number.

.• , , 4\

• t

From. these illustmtions we. derive the jollowing :

•· ,.,
' F

Examples to be corrected.
r '1
Does George and "\Villiam Industry and v.erseverance over..t · .
comes all ddliculties.
'rt rl(,...
writes?
Charles and William resides in l\foth and rust doth corrupt. •i·111.
Boston.
."\Vas John ancl \Villiam play• L .
William and Thomas is out.
ing?
:i J I
'Idleness and ignorance is dis- Thomas and Harry has been · ·f
graceful.
·
fighting.
·- .. 1 .;·~ •.
·Time and tide \vaits for nonwn. Is your brother and sister" at
home?
,,,· . ·
Mercy and judgmant is the
song.
Innocence and happiness d~~p~
together.
·
· 1· "·
I\ '"
Idleness and ignorance is the pnrent of many vices.
, '•l~tt '.'
Wisdom, virtue, liappiness, dwells with the golden mediocri\y. ; 1.1; ~1 .
In unity consists the welfare and security of~cvery society . ... ')'Ii '
His P?liteness and good disposition, was on failure of their ef.· .
feet, entirely ehang-cd.
ld::i l1 .·
Patience nnd diligence, like faith, removes mountains.
• Tt ~H
Humility and knowleda;11, with poor apparel, ex.::els pride and.!J ·.,
ignorance under costly attire.
. • ., .... , ·
The plane~ary system, bo.undless spac~, and the immense oceaQ, ,j'. · ·
affecti! the mmd wrth sens:"tl1ons of astornshment.
· .. •<l a.
Humility and love, whatever obscurities may . involve rcligiou1
tenets, constitutes the essence of true religion.
Religion and virtue, our best _support and highe8t ·J10nors~ tco6!
fers on th.e ~ind principles of noble independence.
·
· !">'Htn o , ,
.\-Vhat s1gmfies the counsel a_nd care of preceptors, when youth ' ~ '.
tlunk they Jia ve uo need of assistance ?
· ., n rn . .

'~i. •'

Examples t~
iame.s or Harry are industrious.
· !fory or lrnr mother are corping.
Neither James nor 'rhos . write. ·
·· James or Harry are absent.
Either his patience 01 his pu1 se
were exhausted.
'
~ Either thou · or I are greatly
mistaken.

be cor1'ectcd.
· ' ' '·
I or thou are tho porson, who

·..:·

.must undertake the business. ,
He or ( is m fault . .
Neith er lie nor I knew any 'th ing
about it.
Eith er the master
or l1is pupils
1
is in fault.

i
11
.i.

:r
I:

·. 1

of

... The cares
this life, or the deceitft1lness of riches, . has chok·
· ed the see?s of virtue in many a promising mind.
1
Remarks. ' The philosopher and poet was banished.' In this
· 15011tcnce the meaning is, that one man, who is both a philosopher
and poet1 was banished : consequently as there is but one agent,
the verb must of course be 'singular.
.
··
: . " Nor were the young fellows ~o wholly lost to a semrn of
1
right as pride and conceit has since made them . affect to be.
, Rambler No. !J7." That is, as pride has and conceit has. Here
1
'
the use of the singular verb must be justified on the principle of
consi<lering1t to be understood afler each nominative,and that which
, is expressed agreeing only with the last. Such violations of thw
above rule are. common among good writers.
EXERCISES FOR THE SLATE OR PAPER.•

Q.. Will you write down six examples, each having two nouns
connected by a copulative conjunction exemplifying Rule IV?
Six sentences each containing two nouns connected by a disjunc,. tive conjunction? Six, having two nominatives connected as in
tho Inst examples, but one of 'hem plural? Six, each having two
·

20*

.

I
!
11

11

,. I

i'

I,
I)11

!1 1

'I

I!
I
I

;

I
'

Ii

Ii

!34

\

'

.

nominotiT:es hut'°f different persons? Six, containing violntio•s ·of
Rulo IV? Six having violations of Rule V? Will you correct the
examples whid1 you have written under Rules IV nnrl V?
Will you .parse all the sentences which you have now written?
RULE VI.

A noun, singula1· in form, but plural in meaning, will h~'ie ·
verbs, nouns, and pronouns agreeing with it in the plural
number.
~: 1 n
E xamplr:s to be corrected.
. .,, ,
1·t. . •

NoTE.-ln some of the following exampl es, a singular noun will
require a verb sin gular as usual. This 1s design ed to taJI. the inge·
nuity of the learner.
The people rejoices in tlrn,t which should give it sorr.ow.
The flock, and not the fleece, are, or ought to be the objects 9f '
the shepherd's care.
· . ·.
The court 11ave just end ed, after having sat for long time. . ' · · ' ~
The crowd were so great, that the judges, with difficulty, n:1ade ,
their way throu gh them .
The corporation consist of a mayor, a\derman and comn,'lon
council.
·
The Ilritish parliament are composed of king, lords, and com•
mons.
··' ·
When the . nation complain, the rulers should listen to their
voi~e.
· 1•
In the .daye of youth, the multitude eagerly pursues pleasure aa •
its chief good.
The church have no power to inflict corporeal punishment. ''
The fleet ware seen sailing up the channel.
·T ho regiment consist nf a thousnnd men.
'.rhe meeting have established sev eral salutary regulations.
The council was not unanimous, and it separated.
The fleet is all arrived, and is moored in safety.
'fhe people clraweth near to me with their mouth, and honortlth~
me with their lips, but th eir heart is far from me.
·
.,
The committee was divided in .its sentiments, and it has referred
the business to a general meeting.
The committee were very foll, when this point was decided. ' ·
Why do this generation wish for greater evidence ?
· :I ii
The remnant of the people were persecuted.
.
' Never were any people so much infatuated as the Jewish
ti on.
The shoal of herrings wore of an immense extent.
No society nre chargeable with the conduct of their particu1ar ' .
m.emlter11 . .
.
'I

n

...

EXERCISES FOR THE SLATE OR PAPER.

Q. Will you compose six eentences, each contaioing violatiott*' ·

or Rule VI ? Will you correct

/

PR:ACTICAJ, . GU~l'1Un;

lNTl:LLECTUAL AND

the examples which you ha\',fl b0# 1
written ? Will you write six interrogative 1sentences in the 'po•'
,te,ntial mode ? Six each exemplifying the elegant ,and different ;

I

'uae'()f the relative c, that•, for ! who::'or f· which?' .T en -nouns, the
ninnes · of different curiosities in n mu1eum' ? '• Ten, · the names of
different farming utensils ? 'l'en_; the names of different · mechnn·
ici.1' tools? Ten, the names 'Of different kinds or species of fishes?
'.ren, the names of difierent persons in scripture ? Join different
adjectives of the superlative degree with eaoh of these scriptural
nnmes ? Write ten names of different womert 1in l!'Criptllre? 1Join
· an adjective in the positive degree with each of these names ?
'l'wo sentences, each centaining a passive verb ? · Six, each having a different neuter verb ? Two,. e::ich buying a :neuter passive
verb? 'fwo sentences, each contamrng nil · the ddferent parts o(
speech ? WilJ you parse the s•mtences which you have now
writfen ?
·
'1 ' , ~ I

j

RULE VII.

I

'

. I

;

. ·The infinitive . mode ma!:,foll?w. ~er?,s, . ~~~~~c!~~~i~~ :. ~,w~c~
bves, nouns and pronouns.
·
·
.; .. ·;'1 ... 1 ,, . :! ...iii ·
' The eagle was so higi1' as not to be seen.' By this ~ example.
we see that the Infinitive mode may follow the c_onjunction ·1 as.' '
1
.
He desirf.'.d no more than to know .his imperfect!ons.~ .¥~~~ ,.· ~o
know ) ' follows 1 than.' Hence
we derne tlLe following : •· " ,,Il \' .
.
RULE VIII . .

,

" The infi~itive mode ID:a( follow THA~ or
.

··'·" RULE IX.

'

As.

Ii

<1/ 1 •1 1

Verbs that . follow" bid,' dare, let) se~, need, '. make .:he~,
feel, and ~ome others, are ~n the ,infinitive mode .without · the
1

1

•

s1gn TO .

~

.

"·

.

'

· .

, ''·

;'i.

t• :

,·\

·,\ ..

~ ~', '~

,Jr ~ tt ;-, t~ l(· -

tfi l"h" I•

.

t

~~

Example8 -to be corrected,· ,! 1~ '" · ·: ~i l't"; ·"'
It is better to live on a little than outlive a great deal. '
You o~ght n,ot walk too l~astily.
. · :
1
I wieh him not wrestle with his happiness.
You· need not to solicit him.
I .
.
I dare not to procee<I so hastily.
' ..
.
I have seen some young persons to conduct' themselves ;ery dis: .
i "· . ·
. : s11~
creetly.
.
I saw it to move. He dares not to read . . I. let lum to go.w We
saw them to walk~ I f'eel it to move. I heard ~i~ to sp~a~ ; ! •
' I found him better than I expecte4 to find lum.•. 1;l~1s 111. ~ f Pifestly better than to say 1 expected to have fo.u~d . him. ,
,. . . ,
' It is long since ' I commanded him to do it. " To have do11e
· · it,' would be' nlika inconeistent with good sense, 'anti good g~nm·
mar. Expected, corhmanded, &c. are verbs expres~ive of, J~p,e,
' command, &c. H~'nu.. we derive tkef'!lloioi~ ·
· :. ·._,,!:I. '
. tii~t ~

', . , .

." ~

'.

RULE rX~
.

·-.11 '" · . #; •. ~·· ·, ; :"'f .-,~~1 · · ·
.

:

' I

, .

.

Verbs expressive of hope, desire, intention, or command,
are invariably followed by the. present of the infinitive.

I

1

·--:-::-----

·~M ·

?N''rtU.EC'i'tr ~L

NoTi:. Other verb~ will of course depend on their difi'etetlce ·in'
times, thus, wheu rm i11fi11itiYe is used to exprc~s time that passed .
prior to tlrnt of the verb before it, tho perfect tense is to bo ueed ; · id
other cu~cs, the present.
"'' .

I :.

B :wmplcs to be corrected.
'Vhcn you went, I expected to huve written.
'Vhen I passed your houso, I int.ended to have called.
,
I always intendl.ld to lrnvc rcwnrderl him according to his merit:·
We have done no rt1orc thnn it '"as our duty to hnve done.
Ci
From the little com·ersiltion I Jrn<l with liim, he appeared to
have been a man of Jcttcr1:1.
,;

EXERCISES FOR THE SLATE OR PAPER.

Q. Will you write six sr,ntenccs, in which th'l infinitive mode
follo\v1i1 verbs? Six, in which the infinit.irn follows participles?
:Six, in some of which the i11finit1Yc shall follow ndjectfrcs, and
in some ehall follow pro nouns? Six riolat.ions of Rule IX? Six, of .
:Rule X? V\'ill you correct th e la st t\/',· eh·e examples which you ,.
]1ave written? \Viii yo11 write three proper examples under Rule ·
-VIII? Will you parse the seutcnccs wJiich you have uow com·
posed?
!lULE XI.

The infinitive mode or parfof a sentence, and oftentitnell a .'.;··~
whole sentence, may be used as a nomin:itirn case, and may .:
have an adjective belonging to it.
1

I

,II

-·-- --------

P~CTICAL . GRAMMAl\.
!I;;t, .P'I f •\'IJ f,1·tv-;,;r

ANV
.~

•.

.-.

RULE XII.

The infinitive mode 'vhen used as the nominative ~ase, re~ /
quires the verb to be oi the third person singular. ·
. , I.

RULE XIII.

The infinitive mode is often made nbsolute, that is, used fn
independently of the rest of the sentence.
Ewm.plcs to be corrected.

To see the sun arc pleasant.
That he l1:!d nlwnyi; acted hon•
To pr!J.Ctice virtue are praise·
estly was a great consolation. , ,
worthy.
To do unto all men, as \Ve would that they, in similar circum··
atance1i1 should do unto us, constitute the great principle of virtue.'
From a fear of the world's censure, to be ashamed of the practice of precepts, which the heart approves and embraces, mark a
feeble and imperfect character.
Th~ erron~ous ?Pinious which we form concerning happinesa ..\
llnd ffiltilery' gives rise to all the mistaken nnd danrrerous rassione •r
that embroils our life.
b

f23'(
. f;~~~

·.To

live sober! y, 1tigflteously ; 'and ·piously,· are 1 required .. of· llll
·men. -. · -'t, 11• ... ;;- ·~ 'r.i;·:;.. ~·'1 "h "'i111'i1~\~'ff.i- !fi-w'-~•~·1•• \• 1 , ; . "1 • ., ...,,,,!~ '·
i. That it is; our cluty.to •·promote th~: 1})urity<'Of ;on h·minds _
a nd ii bo- ·
dies, to be JUst ·nnd lund to 1 our • fellow· creattfres,· and .. to · be , pious
nn<;I faithful to H_im that ma.de ua, ndmi~ · not 1 of; ~nyq doubt . iw 1 a ;
rat10nal and well rnformed mmd.- ·
· · · '(· ' · ., ·· ·
·. ·
.

'l '

.

.

~·

'

' , · \~ '

f'..•\ \ •: t\·

13.',~t' ,•

'"' ' ~

•,

EXERCISES . FOR THE SLATE 01\ ''.PAPER. " .'

. Q : Will you write

,r ·... H:i!.

'

'

d~~·~ · ~i~~,p~~pei; :·~~~~~iJ~:~~d~r'\l~I~~ij?

fax, _,under Rule XIII? -Six,• und~r 'llul e. XI ?,-S1x;;,eaQh ..hav1~g~ a
passive verb in a different ·mode . or ·tense? ·' Vil] .you write ,,the
sa~1e ~eaning by giving·. the verbs . an active ·1form? .Wi!l you
wnte six sc11tences, ·having the verb' to be,' .Jn ' a ,different .mode
o.r tense in each? Write sentences enough to ·contain all ·the -varia- t10ns_ of the verb ·-' ·tiJ ;'be,'« in every mode l and ··$ense? ;
.. ,
.,_Will you pa,rse .; '.Wh~t ,.you have .niny. ,, writt~n?0 r 11 ,,., llJ'll ;,,f -, ·
.:.-11 ·: i

1. r 1 • . ·~~ ··,,.t,~i/'r

"'=, 1:.1. ·

·(~ .. 1 · i1t,.rf,

' It is of the i nature : ~f'both. the\' 'a~ticles ' to' cl~termine ' 'or 'tirriit
the thing 'spoken of. ··.fl 'determines it to .be one 'sin'gle .. th'irig .of.
the kind, leaving it still uncertain which :' the P,eterniiiles' wliith ·
it .is or of many whieh they 'are. ' .
,, I .. ; ' ·. fl• .J'Jf'i '(< f-""
Tiw following 'passage will serve as an exa~pfo of',~hk 'di~J.r~~l'.
uses of a and th.c, and of the force of the su,bstantive wifholit ,
nny article. 'Man wns made for society, and ought to exter~d - liis
go?g "."ill · t~ all n;ien : ,but {1t .~!fa~ , ~ill naturally, en.tertµ.~t\ a rp_ore
particular kmdncss fot tlie
'\\'1th whom he has the most frequent intercourse ; and · enter into a still Closer union ' with th~ -· ·
man whose temper and disposition suit best .with 'his ow.p .'. 1 ·, , , ,,. As the articles are sometimes ·misapplied, it may':be of some
use -to exhibit.a few instances : ~ 1 ' An.d I,1persec1;1!ed this _way. unto
the death.'. The apostle ~does ·not mean any particular sort . of
<lea.th, but death . in gen'e ral ':dthe:, ·a efinite : ahicI0 1 'tb'ererdH} ..·s
improperly used : it ought ·, to be ·:" ml.to deuth,'l i ''Yithout?any r•
article.
·
.
. ·
"When he, the Spirit of Truth, ·js come, ·h_e will guide· yhu into ·
nll truth;" that is, according to this trans.lntion, " · into; alli truth
whatsoever, into truth of nil kinds;" very different from tho
meaning of the evangelist, and from ·the orio-in ~I, '" i11to'lull' 't /w '<
truth;" that is,'; "into all evangelica\ truth,.all, tr1,1th necessary for
you to .know."
·
' Who breaks a butterfly upon a wheel ?' ii l'ough'f'to ' b'e ti~ihli ""
wheel,' used as an instrument for the particular puriJOse of° tortur- ,
in~ criminal~.. ' 1;'h.e Almig!it-'~--'--:h given reason, t? a man to be
a light unto ]nm : it shoulu -rather be, ' to man, rn ·general.- .
' This day is salvation come to this house, fornsmu ch as he also
is the son of Abraham ·:' it ought to be,' 11, son of Abraham.' · ' ~
'l'hese remarks may serve to. show the great importance of, the
proper use of the article, and the excellence of the English· language in this respect ; which, by means of its two . articles, does
most precisely determine the extent of signification of. cominoll'

'men,

l1U01CS.

1

t

•

.•

I

,i t i '' !, ~ · ·1 :r"

NoTE. A nice distinction of the sense is sometimes made by the

;~

.;

- - ------- ...
'

2'38

--

-

use or omission of the article a. If I say, 'He behaves with a little
reverence,' my meaning is positive. lf I say, ' He behaved •With
little reverence,' mv m eaning is ncgntive . And these two ar~ by
no means the same;or to be used in the same cases. By the' for·
mer, I rather .!?raise a person; by the latter, i dispraise him. For
the sake of this distinction, which is a very useful one, we may
better bear the S()emi11g impropriety. of the article a before nouns.
of number. When I say, 'There were few men witl1 him;' I
speak diminutively, and mean
represent them as inc~msid.ern·,
ble: whereas, wh en I say; ''I h ere were a few men with !um;
I evid~mtly intend to mak e the most of them . .
;., ,; ,
In genernl, it may be sufficient to prefix the article to the former, of two words in the same construction ; though the l''rench '
never fail to repeat it in this case.
·· · ' ·
. 'There were many hours, both of the night and da,Y, which he
conlrl spend, without suspicion, in solitary thought. It might
have been ' of the night and of the day.' And, for the sake of
emphasis , we often repeat the articl e in a seri es of epithets. 'He . '
hoped that this title would secure him an ample and an indepen- /
dent authority.'
·.
ln common conversation, and in familiar style, we frequently ·
emit the articles, which might be inserted with propriety in writing, . ;'
es{>ecially in a grave l'ltyle. ' At worst, time might be gained hy
tins expedient.' ' At the worst,' would have been better in this
place. ' Give me h ere John Baptist's head.' There would hHI! .
been more dignity in saying,' John the Baptist's head:' or, ' .'J;'.hq
head of John the Buptist.'
·
.i
. I ~l U
From these remarks we derive the following: .

!·o

i)

RULE XIV.
I

I

~\.

!{ '

' •

,,.'l '
The articles are often properly omitted; when used, their
. .
meaning should be carefully regarded.
I ti J
.1 ; ' Yi i rl
;

The indefinite artide
~ingular number only.

A

or

AN,

I

') I

• .,1d J
. ' !

THE,

.
:- •

belongs to a noun in thei ;· .

RULE XVI.

The definite article
or plural number.

!

·1
l.j

PRACTtcAL Gll.AMMAR.

INTELLECTUAL AND

RULE XV.

---

a

>

I: .

l - ·~ ..

lF>IA "·•,

belongs to nouns of the sin. o't
....... tat ; .'
· :·

Examples to be corrected.
The fire, the air, the earth and the water, are four
the philosophers.
R en son was given to a man to control his passions.
A man is the nohl est work of tho creation.
W ii;:est and best men sometimes commit errors.
·He is a much bette r writer than a reade r.
The king has conferred on him the title of~ duke.
, ··:il:Wl' ,
There are some evils oflifo vvhich eriually affect prince and peo• ·
pl~
.
. .

·(

;:, '."i \Ve are placed here ' under(atrial of••our,·irtue. · ' ' · ··• '·,,w
'

· : 'l' he virtues like his are not easily· auquired. ,. '
,
'· ,. ·
, The profligate man is seldom or never fou11d to be the good bus·
band, the good. father, or-the beneficent' neighbour.
·
True charity is not the meteor, which occasionally glares; but
the luminary, which dispenses bemgnant influa,nc.o. . '
So bold a ureat'!h of order called for little severity.
As his misfortunes were · the fruit · of his ·own obstinacy, a few
persons pitied him.
·
·
. ·
There were so many circ;umstancos, attending his conduct; par·
ticularly his open confession, that he found few friends. · '
'
The fear of shame, and desire of approbation, prevent many bad
actions.
.
'
' ;.
In this 'busincss, he was influenced by a just and. generous princi1
ple .' ·
.
·
'·
" ii
·
· , 111 ···: ·u• ." 1··; ·
. ·At worst, I could but incur a gentle reprimand. ) 1,, . l·""T'· fi11 .• ·
' At best, his gift was but a poor offe ring. " ': · ·• · '1 ·1 ' 1! , ·. ' ', :. ~-.
.' t

I

, n

\..

RULE XVII. • .

Adjectives belong to

·.;I

. ,

,

i1o~ns.

·-. •

1

,

i

I

l

',

:

.... 1111 1
~

1

, ·,

•

l•

RULE XVIII.

•• t 1r1 ;J

to

·1. 1

• ..
1

The adjective pronouns, THIS and THAT, belong
noung
of the singular number; THESE and THOSE, and . all others,
implying more than one, belong to nouns
of the
plural. num11
'
,
ber .
,,, . . . ·
.
'
'" " ~.
·
Examplet to be . corrected.
•

•

•

l'

'J

I

i

1.

/.1-1

,1

I

· He will not come tlus two hours.
. ··
, ·~
.
·' · ..
I have loved her ~his four' y E!ars l':h 1l · lir),'.· ,·,.(.· ~:": >!; n 1i:'1
Ilike this hou ses. I do not like that \ l10rseii. !·'.I h'ave krlown
· him this six years. I do ,not like those kind of trifles. I never
read those sort of books. Listen to no dictates but that of truth.
I bought this scissors, nnd that tongw, and tfmtsnuffers .' · Where i1
those horse ? Who owns those book. I want another . knive1.
;. I do not like these kine\ o~ indulgences. · Th ey di~liked those
'.· 1ort of favors. If there I sliould be ' other opportumty. I mu1t ·
' have another hooks before I can .learn; 1-.·1· . i •• , . . ·.",; · r, ,., . .
')
Each kinds of goods' will be sold. ' You have been playing this
two hours . He found two horses, and he stole · them: 'all.""You '
have three knives, and I want th em both. The chasm waR tw~n­
ty. foot bro~d. .1 have . two canes, and rou may have any of them.
The mean is smted to. the end. By tlus mean he became poor.lndblstry is the mean of obtaining competency. . . " .
. :. ·: . ..

'

.

. I

/; : . RULE , XIX, .. ·

I

T::< .

.

.

\

, ,. . I

,

.. ,.

·-"'!! "

The personal pronoun .TH.E M, should not be used ins~eafof
TH:i·SE

or

THOSE,

.

. • ''

'

~-~:': ··~:,·~·.· '.~:;~"

'

-~

3

•
PRACTipAL GRAMMAR.

, .INTELLE CTUAL' AND

.•· · ~.:g •:.

Examples to · be corrected.

•

.

•

...·1 .:.1~ RULE

"' 1 I •1/•t4'1;-•1 , ~
1 · :." t' ' ·..

"

• Bnng me tl1c m scissors.
I cannot -give any credit to th em r,torii:s .
«;iltrh'l o · ,.
I want them li uuks. Do y ou kn ow tli cm y oung ladies? Who ·
owns them hu rsf'H ? Obscn c t li e!n l h rf'e perso ns. '\Vhat ~· the ,
}Jrice of them h andkerchi ef's? Them arc one dol~ar. l .w1s4:.toJ
s.~ e ,t hem kni vli s. \V h cre is them boys·?
l ,,., ,,ir.1. ·
. ! \

' J{U J,:r.:

x::.

.

ft ...

.

·1

i1.r. ,•.

Double comparatives and sup2rlath·es should be avoided;) , :
Examples ta be corr ect ed .
He is the most happiest ma~ . Tho thi ng woul~ appear'.·~ ~re , , '
fairer. She is th o wo re nrctticr of th o two. H o 1s moro ·w1se1H
.
than they. H o 1:-:
t!1 n 1m::s1t crnol cst m a n · ~ ov er saw . c·1cero 'Y.11 iJ...o; I ·
0~10 of the most e loquent(•r,t :n e 11 that ever I~ ved. ' V c arc more hap.;.t
pier than they. One st;.ll' ;ip pcars m ore lmghter than another. "lt ·:
'·r;r \
was the most b ct;t ::u:tiu 11 i ever heard o[
I
): I
."
R U L E X X I.

EXERCISES FOR THE SLATE _OR PAPER,

Q. Will you write six sentences being proper examples under
Rule XVII ? Six, under Rule XVIII ? Six under Huie XIX ?
S ix,. under Rule XX ? Six, under Rule XXI r Six, under Rule
XXII ? Six, under Rule XXIII ? Two sentences, each having
a neuter verb ? Two, each having a defective verb ? Two each

hnvi~fi" a neuter passive verb r
'
W1 you parse the sentences which you have written?
RULE XXIV.

Adjectives that have in themselves a superlative significa1 ('.
,,. .
tion do not admit the forms of comparison.
. - > -- i,'1
'
- : h , ,l.G: .

Adverbs qualify . verbs, P,articiples, adjectives, and other
adverbs.

E :wmples to be corrected .
:.. »
Virtue confers the most supreme dignity on man ; and_s4ouJd. i
he his chiefest desire. Afte r the most straightest sect of our religion; I lived a P ha risee. His work is pe rfect; his brother's mote " 1
perfect; and hi s fath er's the ~no st porfoc t of all. The mo~t per· ,
feet man does n ot always . nght, although he may act righter ·
than others. Th e French langu ag e is more universally. spoken .
than the English. That is become the most universal.
. , . 1.• h

RULE XXV.

~dverbs

should generally be placed before adjectives, after
verbs active or neuter, and frequently between the auxiliary
and the verb .
RULE XXVI.

An adjective should not be used for an adverb, nor an ad' 'erb for an adjective.

RULE XXII.
.

Examples to be corrected.

I ~ '\.

1 • 1 • :".

r. fl,

Thomas is the best scholar of In pertorming subtrnction, .. tho r; l
least number must be place411 I{ .
the two.
uuder the greatest.
· · · ··.· 1q
Stephen is the best linguist of
William and Thomas ran a race,r
the two .
but which ran .the fastest of1--:, ,
Of the housel'l which were sol<l,
the two?
'T
which was th e best?
\Villiam, and Mary, and Tho· · Which has the greatest number
ofinhabitants, France or Epg..
mas, are three good scholars,
but which is the beUcr?
land ?
1 i / .-~ "
'

'

~·' 'J '

Examples to be corrected. I am the' boy what you wanted. Thomas ktlew not but ~vhat he
Jomes learns no lesson what is
might stay from "school when
given him .
he pl eased.
Stephen coyld not he · persua- He knew not but what his faded but w.iiat he must leave.
ther was in the house.

•\ { q ;t ~ .

When a comparison is made between two things only., the.~ , 1 ~
comparative degree should be used, but when between two or; P.i
"
Jt
more things, the superlative should be used. ·
'. l· "I·
'

XXPI • '-.

The pronoun, WHAT, should neyer be'. used instead of <the
refatives, WHO, WHIC.lt) or THAT, or the· conjunction 'that.'.

'Exceedingly lovely.'

Thii does not sound so well as ' exIlcnco, wit.en ~he adjective to which the adverb
1s JOmed ends m LY tho termmat1011 of tho adverb wlien Eiimilar
i11 dropped, a1t ' excee<lin" ,' for' exceedingly.'
· . ._1:,
'
~
~·
~c~cl_ing lovoly;'

' •

'

Examples to be corrected.
· He is an exceeding honest man. They are extreme unwilling.
It .was exceeding w ell written. It is : cu'rrent reported, The
house is bad constru.cted. He w as extr~me careful. It was_very
proper spoken. It is excellent well wntten.
1 hope for a soon and fortunate escape. His health is indifferently. His conduct was Itot agreeably to his friends.
The soonest way is not always the best way.
EXERCISES • FOR THE SLATE OR PAPER.

Q. Will you write six proper example& under Rule XXIV

21

".

'

1_:_:·

.I

----

~=----:~~-~----

242
with a certain aritecedent~that,agN6lnent must; r be preserved
throughout the senteti.ee~ {. '. ' 1 " ' ~\eJ>\.1tiJ'Wq 1 V:il ~>l} ,l) . r: 1\ IH.\; I; l! O• ,
"t '
\I
""'t1 ...
' ij
.. '
·,
~I
' The woman who came here last .week,l:andi. who '. ,Jias 'batm '

Six under Rule XXV ? Six, ·each having a prcp0!1ition ?= Si"xi: .
eacii having an active patticiple ?
• • . !rii1I ~
Will you pilrse what you ha,·c now composed?
''( ,
RULE

XXVH.

.

0

•

'

•

•

following

sentence.

xxxr.

..., "" ..·•

. _, ..
. ,, .Wl,ien several relatjves , ,r ef~r , t~ ~~~·~>~~ -~J~c~~~P.~f·. ~ey
must.not be changed.
:
'
. . , ; -. ..

RULE

.

Examples to be corrected.
,_
I citnnot, by no means, allow it. Ile will not, by no means,
consent.
·
·
" ~f·"«
There cannot be nothing more insignificant than vanity.
.
Nothinir never affected her so much as ·her child's miseonduct,r
JJe hon~st, nor take no E'irnpe nor semblance of d~sguise . .
Do iiot interrupt me yourselves, nor let no one d1s~ur~ me.
We need not, nor <lo not, confine them to narrow lnmts.
I will not write at present , nor at no other time.
Neither rich es nor honors, nor no such perishing goo<ls 1 cnn
&atisfy the desires of an immortal spirit.

.

. .

''•

,', . RULE XXXII. · 1f · · • ·

1\

• · 1 It ·

.,.

The relative TtI~T,, should b.e 1:1-sed in~te~d of w~o ' or 'YII.I.qt,
1. To avoid a repetition of 'who' · or' which,' when th~y
refer to <jiffererit antecedents. · ·
2. When both · persons and tbj.n~s !ll"~ . ~p~e~~µ.~~t~. ,. ; .'
3. After the adjective 's_ame.'
· ·· ·
··
4. After-the superlative degree.
,; T
-' 6. After the relative ' who.' ·
.; ·';''
. -6.' When little children ~re the su,bjects of discourse,· ~e. ca1J.
use 'which' or' that.'
i
"1
7. When the name of a pers,011 i~ _h~.~~ ~~~'y ~; ~ ~wie,
and does not refer to the p~~~on.
. .1 . ·
• .
· ·

EXERCISES FOR THE SLATE OR PAPER.

Q. 'Vill yon cOJ,n,pose tln-.ee sc!1tences in which there sh~ll. be
two negatives ? I hrce affirmative scntence,s,. eac'h contamrng
two nerrativcs ? 'three sentences, each contammg but one negative ? ""Viii yon write mix propfl r examples ~md e r Rnlc I ? Six,
under Ruic II ? Six, under Rule lll ? Six, under Rule lV ?
"\Viii you parse wh_nt you have now written?

• 'You ~1a~e been quite sic~ and I knew .nothing of it.' ' · .', ·
Here it IS apparent that 'if ~refer$ to the fact
bilil '· beini$. flick; .
tonscqurntly we liave tlie following . . · \.. ! " - . ·' ·• .-. ·. :• :;

RULE XXVIII.

of'

Pronouns must agree 'vith their antecedents, or the nou.p1
for ,iv}1icl1 tl1ey stand, in gender, number, and person.
~·
' I am the man who commands you,' or ' I am the man who
rommand you.' By thes~ exampl~s we. see that the relative,
c who 'may ngrec with ' I or ' man for its antecedent. licnce
we d11~ive the following
· ,~
·· 1.. ,
RULE XXIX.
f .

H

lick, went .away this-morning.'
· · -.,
.
. .
,If we should say .'the woman that cam~,' &c. and 1 who hns
been_eick,' or 'The woman ~ho came,' and I that has been sick ;
it 'wou~d be obviously contrary to good us~ge1 'titnct 'iDt·di'ti'til-11:~

'.~· -·r e

Two negatives destroy one anotl~er, or are e.quivo.l~nt to Rllj :
3.ffirmative, therefore, bu} one shoul<l be use<l in a neiatiye,

•'

1
·•

.

RUJ,E XXXIII • .

.,

·~.

'

The neuter pr?noun, IT, frequently refers to a 'v.hole seilw
tence, or something understood.
,. "·
'Each man

love~

hi1

~wn:' . 'N~i_ther of the , apples

was ripe.'

When the relative is preceded by two nominatives, of dif+~ . ,,'
ferent persons, it may agree with either according to thel ."

··.;!.- 1!1 these examples, you perceive that.' ea~h, a~~' neither/ re.quir:~

sense.
'I am tho Lord that make all things, that stretch forth ';the .· .'

... The adjective pronouns EACH, EVERY, :EITHER NEI'l'Hl:R
must have verbs an~ adjectives ~greeing ~:itl\ ,the.pi .i~ the
,'./ ,
singular number. ,

heavens above,' or, 'I am the Lord that maketh all things, thn-\'I ·
1tretcheth forth the heavens above.'
, · . .. 1'
By theso exampl es we learn that if we make the relative ngreo'
with one antecedent, in person, it must continue to agree with
the same ; lience we derive the following
•" '
. . ['I
RULE XXX.

'•l\)

When it has been determined that the relath·e shall agree

.'· 11m~ular T~rbs, nouns, &c.
" tlte 'following
,

Hence for ; s,~c/& pro.1.W·~~ - ~~ ~v1.
· r. 1 .t 1 • ,,l lil ,, , ,. : . !i'f~;·

RULE XX.XIV.
'

.
,j

'

. '

•

p

,

'

1
' Ev_ery h~~dr~d years const.itutes a. cen.tury.'
:1fe~e, ~h,!3 \I~~~"
. constitµtes, is sm~ul~r, notw.~thstandmg its nol'\lmabve .~y.~_ll,t.llt
Iii plural, because It 10cludes the idea of one w.Mle~ ~~·.;.

1

qutntly we have this '

,

·

~ --

·· · · ' · :" ·

'

,

.

'

·-

. . .

--- --244

Pi\ACTlc.A i

INTELLEC'I'.UAL _AND

.

RULE XXXV .

·
I

..

·"

,._

i

The pronoun, EVERY, may agree with a plural noun,j;..,\IMm.tr'
a collective idea, in which case the noun mny take a verb' ...
gular.
.
• ,,. t
.

RULE XXXVI.

.

. . 11·' · w
..
, , ,,~J

1

In speaking of persons or things, THIS and THl:ai:•·ref,t
to the latter or last mentioned; THAT and THOS~ t.ci" ~~ <~ ~··
1
mer or first mentioned.
.
, " 1~ ~ ·
. '~n which side soever~ turn my each eyes.' '011 whlCJ~ . ~
111~e, o/c. In th ese ex_press1ons, you can at once-discover ' &'· ~I. .
of ease and el egance m th e latte r, which the former posee11sci. ln -

the on~ ~ase , tha compound wor?' which soeve_r' is 1hvi<led ; ' itt th• :._
other it is not. Hence we d,crivc the follow in rr
" ;;~-YU ·
•

0

RULE XXXVII.
WHICH.SOEVER, WHOSOEVER, WHATSOEVEJ:l

are sometimes elegantly divided.

· " '.

·lt

•II !' 1 l

• .

anJ tllo
Hltt
0

'· · "· ., •••,-;t:
,1 " .'

'

Examples to be corrected.
iu' ·
1
. They which seek wiadorn will certninly find him. l\ly ~k'ttll ''
1~to the fire, nnd ~h. o was burnt. I saw but ono bird and' I f1~fh t ·
Jum. ~hat ho11.sn 1s yours, nnd Jie is well built. I have Iott · iy ·
cane, will you frnd l11m for me Herc she iR. This pen 'i1 nd.
she must be mend ct~ . 'l~hat is a bcnutiful woman, ho Jiu fin~ ·
bl~ck eyes. T~ke tins IHl,lfc, and give her lo thy brother. . r
The man whi ch exalts l1imself, will ccrtuiuly Lo nba11ed.~ U
I do _not thmk !liat any one should incur censure for being te dill '
of their rcp11tat1011. Lot cn c h C81.CJr.m otlierH bettor ll10Q lb •
11el vesi. Every 0110 o ught to havo their freedom.
·
Each of them, in th eir turn, receirn the benefit• to which '.1 tlW7
are entitled. Every men and ev ery woman wero numbered.' ;r- ;
Every person, whate ver bo their 111latio11 aro bound by 1bo ddt~
ofm~rnlity l~nd rdigion .
'
. ... ri.t:--• ,
. Neither of thm;c wo111en socm to have nny idea tliat their
ions may be ill-foun<lcll.
· ' ~n
. I do not think that either of those boys kno\Y themtelYW'
m danger.
· .Y-•'•tt
Thy memory is good, but yon do not exercise it . ., .. ,f,
Dost not thou perceive that all will ho yoursl
~" '
Your fath er k11ows thy porver~enrss.
' ·
~·
We are dependent on each others' assistonco. Wbo1n' it'tlim •'
that can subsist by hirrn;clf?
.
·• r ll}~·-, ·
I havo bought two hut!I, will you hnvo nny ofthom? Yet1 I
have the~1 nil. llr.ro nro three c ;mc11, and you mny hay~~ , · .
both.
of them aro good., Neither of thorn arc
people were m that places. Every c:ino of them look., Wf a.
themselves. Eacu of them ~ro carolUl for 1!othi11g, hut tbcm,ee -.
Who do you sec? Who did you come with? Ho is the ma
Jio
I saw yesterday. The lady who you went to line, ii!I in the
•

E1the~

b11d:1•~ '

-

.GRAMMAR.

try. This is the man who ~·~ u hat~' fed nnd clothelll, an~ to whi~h
i you hnve lent so much moriey: 'i • H~ who you hate 1.so bitterly;; is,
your friend. . Who did you ~ea~ preach~ Who do yoti speak to ~
Who is she married to? Does that boy know who ~e sp_eaks to?
Who <lid he wnit on to the assembly? Who do you hve with? 1 ·
Whosoever you please to send, I will receiye.
.
,
r Consider what thou art about to do, before you begin your work; ·
)~st thou labor in vain, and the fruit of your endeavors turn to
no end. Weigh th:)' strength and thy design, lest you ·fai!1t
under your burden, -and foll short of the recompense of_ your toil.
. Commend not thyself with thy lips; but let your own act10ns speak
'iii y·our behalf.
.
·· He instructed and fod the crowds who surrounded him.
Sidney was one of the wisest and most active governors, which
Ireland had e njoyed for several years.
.
He \Vas the ablest minister which James ever possessed.
The court, who gives currency to manners, ought to be exempla1y.
.
I am happy in the friond which I have Ion~ proved.
·
The ehild whom we have just seen, is wholesomely fed, and not
injured by bandages or dothmg.
·
He is like a beast of prey, who destroys without pity.
Having once disgusted him, he could never regain the favour of
Nero, who was i11deed another name for cruelty.
Flattery, whose nature is to deceive and betray, should be
avoid ed as the poisonous adder.
Who of those me n came to his assistance?
\Ve are dependent on each other's assistance: whom is there
that can subsi st by himself?
lt he will not hear bis friend, whom ' shall be sent to admonish
him?
They, who much is given to; will have much to answer for.
It is n ot to be expected that they, whom in early life, have been
dark and decaitful, should afterwards become fair and ingenuous.
'fhcy who have labored to make us wise and good, are the
persons who wo ought to love and respect, nnd who we ought t•
be grateful to.
The persons, who conscience and virtue support, may smile at
tlu1 ea prices of fortune.
From the character of those who you associate with, your own
will b e estimated.
.
That is tl1e student who I gave the book to, and whom, I am
persuaded, deserves it. ·
.
.
Of whom were the articles bought? Of a mercer ; he who re·
sides near the mansion house.
·
. Was any person besides the mercer present 1 Ycs, both him and
his clerk.
'VJ10 was tho money paid to ? To the mercer and his clerk.
Who co1111ted it? B oth the clerk and him .
· · ··
I acknowledge that I am the teacher, who adopt thl\t scntime11,t,
and maintains the propriety of such measures.

21•

--

. . . --.................--......--..

-- ~- --._..,._,._

........

lN"r~tL~CTU AL ' AKU'

~~o~· ~rt a frie1;d

that has often relieved me, and that h'as not
desert~d ·me D?W m the time of peculiar need.
·
• ·;: ·
. I am the ~an who npproves of wholesome distlp1ine, l\nd wh"
recommend !t to others; but I nm not a person who promotes ;
uselesl'! s~venty, or who object to mild und generous treatment.
I perceive !hat thou art a p~pil, who possesses bright parts, but
who .has cultivated them but little.
> · •
·..
':!'"hou art he who breathest on the earth ~lth the' · breath .
epnng, and who covereth it with verdure and beauty~ . · ·, .
I am the Lord thy God, who teacheth th~e to profit and who
le11d thee by the way thou ehouldst go.
·
' 1
• •
Thou art the Lord who did choose Abraham, and brou11htest
him forth out of Ur of tlw Chaldees.
•
·

6r

11C1

EXEltCISES FO.rt THE SLATl'l OR PAPER.

Q. Will you write four prnper examples under Rule X.Xli ?
Four, under Rule XXX? Four, under Rule XXXI? Four, un:
der Rule XXXII? Four, under Rule XXXlll? · Four, under
Rule XXXIV? Four, under Rule XXXV? Four, under Rule
XXXVI ? Four, under Rule XXXVll ? Four, under Rule V?
Four, under Rule VI? Four, uniter Rule Vil ? Four under
Rule IX? 'Yill yon write a sentence cont.aining the nine parts of
1peech? Will you parse the sentences wluch you have now writ-.
ten?
NoTE. 1 Jo!!eph dreamed a dream.' To dream you kno~ is
generally considered a. neut er verb, but what did Joseph dream?
Ans. A dream. In tl11s case, then, you see that ' dream' is really
active. The rule generally adopted by grammarians in such casee
is," Neuter verbs govern nouns of a signification similar to their
own." But if the pupil is taught as he should be , he will make ihe
sense his .only guide in determining to what class each word be-'
longs. Consequently, when a verb has an active meanina he will
pronounce it active, and the reverse. A distinction like tl1'at made
above, concerning verbs, will therefore be wholly unnecessary. . ,
RUJ,E XXXVJll.

The objective case is governed by active verbs.

' I have got a book.' ' I have got to go.' Thel!e expressi~~.
· are evidently improper. They !!hould read thus : c I have It
book.' ' I must go,' or ' I am obliged to go.' The incorrectness
as you have doubtless observed, consists in adding' got' to 'have I _
and in using' have got,' for' must' or' am obliged.' Henee "Wed~rive the following :

.
11.ULE XXXIX.

The word

GOT

•

~------------lmllll

r:.;
.

should not be added to ' HA VE,' ( meailipg
HAVE instead of 'MUST,' or .~· AM

to possess,) nor used with

;

: . ,·

.~

.

·.

r'i '~ • • t

.

h'!fi f\vr"

~;.~~~~~~~~~::~~-

,
...' ,'
Any verb may have the same case after it as before itI· *h~~
.

RUL~

XL.

.
both nouns mean or refer to the same person or thini.

·-~:·~~-~

1
.Ac
live verbs of Wiki°ng
' ~,{~~~l~~g·~, fiWr\.·ra'bit'"e!o~~~{'rl,':~Je:
roi~b
,
- · - . , · .. .., · \~rrir..n.r .,,1
~1
!Jm r- ~ .•
11

i·f'of1

lowed by two objective ~ases." ·." t •1 t1f ; '~:i<i l .lfl
t

·'

•

•

,

~ .: ;_

· ,

IH 11.'l fli

re

"' ·"'···:.-. L1 ·

f-d v.,, J( d · ···,1;';.:fh:-i- 1 ·:t.1 \. 1 Ct.~ , '1!;

....

1

,:

Examplu to be corrected,.~
'
·
,1·
. . They who opulence has, made proµd, and who luxury has I C~r-:·~

~rupted; cannot r~l~sh' t~e simpl~ ples,!lures ~f nature. . : ' . ;. . .. i:t',I'
• You hnve reason to dread his ·wrath, which one· day'w1lh dea,t'r-01 ~
ye both. ·
- •
,. .,, ,., .. ' '" " ·: d• '«°" ,,.!.! i 1 · ·n~· I ·
'
Who have I reason to love so much a!I this .frienq of my youth,?.i
Ye, who were dead, hath he quickened. ·
·(
·
· ;'.
Who did they entertain so freely? · · · · ';" <'VI\ 1 ·1~" ,; .. :; ' ·
'rhc man who he raised from obscurity, is dead.\~
Ye only have I known of.ill the families of the earth. r ., ·· '
Heandtheyweknow,but ·whoare'you? '
. · '.',' '·'" ' i t
She th~t ii!! idle anq ~is~~ievous, reprove ~harply• .!
. .. , , 1" '~'.
. Who did they send to J11m on so important an errand?
" '
That is the friend.who you must re~eive cor~ially, anil 'who 'you
c11nnot esteem too highly.
· ·
·•
·
.· · · ; · ·
He invited my brother and.I to see and examine his library..
We should fear and obey the author of our beirw,
.even He ·who
0
has power to reward or punish us forever.
'. . ,.."~
They who he had most i~jured, .he ~ad the greatest reason to
love. .
. . .,
·
. \Vhatever others do, let thou and l,nd wisely. · . .: ' . •
Let them and we unit~ to oppose this growi.ng evil.
.
I shall see she. When did you 'hear they? I must not tell thou . .. ..
Ye have I chosen. We, your "friends, ye ouaht to"emetnber. He
that is idle, reprove thou sharply. He and tliey we knoiV ' but
~ho art thou? He that .committe~ tlrn of!en~e th,ou 's nouldst 'pun•
rsh, and not I who am mnocent. · Th~y ·fear 11thou 1 but'"love''w~.
Whatever others ~o, let thou and I perform o.ur. a~ty.'. } • lmv~ . got
my lesson. Is tin!! your pen? No, I hav:e got mine: "I 'have got
to go to tho wharf, and to get some wood. I have got to go to the
store, and to get som._e .c.orn. I have got .t~ go to toV\'h to·d{iy :
_What h:ive you got to 1get, after yo~ get t.h ere ?. >Whose" book i11
that wluch you have.got l
· ·
·
' 1'' · i~ll •:t! , 1< ... ..
·

r. ·

'"

'<'' " " f I. Y.ilJ Ii I "' I . t- 1 ~

l

EXERCISES FOR 'l'RE ' !!J~ATJ: on : PA.P-J:Ri·I \

' Q.

Will

~OU . write dowri i!ii ptoper'

1

'd, . t,'

exiitrlples . uh'd ef

1Rhle
XXXVII? Six, under .Rule XXXVIll? Six, under J.l,ule''X:X.XIX1
Six, und.:ir Rule XL? · f;ix, tinder 'Rule XUl? ':Six, lmdM ..Rule
XVI ? Six, under ·Rule XVII ? :six 1 tinder ' Rul~ !VIII? Si~ uu. d.er Rule XIX? .Six,, ~nder Ru!!! Xf{ '! Bix,' ca?h •·hat!ug li:P'O~~s~
•1ve ~ase Qf a ttou_h or pronoun · ~ Six, each haylJ!i: '8 0 1pt~r-.ie~~l~n?
Will you parse what you have now written?
" 1• .. .'' • ·'' 1, IJ •
~ '.rtrr~ f~t.r! ('
;., • , ... "fi

OBLIGED.'

.

:,

,:'.· -,

, ftffl~~.Ylt.~~l ~bif.~t~ ljjt~f.'ft<;f•:!Jr't·l'f~if. ,,;>::-~

RULE !le.LIT.

" ' :The.o}>jective:ease ma.y .be governed 'bf;: prepo1i~op1~,t.1''
· •

· •

·~

"· ·

''

. 1

't ;. . ·~ :;').:

1{ 1 • .i:::':\r.t.1

: j., ;f,.,t,r, !"r~·~ '

-

-

PRA CT I CAL GRAM.MA R .

'!4S

lNTELLl!:C'rUAL AKD

'W e wero near I.
11m,' 'It looks liko liim,' , ' Jt 11.t1
wo
tcntion ;' tlrnt is,' We were near to him,' 1 It look1 like a

'It is worthy of the attention.' In tho fir!!l exnmp101, wt .....it'
the objective ca se is gov ern ed by prcposition11 11nder1tood l
that it is more elegant to onut them. 'llcnce ted deriH tlu/.U...

i,,,g

-'under Rule XLIV? Two, under Rule XLV? Six, un~er Rule XXI~
' Six under Rule XXII ~ Six, under Rule XXIV? S11:, under Rule
·.~XV? Sixteen, with a preposition in each?
'· \.Viii you parse what you have now corn posed?
RULE XLVI.

Participles refer to nouns.
nur,E XLm.

RULE XLV II .

The objective case, l\fter the verbs LIKE and p•tld
· llPI~
governed by the prepositions TO or UNTO, aml Rll.et WO
by the preposition OF.
'He went a h11nti11g,' tl1nt i~, on n l111nting.' Hore a pa~•~:
noun is governe1l by the prr.position 011 under•tood 1 N!iffl,_I~~
examples frequently occur, w e lw:vc tlte following
"'I
RULE XLIV.

Participial nouns may be gornrned by the prepotitl .
understood.
· 1 1 •1 <1 "
...

'

.'

'I saw him go pa ! t y estcrclay .' This should be,' I• _
by,' or,' I saw him pass,' or, 'I 11nw liirn pa• b1,' J ...41ft!Ut':~
Hence for tho correct u<10 of by in11tood uf put, Wt 4following
n u I.E XLV.

The word

PAST

should not be used in Uao

The objective case may be governed by active participles.
RULE XLVlJl.

'fhe objective case may be governed by participial nouns .
RULE XLlX .

The possessive case may be governed by a single participial
noun, or a compound one.
'You will oblige me by sending of th em,' or 'by the sentling
them.' 'Sending,' you know, is a participial noun, and govern ed
by the preposition. bef~re it, but do es the. sens~ appear to be. as
well expressed, as 1fwr1tten thus ? 'You ~viii obl1g? ~e by send_111 g
them,' or, 'by the sending of th em,' eith er · 01111ttrng the a~t~cle
the, before, and th e pre position of, after the word, or else retam1ng
both? Jicncc w e derive the following :
RULE L.

HDIO

of,, ... "......,,.,..

Examples to be corrected. · 1•
I will send by he. He spoke to thou. I nm tho neat lliM"1i• r<'l
You prefer them to he . I hope you nro not di11pleaMd with ...,..,,.,.k"i'";
fool is not long con sistent with himself. 1'hey took b~
theirselves. I shall wait on yo to the park. I rejoioe •11111~1111
l saw him go past our house . lie went pn~t an hour~ · ~ ;
We are nil accounlahlo crnnturc11, f!Dch for tholniolYH.
'l'hoy willingly, und of tlieir11olvc1, ondonvorod to make 11p
difforencc.
• . r , ' 11'
He laid the suspicion upon somebody, I .knew
w
company.
rn11w~•
I hope it i<( not I who ho is 1lieplcn11cd with.
To poor we thcro is not much hopo remalnlnf. ·'
Does that boy know who h O' 111eau to' Wbo«lotl~~
'language to ~
' ' " • ;: ·~
f•.rMt.i!tt'I!
It was not he that they wore 110 nngry with. · r n 1111 • ,
What concord cnn 1mb1ist behnen thoH who OOllllDit cn•r.
and they who abhor thrm l
·
The person who I trnvellcd with, hu 1ald the borM wlaWI
rode on during our journey.
• '
1
It is not [ he is engag ed with .
•
• '( l
'\-Vho did he receive that intolligcneo from~

D°'

.EXERCISES TOR THE !!LATB OR P.&r•R.

i, ~' (

Q . Will you write six proper exnmpln under Rulo XLIU t 8

The article THE before a participial noun, and the prepo' 1itio11 OF after one, should either both be used, or both be
omitted.
RULE LI.

Participles have the same case after them as before them,
in like manner as verbs do, from which they are derived.
RULE Lii,

•

An auxiliary verb should not be joined with the imperfect
tense, instead of the perfect participle.
E xamples to be corrected.
Esteeming th eirsel ves wise , th ey became fools.
:
Sus[Jecting not only ye, but they also, I was studious to avoid a I intercourse.
I could not avoid considering, in som e degree , th ey ail enemies to me; and he as a suspicious fri end.
From h av ing exposed himself too freely in different climates,
he e ntirely lost his h ealth.
By obser ving of tr1.1th, you will command esteem, as well . a1
1ecure peace.
He prepared them for this event, by the &ending to them
proper mformation .

!5()

PRACTI'CAL. GitAYM>'Alt.

INTELLECTUAL 'AKD ,

A perso!l may be grc~t or r}ch by ~hnni:o;
or good, without the takrng pains fur it.
Nothing could have macfc her BO unhappy, ns them
mar: who pos.sess ~d such principl es.
.
·' . "J •
~ '·
. 'I he chang111g t11uc.s anti seasons, tho roruoving and 1ottiacl1
lu~1~s, be.long tu 1'.rov11h; 11'. :~! 11.loue.
· .
. l he m1.<l<llc ~tr!.twn ~t l~lc seems to be the mo1t atlvant9ft0tlilf.
situated for ga111111g ot wi sdom . Pov erty turns our thouglita•I Mll
!nuch upon the s~pplyiug our wauts i aud riches upon .tho
Ill" our s11pcrf1111t1 cs.
.
· ' . ..
'Pliny, speaking of Cato the Censor's disapproving tho GfeoWa
orators, expressed himse lf thus .
•
'
Propriety of pronunciation is the giving to every word
so~nd, which the mo::.t polite usngc of tho lu11gungo nppro~
to1t.
I N
The not attending to this rule, is the cause of n ·v ery COIQllMtttfl
error.
,
This was in fact a converting tho dcposito to hie OWD..
NoTE.-When their or our, precedes the participial noun,'·
will not, on this account, form un excoption to UuLa L. · · ~
j ••
lti'5!1llil·
Thero will he no dnngrr of their 11poiling their
tlrnir gaining co nvc rt.H.
For his avoiding that precipice, ho is indobtod to .hl9, ~
care.
' • ·• "
'f
It wafl from our mi ~ umlcrnltlll<ling tho <lircction1 1 that WO Ioli&.
our way.
· ' •rt• l
In tracing of his history, wo discover littlo that ia wonbJ~
imitation.
·)
By reading of books written by tho best nuthon, h11 lidiMI·
became highly improvc1l.
By too eager pursuit, he nm a great risk of being diaappqlnt-t .
He had not !011~ enjoyed repose, before ho began to l'9 Wt1it
ry of having noth111g to do .
f i I ;u..~"'"·'
Ho was grnntly lw111.1!d, 11111! 1ln111k with avidity.
l •h
'!'hough his co11dni:t wa~, in !-lonrn rrR(H!Ctl! 1 .cxrnptionnblt~
he dared not commit su grcut an offeuccc, as thllt which
proposed to him.
A second tlclnge l1 ! :trnin1~ thm~ o'er-run·
1
1
And the monks fi11isl1c1I whnt tho Gotf11 begun. ,
. If some events had not fell out \'cry unespectAldly; I lh
have been present.
He would have wf'nt with 1111 1 hn1l ho been ln•lted. •; •""''"i "· '"""
He returned tho goods which he had stole, and made all,__• ..~•'""'
reparation in his power.
.
·
· ~
They have choso tho pnrt of honor and virtuo.
"'
His vices have wcakc11cil his mind nnd broke hie health.~
He had mistook his true interest, and fouml h1m1olf
.
by his former adherent!!.
The bread that ha11 been eat is soon forgot.

••r· ;

a.a.,

#

No contentions have arose amongst them since their rcconeiliation.
The cloth had no scam, but was wove throughout.
The French langunge is spoke in every state in Europe. .
His resolution was too strong to be shook by slight opposition.
He was not much restrained afterwards, having took improper liberti es at first .
He hafl not y1~t wore off the rough mrrnnms, which he brought
with him . .
You who have forsook your friends, arc entitled to no confid ence.
, Th ey who have bore a part in the labor, shall share the rewards.
'Vh en the rules have been wantonly broke, there can be no
plea for favor.
He writes as the best authors would have wrote, had they
writ · on the same subject.
He hcapt up great rich~s, but past his time miserably.
I
He talkt and stampt with such vehemence, that he was sus. pcctcd to be insane.
.
.
.
.
It being her wlio was 1mplicate<l, we <lid not proceed to extremities.
Did you hear of the President passing through New-York?
vVe heard of the fleet sailing up the Channel.
Diel you hea r of my horse running to-day?
I heard of a sick man going to church yesterdny.
Intelligence has just been received, ofa great battle hnYing been
fought in Portugal.
EXERCISES FOR THE SLATE OR rAPEPt.

Q. \Vill you write down six proper examples unclnr Rule XLVI?
Six, under Ruic XL Vil ? Six, under Ruic XL VIII ? Six, under
1

...

:r,'

Rule XLIX? Six, under Rule L ;i Six, under Rule LI? Six, under
ltulc Lll? Six, under Rule LIU? Six, under Rule XXVl? Six,
under Rule XXVIl 1 Six, under Rule XXVIII? Six, under Ru!~
XXIX ? Six, under Rule XXX? Six, each having an interjection?
Six, each having a subjunctive mode, in diflerent tenses? Four,
in the potential mode, but in different tenses? The same four in-~
lerrogutively?
·
Will you parse what you have now written?
RYLE LJJI.

The possesshe case of nouns or pronouns is governed Ly
the noun following it, which is the name of the thing possessed.
RUJ.lt LIT.

i

The possessive case should always 'be distinguished by au
lipostrophe.

·I

---~
JNT~LLECTUAL

AND

: l.VI? Six, under Rule LVII? Six 1 under Rulo LVIII? Six,
. u.nder Rule XXXI? Six, under Ruic XXXII? Six, under Rule
XX~Ill? Six, under Rule XXXIV? Six, under · Rule XXXV?
\Viii you purse what you huve now composed?
.
.\
RULE LVIII.

, . Conjunctions connect verbs, nouns and pronouns of the
fmme cases, adjectives with adjectives, adverbs with adverbs,
also different members of the same sentence.

RULF. T.,; r.

When the name of the thing possessed is
omitted.

c.Paul, tlm Apostle's arlv~ce.'
snch exnmplc11
,I ' •
wluch the name possessed, 1s <lescnbed by two or more ~'&
is customary to annex tl1e sign of the possessive only, to ~~-a
Hence we clerivc the following
· '

!n

at

· ...

·

RULE LVII.

. c 1;'homns, an_d .John, and William, nnd Harry, will accompany
him.
Ily or~nttrng all these c?njunctions, but the last, you
, n:iust b~ e~ns1hle that the sense !s much better expressed. Bes1deB, 1t 1s not customary to rnsert the conjunction between
sev·eral words under the same govetnrnent, except when we wish
to . render a sentence emphatical, as ' James and John and
Thomas, must all be punished.' Hence we have' the Jollowi;zg

When the name possesse1l is described by hro
foregoing nouns, the sign of the possessive case-, it •n~
only to the last.
E.wmples to be corrected.
ancestors virtue is not mine.
1
I-l 1s brothers oflcnco will not condemn him.
.
.
r ..
I will not destroy the city for ten enlm.
Nevertheless, Asn his heart W:IR perfect with the ,Lord., ,. ,
A mot hers tenderness nn<l n fathers cnro ore nature,. ~
mims advantage.
A mans manner'!> frerp1ently influcnco liis fcrllme.
\Visdoms precepts' form the good mnns intcrClt and bappi.a..And he cast himself down at Jesus feet. ..
.. ".- 1
Moses rod was turner! into n serpent.
' ..
For Herodias sul<e, liis brother Pl1illips wifb. · '
If ye snffer for righteousness's sake, hnppy ore ye.
Ye should be 1mhject for conscience's B11l<0.
What can be tho cause of the parliament neglecting IO ilDIMllW
taut a business r
Much depends on this ; ule being ohscrYe<J.
'l.'he time of William 1nalting tho experiment at lenatb
•
It is very probable that. this nssembly waa callod lo cl.VE -',
doubt which tho king hnd, ubout tho lrnvfulnoa
th' llo , l '
ers their throwing off the monarrhy of Spain, and ~1cir withdn ' .
mg entirely their allr.giancc to that crown.
·1'1 \ff:\
f
If we alter tho situation of nny of the words, we 1hall pNllitlJ be sensible of the melody suffering.
•:flfftl
Such will ever be tho effect of youth aHociatini with ~
companions.

My

or

RULE LIX.

'Vhen there are more than two words connected, the con·junction is omitted except before the last.
RULE LX.

When we wish to render a sentence emphatical, the con'. jtrnction is not omitted.
, 'I do see and hear him,' not 'do sec and do J1ear him ' un·
.: less to nd<l force or emphasis : wnsequently we have tlte J~llow·
' ing
RULE LXI.

'When two compound tenses are connected by a conjunction, the auxiliary is generally omitted before the latter veM>.
' . William desires to learn ~nd stu'dy,' not' to study.' cH:e
· :tppears to have read and studied,' not ' to have studied.' From
these examples we derive the following
RULE LXII.
1
' '

When two verbs in the infinitive mode, are connected by a
conjunction, the signs TO and TO HAVE are omitted before the
latter verb.
' William has read to me often, and he will read to me aaain.'
In this sentence because the latter verb is in a different ten~e its
nominative is not omitted. From this example we derive the fol-

lowing

·

RULE LXIII.

When two Terbs, of different tenses, are connected, ,the
'n.oininative case should be repeated.
22 '

IN'l'ELLli:CTUAL A~D ' ..

.

Examples to be corrected.

.·.,,.U 1r

.

PRACTICAL GRAMMAR.·

\Viii you parse whatyou have now -composed ?

.•

I will say it between you and I. Yon will wnit on'f j; .

shr. to the play. Don't you recollect that he Apoko te yQ~Na
I ahout the affair, mul requested you nnd I not to 'mention' It;
He came with me an<l thou. He will write hy you or 11lu1: · H•
Jromised them and we. \Vill xou permit Ralph and I to IOO
etter ? She and him and I will read alternately. Tho aft'ni; ' l•
to be settled between you and they. Plea8c to let Samuel 'and I
read ? May Peter an<l \Villiam and I go out ?
··dflt.'fJw .
l\Iy brother and him arc very attentive to their studic1. • O~ J' '
You and us enjoy many pri vilcgcs.
· '""
~ lri
1
She and him arc very unhuppily conncctC'tl.
· " '•"
Between him and I there is some disparity of ycnn 1 but'
between him and she .
' ... \11f• •
Did he not tell thee his fault, and entreated thco 'to 'li>tllf :.
him ?
~ i;t
If h e understand the suhjcct, and n.ltcnds to it industriou1lf. IMt ·
can scarcelv fa.ii of snccesH.
· ' ''°" f1
If a man have an humlrr.d shcr.p, nnd 0110 of them. ~..... NMt :
m;trny, doth he not leaYc tho 11i11cty nncl nine, nnJ gocti.,. _
the mountains , and seekcth tli:it wl11eh is gonl'.' !l!ltrny?
&•· .
I saw the work, and hay e been mnch plenRctl with it. I hid.
heen acquainted with him, and hn~e been plcnsod with /•im 1 .Jfe .
docs dri11k, a!lfl Rpcnds )tis t.imc itlly . Jle wrote 1';0 t 'a n'lf aid ,
speak c lotptcntly. Ile <lcsircd to hear n11d to hnvo 11etm.1• He
...
to have been admonished, rmd to have a Alight J!llniAhmonl. B~nln
the performance, and having been much grattficd 1 he rem '
f
there al<mg time.
· ' .. , · 1 I ,'
His courage and fidolity and ucti\·ity entitl ed him to comm
Ile can rend and can ·write. I might have seen nnd might Ii
known it. He lo\'CStorcadan1! tnwritcnnd tociphcr.
'' ·. \ •tJ,
'\'Ve have met with many di6appointments, and lhnll p~l,f; •
meet with many more.
' ''" "f 1 11 \
Rank may confer influence, but will not necouni'ily 'j>
·~
virtue.
· 1 1wt · •
lfo docs not want co11rngn, !mt iR tlPfoctivo in 1111n11ibllltr• 'I
Th ese people have imlucd ac1l'1ir.cd grcnt richc1 1 bu& Cl
command cstnem.
.
' •Ii · , .........,
I le might have h1~c11 happy, nnd iR now com·ineod of1ti , w.•.-;
. Learningstre11gthcns the mind ; 0111.I, if proporl7 ' app~Adf~l "
unprovc our morals.
; :-r.._ "'(!"

"'4'

f

p

EXEilCISES FOR THE SLATE

on

l'APER. ' ll1·d ~- •

Q. 'Viii yon write six proper examples under Rule LIX~l
.~·\-S;s,
under Ruic LX ? Six, under Rulo LXI ? . Six, under Rule
. li·
Six, under Ruic LXIII ? Six, under Rulo LX ? Si1 1 ~
,
Rule XXXVI? Six, uncler Ruic XXXVll ? Ono, undor ' e~
of the following Rules, viz: XXXVIJI, XXXIX, XL X~f
XLII, XLIII, .XLIV, XLV, XLVI, XL VII, XLVIII,
I.JI
Six, each havin~ a possessive case, and the gov~rning . ~o~
'' •h
object of an active Yerb, in the indicative mode, enchul a''
'
cnt tense ?
'

xLlx;
1

•

''J

RULE ' LXIV.

The subjunctive form of th~ verb, should be used only after, or without cor~unctions, when the idea of doubt, and future time are both implied.
' Alfred than whom a greater king, never reigned.'
' Beelzebub, than wf10m, Eaton excepted, none hiuher sat.'
these examples the relative' wliom' must be uovern;d by titan if
. 1s
. governe d at a II ; but ' than,' you know, is
"' a conjunction. · ' It
• ~t
1s somewhat rcma_rlrnble that in snch i_nsta_nccs, if the personal pronou~ were used, 1t would be the nomrnative case, thus; 'A greater king never reigned than he,' that is ' ' than he was;' Hence
we derive the following
'

rn

RULE LXV.

The conjunction THAN is sometimes placed before an objecti rn case, followed by an atljcctrve of the comparative degree.
RULE LXYI.

The conjunction As placed after sucH or MANY is sometimes use<l as a relative pronoun.
E xamples to be corrected.
If he acquires riches, they will corrupt his mind, and be wicless
to others.
_Though he l1rgcs me :ret more earnestly, I shall not comply,
unless he advances more forcible reasons.
'I shall walk in the fields to-day, unless it rains.
As th~ governess were present, the children behaved properly.
She disapproved the measure, because it were improper.
· Tho11gh he be high, he hath respect to tho lo·wly.
Tl1011gh he were her friend, he did not attempt to justify her
.;:onduct.
\Vhcthcr Im improve or not, I cannot determine.
'I' hough the fact be extraordinary, it certainly did happen.
ltcuwmher what thou wcrt, and be humble.
0 ! that his heart was tender, and susceptible of the woes of
others .
Shall then this verse to future age pretend,
Thou wert my guide, philosopher, and friend?
Desp~sc not ~ny coi1<~ition, lest it happens to be your own.
Let 111111 that 1s sangume, take heed lest he miscarries.
T:i kc care that thou breakest not any of the established rules.
If he does but intimate his desire, it will be sufficient to produce obedience.
At the time of his return, if he is but expert in the business, he
will find employment.

INTELLECTUAL

A1ifi .

P'RACTICAL. GRAM.MA.It.

If he do but speak to display his abilities; he 'la "uil~8iibll ;;
11.ttc ntio11.
.u ~li t t_
If he Le but in health, I am content.
"l ,.,"lfn:
If he docs promi se , he will certainly perform . ' · · · utr ~.,f,
Though he <lo praise her, it is only for her beauty. · 11 ']l' (lil r
If thou dost_not forgiv e, perhaps thou wilt not be forgivc!l . '>~
. If thou d o sm cerely believe the truths of religion, ni:t'll~c"~d1
rngly.
r!l"'"' l
· His c~nfu s ed behavior m ade it reasonable to suppo8~ 1 tbai ' Le
were guilty.
· ,., 1•1,il l o
I-le is so con sciorn; of deserving the rebuke, tlmt ·ho dlii;.;l{,ot
mak e a ny repl y.
' 'I f';iJlr
1
His apol ogy was so p! a usiblc, that many bcfriendcd hi' ,~kd · .
thought he were innocent.
·n lf• ll 'tl". . ' .
If one m~n prefor a l!fo of industry , it is bccnuse he llDl ll'~·
of .c9u_ifort 111 wealth ; 1f an other prcfors a lifo of gaiety it Iii' m .
a hk e id ea co ncerning pl enrnrc.
.' 'll 11 " 1
" ·
No on e engage.s in that busin ess , unl ess he nim nt r~pu,lu.~~n !
h or- es for some s1ng11lar ad vantage.
" 1 1 "1'1 • .••
. 'f!1ou~h. th e design lie la11d able, nnrl is fo\·ornblo .to';out' 1
. ;
est, It will invol ve nrncl1 nnxi e ty nnd lnbnr.
· 1 ,1 ,.,,,.
"'!
Unless he learns faster, he will Leno 11cholnr.
t'" 11.fiJ)
Though .h.e fall s, he s hall no t L~ utterly cnet <low~,.: I 'l!f d ~ ,,. :
On cond1t1011 tha~ ~1 c com ?s, I will consent to s.tny .' , 1~ . ~~ 11 ,
:
How ever that afla1r tcr111111atce, my con<lullt will bo unamnel!b,
ahle .
· 1 ~ ' ' ' ""
If virtu e. TC \yard s LIS not SO 80011 US W C desire, the .(lllJOl~d~ wllll
1111
be made w1t.h mtcrest.
.
C'i
Till rcpcnta11 cc composes his mind, he will ho n 1tran'gdr:ouf
pcar.e .
• •
\Vhethcr h c confesses, or not, the truth will certninly be di1eoY. creel.
'" · '"'V Ii i N'
If thou ccnsm r st 11ncharit11bly, thou wilt be ontitlod" tOlftO.
vor.
'""'tt 1'•fff
If
Thougl1, at ti111 ns, th e n ~c cnt to tho trmplo of \'i~tU IJl 'IJI~
etecp and crag.g y , be n ot cl1 s.co11rnger.f. l'crHuv oro 11nttl thou pJql:
est the s ummit : t.h cre , all. is ord er, hcn11ty, 1111d ple111111t11,1 ~
• I : ,
If Charl otte il cs1M to gain esteem und love, ehe doH' notr em '
ploy th e prope r means .
.
·
.' "" I 1 o ~ .
, Unl ess th e accountant deceive me, my e1tato 11 con1iderablJ.1'
unprov ud .
·
•'., r\ ' ' " ' " ·"•8
'!'h ough sc lr-go,·ernm c nt prorlu ce ~om c 11nenainc111, · it· it rllgldg
wh en compared with th e pain of vicious indnlgonce. • i. 1·.iim1 , ii~·
'\Vh e th cr lie th111k aR ho ApenkA, time will diec:oYor.
I oq
Though virtue nppenr scverr~, eho ie tmly r1.1ninhlo.
Though succcHs Im very doubtful, it is 11ropcr that ho onde>J..wa"
1
to su cceed.
'
··n J fllltfJ,JJ <
If th o u have promised , be faith fit I to thy ongngcmont, niilt "
.
'rhough he have proved his right to ~ubrnission, ho 11 too &
crous to exact it.
·
•
. Unloss li e have impr.ove<l, he is unfit for the offic~. 10 a~ 1. ',

U'. ,

1'',.1".

P.

. It thou h:id succeeded, perhaps tQpu wouldst , n ot be the happier for it.

··
l!nlesH thou shall soe the propriety of the measure, we :shaq not
d esire thy support.
' Though thou will not acknowledge, tholJ canst not deny the
fact.
" '
.
If thou gave liberally, thou wilt receive a liberal reward.
'I'hough thou did injure him, he harbors no resentment.
It would b~ well, if the report was only the misrepresentation.
of h er en emies.
·
\Vas he ever so great and opulent,t hiA.conduct would debase him .
\Vas I to enumerate nil her virtues, it would look like flattery.
Though I was perfect, yet would I not presume.
If thou may share in his labors, be thankful and do it cheerful-

ly.
'

Unl ess thou can fairly support the cause, give it up honorably.
. Though thou might have fores een the danger, thou wouldst not
have avoided it.
· 1
If thou could convince him , he would not net accordingly.
If thou would improve in knowledge , be diligent .
Unl ess thou should make a tim ely retreat, the danger will be
unavoidaulc. ·
I h ave labored ·and lVeari cd myself, that thou may he at ease.
H e enl arged on those dangers, that thou should avoid th em.
Charles XII, of Sweden, than who a more courageous person
n enr Ii vcd, appenrs to h ave been destittite of the tender sensibiliti es of nature.
Salmus (a more learned man than him has seldom appeared)
was not happy at the close of his life.
EXERCISES FOR THE SLATE OR PAPER .

Q. Will you compose six proper examples under Rule LXV ?
Six, under Rulo L? Six, having
n proper noun, different in each? Six , each haTing the definite
article properly used? Six, each having the indefinite article
properly u~ ed before words b e~inning with. a consonant t
Six, each havmg a plural noun? Six, each · havmg n noun of
the neuter gend er? Six , each having a noun of the ·second
person pla1:ed indepe ndent? Six, each h aving an adjective
m th e superlative degree ? Six, each having a numeral adjective?
Six, each having an a~jective pronoun? Six'. being proper examples under Rule LI? Six , under Rule LU?· Six, under Rule Lill?
Six, under Rule LIV? Will you parse what-you have now composed?
RULE LXVH.

Six, under Rule LXVI?

A:•

When two or more nouns come together signifying the .
same thing, they agree in case.
RULE LXVIII,

A noun or pronoun joined with a p11.rt.icipleJ independent

22•

258

INTELLECTUAL AlfD

of the rest of the sentence, is the nominative
RULE LXIX.

Interjections require the objective case of a pronoun ' of
: [
the first person, but nominative of the second.

I

P'

r

r•

Q. '\Viii yo u \ovrite cl o wn six proper cxnmples undo r., .Rule
LXVIII ? Six under Rule LXlX ? S ix under I ,XX? Six each in
the i111perJ.ti ve 1node? S ix in th e potential mode nnch in ·a ·drfTcr· •
ent tense? Two, each having an infinitive mode nn<l perfect
t ense ? Six, each hav ing the v erb, 'to be,' eith er 'in a different
mode or tense ? S ix, in th e suhjunctivc mod e, passive? Six , hnv- •
ing two, and Liut two, dilforent parts of speech? Six, each . having
f.iur differe nt parts of speech? 8ix each having fivo different part11
of speech? 8ix, ()ar:h having six different parts of Rpeech?
Six, each containin g seve n differe nt pn.rts of speech, Six, each
c ontaining eight different pnrts of speech? Six, each containing
nine diffe re nt parts of spe ech ?
, irJ
Will you parse what you have now written?
. .. ,,,
. iilt·tt •

,.

d·n., . ·

1'0 ~

' ,;:.;•n JI
:;••

, j, J\(C".f~Dl

I ' ,,

',,, .. qt ,. :

I

,·i~ 1

V"

'>'nrltt'6g A

:
I

t

I

"

~

' ) l '

I

~

'

•

·' .

TI-IE UNITED STA'.rES.

F,xamplcs to li e rnrurtcd .
.
Solomon was of thi s mind ; and I have no doubt he m•dt ' u •
wise and tru e prov erbs, as any body h aH done since ; !ti'n\ '6qlJ_
excepted, who w as a much greater and wiser man than Bo.lql\laii• .
- - - - - - - - H i m <lostroy'd,
" r f
Or won to what may w ork his utter lose, "·'.l'fri!(~'
All this will soon follow.
, :.t, .·
"\Vhose gay top
l•
l
,
Shall tremhle, him desce nding.
· 1 • ;tiff.ll , · ·
:'!rj lf
Ah! unhappy thee, who art deaf to the cnlle o.f ~utY'('l.'.i
'~'t
honor.
Oh! happy wo , surrounded with so many blessings: ~·1 • <ti 1
, l . r: \•1

.~

;•

· · or

Nouns signifying time, direction, distance,
price, are frequently in the objective case, .w ithout a :pNposition.
: ""'" H

E XE R CI SF. 9 F' OR TIIF. SJ.ATE OR PAPER.

•

CONS'l'!Tu~r10N

RULE LXX .

.{i'' 11

'

PROll!l SCU OUS EX ERCISE S I N S YN T AC T ICA L PA R SIN G .

We, the people of the United States, in order to fo~m. a morn
perfect uni on, establish justice, insure dom estic tranqu1lhty, pro·
vide for th e common defence , promote the gen eral welfa re , a nd se·
cure the bl e%ings of liberty to ourse lves and our post erity, do ordain and establish tl1is Constitution for the United States of Amer·
ica.
ART. I.- Sr.c. 1. All legi slative powers here.in granted, 'sh?ll
h e vested in a C ong re ss of th e Unit ed Stat es, winch shall · consi st
of a S enate and House of R epresentativ es.
· SE c . 2. The 'Hou se of ll e presentativ es shall Lie composed of
' members chosen eve ry second ye ar , by th e peopl e oftl1e several
States: and the electors in ea ~ h State shall have the qu :i !ificati ons
requisite for electors of the most num erou s branch of. the Stat e
L egislature.
No person shall he a R epresentati ve who shall not have attained
to the age of twenty five years, aud been seve n years a citi_zen
the
United States, and who shall not, wh e n elected, be an mhab1tant
· of that State in whi c h he sh all be cho sen. ·
R eprcsentat1Yes a nd direct tax es shnll be apportion ed among tlrn
severdl States, whi ch m ay be in clud ed wi thin this union, according
to th e ir respective numbers, which shall be determined by adding
to the whol e number of fre e persons , including those bound to serYi ce fora term of years, and excluding Indians not taxed, three
fiflhs of all other persons. The actu al e numeration shall be made
withrn three years after the first meeting of the Congress of the
United Slates, a nd within eve ry sulisequ ent term of ten yM rs, in
such manner as they shall by law. direct. The number of Repre·
sentatives shall not exceed one for every thirty thou9anrl ; but
each State shall have at least one Represenlatirn ; an<l until such
enumeration shall .b e made., th e State of New-H!impshirc shall be
entitled to choose' three, .Massachusetts eight, Rhode-Island. nml
Providence Plantations ono, Connecticut five, New-York six, Ne\v
Jersey four, . Pennsylvania eight, Delaware one, .Maryland s1'r;
V:irginia ten 1 North Carolina five, South Carolina tiv,o1 an.d, ,G eor-

o:

gia three.

·

.;

'

.;.

/

It·

,

.

·fJ~TE~LECTUAL
,. I
~ .;·

, . 'ANl>
·,: :~,'.

\
, ..

.'

.~

.,

l'
\\

I

.. •
·,
r

.... ~-

~·

~·

-'

·:

.,.

•
"\!iii

·•·.I
I

'~

'\

Names slw1#d avcceed ideas.,
I

I

Urobfbtnrt : '
~.~<~·· lit' TRt A11~H~R AND BOOKHLL~ns GEft'.llt4~hi··
:J :~

'

'.

• ••••• ••••••••••

'

1829.

.

7'
'·

I -.

('

•·

"•

..

